MCWP 3-16

FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION 

IN THE GROUND COMBAT 

ELEMENT

U.S. Marine Corps 

PCN 143 000059 00 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public; distribution is unlimited
To Our Readers

Changes: Readers of this publication are encouraged to submit suggestions and changes that

will improve it. Recommendations may be sent directly to Commanding General, Marine

Corps Combat Development Command, Doctrine Division (C 42), 3300 Russell Road, Suite

318A, Quantico, VA 22134-5021 or by fax to 703-784-2917 (DSN 278-2917) or by E-mail to

morgann@mccdc.usmc.mil. Recommendations should include the following information:

l Location of change

Publication number and title

Current page number

Paragraph number (if applicable)

Line number

Figure or table number (if applicable)

l Nature of change

Add, delete

Proposed new text, preferably double-spaced and typewritten

l Justification and/or source of change

Additional copies: A printed copy of this publication may be obtained from Marine Corps

Logistics Base, Albany, GA 31704-5001, by following the instructions in MCBul 5600,

Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications Status. An electronic copy may be obtained from the

Doctrine Division, MCCDC, world wide web home page which is found at the following universal reference locator: http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil.

Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine gender is used, both 

men and women are included.
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

Headquarters United States Marine Corps

Washington, D.C. 20380-1775

28 November 2001

FOREWORD

Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-16, Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element, is a framework for coordinating and employing supporting arms in consonance with maneuver elements. While this

publication covers many aspects of fire support, it focuses on fire support coordination in the infantry division, regiment, and battalion. The doctrine applies

across the full range of military operations—from humanitarian assistance to a

major theater war. 

Fire support doctrine is based on a common understanding of the nature of war

and on our warfighting philosophy as described in Marine Corps Doctrinal Publication (MCDP) 1, Warfighting. This doctrine provides for fast, flexible, and

decisive action in a complex environment characterized by friction, uncertainty,

fluidity, and rapid change. 

This publication is a field reference guide for commanders, their staffs, and fire

support coordination personnel. It forms the basis for specific fire support coordination tactics, techniques, and procedures. 

This publication supersedes Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM) 6-18, Techniques and Procedures for Fire Support Coordination, dated 27 March 1992.

Reviewed and approved this date.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

EDWARD HANLON, JR.

Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps

Commanding General

Marine Corps Combat Development Command

DISTRIBUTION: 143 000059 00
CHAPTER 1. FUNDAMENTALS

Fire support is fires that directly support land,

maritime, amphibious, and special operations forces to

engage enemy forces, combat formations, and

facilities in pursuit of tactical and operational objectives (JP 1-02). Fire support coordination is the

planning and executing of fires so that targets are

adequately covered by a suitable weapon or group of

weapons (JP 1-02).

The Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF) is the

Marine Corps’ principal organization for all missions

across the full spectrum of military operations.

MAGTFs consist of a command element (CE), a

ground combat element (GCE), an aviation combat

element (ACE), and a combat service support element

(CSSE). The MAGTF principally employs fire support

provided by the GCE and the ACE, but may also

receive external fire support from other joint,

combined, and coalition forces.

MARINE CORPS

WARFIGHTING PHILOSOPHY

The Marine Corps warfighting philosophy is based on

rapid, flexible, and opportunistic maneuver capabilities. Maneuver warfare is a warfighting philosophy

that seeks to shatter the enemy’s cohesion through a

series of rapid, violent, and unexpected actions which

create a turbulent and rapidly deteriorating situation

with which he cannot cope (MCDP 1). Fire support in

maneuver warfare produces combat power and is

applied through combined arms.

The MAGTF and GCE are combined arms teams by

the nature of their organization. The GCE’s ability to

deliver fire is most effectively employed when it

creates a combined arms effect. Combined arms is the

full integration of arms in such a way that in order to

counteract one, the enemy must make himself more

vulnerable to another. It pairs firepower with mobility

to produce a desired effect upon the enemy (MCDP 1).

In addition to the typical example of combined arms

where indirect fire suppresses an enemy, enabling

either maneuver or attack by direct fire, multiple

supporting arms can create a combined arms effect.

Artillery raids in the Gulf War intentionally attracted

enemy counterfire to enable air attack of enemy radar

and artillery units. The enemy had to suffer the effects

of indirect fire or risk losing its own artillery assets.

The 3d Marine air wing used a similar technique when

conducting attacks against the Iraqi integrated air

defense system (IADS). Suppression of enemy air

defenses (SEAD) packages accompanied Marine

aircraft conducting strikes against Iraqi positions and

equipment. When Iraqi fire control radars were

activated, the aircraft from the SEAD package attacked the radars with high-speed antiradiation

missiles (HARMs). Once again, the Iraqis were placed

in a dilemma. To defend against the air attacks, they

placed their fire control radars in jeopardy.

Combat power is the total means of destructive and/or

disruptive force which a unit can apply against the

enemy at a given time. Combat power consists of

tangible factors such as the destructive effect of

available firepower. But, just as importantly, it

consists of intangible factors such as surprise, tempo,

and morale.

FIRE SUPPORT TASKS 

Fire support functions are performed in relation to—

l Supporting forces in contact.

l Supporting the commander’s concept of operation.

l Integrating fire support with the scheme of maneuver.

l Sustaining fire support.

Regardless of the unit supported, these tasks give the

commander and his fire support representatives a

frame of reference to evaluate the overall effectiveness

of fires. They serve as unifying factors for supporting

arms. The four tasks do not change or replace

traditional missions, roles, and operations. They

provide a common point of departure for all supporting arms. For example, naval surface fire support
1-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

(NSFS) in general support of a regiment does not

consciously plan to perform the four tasks. It accomplishes its mission by furnishing a continuous

volume of naval gunfire that supports forces in contact

and the commander’s concept of operation. It integrates its support with the scheme of maneuver

through liaison officers who plan fire support areas

(FSAs) to support the scheme of maneuver. 

Supporting Forces in Contact

Prerequisite to this task is the ability to immediately

respond to and meet the fire support needs of forces

engaged with the enemy. This task enhances the

friendly force’s survivability and increases their

freedom of maneuver. Individual fire support assets

support forces in contact in many ways; e.g., artillery

supports forces in contact by performing its traditional

roles of close support and counterfire.

Supporting the Commander’s

Concept of Operation

This task enables the force commander to influence

the battle with firepower. It gives him the means to

create effects on enemy forces or functions that contribute to his mission accomplishment. Fires can shape

the battlespace by attacking the enemy’s center of

gravity (COG) through enemy critical vulnerabilities

and creating decisive combat power with a combined

arms effect.

Integrating Fire Support

with the Scheme of Maneuver

Integrating fire support with the scheme of maneuver

requires precise arrangement of coordinated activities

in time, space, and purpose to produce the most effective fires. It provides the right attack means

delivered on the right target at the right time, creating

a combined arms effect. Integration must occur within

the supporting arms and the other warfighting

functions (maneuver, intelligence, command and

control, logistics, and force protection). 

Sustaining Fire Support

This task ensures fire support endurance and continuity in providing fires. It involves the actions to

achieve logistics sustainment and technical support for

supporting arms available to the commander.

ROLE OF THE GROUND

COMBAT ELEMENT

Each MAGTF element has specific roles in coordinating fire support. The CE implements the

MAGTF commander’s intent and normally focuses on

deep operations to shape the battlespace for the major

subordinate commands (MSCs). The ACE is a major

provider of fire support through offensive air support

(OAS), electronic warfare (EW), and unmanned aerial

vehicle (UAV) support. The CSSE commander is

normally assigned responsibility for the conduct of

rear area operations. Since no formal supporting arms

coordination agency exists within the CSSE’s rear

area operations center (RAOC), the CSSE may be

augmented with fire support representatives. However,

it is the GCE that receives the majority of fire

support—its own—as well as fires provided by other

MAGTF elements. 

GCE fire support coordination centers (FSCCs) interact

with the CE through the MAGTF force fires

coordination center (FFCC). The FFCC coordinates

those matters that cannot be coordinated by FSCCs

within the GCE and those matters that affect the

MAGTF as a whole. The MAGTF LF FFCC

coordinates fires with higher, adjacent, and external

commands. It is the element of the amphibious force

(AF) that forms the supporting arms coordination center

(SACC) with representatives from the amphibious task

force (ATF). It maintains close coordination with the

GCE for integrating fire support plans of the deep and

close battle.

The GCE interfaces with the ACE through the Marine

air command and control system (MACCS). Control

and coordination of direct air support is achieved

through tactical air control parties (TACPs) organic to

GCE units, through the direct air support center

(DASC), and through other MACCS agencies.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 1-3

The GCE coordinates NSFS through naval gunfire

(NGF) liaison sections including U.S. Navy personnel

communicating to support ships.

The GCE plans, integrates, and coordinates all fire

support within the GCE’s area of operations. It plans

fires, conducts targeting, and integrates fires with

maneuver in close operations. The GCE plans and

coordinates the delivery of its organic fire support; the

delivery of fire support provided by other means (such

as aviation or NSFS), or nonlethal means (such as

electronic attack [EA] or electronic warfare support

[ES]) that contribute to a combined arms effect. The

GCE conducts fire support coordination for its own

artillery and mortar fires in support of its maneuver

elements. All artillery is normally organic or attached

to the GCE. In MEF operations, a force artillery may

be established to provide C2 for cannon and rocket

artillery not attached to GCE assets; e.g., USMC

Reserves, U.S. Army, U.S. Army Reserves, and

Allied. The GCE coordinates with other elements, as

required, and with adjacent external forces. The

organization the GCE uses to perform these tasks is

the FSCC. 

FIRE SUPPORT

COORDINATION CENTERS

A fire support coordination center (FSCC) is a single

location in which there are centralized communications facilities and personnel incident to the

coordination of all forms of fire support. An FSCC

exists from division to battalion levels. The fire

support coordinator (FSC) organizes and supervises

the FSCC under the staff cognizance of the G-3/S-3.

The number of personnel and amount of equipment

varies with the level of command and responsibility,

the size and complexity of the forces involved, the

degree of planning and coordination required, and the

desires of the commander.

All echelons of the GCE establish an FSCC as an

advisory and coordinating agency. The FSCC is

located with the combat operations center (COC).

Facilities, equipment, and material are provided by the

parent headquarters. Supporting arms units provide

representatives and equipment to conduct coordination, targeting, and communications functions for

their respective supporting arms. Detailed listings of

personnel by grade, military occupational specialty

(MOS), and billet description are found in unit tables

of organization (T/Os). 

Division FSCC

This center plans, coordinates, and employs fire support.

Supporting arms representatives identify requirements,

estimates of supportability, and make recommendations

to the division commander for allocating fire support. Its

key role is targeting due to its assets and ability to collect and analyze target information.

Fire Support Coordinator

The division artillery officer/commanding officer,

artillery regiment is the division FSC. The artillery

regiment’s assistant FSC performs the FSC duties

when the artillery commander is absent from the

division COC.

Fire Support Coordination Section

This section provides liaison to division forces for

artillery control and coordination. It coordinates all

supporting arms to support the concept of operations

and is provided by the headquarters battery of the

artillery regiment. The section consists of two assistant

fire support coordinators (AFSC), a naval gunfire

officer, a target information officer (TIO), a liaison

chief, an observer/liaison man, and three artillery

scout observers. The headquarters battery of the

artillery regiment provides field radio operators and

equipment to operate artillery nets.

Target Information Section

This section is normally formed upon activation of the

FSCC during the initial planning phase. Duties include

target acquisition, target dissemination, and attack

recommendation and assessment. Target information

section (TIS) personnel typically include the TIO and

one to three enlisted personnel to work with the target

intelligence officer (TGTINTELO) from the G-2

section. TIS personnel are provided by the artillery

regiment. The TIO supervises TIS operations under

the staff cognizance of the FSC. See chapter 4.
1-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Air Section

This section of the operations section (G-3) is an

organic component of HQ battalion. It consists of a division AirO and an assistant AirO. Although not a part

of the division TACP in the FSCC, personnel from the

division air section may augment the division TACP

in the FSCC. The division AirO works closely with the

FSC. Some functions of the air section are to—

l Advise the division commander, his staff, and

commanders of those units not having TACPs on

air support, including antiair warfare (AAW).

l Participate in forming operation plans and orders on

air employment.

l Participate with the FSC in targeting and selecting

appropriate means of attack.

l Prioritize and resolve conflicts in air support requests (ASRs).

l Prepare, forward, and coordinate ASRs.

l Relay pertinent information to other tactical air

control elements.

Naval Gunfire Fire Section

This section establishes and maintains facilities for

liaison and communications between supported units

and appropriate control agencies. It informs and

advises the GCE commander on employing, requesting, and controlling NGF. The section consists of

a naval gunfire support officer (NGFO), an assistant

NGFO (Navy), an NGF chief, and a shore fire control

party (SFCP) man.

Regimental FSCC 

The regimental FSCC plans, coordinates, and

integrates supporting arms to support the regiment’s

scheme of maneuver for current and future operations.

The regimental FSCC performs targeting and develops

targets with its own target acquisition (TA) assets, in

addition to those developed at higher headquarters. It

allocates assets for the attack of targets in its area of

operations. Assets include a direct support (DS)

artillery battalion and available NGF and aviation. The

FSCC develops the regiment’s fire support plan,

requests NGF and air support, and plans fires within

the regiment’s area of operations. The regimental

FSCC allocates fire support assets to subordinate

battalions (CAS sorties, NGF ships, etc.) and assists

and supervises subordinate FSCCs. The regimental

FSCC coordinates—

l Clearance of fires that affect the regiment’s area of

operations. Normally, coordination will be conducted by subordinate battalions while the regiment

monitors and effects coordination with higher, adjacent, and subordinate units, as required.

l Ingress and egress routes for all aviation missions

including assault support, CAS, and reconnaissance.

l Employment of all supporting arms in support of

the regiment. 

Fire Support Coordinator

The DS artillery battalion commander is normally the

regiment’s FSC. The artillery battalion liaison officer

performs FSC duties when the battalion commander is

absent from the infantry regimental FSCC.

Liaison Section

This section is provided by the HQ battery of the

supporting artillery battalion. It consists of an artillery

battalion liaison officer, an assistant liaison officer, an

observer liaison chief, two scout observer men, and

four field radio operators. The section conducts

artillery liaison and coordination functions for the

regiment. It also operates the fire support coordination

and artillery nets in the FSCC. 

Tactical Air Control Party

Organic to the regiment, the tactical air control party

(TACP) consists of one AirO and four field radio

operators. The AirO is a special staff officer to the

regiment commander on aviation matters. He is also the

officer in charge (OIC) of the regiment’s TACP where

he functions as the air representative within the FSCC.

NGF Liaison Team

The regimental NGF liaison team is from the HQ

battery of the supporting artillery battalion. It consists

of a naval gunfire liaison officer (NGLO), an NGF

chief, two SFCP men, and three field radio operators.

They perform the same liaison and coordination

functions as their NGF division counterparts.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 1-5

Battalion FSCC

The battalion FSCC performs fire support coordination in terms of closely integrating multiple supporting arms with maneuver. It monitors and receives

all fire support requests originating within the battalion. The battalion FSCC ensures that supporting

arms are integrated with the scheme of maneuver and

that friendly forces are not endangered. It may also

coordinate missions for observers to attack targets

outside the battalion’s zone of action.

Fire Support Coordinator

The infantry battalion weapons company commander

is the FSC.

Liaison Section

This section is organic to a firing battery of the

supporting artillery battalion. It consists of four

officers, an observer liaison chief, four observer

liaison men, and nine field radio operators to support a

battalion. The senior officer is the artillery liaison

officer in the battalion FSCC. The remaining three

officers are forward observers (FOs) and each heads

an FO team to support a company. The FO team

consists of the FO, a fire support man, and two field

radio operators. When required, a FO team may be

divided into two elements, each capable of independent operations for a limited period. More than

simply calling for and adjusting artillery fires, the FO

teams plan the company artillery fires and can

coordinate all fire support at that level.

MCWP 3-16.6, Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter,

and Controller, contains detailed discussions of

responsibilities of the FO team, forward air control

(FAC) party, NGF spot team, and mortar FO.

Tactical Air Control Party

The TACP is organic to the battalion. It consists of

three aviators and twelve field radio operators. The

senior aviator acts in a dual capacity as the battalion’s

AirO (a special staff officer to the battalion commander in regard to all aviation matters) and as the

OIC of the battalion TACP. As the OIC, he works

within the FSCC as the air representative. Each of the

other two aviators is the leader of a forward air control

(FAC) party with four communicators each. A FAC

party requests and provides terminal control of CAS.

More than simply calling for and directing CAS, the

TACP provides input to the company fire plan.

Shore Fire Control Party

The battalion shore fire control party (SFCP) is from

the HQ battery of the supporting artillery battalion. It

includes a battalion NGF liaison team and an NGF

spot team. The liaison team consists of an NGLO, an

NGF chief, and three field radio operators. It performs

liaison and coordination functions in the battalion

FSCC. The spot team consists of an NGF spotter

(Marine lieutenant), two SFCP men, and two field

radio operators. The spot team is normally employed

with a company of the battalion. However, it may be

divided into two elements, each capable of independent operations for a limited period. Spot teams

call for and adjust NGF. 

81mm Mortar Platoon Representative

The battalion’s organic 81mm mortar platoon provides

a mortar liaison party to work in the battalion FSCC

and four FO teams to support the companies and/or

man observation posts. The mortar liaison party

consists of a mortar representative, two field radio

operators, and a wireman. An FO team consists of the

FO, two field radio operators, and a wireman.

Separate Battalion FSCC

Separate battalions operating as maneuver elements;

e.g., light armored reconnaissance or tank battalions,

establish FSCCs. This FSCC functions the same way

as an equivalent level infantry unit FSCC. The FSCC

staff consists of personnel to provide fire support

expertise; e.g., artillery, mortar, NGF or air. Personnel

are organic to the separate battalion or are provided by

the artillery regiment and Marine division. Tank and

light armored reconnaissance battalions have a permanently assigned artillery officer as the FSC.

Company Fire Support Coordination

A company does not have an FSCC. The company

commander is responsible for coordination of his fires

and organizes his personnel accordingly. He is assisted

by artillery and mortar observers, the FAC, and the
1-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

NGF spotter. The company commander may assign an

officer as the company FSC to coordinate supporting

arms with the company’s scheme of maneuver.

Direct Air Support Center

The direct air support center (DASC) is normally

collocated (electronically or physically) with the

senior FSCC. The DASC can provide direct air

support control functions to a division GCE. Support

of multiple division GCEs requires assets beyond

those normally found in a single Marine air support

squadron (MASS). When there is more than one

division in the GCE, the DASC may be augmented

and collocated with the MAGTF FFCC while an air

support element (ASE) is collocated with each

division FSCC. 

Functions of the Senior FSCC in the GCE

l Reporting pertinent information such as the location

of friendly artillery units, fire support coordinating

measures (FSCMs), and enemy antiaircraft weapons to other staff sections of the MAGTF FFCC for

further dissemination as required.

l In amphibious operations, providing representation

to the supporting arms coordination center (SACC).

l Conducting targeting functions to meet the GCE

commander’s intent.

l Serving on the MAGTF targeting committee.

l Establishing reporting requirements, FSCMs (for

example, restricted fire areas [RFAs]), and fire

support coordination procedures when existing

procedures are inadequate.

FSCC ARRANGEMENT

Internal Organization

Internal organization should allow for rapid coordination and exchange of information between FSCC personnel and other staff sections. The FSCC is physically

located within the COC. Its configuration may vary

with the mode of operation and tactical situation; i.e.,

tent, HMMWV or AAVC-7A1 configuration. 

The FSCC must be close enough to the G-3/S-3 and

G-2/S-2 for easy information exchange. Positioning of

automated information systems, maps, and status

boards should facilitate sharing of information. The

FSC should position himself to facilitate internal supervision of the FSCC and coordination with the G-2/

S-2 and G-3/S-3.

Current automated information systems print

messages and status information. However, an FSCC

journal should be maintained to record significant

events affecting the operation. Incoming and outgoing

messages should be filed chronologically after routing.

The FSCC journal provides necessary information for

oncoming watch-standers. A separate fire mission log

should also be maintained to keep the journal uncluttered, provide an ordered, chronological flow, and

indicate mission clearance. See appendix A for a

sample fire mission log. Further, FSCC personnel

need easy access to all fire support nets and automated

information systems. FSCC watch officers and staff

noncommissioned officers must be able to closely

supervise radio and automated information system

operators to facilitate coordination. Fire support nets

should be separate from the supported command’s

tactical and command radio nets. Because both types

of nets are extremely busy, adjacent location can lead

to increased noise in the COC and impede coordination among fire support personnel. See MCWP 6-22,

Communications and Information Systems.

Graphics, Maps, and Overlays

As automated information systems can graphically

represent information and incorporate information into

individual cells, reliance on manually maintained maps

is reduced but not eliminated. See FMFM 6-18.1,

MCFSS Techniques and Procedures.

If possible, an FSCC should have three maps: two of a

scale of 1:50,000 and one of a scale of 1:500,000 or

1:250,000. One of the 1:50,000 maps are used for

current operations; the other for planning or when the

FSCC displaces. Larger scale maps are used for aviation planning. Devices for mounting overlays and maps

throughout the COC should be standardized so overlays

can be interchanged quickly between the planning map,

the G-2/S-2 map, the G-3/S-3 map, and the fire support

coordination map. The use of colored pushpins,

restrictive fire area (RFA) templates, airspace
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 1-7

coordination area (ACA) templates, and maneuver

symbols may save time and prevent critical information

from being erased.

Laminate maps or cover them with acetate. Post information on overlays for unobstructed examination. The

following arrangement of overlays is effective.

First, Closest to the Map

This overlay posts information that does not normally

require frequent change; e.g., scheme of maneuver,

FSCMs or checkpoints.

Second

Post information that normally requires frequent

updating; e.g., location of friendly units including

target acquisition assets or fire capability fans.

Third, Targets

This overlay is rolled down into position on the map

board when required.

Fourth and Successive Overlays 

Post special purpose information such as programs of

fire. These overlays are removed from the map board

when not used.

FSCC PERSONNEL DUTIES

Though fire support coordination roles of division,

regiment, and battalion FSCCs differ, there are

common sets of duties at each echelon.

Supporting Arms Representatives

Duties common to all supporting arms representatives

are to—

l Advise the commander and FSC on capabilities of

the supporting arm represented.

l Prepare estimates of supportability.

l Assist in preparing the fire support plan.

l Provide input to the FSC as he plans FSCMs.

l Coordinate and deconflict the delivery of fires in

consonance with maneuver. 

Watch Officers/Chiefs

All officers and staff NCOs assigned to an FSCC must

be able to supervise the FSCC without assistance

during routine operations. This requires familiarization with all supporting arms and duties of other

supporting arms representatives. During critical operational periods, actual supporting arms representatives

must be recalled to their positions. In establishing

watch lists, duties include—

l Assignments to distribute expertise on each watch;

e.g., artillery liaison officer (LNO) with NGF chief;

NGLO with artillery liaison chief.

l Minimum assignment of personnel with multiple

tasks; e.g., AirOs often have tasks other than fire

support, such as arranging for assault support.

l Watch officers/chiefs have requisite knowledge to

plan, coordinate, and execute fire missions with

automated information systems. 

Fire Support Coordinator

The FSC organizes, trains, and supervises FSCC

personnel. Commanders delegate the authority to

FSCs to control and supervise the FSCC. Duties of the

FSC or AFSC are to—

l Advise the commander on fire support.

l Coordinate preparing estimates of supportability.

l Participate in the targeting process.

l Provide guidance for automated information systems;

e.g., HPT, target delay time or firing asset preferences.

l Prepare the fire support plan with help from the

supporting arms representatives.

l Ensure that the fire support plan can be implemented with assets available and, if necessary, coordinate with the operations officer (G-3/S-3) and

the commander to request additional assets or to

modify plans.

l Recommend FSCMs to the commander.

l Work with the operations officer as he plans

maneuver control measures (will impact on

FSCMS).
1-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

l Provide clearance on requests for fire missions and

air strikes from subordinate units.

l Coordinate clearance of fires, when required, with

senior and adjacent units. This may be delegated to

the appropriate supporting arms representative.

l Disseminate target information received to other

staff members, subordinate units, and commands

requiring the information.

l Advise the commander on target selection and

attack guidance.

l Maintain close liaison with the operations officer

and the intelligence officer to ensure the most effective planning and application of fire support.

l Execute the attack of targets based on the commander’s guidance and the targeting process.

Artillery Liaison Officer

The AFSCs provide artillery representation in the

division FSCC. An artillery LNO and his liaison

section is provided by an artillery battalion to regiment

and battalion FSCCs. These liaison officers and

sections remain with their respective supported units

to allow continuity in planning and operations. Duties

are to—

l Monitor the artillery conduct of fire (COF) net and

provide clearance on requests for fire (battalion

only). Regiment and division FSCCs monitor the

artillery battalion and regiment fire direction net,

respectively, to keep abreast of artillery fire planning and significant artillery missions.

l Pass requirements for fire support to the appropriate

FDC for action.

l Coordinate artillery unit requirements (such as approval for displacement and resupply routes) with

the supported commander and with the commander

in whose area of operation the movement will occur,

if outside the supported unit’s area of operations.

l Remain abreast of current operations and logistics

status of artillery units and keep the FSC informed.

l Keep the supported unit S-2 or TIO advised of all

target information received through artillery nets.

l Keep the artillery unit advised on the plans and

tactical situation of the supported unit. Examples of

information passed to the artillery unit include target information, FSCMs, time checks, location of

friendly units, routing of aircraft, location of minefields (friendly and enemy) and lanes through them,

and other obstacles.

Air Officer

The AirO is a special staff officer at division headquarters. At regiment and battalion, the AirO is

assigned to the S-3 section. At all levels, the AirO

provides aviation representation in the respective

FSCC. Duties are to—

l Provide aviation information and expertise.

l Pass the commander’s air support requirements to

the appropriate air support control agency.

l Coordinate ASRs and joint tactical air requests

(JTARs) from subordinate units to ensure adequate

attack of targets, avoid duplication in the attack of

targets, and protect friendly units.

l Receive target information relayed through Marine

air command and control system (MACCS) agencies.

l Monitor the tactical air request (TAR) net in the

FSCC for information, or clearance if required, on

immediate ASRs and JTARs.

l Supervise and coordinate TACP activities.

l Request SEAD fire in support of air strikes from

other supporting arms representatives, as necessary.

l Maintain situational awareness on information

pertaining to ASRs, prospective air support targets,

assigned missions, and SEAD requirements.

l Provide necessary coordination with the DASC in

support of GCE maneuvering units.

l Coordinate with the ACE when planning forward

arming and refueling points (FARPs) within the

maneuver unit’s boundaries.

l Coordinate ingress and egress of aircraft through

the unit’s area of operation.

l Plan and disseminate air control measures; e.g.,

holding areas (HAs) or contact points.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 1-9

Naval Gunfire Officer/

Naval Gunfire Liaison Officer

The NGFO is a special staff officer at the division

headquarters. NGLOs are Navy officers provided by

the supporting artillery battalion to the regiment and

battalion FSCCs. Duties are to—

l Monitor the NGF spot nets and provide clearance

on requests for fire (battalion only). The NGF support net is monitored at division and regiment

FSCCs to keep abreast of NSFS information.

l Assist in transmitting requests for fire between

other stations; e.g., artillery or other ground observers and NSFS ships.

l Request NGF ships to occupy specific fire support

stations (FSSs) or areas for the attack of targets,

mask clearance or troop safety.

l Remain abreast of ships’ ammunition status and

rotation schedules and keep the FSC informed.

l Supervise and coordinate SFCP activities at the battalion level.

l Keep the TIO or supported unit S-2 advised of all

target information received through NGF channels.

Target Information Officer

The artillery regiment provides a TIO to work in the

division FSCC TIS (when formed). The TIO is responsible for targeting. (See chap. 4.) His duties require

him to work closely with the TGTINTELO in the G-2

section. Because there are no TIOs in the regiments or

battalions, the FSC may have to perform some TIO

duties or delegate to the supporting arms representatives. Duties are to—

l Receive reports on potential targets from the G-2/

S-2, subordinate elements, artillery units, and also

from other FSCCs. 

l Keep the FSC and other supporting arms representatives informed on the status of targets.

l Keep appropriate target files.

l Perform preliminary weaponeering. 

81mm Mortar Platoon Representative

Each infantry battalion FSCC has a representative

from the 81mm mortar platoon. Duties are to—

l Monitor the mortar conduct of fire net and clear

requests to fire.

l Coordinate with the FSC on movements of the mortar platoon or any of its sections.

l Keep the FSC informed of the firing capacity of the

mortar platoon, including ammunition status.

l Pass requirements for planned fires to the mortar

platoon FDC.

Other Personnel

Personnel in other staff sections may be required to

work closely with FSCC personnel. In addition to staff

officers (G-2/S-2, G-3/S-3), personnel include special

staff officers from engineer, tank, AAV, LAR, antitank, LAAD units, and the EWO. Input could be—

l An engineer’s battlefield analysis. This input aids in

terrain and route reconnaissance and gives guidance

for targeting on bridges and structures.

l A nuclear, biological, and chemical defense (NBCD)

officer’s analysis of weather affects on smoke,

chemical, and biological weapons. This input aids in

targeting, particularly with regard to the hazardous

effect of munitions on industrial chemicals.

l An ASE serving as a liaison for the DASC at the

FSCC. Input could be to transfer requirements for

air support and update the scheme of maneuver.
CHAPTER 2. FIRE SUPPORT COMMUNICATIONS NETS

Fire support communications nets are established to

conduct fire support coordination as efficiently as possible with a minimum number of communications assets. Radio communications allow net monitoring by

fire support agencies at each echelon. Planning considerations include available assets, number of nets required, number of stations per net, requirements for

data and voice transmission, security requirements,

and information flow. When the communications system incorporates data communications, planners must

ensure equipment compatibility between fire support

agencies at each echelon. Subscribers must configure

their data terminals with the correct parameters as well

as ensure messages and transmissions are addressed to

appropriate agencies.

The commander is responsible for employing communications and information systems (CIS). The G-6/S-6

is responsible to the commander for all CIS planning

and employment. The volume of information to be

processed and analyzed to support decisionmaking is

exploding and threatens to overwhelm the commander

and his staff. Efficient CIS help the commander to

overcome this challenge. CIS must satisfy command

and control (C2) requirements of the expeditionary

force. CIS must provide commanders and their staffs

with the tools to rapidly collect, process, analyze, and

exchange information to support planning and execution. Systems employment must not adversely affect

freedom of action or mobility. Communications must

be reliable, secure, flexible, and responsive.

The two original forms of communication (written and

voice) have been augmented by automated information

systems with a third form of communication; i.e., data.

Data communications increase the speed of communicating by transmitting large amounts of information

while reducing signature and enhancing survivability.

Data communications require prior integration to succeed in information processing and dissemination.

SECURITY

Force protection entails communications security.

Communications that can be intercepted are a lucrative source of intelligence to the enemy. However,

speed and accuracy of communications are also critical to friendly operations, particularly in fire support.

There may be situations when requirements conflict;

e.g., insufficient encryption devices to cover all nets

coupled with a requirement for rapid communications.

A good rule of thumb is that security takes precedence

on nets where targeting or fire planning information is

passed (the enemy may intercept these communications and take appropriate counteraction). On the other

hand, speed and accuracy take precedence on nets

where immediate requests for fire are passed. If these

communications are intercepted, there is seldom time

for targeted personnel or units to react.

MAGTF TACTICAL 

COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK

The design of the communications network to support

a MAGTF is based on the nature of the operation, the

commander’s intent, the concept of operations, and the

composition and task organization of the MAGTF and

attached and supporting forces.

In the early stages of an operation, single-channel radio (SCR) normally provides the principal means of

communications. As the operation evolves, local area

networks (LANs) and a switched backbone are established to meet the information transfer requirements of

C2 at higher echelons and to connect to the Defense

Information Systems Network (DISN). Maneuver battalions continue to depend on SCR throughout the operation with limited interface to the switched

backbone. Special-purpose systems provide dedicated

communications support for certain functions, such as

position location and navigation and air defense.
2-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

The Marine Corps is currently fielding, or will soon

field, equipment systems that will provide data transmission capability to fire support agencies at all echelons. These systems will decrease response times to

requests for fire by speeding transmission time to affect necessary coordination.

Single Channel Radio

SCR is the principal means of communications support for maneuver units. SCR communications equipment is easy to operate. Networks are easily

established, rapidly reconfigured, and, most importantly, easily maintained on the move. 

SCR provides secure voice communications and supports limited data information exchange. VHF and

UHF bands are normally limited to line of sight. Satellite communications (SATCOM) provide mobility,

flexibility, and ease of operation with unlimited range.

SCR limitations include susceptibility to enemy EW;

cosite, footprint, terrain, and atmospheric interference;

the requirement for close coordination and detailed

planning; a need for common timing, frequency, and

equipment; and limited spectrum availability. The latter is particularly critical in SATCOM.

MAGTF SCR equipment is fielded in many configurations and includes hand-held, manpack, vehiclemounted, ground-mounted, and sheltered radios.

These radios operate in simplex and half-duplex

modes. The most widely employed tactical radios provide integrated COMSEC and jam resistance through

frequency hopping. 

SCR is used primarily for secure voice communications. However, SCR can also transmit and receive data by using terminal devices such as the digital

message system (previously called and more commonly known as the digital communications terminal

[DCT]) and the tactical communications interface

module (TCIM). Tactical SCRs operate in HF, VHF,

and UHF bands as shown in table 2-1.

HF Radio

HF radio equipment is capable of both long- and shortrange secure voice and data communications. The primary Marine Corps HF radio is the AN/PRC-104.

VHF Radio

The primary Marine Corps VHF radio is the single

channel ground and airborne system (SINCGARS).

SINCGARS is a family of light-weight combat radios

that serves as the primary means of communications

for C2 and fire support.

UHF Radio

Military UHF radio equipment operates in the 116–

150 megahertz upper VHF frequency range and the

Table 2-1. SCR.

Frequency Band MAGTF SCR

 Equipment Used

Operating

 Frequency Range 

(MHz)

Typical

Application

HF AN/PRC-104

AN/PRC-138

AN/GRC-193

AN/MRC-138

AN/VRC-102

2–29.999 Radio line of sight and beyond/long range

VHF AN/PRC-68

SINCGARS family 

30–88 Radio line of sight and relay/retransmission

AN/PRC-113

AN/VRC-83

116–150 Critical line of sight (ground to air)

UHF AN/PRC-113

AN/VRC-83

AN/GRC-171

225–400 Critical line of sight (ground to air)

AN/PSC-3

AN/PSC-5

SATCOM footprint
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 2-3

225–400 megahertz military UHF radio spectrum.

UHF radios also include UHF-TACSAT radios capable of long-range communications. The primary

Marine Corps UHF radios are the AN/PRC-113 and

the AN/PSC-5.

Local Area Networks

Local area networks (LANs) are data communications

networks that are designed to support information exchange, collaboration, and resource sharing in a particular unit, agency, facility, center, or cell in a confined

geographic area. Because of the limited distances involved, LANs can support high data throughput up to

100 megabites per second, although 10 megabites is

more common. LANs include terminal equipment

connected to a transmission medium such as wire or

fiber-optic cable. LAN media used in the MAGTF include both copper-based coaxial and twisted-pair cable

used within local facilities, such as a regiment COC,

and fiber-optic cable used as a higher speed backbone

that connects multiple facilities in a large headquarters

complex. Fiber-optic backbone LANs are also used

aboard Navy ships with copper-based coaxial and

twisted-pair LANs within an operational workspace

such as the landing force operations center (LFOC).

MCWP 6-22 contains extensive discussion on how

specific LAN media, access methods, technologies,

protocols, and equipment are employed to meet specific unit requirements.

Switched Backbone

The MAGTF switched backbone consists of switching, routing, and wideband transmission systems that

provide a high-capacity communications backbone for

the MAGTF as well as connectivity with the DISN. It

is the tactical equivalent of commercial local and longdistance networks and sometimes interfaces with and

uses those commercial networks. Switched backbone

uses a mix of older equipment developed under the

TRI-TAC program and newer equipment and technology. It is tailored to meet the requirements of a particular operation and can adapt to support the unfolding

tactical situation and overall scheme of maneuver.

Planning, redesign, and adaptation are continuous as

switched backbone equipment and personnel arrive in

theater and the MAGTF transitions to operations

ashore. Larger headquarters, rear areas, expeditionary

airfields, and C2 centers at higher echelons are principal subscribers. Maneuver battalions cannot be constrained by the switched backbone’s inherent lack of

mobility and normally link to it through an SCR interface. The MAGTF switched backbone includes

switches, internet protocol routers, and wideband multichannel radio transmission systems. 

The TRI-TAC family of equipment, developed in the

1970s under a joint program of the Marine Corps, Air

Force, and Army and fielded in the mid-1980s, provides

the major components of the MAGTF switched backbone. The Marine Corps and the Air Force employ the

TRI-TAC-developed AN/TTC-42 and SB-3865 unitlevel circuit switches (ULCSs). Computers play a key

role in operation, maintenance, and control. Computercontrolled communications links and switching enable

efficient, flexible use of limited resources. Computerized switches and routers route voice, data, and video

information at various points or nodes in the network.

Telephones TA-954 DNVT, TA-1042 DNVT, TSEC/

KY-68/78 DSVT, and multimedia terminals (STU-III)

are used to gain access. At divisions and regiments, the

switching nodes that support fire support agencies are

connected via tactical multi-channel radios AN/TRC170 and AN/MRC-142.

Wire is most often used to connect cells within a COC

and connect multiple automated terminals within a

cell. Where the tactical situation permits, wire provides a redundancy for some radio nets. Often an FSC

may want a direct wire link that does not pass through

a switchboard (hotline) to the supporting artillery FDC

or the TPC. Wire communications can be secured and

used for voice and data communications.

Messenger

Using messengers must be planned because they provide a secure, reliable means of communications.

When time permits, they may be the most effective

means for sending fire support plans and overlays.

Special-Purpose Systems

Special-purpose system assets are designed to provide specific position location, navigation, information distribution, and cooperative identification

services. They serve all MAGTF elements, often

through externally managed satellite and aircraft
2-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

relay systems, and provide real-time information to

tactical users at the point of need.

Precision Lightweight Global Positioning System

(GPS) Receiver (PLGR)

The AN/PSN-11 PLGR is a small, handheld, GPS receiver that weighs approximately 3 pounds. It provides

precise positioning and timing solutions based on signals received from the GPS satellite constellation. Position can be displayed in virtually any format

(latitude/longitude, military grid reference system, and

universal transverse mercator). It contains 49 map datums. Users can program way-points for navigation

with back azimuths and distances to the next waypoint available with the push of a button. The PLGR is

compatible with night vision goggles.

Enhanced Position Location Reporting System

The enhanced position location reporting system

(EPLRS) shares many characteristics with PLRS, but

provides a significant increase in data communications

capability. Since various data rates supporting various

broadcast and point-to-point modes are currently

available, EPLRS provides a dedicated data communications capability between regiment and battalion tactical data networks (TDNs) within the GCE. This

network will also be extended to lower echelons

throughout the MAGTF. EPLRS serves as a source for

automated friendly position location information

(PLI), navigation information, and communications

capability for automated systems.

Digital Communications Terminal (AN/PSC-2)

The DCT is a rugged, lightweight, microprocessorcontrolled, handheld message processor. It provides

Marine users at all echelons with point-to-point and

netted data communications. It is compatible with

most MAGTF radio, wire, and encryption equipment.

It supports data transfer up to 2.4 kilobits per second in

the analog frequency shift keying (FSK) mode and,

depending on the transmission media, up to 16 kilobits

per second in the digital baseband mode. The DCT allows the operator to enter and read data in both free

text and fixed or variable message formats (VMFs).

VMF is the tactical message standard adopted by

DOD for ground forces. All of the Services have

agreed to use this standard.

Target Handoff System

The THS is still in the formative stages. It is designed

to replace the digital messaging system (DMS). THS

will provide personnel at the company level with a tactical input/output battlefield situational awareness and

data communications capability. THS will be used to

receive, store, retrieve, create, modify, transmit, and

display fire support information and commander’s

critical information via tactical radios, networks, and

wirelines. THS will assist the user to manage information such as positions of other units, coordinates of

designated points, preformatted messages, and free

text information.

Data Automated Communications Terminal 

The DACT provides company fire support personnel

with a tactical input/output battlefield situational

awareness and data communications capability.

DACT will be used to receive, store, retrieve, create,

modify, transmit, and display map overlays and commander’s critical information via tactical radios, networks, and wire lines. DACT will use an embedded

global positioning system (GPS) receiver to display its

own location, which can be automatically transmitted

to other stations. DACT can assist the user to manage

information such as positions of other units, coordinates of designated points, pre-formatted messages,

and free-text information.

Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System

The AFATDS is a joint Army/Marine Corps system to

replace the initial fire support automated system (IFSAS). It is a multi-Service, integrated, battlefield management and decision support system that incorporates

automation into the fires warfighting function to assist

the commander in planning, delivery, and coordination of supporting arms. Terminals are located in

FSCCs, DASC, TACC, and artillery battalion and regiment FDCs.

Tactical Combat Operations

TCO will automate the commander’s ability to receive, fuse, select, and display information from many
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 2-5

sources and disseminate selected information throughout the battlespace. TCO attributes include automated

message processing, mission planning development

and dissemination of operations orders and overlays,

displaying friendly and enemy situations, displaying

tactical control measures, and interfacing with wide

and local area networks. Terminals will be located in

the MEF, DASC, TACC, and COCs of divisions, infantry battalions and regiments, artillery battalions and

regiments, and LAR and tank battalions.

FIRE SUPPORT RADIO NETS

Radio nets are groups of designated stations connected

to each other. They may be identified to carry either

voice and/or data transmissions. Unit standing operating procedures (SOPs) should contain procedures for

establishing communications and troubleshooting on

voice or data nets. Data radio nets do not have the

range capability of voice nets. Directional antennas

help minimize this limitation. Figure 2-1 on page 2-6

shows fire support radio nets and designates control,

guard, and monitor responsibilities.

The MAGTF force fires coordination (MAGTF FFC):

VHF, voice/data net is activated by the MAGTF FFCC

in operations that are not amphibious.

Examples of division fire support coordination (Div

FSC): VHF, voice/data net traffic include fire plans,

target information, and fire support coordinating measures (FSCMs). Regiment FSCCs also use this net for

cross-boundary coordination of aircraft and fires.

At a lower level, the regiment fire support coordination

(Regt FSC) VHF: voice/data net is similar to the division FSCC net with emphasis on traffic related to coordination and execution of fire plans. Battalion FSCs

use this net to pass fire support requirements to the regiment FSC and to coordinate cross-boundary fires.

These nets will normally accommodate communications requirements for effective fire support. When

used for their stated purpose, circuits do not become

overloaded and remain free for necessary communications. However, if some nets become unavailable

through heavy traffic, enemy interference, or equipment failure, FSCC personnel should not hesitate to

use any available net to pass urgent traffic. 

Nets may be used as alternate tactical or command

nets by maneuver units in special situations. The

number of nets plus the availability of wire provides

flexible options for FSCC personnel to provide continuous communications.

MCWP 3-16 is the primary reference for fire support

communications nets. See FMFM 6-18-1 for net configuring procedures for data transmission with automated fire support systems. See also MCWP 6-22.

ARTILLERY AND MORTAR RADIO NETS

Artillery Conduct of Fire (Arty COF):

VHF, Voice/Data

This net provides a means for observers to request and

adjust artillery fire. Artillery LNOs at regiment and

battalion FSCCs monitor/receive net traffic to coordinate requests for fire. FOs and LNOs may use the net

to exchange target and fire planning information. If

conducting battalion-directed operations, the artillery

battalion FDC establishes as many as three COF nets

and acts as net control on each. The artillery battalion

FDC may assign a COF net for each maneuver battalion for continuity of fire support during battery displacements. The supported unit’s LNOs and FOs

remain on the assigned COF net. The artillery battalion FDC receives all calls for fire (CFFs) and determines the firing battery that will provide fire support

to the maneuver battalion. If conducting autonomous

operations, each battery FDC maintains a COF net and

acts as net control, each net is monitored by the battalion FDC when present. When observers are employing

digital devices, one or more COF nets must be dedicated to data communication.

Division/GCE Artillery Air Spot: VHF, Voice

This net provides a means for aircrews to adjust artillery fire. When in use, artillery LNOs monitor for targets in their unit’s designated area of operations just as

they do with COF nets. FOs may use this net to coordinate with aircrews for attack of targets in their company’s area of operation. 
2-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Artillery Regiment Fire Direction 

(Arty Regt FD): VHF, Voice/Data

This net provides a means for the artillery regiment to

exercise tactical FD; e.g., transmitting orders, fire missions, fire plans, tactical information, and meteorological data to subordinate battalions. It also collects,

exchanges, and passes combat and target information.

Subordinate units may use it to request reinforcing

fires. The artillery officer at the division FSCC may

Legend: 

C - Net Control

X - Guard

R - As required 

(When directed)

LF FFC (VHF) (1)*DIV FSC (VHF)*REGT FSC (VHF)*LF A

RTY

C

MD

A

RTY

REGT C

MD (HF)

A

RTY

REGT FD (VHF)*

A

RTY

REGT TA

C (VHF)

DIV/G

CE A

RTY

AIR SPOT (VHF)

A

RTY BN C

MD (VHF)

A

RTY BN FD(VHF)*

D/S A

RTY

C

OF (VHF) (2)*

TA

R (HF) (1)

TAD (UHF/VHF) (1)TA

CP LO

C

AL (VHF)

DIV/G

CE NGF SPT (HF)

NGF AIR SPOT (UHF/VHF)NGF C

ONTR

OL (HF)

NGF G

RND SPOT (HF)

SFCP LO

C

AL (VHF)

NGF C

ONTR

OL O

VERLO

AD (HF)

LF NGF SPT (HF)BN M

O

RTA

R (VHF)

SACC (AFLOAT) C C C C C C

TACC (AFLOAT) X X R

MAGTF FFCC C C X R X R C

FAHQ X

DIV FSCC X C R R R X R X C C R X

DASC (ASHORE) C C

INF REGT FSCC R X C R R R R X R X X C R R

INF BN FSCC X R R X X X C R C C R X

SEP BN FSCC X R R R R R R R X X C R R C C R X

ARTY REGT R X R C C C C

D/S ARTY BN R X R X X X R C C C

ARTY BTRY R X X X

RADAR BEACON TM

ARTY FO R X

FAC X X X

MORTAR FO X

NGF SPOT TM X X

LAAD MISSILE TM (3)

FIRE SPT SHIP(S) X R X X R X

MORTAR PLAT C

NOTES:

(1) Net control located in SACC until displaced ashore.

(2) Net control at battalion (battalion directed operations) or battery (autonomous operations).

(3) LAAD nets established as required.

* Data and/or voice nets.

Figure 2-1. Fire Support Radio Nets. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 2-7

monitor this net to keep abreast of artillery fire planning and pass fire support coordination traffic if no

other net is available. 

Artillery Battalion Fire Direction (Arty Bn FD): 

VHF, Voice/Data

When transmitting voice traffic, this net provides a

means for the artillery battalion FDC to exercise tactical FD of subordinate units. If tactical FD is decentralized, this net may be used by batteries to request

reinforcing fires. The artillery LNO at the regiment

FSCC (battalion FSCC as required) may monitor the

Arty Bn FD net to keep abreast of artillery fire planning and significant artillery missions. When transmitting data traffic, tactical FD is incorporated into a COF

net and the Arty Bn FD is used for coordinating reinforcing fires. 

Artillery Regiment Tactical (Arty Regt Tac): 

VHF, Voice

This net provides a means for the artillery regiment

commander to command and control subordinate

units. Types of traffic include changes in tactical mission assignments and displacement or fire capability

reports. It may also be used as an alternate net for FD

and fire support coordination traffic. 

Artillery Regiment Command (Arty Regt Cmd): 

HF, Voice

This net provides a means for the artillery regiment

commander to command and coordinate administrative and logistical activities of subordinate units. It

may be used as an alternate net for FD and tactical

orders. The division FSCC may monitor this net, as required, principally as an alternate net for communicating with the artillery regiment should other nets

become inoperative. 

Artillery Battalion Command (Arty Bn Cmd): 

VHF, Voice

This net provides a means for the artillery battalion

commander to command and control subordinate

units. It is used principally for administrative, logistic,

and tactical traffic not related to FD. The supported infantry regiment or separate battalion FSCC may monitor this net, as required, principally as an alternate net

for communicating with the DS battalion should other

nets become inoperative. 

MAGTF/LF Artillery Command/Fire Direction 

(Arty Cmd/FD): HF, Voice

This net is established in amphibious operations for

rapid dissemination and coordination of fire support

information. It is used for the artillery regiment and

SACC to remain current on the status of artillery battalions. When the MAGTF consists of two GCEs or a

force artillery, both artillery regiments and the force

artillery monitor this net. The net remains active until

the artillery regiment headquarters or both artillery

regiment headquarters and the force artillery are

ashore and have established their own command/FD

nets. If only one GCE, this net normally transitions to

the artillery regiment command net with the artillery

regiment as net control. If two GCEs, the net normally terminates or becomes the command net of the

force artillery. 

Other Artillery Nets

Artillery units routinely use other radio nets for internal functions; e.g., survey, meteorology or radar telling. These nets are omitted from this publication since

they do not pertain to fire support coordination and

would not be required in an FSCC. They are discussed

in FMFM 6-18-1. 

Ground Combat Nets Monitored by Artillery

Artillery battalions and regiments monitor the supported unit’s tactical and intelligence nets. Monitoring

keeps them abreast of the tactical situation and able to

anticipate and project fire support requirements.

Infantry Battalion Mortar Net: VHF, Voice

This net provides a means for mortar FOs to request and

adjust fire on targets and for the 81mm mortar representative at the battalion FSCC to coordinate requests.
2-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

NAVAL GUNFIRE RADIO NETS

NGF ships may have limited communications terminals that can be used for fire support. When possible,

the MAGTF LF should make prior coordination with

the ATF to ensure that the proposed communications

plan of the AF is workable by the assigned ships.

NGF Ground Spot: HF/VHF, Voice

This net provides a means for NGF spot teams to request and adjust NGF, normally between a spot team

and the assigned DS ship. This net is also used to exchange vital information between stations. The battalion NGLO monitors the net to provide clearance or

communications relay, if necessary.

NGF Air Spot: UHF/VHF 

(Depends on Aircraft), Voice

This net provides a means for aircrews to request and

adjust NGF. The NGLO of the unit in whose area of

operation the fires will impact monitors the net to provide clearance. NGF spot teams may use this net to coordinate with an aircrew for attack of targets in their

respective company’s area of operation.

Shore Fire Control Party Local (SFCP Local): 

VHF, Voice

The SFCP local net provides a means for the battalion

NGLO to coordinate the activities of his SFCP. It is also used for the OIC of the spot team to communicate

with the members of that team when dispersed.

Division/GCE NGF Support: HF, Voice

This net provides a means for NGF planning between

the division/GCE NGFO officer and regiment NGLOs.

It is used by divisions and regiments to assign missions

to GS ships. This net can also be used by regiments to

request additional NSFS and aircrews. 

MAGTF/Landing Force NGF Support: HF, Voice

This net provides a means to request NSFS and coordinate employment of NSFS ships in GS of the LF. 

NGF Control: NGF 

Control Overload: HF, Voice

This net provides the Navy amphibious commander

with a means for requesting and assigning NSFS ships,

making relief and emergency reports, and transmitting

orders regarding the execution of scheduled fires. It is

an NSFS-equivalent of the artillery command and FD

nets. The SAC uses this net to coordinate NSFS ship

employment. Depending on the volume of traffic or

other criteria, the Navy amphibious commander may

establish one or more NGF control overload nets. Examples of traffic are ammunition status and results of

attack on targets. Composition is the same as the NGF

control net. 

AVIATION RADIO NETS

The DASC, when practical, normally collocates with

the GCEs senior FSCC. Optimally, collocation is by

physical proximity. However, an electronic link may

be an acceptable alternative when DASC siting requirements differ from the FSCCs; i.e., necessity for

line of sight (LOS) communications with aircraft, tactical or geographical considerations, and communications connectivity with other MACCS agencies. The

following nets are normally found in the DASC and

are monitored by the AirO in the FSCC. 

Tactical Air Command (TAC) 

This net connects the DASC to all other MACCS

agencies.

Direct Air Support (DAS) 

This net is a discreet net between the DASC and

TACC used to transfer information on air support requests and mission/aircraft status.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 2-9

Tactical Air Request/

Helicopter Request (TAR/HR): HF, Voice

This net connects the DASC to all potential direct air support aircraft requesters. It receives requests for immediate

air support. FSCCs monitor and receive air requests and

approve, deny or modify them. BDAs and emergency helicopter requests may also be passed over this net. Preplanned air support requests may be passed but should

normally be passed by other means; e.g., wire or messenger. Multiple TAR nets may be required. 

Helicopter Direction (HD) 

This net is used by the DASC, airborne coordinators, and terminal controllers for helicopter control

and coordination. 

Tactical Air Direction (TAD): UHF/VHF, Voice

This net is used by the DASC, airborne coordinators,

and terminal controllers to control and direct fixed-wing

aircraft; e.g., FAC or FAC(A) and for an air control

agency to brief support aircraft on target information

and handoff to a FAC, FAC(A), or TAC(A).

Tactical Air Control Party 

Local (TACP Local): VHF, Voice

This net provides a means for coordination between

the AirO in the battalion FSCC and the FAC parties.

Stations include the AirO in the battalion FSCC (net

control) and the FAC parties.
CHAPTER 3. FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING

Planning is the act of preparing for future decisions

in an uncertain and time-constrained environment. It

should incorporate flexibility and, when required, enable intuitive or recognitional decisionmaking. The

commander must recognize benefits and potential

pitfalls of planning. He is responsible to ensure that

planning is conducted properly to avoid these pitfalls. The commander disciplines the planning process and teaches the staff the relevance of product

content (MCDP 5).

The goal of fire support planning is coordinating and

integrating fires from armed aircraft, land-based and

sea-based indirect fire systems, and electronic warfare systems that directly support land, maritime, amphibious, and special operation forces to engage

enemy forces, combat formations, and facilities in

pursuit of tactical and operational objectives. Fire

support planning answers the question “How will

fires support the scheme of maneuver?” To accomplish this, the staff determines—

l What types of targets to attack.

l How to acquire and track targets.

l When to attack targets.

l What fire support assets are available to attack

targets.

l How to coordinate the attacks.

l What defines success.

The collection plan must be integrated with and supported by the fire support plan. Fire support planning

provides crucial input for developing the collection

plan. It links acquisition assets to finding specific enemy formations to attack or required information to answer the commander’s CCIRs. NAIs and TAIs must

support the requirements of the fire support plan.

The result of fire support planning must be an effective, integrated, executable, and flexible plan. An effective fire support plan clearly defines and focuses on

achieving the effects required to support the scheme of

maneuver, which together, form the overall concept of

operation. An integrated fire support plan uses all

available acquisition and attack assets and maximizes

combat power to create a combined arms effect. An

executable fire support plan has the time, space, and

resources to achieve and assess the planned effects. A

flexible plan is simple, understandable, and has the

agility to support the commander’s intent when the unforeseen arises through well-defined decision points.

Finally, maneuver commanders and all fire support

agencies must understand the plan.

SECTION I. PRINCIPLES

Fire support planning is a continuous, concurrent cycle

of analyzing the enemy and friendly situation; conducting targeting; tasking and allocating fire support

assets; scheduling fires; and coordinating execution to

integrate fire support with the scheme of maneuver

and maximize combat power. Its tangible result is a

fire support plan. Effective fire support planning requires a continuous interaction between higher and

lower echelons. The philosophy behind Marine Corps

fire support planning is a top down, bottom up refinement approach. The following principles provide guidance regardless of the tactical situation. 

PLAN EARLY AND CONTINUOUSLY

To effectively integrate fire support with the scheme

of maneuver, planning must begin when the commander states his mission and provides his planning
3-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

guidance. The FSC should solicit that additional guidance from the commander whenever needed.

EXPLOIT ALL AVAILABLE 

TARGETING ASSETS

The FSC should ensure that target acquisition requirements are identified and incorporated as CCIRs in the

collection plan and that target information from all

available resources is rapidly evaluated. This includes

information from all sources within the MAGTF.

CONSIDER ALL AVAILABLE FIRES

The FSC considers the use of available assets at both his

echelon and higher. Available fires includes nonlethal

means such as smoke, illumination, and EW resources.

He also considers the commander’s guidance for using

supporting arms in current and future operations.

USE THE LOWEST ECHELON 

CAPABLE OF FURNISHING

EFFECTIVE FIRE SUPPORT

The lowest echelon that has the means to accomplish

the mission should furnish the fire support. The FSC

decides what is needed and, if his own assets are inadequate, requests additional fire support from the echelon that controls the required asset.

USE THE MOST EFFECTIVE

FIRE SUPPORT MEANS

Requests for fire support are sent to the supporting

arm that can deliver the most effective fires within the

required time. In making his decision, the FSC considers the nature and importance of the target, the engagement time window, the availability of attack means,

the results desired, and the number/type of assets required to achieve the desired effect.

FURNISH THE TYPE OF

FIRE SUPPORT REQUESTED

The fire support requester is usually in the best position to determine his fire support requirements. However, the FSC is in a position to weigh the request

against the commander’s guidance and the current and

future needs for fire support. If a request is disapproved, the FSC stops the request and notifies all concerned. When possible, he substitutes a new fire

support means and alerts the agencies that are to provide the support and the requesting unit.

AVOID UNNECESSARY DUPLICATION

A key task for the FSC is to ensure that unnecessary

duplication of fire support is resolved and that only the

minimum force needed to achieve the desired effect is

used. Eliminating unnecessary duplication conserves

fire support assets, facilitates sustainment, and maintains tempo. This does not mean that only one asset is

used. Taking advantage of the complementary characteristics of different types of assets and integrating

their effects provides the synergy of combined arms.

COORDINATE AIRSPACE

Inherent in fire support coordination is the deconfliction of airspace by supporting arms. FSCMs and coordination procedures protect aircraft while

incorporating CAS and DAS with indirect fires in support of close operations and deep operations. The extent of airspace coordination depends on available

time. At lower levels, such coordination is performed

by FACs, forward observers, and aircrews.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 3-3

PROVIDE ADEQUATE SUPPORT

The mission and the commander’s guidance determine

the effects that fire support must achieve for the plan

to succeed. The FSC must clearly inform the maneuver commander when he lacks adequate resources to

support his plan.

 PROVIDE RAPID COORDINATION

Procedures for rapid coordination ensure speed and

flexibility in delivery of fires. Established channels for

coordination facilitate rapid coordination. The FSC

must know the characteristics of available fire support

weapons and their status. The FSC must maintain situational awareness as the battle develops to attack planned targets and targets of opportunity. 

PROVIDE SAFEGUARDS

AND SURVIVABILITY

Force protection includes considerations of both

friendly and enemy threats. The FSC must be aware of

situations that increase the risk of fratricide. The primary mechanisms for limiting fratricide are close

coordination at all levels and situational awareness.

Use of FSCMs, coordination of position areas, and the

locations of friendly forces during target analysis contribute to safeguarding friendly units. Safety measures

must minimize the potential for fratricide while not

limiting boldness and audacity in combat. Fires that

increase survivability include SEAD for aviation assets and proactive counter fire to ensure freedom of

movement of maneuver forces.

ESTABLISH FIRE SUPPORT 

COORDINATING MEASURES

FSCMs facilitate the rapid engagement of targets

throughout the battlespace and at the same time provide safeguards for friendly forces. They ensure that

fire support will not jeopardize troop safety, interfere

with the delivery of other fire support means, or disrupt adjacent unit operations. FSCMs are discussed in

appendix B.

ESTABLISH

COMMUNICATIONS SUPPORT

Timely and efficient exchange of information is a key

requirement for all successful operations. Physical collocation of coordinating agencies provides the surest

form of communication. If personal coordination is required but collocation is not possible or desired, liaison personnel are used and an electronic interface is

established (voice and/or data).

SECTION II. THE MARINE CORPS 

PLANNING PROCESS

Fire support planning is a part of the Marine Corps Planning Process (MCPP) and is integrated with the other

warfighting functions (command and control, intelligence, maneuver, logistics, and force protection). It applies the MCPP tenets of topdown guidance, the single

battle concept, and integrated planning. Steps of the

MCPP (figure 3-1 on page 3-4) support the Marine Corps

warfighting philosophy of maneuver warfare. It helps organize the thought process of a commander and his staff

throughout the planning and execution of military operations. The MCPP applies across the range of military operations and is designed for use at any level of command.

It can be as detailed or as abbreviated as time, staff resources, experience, and the tactical situation permit.

The process described is a means to an end; the final

output for fire support planning must be an effective,

integrated, flexible, and executable fire support plan.
3-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

The process outlined here is intended to help FSCs to

better understand their role in the overall planning process and the procedures to develop a thoroughly integrated and effective fire support plan. See MCWP 5-1,

Marine Corps Planning Process.

DIVISION PLANNING

Higher echelons are generally organized with more

planning capacity than lower echelons. Higher echelon

planning should attempt to reduce the burden of lower

echelon planning. The higher echelon’s efforts are

generally focused on influencing future operations

while supporting current operations.

Planning includes disseminating guidance and information on targeting, anticipating requirements, allocating assets, and coordinating with higher and

adjacent agencies. Planning should not impede nor

substitute the planning efforts of lower echelons. Fire

support planning by higher echelons seeks to—

l Support forces in contact by using fires to isolate

the battlefield for current operations, and providing

force protection; e.g., counterfire.

l Support the commander’s plan by establishing

guidance on fire support and by using fires to shape

the battlespace for future operations.

l Combine the different supporting arms to shape the

battlespace and set the stage or enable current

operations.

l Sustain fire support by allocation and distribution of

assets and by anticipating requirements and

providing logistical support.

REGIMENT AND BATTALION PLANNING

Lower echelons plan concurrently with higher echelons (see appendix C). Close liaison facilitates concurrent planning. Lower echelons focus on providing

close supporting fires and the coordination needed to

integrate them with maneuver. Fire support planning

at lower echelons seeks to—

l Support forces in contact by providing close

supporting fires.

l Support the commander’s scheme of maneuver.

l Integrate fire support with maneuver to create a

combined arms effect.

Figure 3-1. Steps of the Marine Corps Planning Process.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 3-5

l Sustain fire support by judiciously employing

limited assets where they will have the greatest

effect. 

COMPANY PLANNING

Planning at the company level may use the troop leading steps commonly referred to as BAMCIS. Figure

3-2 lists the fire support actions during each step of

BAMCIS. Actions may be done in any sequence or simultaneously. The company fire support planner must

organize the efforts of his assets to meet all these requirements in a time-constrained environment. See

MCRP 3-11.1A for more information.

MISSION ANALYSIS

Because fire support planning is a continuous process,

the FSC must continually update his fire support estimate. Once a mission (or a probable mission) is identified, the efforts of the FSCC become focused. The

mission statement received includes the task, together

with the purpose, that clearly indicates the action to be

taken and the reason. FSC’s responsibilities during

TROOP LEADING STEP FIRE SUPPORT ACTIONS 

Begin Planning Update friendly and enemy situations.

Find out assets available, allocations, and FSCMs.

Obtain battalion’s target list worksheet, FSEM, and attack guidance.

Understand the battalion fire support plan and how it affects your company.

Identify fire support tasks for your company. Brief your commander on above.

Receive the commander’s mission.

Receive the commander’s fire support guidance.

Participate in warning order.

Issue warning order to fire support personnel and mortar section on fire support issues.

Arrange for

Reconnaissance

Conduct map analysis.

Plot obstacles and known enemy locations.

Plot all battalion targets.

List fire support tasks.

Advise the commander if guidance can/cannot be met with available assets and allocations.

Refine battalion targets, if necessary, and request additional assets as required.

Determine if battalion targets support the commander’s guidance.

Plot targets necessary to support commander’s guidance (within target allocation).

Determine purpose, engagement criteria, trigger points, and primary and alternate executors.

Develop target list worksheet.

Develop FSEM.

Brief commander on initial fire support plan. 

Make Reconnaissance Ensure battlefield observation is maintained.

Accompany maneuver leaders on reconnaissance.

Confirm or modify plan.

Verify target locations, trigger points, and observation plan (primary and alternate).

Complete the Plan Modify the plan as necessary after reconnaissance.

Brief commander on the scheme of fires.

Emphasize observer movement, OP requirements, and triggers.

Receive approval for fire support plan.

Transmit target list worksheet and coordination requirements to battalion FSCC

and company mortars.

Brief fire support personnel on fire support plan.

Issue the Order Participate in company orders brief.

Ensure fire support representatives and mortar section leader attend orders brief if possible. 

Supervise Conduct rehearsals.

Conduct inspections as required.

Continue to refine targets and triggers for actual location, ground reconnaissance or new enemy information.

Continuously update and coordinate the plan as necessary.

Figure 3-2. BAMCIS.
3-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

mission analysis are primarily focused on gathering

information and participating in the staff’s analysis of

the mission. This allows the FSC and the supporting

arms representatives in the FSCC to begin developing

the situational awareness crucial to building a fire support plan. Understanding the enemy situation; the intent of higher HQ; commander’s initial planning

guidance; identifying the unit’s specified, implied, and

essential tasks; determining restraints or constraints;

and identifying information shortfalls provides fire

support planners information and direction to continue

planning.

The resulting mission statement, commander’s planning guidance, and commander’s intent to subordinate

commands will drive planning during course of action

development. During mission analysis, the staff may

identify issues that will require additional guidance

from the commander.

Commander’s Initial Planning Guidance

Commander’s guidance provides preliminary decisions required to focus planners on the commander’s

conceptual vision of the operation. The commander

develops this guidance using his commander’s battlespace area evaluation (CBAE), experience, and information on the mission from higher headquarters.

The commander’s initial planning guidance provides

the staff and subordinate commanders additional insight on how he views the mission and the resources

required to achieve the desired end state. Depending

on the time available, he may provide general guidance, as well as specific points; e.g., a particular enemy capability or a certain task organization. From this

guidance, the FSC begins to frame fire support’s role

in the plan. 

This guidance is more proscriptive than commander’s

intent. It should address what he wants fires to accomplish (task and purpose), the focus of fire support,

what he initially sees as high-payoff targets (HPTs),

any force protection issues (such as radar zones), and

constraints or restraints from higher headquarters. The

key is to focus on the “effects” that the commander

wants fires to achieve. See page 3-8. An example of

commander’s guidance for fire support in a deliberate

attack in an urban operation follows.

1) I see our supporting arms assets accomplishing three

tasks:

a) Starting with isolation, I want fires to limit the enemy’s ability to reinforce and resupply forces in Obj

A and Obj B through the use of complementary systems (artillery, UAV, FAC(A), and attack aviation).

Position assets and integrate UAV and FAC(A) to

limit the enemy’s ability to move forces.

b) I see fires being used to destroy the enemy’s ability

to use strong-points and the upper stories of buildings through the use of field artillery and PGMs.

c) Finally, fires must deny the enemy’s ability to mass

a counterattack or reinforcing forces on the avenue

of approach parallel to our axis of advance. We can

use UAVs and FAC(A)s and positioning artillery

units to fire along the long axis of the likely enemy

avenues of approach.

2) The focus of fires initially is to the isolating force to

aid in the isolation effort, then to scouts and reconnaissance assets along our axis of advance. In the remaining phases, the focus will be on Obj A and B to

ensure the assault force has freedom to maneuver.

3) My HPTs are—

a) Initially C3, indirect fire assets, and armored vehicles operating in formation greater than a section.

b) Gaining a foothold—indirect fire assets, C3, and

then strong-points.

c) Secure—counterattack/reinforcing forces, indirect

fire assets, and C3.

4) My force protection priorities are on the lead forces of

the assault force. Ensure that sensor zones are in place

to support their movement and assault on Objs A and

B. Ensure artillery units providing fire support have

adequate security. Place NFAs on buildings or specific

locations that may house industrial chemicals to avoid

the release of hazardous material. Ensure that boundaries and FSCMs are easily discernable to ground

forces and aviation assets. Ensure that positions/buildings that have been occupied by our forces are

marked. (Marking must be seen by ground and air assets.) Ensure that fire support nets are supported with

retransmission sites to communicate with supporting

arms assets and higher HQ. Position mortars with the

assault force to ensure quick response.

Within the guidance, the commander should focus

much more on what he wants done to the enemy and

how he sees that helping the operation to succeed.

For example, “Disrupt the ability of enemy ADA to

engage the lift helicopters from PZ BLUE to LZ XRAY to allow the helo force to arrive at the LZ with

its forces intact.” Advantages of this guidance over

“suppress ADA for the air assault” follow.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 3-7

Suppress applies to artillery and mortars but does not

apply to EW. By stating the affect in targeting terms,

we also talk to the maneuver planner. He can support

this task by planning air routes away from known or

suspected ADA positions. He can choose to execute in

visibility conditions that “disrupt” these systems.

The clear focus on a specific capability and when it is

important helps focus the entire staff on which ADA is

important and when it is important. ADA that is identified but can’t affect the air route may not be high payoff. This specificity can keep fires focused on the right

target at the right time. The commander’s guidance for

fire support developed at this point is refined through

the planning process and is later included with the

above detail in the operations order.

Higher Headquarters Order

The FSC must fully understand the mission (task and

intent) of the commanders two echelons above his

unit. He must understand the concept of operations

(scheme of maneuver and fire support plan) of his

higher headquarters. Understanding the higher headquarters plan and how his unit “fits” into the higher

headquarters plan is essential to top down planning.

The FSC must identify what his unit’s responsibilities

are to the higher headquarters’ fire support plan as

well as the fire support capabilities he has been allocated. These tasks may be found in the fires paragraph

and the essential fire support tasks (EFSTs) developed

by higher headquarters. See appendix D. 

Appendix 19 and the R&S plan are also sources for

tasks that the FSC and the unit must accomplish. Information from analyzing the higher headquarters order

may include—

l The commander’s intent two echelons up.

l Missions of higher and adjacent units.

l The future mission of the unit.

l If there are any contingency missions for the unit.

l External fire support assets made available.

l FSCMs.

l Fire support coordination procedures. An example

of this requirement may exist in joint/combined

operations for such procedures as cross-boundary

fire support coordination, airspace management for

the deep supporting fires, and targeting.

l Targeting tools (attack guidance matrix, HPT list,

target list, etc.).

l Planned fires.

l Technical advice on fire support.

l Rules of engagement (ROE). ROE must be fully

understood by all personnel and incorporated into

the fire support plan as appropriate.

l Munitions restrictions.

See appendix E for Appendix 19 to Annex C. 

Specified and Implied Tasks

Like other members of the staff, the FSC must identify

specified and implied tasks. Input comes from the

higher headquarter’s order (fires paragraph, Appendix

19, FSEM or R&S plan) and from the unit commander’s guidance. From these identified specified and implied tasks, the FSC will determine the EFSTs that

must be accomplished to achieve the commander’s

guidance. During this portion of the planning process,

the FSC should determine the task and purpose of the

proposed EFSTs. EFSTs are different than the tasks

normally associated with the mission or tasks paragraph. Normal tasks are directed to units to attack, defend or support to achieve a certain purpose. However,

the task in an EFST is enemy oriented and uses a targeting objective to achieve a purpose that is friendly

oriented. EFSTs are designed to ensure synchronization of all assets and that those involved understand

their role in execution of the fire support plan and the

desired effects.

Additional Constraints or Restraints

Additional constraints or restraints may be identified

during mission analysis and should be reflected in the

proposed fire support tasks. Topics are noted and carried forward for use in subsequent planning.

Effects of IPB on Fire Support

Intelligence preparation of the battlespace (IPB) is the

primary analytical methodology used to produce intelligence in support of decisionmaking. It is a systematic, continuous, mission-focused process of analyzing

the threat and the environment in the area where the

operation is to take place. The IPB process is not exclusive to the S/G-2. It should include input from other
3-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

special staff officers such as the engineer and NBCD

officers. Avenues of approach (friendly and enemy),

weather patterns and projections, time/space factors,

and threat situation templates are reviewed and evaluated for their impact on operations. This analysis may

identify additional information requirements. FSCs

must understand and apply the affects that IPB has on

fire support. See MCWP 2-3, Intelligence Analysis

and Production. Information from IPB may include—

l Organization, capabilities, limitations, and methods

of employment of the enemy. Particular emphasis is

on fire support assets, direct fire weapons, aviation/

air defense capabilities, and vehicle mobility.

l Likely enemy courses of action.

l Known, suspected, or likely enemy locations.

l Secure points that offer clear observation of the area

of operation.

l Cover and concealment in the area of operation.

l Where obstacles are in the area of operation

(manmade or natural).

l Location of key terrain.

l The weather forecast and how it will affect—

n NVG or thermal site effectiveness.

n Aircraft flying in a high threat environment.

n Aircraft-identifying targets.

n Lasers.

l Terrain’s affect on mobility (friendly and enemy).

Howitzers may get stuck. Mortars may take longer

to move and emplace.

l Terrain’s affect on communications equipment (life

of batteries).

l The kinds of munitions best-suited for the terrain

and weather (effects on smoke and illumination,

submunitions effectiveness, and precision guided

missiles [PGMs]).

l When the operation begins.

l Time available to plan.

l The expected duration of the operation.

Effects-Focused Fire Support

Effects are the results of actions—both lethal and nonlethal. The commander uses lethal and nonlethal means to

obtain physical as well as psychological effects against

the enemy commander. Approaching commander’s guidance for fire support from an effects-focused standpoint

incorporates targeting into both the MCPP and the fire

support planning process. Fire support representatives

should have a clear understanding of the mission and the

commander’s planning guidance. Prior to the targeting

effort, the FSC must thoroughly understand the commander’s guidance and how it applies to fire support. It is

critical that fires objectives are thoroughly integrated

with the objectives of maneuver. The effects of fires

should be articulated in terms of conditions and measures

of effectiveness to facilitate assessment and should be included in the CCIRs. If the desired effect was not

achieved, the action may need to be repeated or another

method sought. At this stage, intelligence and objectives

for fires should be formulated. This process must not focus on specific percentages normally associated with

damage criteria, but must concentrate on the effects fires

produce and what they can do to the enemy to shape the

battlespace, set conditions for decisive action, and support maneuver forces. For example, not “destroy 40 percent of the enemy artillery,” but “deny the enemy the

ability to mass fires above the battery level for 48 hours

to enable the battalion to conduct a heliborne assault.

Depending on the time available, the commander may

provide general guidance and specific points he wants

the FSC to consider (a particular enemy fire support

capability or task organization,). Once the commander’s guidance is understood, the FSC should analyze

the enemy center(s) of gravity to determine the threat

weaknesses that are critical vulnerabilities. (A critical

vulnerability is something that a force needs to function effectively and is or can be made vulnerable to attack. Critical vulnerabilities provide an aiming point

for applying friendly strengths against threat weaknesses.) The FSC identifies and plans fires against the

enemy’s critical vulnerabilities to hamper his ability to

function, defend, attack, or sustain his forces or to

command his forces. See MCDP 1-0, Marine Corps

Operations, for more information on effects and commander’s guidance.

Status of Supporting Arms

The FSC must translate data on supporting arms into

meaningful capabilities. For example, artillery ammunition counts should be converted to a form that communicates capabilities to the commander; 300 M825

smoke rounds may translate to ten, 600 meter, 20

minute duration smoke screens; DPICM (600 rounds)

can translate into ten, artillery battalion massed fire
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 3-9

missions firing three volleys per mission; 200 rounds

of 155 millimeter illumination can be translated into

approximately 75 minutes of illumination for an area

with a 1 kilometer radius (firing four gun illumination). A similar analysis can be made of any ships

made available by higher headquarters for NGF. CAS

sorties allocated by higher headquarters may be translated, based on type of aircraft, time on station, and

ordnance load, into number of strikes available. This

information will be necessary for the FSC during the

planning process.

Participating in the mission analysis phase allows the

FSC to develop a shared situational awareness with the

rest of the staff that will help integrate the fire support

plan with other functional plans to support particular

COAs. From the analysis of supporting assets, effects of

IPB, specified and implied tasks, and commander’s

guidance, the FSC will have determined proposed

EFSTs. These EFSTs should be briefed to the commander during the mission analysis brief along with the

refined mission statement, commander’s intent, etc. It is

important that the commander and the FSC have a common understanding of “what” fires will do for the unit

before determining the “how.” From mission analysis

the FSC should have approved EFSTs and commander’s guidance for fires. The FSC should issue a warning

order to subordinate FSCs, observers, or supporting

arms representatives. Included would be the mission of

the supported unit, commander’s intent and his guidance for fires, and proposed EFSTs.

 COURSE OF ACTION DEVELOPMENT

The next step is developing COAs that accomplish the

assigned mission. Normally, several COAs are developed for follow-on analysis, but time constraints may

reduce that number. A COA must be suitable, feasible,

acceptable, distinguishable (when multiple COAs are

developed), and complete. The FSC must conceptualize how to integrate fires into each developing COA.

As a minimum, the fire support portion of a COA

should allocate target acquisition assets, attack assets,

planned target areas, and create the sequence that targets will be attacked. Fire support planning is an integral portion of the concept of operations and, like

other functional plans, shapes the battlespace and sets

conditions that facilitate mission accomplishment. It

cannot be a separate plan developed in a vacuum. Depending on time available, the FSC may have to prioritize the one or two key fire support tasks and targeting

objectives in enough detail to facilitate COA wargaming and selection. 

Begin Targeting

The targeting process begins during mission analysis

and provides initial input for fire support and collection planning. Targeting requires an assessment of the

terrain and enemy, without regard to unit boundaries,

and identifies those enemy formations, equipment,

facilities, and terrain that the enemy commander requires to successfully complete his mission; i.e., highvalue targets (HVTs). Attacking these targets would

be expected to seriously degrade important enemy

functions in the friendly commander’s battlespace. After these HVTs are identified, the FSC begins to refine

the list to identify those targets whose loss to the enemy will significantly contribute to the success of the

proposed COA; i.e., HPTs. This refinement continues

during COA wargaming and allows the FSC to develop specific tasks for fire support that affect these targets in the manner required by the COA. Initial plans

may be made for acquiring, tracking, attacking, and

assessing actions taken against HPTs. 

At the highest level of command within the GCE, the

targeting process begins with the IPB and target value

analysis (TVA) for the entire area of operation. The

commander, the G-2/S-2, the G-3/S-3, and the supporting arms representatives focus targeting efforts to

support the scheme of maneuver. This interaction is

the foundation of building collection and fire support

plans. Targets are developed and disseminated to lower echelons with any tasks for the attack of specific

targets (top down).

Lower echelons conduct targeting concurrently with

higher echelons. Lower echelons plan targets to meet

their commander’s requirements. Targets are compared

with those provided by the higher echelon. Requests for

targets to be added to the target list are submitted to the

higher echelon for action (bottom up refinement).

When the tactical situation permits, targets are disseminated as soon as possible. If using overlays, the

receiving unit fastens the overlay to its map and identifies gaps or duplications in coverage without the need
3-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

to plot individual targets (figure 3-3). Automated information systems (IFSAS and AFATDS) can rapidly

share and update target lists. AFATDS can analyze

targets (based on guidance) and determine target duplication without plotting any targets. See appendix F

for AFATDS information. 

The target list is a tool for recording planned targets.

It must be kept current and as short as possible. Targets are deleted when they are destroyed or no longer

of value. New targets are added as required. Targets

essential to one operation, or phase of an operation,

may not be essential to the next. For example, an offensive operation may not require the same targets as

that for the defense. When transitioning from one operation or phase of an operation to the next, previously planned targets that remain valid should be

retained with the same target number. This reduces

the number of changes to the target list and makes

record keeping easier. 

Targets that can be planned and approved without coordination with another unit and those that have been coordinated are submitted directly to the appropriate

supporting arm or FSCC. While a target list may be

maintained at any echelon, the infantry, tank, or LAR

battalion FSCC is usually the lowest echelon maintaining a list since it is responsive to the companies and has

fire support representatives to disseminate changes. The

target list worksheet is a useful tool to identify targets to

be engaged by supporting arms along with scheduling

requirements when digital communications are not

available. Information contained in the target list worksheet can be disseminated via data or voice transmission

from the lowest to highest echelons.

Quantify Desired Effects (Success) 

As the FSC and the staff build the COA and determine

how to accomplish each EFST, they must first try to

quantify desired effects. It is a clear means of telling

subordinate elements what they have to do. Supporting

assets also use this quantification of effects to determine the ammunition or attack parameters to accomplish the EFST. The FSC and staff must focus on what

must be done, not on what can be done. If it is determined that the desired effects cannot be achieved with

the allocated assets, then the method must be reworked

or additional assets requested. However, broad categorizations of the enemy are almost never achievable

when associating a percentage to damage criteria

(30% = destruction, etc.). Effects should be expressed

as a measurable action of combat effectiveness that

enables maneuver to accomplish a mission or task;

e.g., limit the enemy’s ability to mass indirect fires

above the platoon level for 48 hours to enable the battalion to cross the river. 

Table 3-1 on page 3-11 shows the differences between

targeting objectives and effects of fires. Targeting objectives are tied directly to the maneuver commander’s

guidance and what must be done to the enemy to meet

the commander’s desired effects of fires.

Plan the Method for Each Fire Support Task

The FSC determines fire support and acquisition asset

requirements to accomplish the fire support tasks assigned to each supporting arms agency. Requirements

are expressed in amounts and types of fire support and

acquisition assets. Initial requirements are prepared

and then refined during COA analysis and wargaming.

Formats for recording of requirements are contained in

MCWP 3-24, Assault Support, MCWP 5-1, and

MCWP 3-31.1/NWP 3-09.11M, Supporting Arms in

Amphibious Operations. If requirements surface subsequent to allocating attack resources, requests for additional resources are forwarded to the next higher

echelon. Requests for additional resources can take the

form of radars, recon, JSTARs, radio bn, reinforcing

fires, or identifying specific targets to higher headquarters for attack by their resources. 

Figure 3-3. Target Overlay Technique.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-11

Fire support capabilities must be allocated for each

COA. Allocation establishes what capabilities all commanders have to employ. Allocation is essential for

concurrent planning at lower echelons. The MAGTF

apportions air and NSFS capabilities for a specific use;

e.g., a certain percentage of air for CAS or a certain

number of ships for support. These capabilities are

then allocated to subordinate units; e.g., number of

sorties for CAS or assignment of tactical missions to

NSFS ships. Artillery is allocated by assigning tactical

missions. See Appendix O.

Task Target Acquisition Assets

The S-2, S-3, and FSC must work together to build

the R&S plan to identify which asset, based upon the

COA’s scheme of maneuver and priorities, can accomplish the task and a plan getting that asset into a

position to execute the fire. Along with identifying

the tasks fire support assets must achieve, acquisition

assets must be allocated and tasked to observe the attack of the assigned EFSTs and provide feedback for

assessment.

Priority of Fires

Fire support may be further allocated by assigning priority of fires. Priority of fires provides guidance to organize and employ fire support means in accordance

with the relative importance of a unit’s mission and establishes the priority in which calls for fire will be answered. Priority of fires may be given for all fire

support assets or a specific supporting arm. 

Positioning

Allocation of fire support will effect the positioning of

fire support assets (artillery, mortars, and NSFS). For

example, positioning an artillery battalion with a tactical mission of direct support in proximity to the area

of operation of a supported regiment facilitates support to that unit. Positioning also includes the location

of target acquisition assets (weapons locating radars,

observers, etc.) to acquire targets and observe fires.

Positioning requires close coordination with maneuver

units’ S-3s.

Ammunition

Ammunition is a major consideration for allocating

fire support. Ammunition expenditures may be tightly

controlled when ammunition supplies are restricted. If

ammunition restrictions are such that one fire support

means cannot provide adequate support, other fire support sources must be considered. It may be necessary

for the ground commander to consider modifications

to the scheme of maneuver to compensate for the ammunition shortage. Ammunition allocation can be expressed in terms usable to the commander such as a

number of battalion or battery volleys, minutes of illumination for a specific sized area, number of targets,

number of specific-sized mine fields of a specific density, or sorties of CAS available.

To provide close fire support or set the conditions for

maneuver to exploit, timing of fires is crucial. The FSC

must understand the tentative timing flow of the scheme

of maneuver to establish triggers. These triggers should

Table 3-1. Difference between Targeting Objectives and Effects of Fires.

TARGETING OBJECTIVES EFFECTS OF FIRES

DISRUPT: To not let the enemy perform a specific function. HARASSING FIRE: Fire designed to disturb the rest of the enemy troops, 

curtail movement, and, by threat of losses, lower morale.

DELAY: To not let the enemy perform a specific function when he wants to. SUPPRESSING FIRE: To create a temporary or transient degradation by 

an opposing force of the performance of a weapons system below the level 

needed to fulfill its mission objectives. Normally associated with duration.

LIMIT: To reduce options or COAs available to the enemy. NEUTRALIZING FIRE: Fire that is delivered to render a target ineffective 

or unusable. The unit has degraded capability of accomplishing its mission.

DESTROY: To ruin the structure, organic existence or condition of an 

enemy target that is essential to an enemy capability.

DESTRUCTION FIRE: Fire delivered for the sole purpose of destroying 

material objects to render a unit incapable of accomplishing its mission.

DIVERT: To force the enemy to tie up critical forces or resources from one 

area to another.
3-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

be refined during COA analysis, through subordinate

refinement, and rehearsals.

Test Feasibility

As the FSC and staff develop COAs, they must apply

doctrinal or accepted planning factors to ensure the

plan is feasible. Factors can come from the Marine

Corps Combat Readiness Evaluation System (MCCRES), T&R manuals, other “book” answers, or educated guesses based on previous experiences.

Assist S-2 in Collection Plan Refinement

The FSC must coordinate with the S-2 to ensure there

are adequate, redundant collection assets integrated

with the detect phase of the targeting process. Observers, terminal controllers, counter-mortar/battery radars, and sensors should be incorporated in the FS plan

and the collection plan.

During COA development, the FSC has functioned

within the staff process. As a result, the tentative fire

support plans for each COA should be incorporated

and integrated with the schemes of maneuver. Outputs

from this phase should be a tentative plan for each

COA. These fire support plans should include the—

l Concept of fires, describing how fires will support

the scheme of maneuver to accomplish the

commander’s intent. It is a sequencing of EFSTs.

l Draft fire support execution matrix (FSEM).

l Draft target list worksheet and overlay.

l Draft target synchronization matrix.

l Collection/reconnaissance and surveillance plan.

COURSE OF ACTION WAR GAME

This step examines friendly COAs against threat

COAs. It allows the staff to adjust identified problems

or weaknesses in the friendly COAs. Wargaming is a

technique that aids COA analysis. It can be done formally or informally. Formal wargaming is a disciplined, interactive mechanism that examines the

execution of friendly COAs in relation to threat reaction. Informal wargaming may be as simple as a “what

if” conversation between the commander and selected

staff officers. Whether formal or informal, wargaming

relies heavily on tactical judgment and experience. It

allows the staff to gain a common vision of the operations and to test the plan against the array of possible

enemy and friendly actions. Wargaming provides the

FSC with the opportunity to validate or refine the fire

support plan.

Continue Targeting

Refinement of HPTs continues. Wargaming may identify additional HPTs or invalidate previously identified HPTs from COA development. Changes in HPTs

must be coordinated for inclusion in the refined collection plan for acquisition, tracking, and assessment.

Other targeting tools, such as the attack guidance matrix (AGM), may require refinement after wargaming.

War Game Fire Support Tasks

Fire support tasks are wargamed with the scheme of

maneuver for each friendly COA against possible enemy COAs. This provides a means to test the fire support plan’s effectiveness and its integration with the

scheme of maneuver. Wargaming can—

l Validate existing fire support tasks.

l Identify refinements to existing tasks (including

assigning the task to another supporting arms

agency).

l Identify additional fire support tasks.

Refine Fire Support Requirements

Wargaming assists the FSC in validating or refining

the previously identified requirements that accomplish

the fire support tasks. Identifying additional or reassigning specific fire support tasks to other supporting

arms agencies can require the FSC to revise his fire

support requirements for each COA analyzed.

Adjust Fire Support Allocation

Allocating fire support capabilities may require adjustment based on refinements to COAs made during wargaming.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-13

Prepare Estimates of Supportability

For deliberate planning, each supporting arms commander or representative in the FSCC may prepare an

estimate of supportability. The estimate of supportability analyzes the area of operations, enemy capabilities, and each COA proposed to the commander. It

cites advantages and disadvantages of each COA from

the viewpoint of a particular supporting arm. The estimate may be a written document and/or presented as a

formal briefing. In detailed planning, a concept of operations and fire support tasks may be developed for

each COA. If time is short, the estimate may be expedited and explained in as much detail as the tactical

situation requires. This may take the form of the supporting arm commander, or his representative, providing a verbal estimate of that supporting arm’s

capability to support a contemplated COA. A formal

estimate of supportability is normally only done during deliberate planning above the battalion level.

At the conclusion of wargaming, the FSC should have

adjusted the fire support plans of each COA. As outputs to this step, the FSC should have final drafts of

the fires paragraph and information required in appendix 19, such as FSEM, target overlay or TSM. See appendix G for sample estimates of supportability.

COURSE OF ACTION COMPARISON 

AND DECISION

This step evaluates, compares, and decides the COA

that best accomplishes the mission. The FSC must be

prepared to brief his estimate of supportability of each

COA to the commander. The level of detail for his brief

will vary depending on the commander’s evaluation criteria and level of participation in the wargaming. 

Course of Action Evaluation

Each COA is evaluated against the commander’s evaluation criteria. The FSC should normally brief the

method to accomplish each fire support task along

with the advantages and disadvantages of each COA

from the perspective of each supporting arm. The FSC

may decide to have his supporting arms representatives brief the latter information. Advantages and

disadvantages are then discussed and recorded. A

comparison (figure 3-4) can assist the staff in making

recommendations for a particular COA. 

Course of Action Comparison

The staff ranks each COA with respect to advantages

and disadvantages in addition to evaluation criteria

such as mission accomplishment, EFSTs, and warfighting functions. These ranks are totaled and compared. This comparison gives the commander the information he needs to make a sound decision.

However, these rankings may be more subjective

than objective numbers indicate. For example, one

COA may be determined to be the “best” but it may

not be supportable by one of the warfighting functions. The commander must consider this and determine if additional support is required or if the COA

must be adjusted or thrown out. Figure 3-5 on page

3-14 is an example of a comparison matrix.

Commander’s Decision 

The commander compares COAs and selects the COA

that best accomplishes the mission. The commander

may identify portions of the selected COA for further

refinement by the staff. Once the commander selects a

COA, warning orders may be issued to subordinate

commanders and appropriate supporting arms agencies.

CRITERIA COA 1 COA 2 COA 3

Advantages RISK—Lowest risk. COUNTERFIRE—Simplicity. MSN/TASKS—Best means of 

accomplishing EFST.

Disadvantages FIRES—EFSTs difficult to 

accomplish.

C2—Difficult to control due to 

mobile plan.

RISK—Accepts most risk.

Figure 3-4. COA Comparison: Advantages and Disadvantages.
3-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

ORDERS DEVELOPMENT

Orders development articulates the commander’s intent, guidance, and decisions into a clear, useful form

that will be understood by subordinates and supporting

arms agencies that must execute them. Orders may be

written or verbal, depending on time available.

Finalize Targeting Decisions

Final refinements to targeting decisions are made

based on additional guidance or modifications specified by the commander during the COA comparison

and decision brief. Plans must be finalized for acquiring, tracking, attacking, and assessing actions taken

against HPTs. It is crucial that plans for assessing the

effectiveness of attacks provide feedback to the FSC

in a timely manner to determine requirements for reattack. Final targeting products should include, at a

minimum, the HPT list, target selection standards, and

attack guidance matrix.

Finalize Essential Fire Support Tasks

Final refinements to the fire support tasks identified by

the commander during COA comparison should be incorporated into the concept of operations. Schedules

of fire, FSCMs, and an FSEM are adjusted, as required, to reflect any modifications to the tasks.

Finalize Engagement Areas

An engagement area is an area where the commander

intends to trap and destroy an enemy force with

massed fires of all available weapons. The engagement area development process is vital to achieving

the commander’s intent. It compels the FSC to consider such factors as the number of indirect fire assets

available, training proficiency of observer/firing unit,

the enemy’s direction/rate of march, trigger and intercept points, terrain analysis, anticipated enemy actions, and the amount of time the enemy can be

expected to remain inside the area. The process requires forethought, analysis, and mathematical calculation. See table 3-2 on page 3-15.

CRITERIA COA 1 COA 2 COA 3

Intelligence 3 2 1

Force protection 2 1 3

Maneuver 2 1 3

Decisive action 3 2 1

Simplicity 3 2 1

Movement—number and length 2 3 1

Mission/fires—accomplish EFSTs 3 2 1

Counterfire 1 3 2

Command and control 2 3 1

CSS supportability 3 2 1

Other 2 1 3

TOTAL 26 22 18

Figure 3-5. Comparison Matrix.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-15

Finalize Triggers

Triggers are a physical point on the ground or an action or event. During offensive operations a trigger is

often a maneuver action or event. In the defense a trigger is more often a physical spot on the ground. Trigger development sequence determines the—

l Position on the ground that you want to engage the

enemy or to silhouette the enemy with fires.

l Enemy rate of movement. This may be done by

estimation, on the basis of past experience, from

doctrinal literature, or from scout reports of

enemy speed.

l Time of flight of the rounds from the weapon

system firing the mission.

l Processing time; i.e., time required from the call for

fire to rounds being fired from the weapon system.

l Total mission time; i.e., the time of flight plus

processing time.

l Trigger point. Place the trigger point the required

distance from a planned target location based on the

total mission time x speed of enemy = distance.

Observation Plan

The observation plan is an integral portion of the fire

support plan. It should provide the task and purpose

for each phase of the operation. The observation plan

should be synchronized with the scheme of maneuver

during the MCPP. Construct an observation plan in

concert with the S2 and S3. The FSC should plan to

have observers/sensors in position to support the maneuver commander’s intent and each EFST. The observation plan should address where the observer/

sensor needs to be, security, communications, how the

observer/sensor gets into and out of position, what the

observer/sensor is to accomplish, and disengagement

criteria if necessary.

Effect Coordination

Coordination promotes the development, understanding, and subsequent execution of the fire support plan.

Proper coordination is key to responsive coordination

during execution of operations. FSCC representatives

should, at a minimum, conduct the following tasks.

The fire support plan provides the detailed, logical sequence of fire support events executed by each supporting arm to accomplish their tasks. It includes the

individual fire support plans of each supporting arm.

These plans explain how each supporting arm will accomplish its fire support tasks and execute the supported commander’s fire support plan. The supported

unit provides the necessary planning information; e.g.,

timing of fires or special instructions, for supporting

arms to conduct their fire planning. See section IV.

The FSC coordinates preparing the fire support plan

with other supporting plans for the operation; e.g., obstacle/barrier plan, surveillance and reconnaissance

plan, and C2 warfare plan.

The level of detail in the fire support plan varies with

the tactical situation and time available. When time is

abundant, the plan may be recorded in a formal format

such as Appendix 19 to Annex C of the Operations Order. When time is short, certain aspects may occur

without a need for documentation; e.g., orders to reposition fire support units may be issued verbally and accomplished while the plan is finalized. Documentation

Table 3-2. Engagement Area Development Process.

Step 1 Visualize how the enemy will/might attack.

Step 2 Select where and how to engage the enemy.

Step 3 Position forces to engage the enemy with direct fires.

Step 4 Position obstacles to support direct fires.

Step 5 Plan indirect fires to support direct fires and obstacles.

Step 6 Complete the plan, select/prepare final positions, site obstacles, and triggers.

Step 7 Rehearse.
3-16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

in these situations should include information to execute the fire support plan. This information should include, at a minimum, the following:

l Concept of operation.

l Fire plan and tasks for each supporting arm.

l Target priorities and attack guidance.

l Priority of fires.

l Target list update.

l FSCMs.

l Fire support coordination procedures that are not

covered in SOPs.

l Restrictions or changes in restrictions.

l Schedules of fire. 

TRANSITION

The transition provides a successful shift from planning to execution. Successful transition ensures that

those charged with executing the order have a full understanding of the plan. Transitions may include briefs

and rehearsals to increase situational awareness of the

subordinate commanders and the staff, and instill confidence and familiarity with the plan.

Rehearse the Fire Support Plan

The rehearsal is an effective transition drill. A combined

arms rehearsal is key to synchronize all warfighting functions before execution. Key fire support points that

should be highlighted during the rehearsal include synchronization of the fire support plan with the scheme of

maneuver, target execution responsibilities (primary and

alternate observers), artillery and mortar positioning and

movement plans, and verification of target acquisition.

Plan FSCMs, CAS employment, and verification of windows to mass battalion fires.

Adjust the Fire Support Plan

Refinements are adjustments to the fire support plan by

subordinate elements. Refinements are crucial in top

down fire support planning. These refinements would

include changes to the observation plan and target locations based on the subordinate unit’s analysis of the terrain and selected scheme of maneuver. The higher

FSCC receives changes and approves or denies them.

Choices the FSC has for target refinement include—

l Numbering targets every five rather than

sequentially; e.g., AD 1000, 1005, 1010. If this

method is used, the FSC increases the regiment’s

target number by one (AD 1005 to AD 1006),

determines the appropriate target location, and

sends the refinement information to the regiment.

Once the refined targets are plotted and approved,

the regiment FSC then forwards the accepted

refinements to other subordinate elements and fire

support assets. By using this method, all involved

will understand that the target has been refined but

is executed in accordance with the original intent.

l Maintaining the original target number but

adjusting the location. This does not clutter the

target list but FSC’s must ensure that all elements

receive and incorporate the adjusted location.

l Using a battalion target number. Battalions can

quickly target enemy locations but not all elements

will have the refined location.

As the tactical situation dictates, the FSC recommends

changes to the fire support plan to the commander.

The FSC is responsible for effecting the changes the

commander approves. The means for disseminating

changes should be established in advance; e.g., messenger, wire, or radio (data or voice) transmission. If

during fire planning, a supporting arm determines that

certain support cannot be provided, they notify the appropriate FSC who then adjusts the fire support plan.

The FSC may drop targets from the fire support plan

or reassign them to another supporting arm. Figure 3-6

on page 3-17 shows fire planning using the MCPP.

MISCELLANEOUS

Message Routing Protocol 

and Clearance Procedures 

Message routing protocol determines routing of a request for fire; i.e., whether it goes initially to the FSCC

or supporting arm. Both decisions depend on communications net structure, type of transmission (data or

voice), expected volume of traffic, and the training

level of the FSCC. Routing requests for fire can be

centralized and decentralized. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-17
3-18 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

In the centralized option, all requests for fire are sent

to the FSCC for approval and then relayed to the appropriate supporting arm. The advantage of this option

is the ability of the FSCC to modify, coordinate, and

clear every mission. The FSCC may be the only unit in

direct communication with observers when operating

on a dispersed battlefield. The primary disadvantage is

the delay caused when mission coordination/deconfliction occurs prior to forwarding the mission to the

appropriate supporting arm. In amphibious operations,

the higher echelon FSCC may be in the SACC. 

In the decentralized option, requests for fire support

are sent directly to the supporting arm (NSFS ship, artillery/mortar FDC, DASC). The supporting arm processes the mission while the FSCC concurrently

coordinates and clears or denies the request for fire.

Advantages to this option are the speed that concurrent

processing and coordinating provides and the ability

of the observer to communicate directly with the supporting arm for clarification or special missions (FPFs,

Illumination, or Copperhead). Disadvantages to this

option are the possibility of firing an uncoordinated

mission when employing passive clearance and the requirement for the observer to maintain communications with the supporting arm.

Two options for clearing requests for fire are positive

and passive approval. They specify the communication required between the FSCC and the supporting

arm before firing or engaging a target.

Positive clearance requires a transmission from the

FSCC to the supporting arm indicating clearance or

denial. This includes NSFS requests. NSFS spotters

and ships must wait for the FSCC to provide clearance

before giving “Ready. Break. Fire.” Voice transmissions indicating clearance or denial must be sufficiently different to avoid the chance of misunderstanding.

For example, “Artillery on grid 123 456 cleared,” for

approval, and, “denied clearance on grid 123 456,” are

unmistakably different. Data transmissions use a plain

text message stating the target number and cleared/denied. The supporting arms receipt of a call for fire

from the FSCC can indicate mission clearance when

utilizing centralized FSCC message routing.

Passive clearance (silence is consent) does not require a

transmission from the FSCC to the supporting arm to

clear the mission. The supporting arm assumes the mission is cleared unless the FSCC indicates the mission is

denied. This requires the FSC to quickly determine conflicts that may necessitate cancellation of the mission

and perform the required coordination. The FSC should

acknowledge that the message/mission has been monitored to preclude conflicts resulting from loss of communications whether using voice or data transmission.

Passive clearance can only be used in conjunction with

decentralized FSCC message routing. 

Acquire Clearance to Fire on Targets

Obtaining clearance to fire on targets is generally associated with fire support coordination during execution; however, during final planning, preliminary

coordination can be effected. Preliminary coordination

facilitates the execution of fire support plans and attack of targets outside the requesting unit’s area of operation. The unit requesting fire support is responsible

for obtaining approval for the attack from the unit in

whose area of operations the target is located. The unit

granting the approval for the fires notifies the requesting unit of changes which may negate the approval.

Those requests for fire support which require special

coordination through higher or adjacent headquarters,

or where special restrictions apply, are passed to the

next higher echelon FSCC as soon as possible. Clearance of targets within a unit’s zone can also be coordinated to expedite the execution of targets and provide

a scenario where passive clearance may be used.

Establish Fire Support 

Coordinating Measures

Fire support coordinating measures are tools that can

facilitate the rapid attack of targets and provide safeguards to friendly forces. The type and number of fire

support coordinating measures are dependent on the

tactical situation. The early and prudent establishment

of fire support coordinating measures can make planning and execution of fire support more efficient.

Planning the establishment of fire support coordinating measures must be in conjunction with the establishing of maneuver control measures such as

boundaries. FSCs should be careful not to use FSCMs

as maneuver control measures and visa versa (i.e., the

FSCL should not be used as a forward boundary).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-19

Coordinate the Positioning

of Fire Support Assets

The FSC must coordinate the positioning of fire

support assets so they can respond to fire support requirements. Positioning of fire support assets and

movement/displacement plans are coordinated to

speed movement, ensure availability of support, and

maintain tempo. Movement priorities and passage procedures must be coordinated to facilitate artillery units

moving through the supported unit’s area of operations. This may be the most critical function of fire

support planning in terrain where movement is restricted to roads.

Coordinate Fire Support Delivery

Procedures and Observation Coverage

Procedures for delivering fire to any unit in the supported units area of operations which do not have assigned

observers must be coordinated. Plans to provide observation of the area of operations should be coordinated

with the S-2, S-3, and company commanders. Examples

include locating target acquisition assets to observe

planned fires, determining how a reconnaissance team

will fire a planned target, or disseminating PRF codes

for observers and preset munitions. 

Coordinate Fire Support Communications 

The FSC must work closely with the operations and

CIS officers to ensure that communications planned to

coordinate fire support are adequate.

Establish Restrictions

on Fires, As Required

A commander may wish to limit the use of certain

types of ammunition in his area of operation or place

restrictions on the attack of specific targets or target

sets. These restrictions must be clearly articulated to

both his subordinate commanders and the supporting

arms agencies. Examples of these include restrictions

on use of smoke, illumination, improved conventional

munitions (ICM), and family of scatterable mines

(FASCAM) or placing targets on a restricted target list

or a no strike target list.

Coordinate the Delivery

of Specialized Munitions

Certain munitions (improved conventional munitions,

smoke, FASCAM, illumination, etc.) have the capability to produce unintended effects on operations of both

the units employing them and those adjacent to the

employing unit. Employment of these munitions must

be coordinated to ensure effectiveness to the supported

unit without hindering operations of others nearby. For

example, the uncoordinated delivery of illumination

could reveal another units location, restrict the use of

night vision devices, and injure friendly personnel

with empty carrier projectiles.

Effect Other Required Coordination

Additional coordination may be required depending

on the situation, mission, and the type of operation being planned. Examples may include identification of

LF representatives in amphibious operations, fire support for rear area operations, integration with aviation

operations (air defense conditions, airspace control

and coordination procedures, SEAD procedures, etc.),

and integrating command and control warfare (electronic attack, electronic deception, etc.) with the fire

support plan.

Disseminate the Fire Support Plan

The fire support plan is disseminated to those units

that will use or provide fire support. It should be distributed as soon as it is prepared and should not be delayed to await preparing other documents. When the

fire support plan is a complex document, it is often

best to disseminate it in segments (such as tabs and enclosures) as soon as these are complete and approved

by the commander.
3-20 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

SECTION III. THE FIRE SUPPORT PLAN

This tactical plan prepared by the FSC contains the information for employing fire support assets. It identifies specific maneuver units responsible for engaging

targets with identified fire support assets at a specific

time or event. It is the basis of how each supporting

arms agency conducts its own fire planning. The fire

support plan consists of essential information. Some

information must be written and disseminated to subordinate and supporting units for execution. The extent

of documentation depends on the quantity and type of

data to be disseminated, time available, training of

personnel, and the adequacy of SOPs. The FSC uses

the format that best meets his needs.

AS PART OF THE BASIC ORDER

When the fire support plan is included in the basic order, the amount of detail depends on the echelon of

command and the level of detail to be included.

At company and battalion levels, the concept of fires

normally is part of the concept of operations paragraph. This paragraph is written to include both direct

and indirect fire support assets. Depending on the level

of detail necessary, the fires paragraph created during

the planning process may be included as the indirect

fire portion of the fire support paragraph to show the

integration of direct and indirect fires in support of the

concept of maneuver.

Should the operation order not include any annexes,

then the remaining portions of the fire support plan,

such as the FSEM, schedules of fire and observer plan,

would be included as attachments to the order. 

Within the concept of operations the concept of fires

paragraph (3.b. (2)) shows the overarching requirements that fire support will achieve to meet the commander’s intent. The concept of fires is the sequencing

of the task, purpose, and identified asset from each essential fire support task (EFST) (see appendix D) in

sequence with the concept of operations. The remaining detailed information can be found in appendix 19

to Annex C. See the following sample paragraphs.

3b. ( ) Concept of Operations.

(1) ( ) Concept of Maneuver.

(2) ( ) Concept of Fires. 1/1 will initially use artillery and NSFS to disrupt the enemy regiments reconnaissance ability to identify and report our battle

positions and obstacle locations to allow 2/1 to remain

undetected within its battle positions, prepared to maximize fires within engagement area (EA) Mack. R/W

CAS and artillery will be used by 2/1 to delay the advanced guard main body of the enemy regiment west

of phase line Iowa to enable 1/1 to conduct rearward

passage of lines with 2/1. 

AS APPENDIX TO ANNEX C

The operations annex provides substantive guidance for

the planning of the concept of operations. Within the

annex, fire support is included as subparagraph (t) of

paragraph 3, Conduct of Operations. This will normally

refer to Appendix 19, Fire Support, but may be used as

another location for the fire support plan, which includes the concept of operations for fires, should a separate appendix not be required. See MCWP 5-1.

The fire support plan may be written as an appendix

(appendix 19) to the operations annex (annex C) of an

OPORD or OPLAN. The appendix contains information to convey the commander’s plan for fire support.

It restates the current situation and the fires paragraph.

The execution paragraph includes the commander’s

intent and each supporting arm’s tasks. 

The appendix contains tabs that complement the basic

fire support plan; e.g., air fire plan, artillery fire plan or

fire support coordination plan. If individual fire plans

are not tabbed, then separate paragraphs stating fire

plans and each arm’s concept of operations should be

included. Fire support coordination guidance, if not

tabbed, is stated as a separate paragraph. Tabs provide

detailed information or products typically included with

the fire support plan, such as:

l Individual fire plans.

l The fire support coordination plan.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-21

l Targeting.

l The Marine Corps fire support system plan.

l Enclosures.

The fire support appendix provides complete and detailed information on the fire support plan. Administration and logistics states specific command guidance for

ammunition management, but primarily references the

logistics annex (annex D) and combat service support

(annex P). The command and signal paragraph identifies the necessary command relationships and the communications support for the plan. However, adequate

time must be available to prepare a detailed document. 

FRAGMENTARY ORDER

FIRE SUPPORT PLAN

A frag order fire support plan is a fire support plan

prepared using a shortened format. See appendix H for

an example frag order fire support plan with quick fire

support planning. 

Commander’s Guidance

The commander spells out how fire support will support the scheme of maneuver. He establishes what,

where, when, and why fire support must accomplish to

support the overall plan. This may be graphically depicted as a fire support execution matrix (FSEM). The

FSEM is a concise, simple tool that graphically shows

the fire support events associated with particular

events in the scheme of maneuver. It can show when

certain fires occur, who controls them, and priorities

of fire. The FSEM shows activities of all supporting

arms. The commander provides instructions and critical information essential to executing the plan; e.g.,

ammunition allocation, changes to attack guidance,

and new FSCMs.

Those targets closely tied to the scheme of maneuver

and are critical to the success of the operation are disseminated with the frag order fire support plan. See

appendix I for targeting and execution tools.

AS PART OF THE BASIC

FRAGMENTARY ORDER

Another option for disseminating the frag fire support plan is to place it in the basic fragmentary order

(FRAGO). Fire support information normally consists of changes to an existing fire support document

(appendix or frag fire support plan). The fire support

plan may be a new FSEM, commander’s guidance, or

a list of specific fire support tasks, depending on the

tactical situation.

SECTION IV. SUPPORTING ARMS FIRE PLANS

Each supporting arm and its representatives in the

FSCC conduct fire planning. Their fire planning consists of those activities necessary for them to coordinate employment of their weapons to support the

concept of operations. Scheduling fires, determining

provisions for attacking targets of opportunity, positioning of firing units and observers, coordinating

communications and CSS, and computation of firing

data (as applicable) are examples of fire planning information. Fire planning information required by the

supported unit to employ a specific supporting arm is

contained in applicable tabs to the fire support plan.

Detailed procedures, instructions, and information for

use by the supporting arm is recorded in applicable annexes to the operation order.

The desired effect is a major consideration in fire planning. It influences selecting the weapon, type and

amount of munitions, and the required time of delivery. Availability and characteristics of the weapons

and munitions, troop dispositions (unit locations and

proximity to targets), and the scheme of maneuver are

also considered. The goal is to use the best available

weapon munition combination to achieve the desired

effect on approved targets.
3-22 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

AIR FIRE PLAN

Aviation assets are made available through an apportionment process. Apportionment (air) is the determination and assignment of the total expected air effort

by percentage and/or by priority that should be devoted to the various air operations and/or geographic areas for a given period of time (JP 1-02).

The MAGTF commander works closely with and may

receive taskings from higher commanders in the apportionment process. The MAGTF commander, based

on recommendations by the ACE commander, determines the allocation of aviation effort within the

MAGTF. The ACE commander also makes recommendations to the MAGTF commander for distributing its allocated CAS sorties. Air control measures are

established to allow aircraft maneuverability while

minimizing interference with indirect fires. AirOs in

the GCE identify/anticipate aviation requirements and

pass tactical air requests up the chain of command. Requests are reviewed for approval or disapproval, prioritized, modified as required, coordination initiated,

and (if approved) forwarded to the next higher echelon. Once all requirements have been identified, prioritized, and approved, they are passed to the TACC,

where the MAGTF direct support portion of the ATO

is prepared. 

The AirO prepares the air fire plan to provide air support information to the supported unit. It is made in coordination with the supporting ACE and development

of the air operations annex, which addresses aviation

specific procedures and information. The air fire plan

provides information on immediate and preplanned

CAS (scheduled or on-call). With preplanned CAS,

Marines from the GCE may track their JTAR request

numbers on the ATO in any of the following ways:

l Review the given air day air support list (ASL) in

AFATDS. Confirm mission status for each request

submitted, and open the request to review mission

data. If further information is needed, review the

ATO in AFATDS.

l Submit a request to the DASC to review a given

request status through the ATO/ACO tool (AAT

Browser) in TBMCS using the “Re” field as the

basis of query.

l Use the “find” feature of the Execution

Management Control (EMC) of TBMCS to search

for mission line comments containing GCE request

numbers. Before operations start, MAGTFs should

develop a numbering system for preplanned

requests. Specific blocks of numbers are assigned to

subordinate units. Predetermined numbers allow

requesting units to follow their requests from

initiation to execution. The request number stays

with the request as it is processed through the

FSCCs to the Marine TACC. The published ATO

includes the request number. Examples of other

information in the air fire plan include—

n Aircraft alert status.

n Coordination measures and procedures incident

to air safety.

n An air target list annotated with necessary attack

instructions.

n Applicable air delivery procedures; e.g., target

marking or SEAD.

n Laser PRF codes.

n Air request procedures.

n Graphic illustration of all preplanned air strikes. 

When possible, reference is made to other publications

and parts of the OPORD; e.g., SOPs or the air operations annex. For more discussion on air fire planning,

see MCWP 3-23, Offensive Air Support. 

Planning not only directs and coordinates actions, but

generates shared situational awareness. The more liaison between the supported unit and the ACE, the quicker the plan can be developed and effectively executed.

ARTILLERY FIRE PLAN

The fire plan of the artillery battalion in direct support of an infantry regiment or separate battalion is

done by the artillery battalion S-3. He plans the fires

of any reinforcing artillery. The S-3 receives target

information, fire support requirements, and guidance/input from artillery LNOs, the artillery regimental S-3, and the artillery regimental S-2. Fire

support tasks assigned to the artillery are the basis

for his fire plan. The artillery battalion S-3 prepares

the artillery battalion’s fire plan and forwards applicable portions of it (schedules of fires, firing positions, movement plans, etc.) as early as possible to
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-23

the supported unit for approval. A copy is also sent

to the artillery regiment along with requests for additional fires. The completed fire plan is distributed to

the firing batteries and reinforcing artillery.

Artillery LNOs also receive the plan and ensure that

all FOs are notified and, if necessary, can observe fires

planned in their sectors. The artillery unit continues its

planning to ensure that the required support can be

rendered (positioning of firing elements, ammunition

availability, firing restrictions, etc.). 

The artillery regiment S-3, in coordination with the

AFSC and G-3, prepares the artillery fire plan for the

division’s fire support plan. The artillery fire plan incorporates the requirements of subordinate artillery

units and fire support requirements of the division.

The plans of the battalions assigned the direct support

mission are reviewed, duplications eliminated and

necessary additions/changes made, and integrated into

the division artillery fire plan. The fires of artillery

battalions in general support reinforcing (GS/GS-R)

are planned by the artillery regiment. These fires are

employed on targets requested by the artillery battalions in DS, targets identified by the artillery regiment,

and targets designated by the division commander.

The artillery regiment may also plan counterfire.

Based on the complexity of the counterfire plan, a separate tab may be required. The counterfire plan addresses how counterfire will be prosecuted and assigns

unit counterfire responsibilities. 

The artillery fire plan is normally done in FDCs. However, some planning tasks may occur in the supported

unit’s FSCC (division or regiment) when multiple supporting arms are being integrated into the fire support

plan (counterfire procedures, scheduling of fires, etc.).

Remaining artillery fire planning tasks are then performed at the appropriate FDC (fire direction, resupply, and positioning to meet the fire support

requirements, etc.).

81MM MORTAR FIRE PLAN

Fire planning for the infantry battalion mortar platoon

is normally done by the platoon commander or platoon

sergeant. They receive target information, fire support

requirements, and guidance/input from the FSC. Fire

support tasks assigned to mortars are the basis for the

mortar fire plan.

Fire planning for the company mortar section is normally done by the company commander or his designated representative. As with the 81mm mortars, fire

support tasks assigned to company mortars are the basis for the company mortar fire plan.

NAVAL SURFACE FIRE SUPPORT PLAN

The MAGTF’s NSFS requirements are submitted to the

appropriate naval component commander. He examines

overall Navy and MAGTF requirements and subsequently allocates NSFS assets to support the MAGTF.

In amphibious operations, an NSFS plan is prepared by

the MAGTF NGLO who coordinates closely with the

AF FFC/FSC in planning NSFS. The MAGTF NGLO

provides information on the MAGTF concept of operations; e.g., scheme of maneuver, that allows the AF to

plan NSFS employment to meet MAGTF requirements;

e.g., positioning of fire support areas and stations. The

use of NSFS depends to a large degree on hydrography,

number, and type of ships available, and on the commander’s priorities and guidance.

The MAGTF NSFS plan contains pertinent information and instructions taken from the AF NSFS plan.

Subordinate echelons may simply refer to higher echelon plans and not issue a separate plan. NSFS plans

normally include specific instructions on the tactical

use of NSFS. The NSFS plan contains an NSFS operations overlay, a schedule of fires, and instructions

on communications and reports. Upon deployment,

much of the planning between the supported unit and

the supporting ship may occur via radio or teletype.

See MCWP 3-31.1/NWP 3-09.11M, Supporting

Arms in Amphibious Operations, for more information on NSFS fire planning.

COUNTERFIRE PLAN

Enemy fire support systems can potentially inflict serious damage on friendly maneuver forces, fire support
3-24 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

systems, and supporting infrastructure. Therefore, the

enemy’s fire support system, which includes the cannons, rockets, mortars, target acquisition, C2, and logistics elements, must be eliminated as a viable threat.

Proactive counterfire is a vital consideration for both

maneuver and fire support planning. Proactive counterfire should be integrated into the MAGTF and GCE

commanders’ battle plans and not fought as a separate

battle. The fire support coordinator is responsible for establishing a proactive counterfire plan based on the

commander’s priorities and guidance. Location of target

sets, capabilities of sensor platforms, and ranges of

available weapon systems dictate counterfire responsibilities. Usually, the MAGTF is responsible for proactive, deep counterfire, establishing overall priorities,

and allocating resources. The presence of a force artillery, when augmented with USA Q-37 radar and rockets, provides a deep, reactive counterfire capability as

well. The artillery regiment, in support of the division,

provides organic radar assets to the GCE for reactive

counterfire, and can serve as a counterfire headquarters.

Counterfire is either proactive or reactive. Mid- to

high-intensity conflicts demand an aggressive, proactive counterfire effort to limit or damage hostile fire

support systems. This requires allocating proportionate target acquisition and delivery assets at the MEF

and division level. In reactive counterfire, designated

fire support assets respond to enemy mortar and artillery fires during or immediately following enemy engagement of friendly forces.

In the offense, friendly counterfire should initially focus on enemy long-range weapon systems used to conduct hostile counterfire missions. It is a critical

element for friendly forces to generate the necessary

momentum and to counteract enemy artillery.

In the defense, counterfire should focus on artillery

formations supporting ground attacks and on the enemy’s counterfire systems. Attack systems must be positioned to meet the enemy’s main effort with

counterfire target acquisition elements focused on the

most likely avenues of approach where the enemy is

expected to concentrate his indirect fire weapons.

Available assets should be emplaced for maximum lateral and in-depth coverage.

Two primary concerns of the FSC when creating a

counterfire plan are radar zone management and establishing quick fire channels.

In radar zone management, the maneuver commander’s guidance should include top-down planning and

bottom-up refinement guidelines, priorities within the

unit’s sector for radar zones and most importantly, assigned responsibility to facilitate the plan’s execution.

Timely information quickly shared with the artillery

battalion S2 will ensure accurate critical friendly

zones (CFZs) are emplaced to provide responsive

counterfire and force protection when the maneuver

elements are most vulnerable to enemy indirect fires.

To clarify radar zone management and incorporate the

maneuver commander’s guidance, a proper planning

sequence must be followed. Radar zone planning must

be structured around a simple sequential process. See

appendix J for radar zone management.

In quick fire channels, the headquarters responsible for

counterfire planning can establish a direct link to the

supporting arm to attack the target (quick fire channel).

This is particularly effective for reactive counterfire.

SUPPORTING ARMS

IN AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS

Amphibious operations are the most complex of all

military operations. They are often conducted by forces who have been brought together shortly before the

operation begins. Success of the operation requires a

common understanding of standard fire support coordination procedures between all joint forces. MCWP

3-31.1/NWP 3-09.11, Supporting Arms in Amphibious

Operations contains detailed information on supporting arms TTPs for amphibious operations.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-25

SECTION V. QUICK FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING

Quick fire support planning responds to immediate

problems using fire support assets available. Authority

has already been given for a supported unit to plan

fires of one or more supporting arms. Normally, time

does not permit detailed evaluation of targets and fire

planning by fire support agencies. The FSC, assisted

by supporting arms representatives in the FSCC, identifies targets to be engaged, allocates available fire

support assets to engage the targets, schedules associated fires, and determines other pertinent information.

He then disseminates the plan to all appropriate supporting arms agencies for execution. General preparation steps follow.

RECEIVE THE OPERATION ORDER

AND COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE

Determine the—

l Concept of operation.

l Targets to be engaged.

l Desired effects on targets.

l Order and timing of target engagement.

l Duration of fires.

l H-hour.

l Priority of fires.

l Estimated rate of movement.

l Time check with commander and supporting arms

elements.

DETERMINE AVAILABLE ASSETS

AND ISSUE WARNING ORDERS

Determine the—

l Firing units from the artillery battalion in DS that

will be designated to execute the plan.

l Availability of the mortar platoon.

l Availability of NSFS.

l Availability of OAS (i.e., the number of sorties,

aircraft type and ordnance, time on station, and

method of control).

SCHEDULE TARGETS

Schedule targets in accordance with the scheme of maneuver, commander’s guidance, and allocated assets.

The quick fire support plan may be disseminated using

voice or data transmissions. Figure 3-7 on page 3-26 is

used for either method. The schedule includes designation of asset to be used; shell/fuze combination or

ordnance mix; duration of fire for each target; and

time to fire.

DISSEMINATE

Disseminate the plan to the fire support agencies,

higher headquarters FSCC, and subordinates, as

required. The plan may also be transmitted by radio or wire.
3-26 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Figure 3-7. Quick Fire Support Plan Form.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-27

SECTION VI. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

The FSC should focus on tasks, command and control

(C2), and planning.

TASKS

The following examples of fire support tasks may be

required during offensive operations based on the tactical situation and the mission.

Provide Fire Support 

in the Preparation Phase

Attack targets as part of a deception effort. Use smoke

to screen the movement of friendly forces preparing

for the attack. Disrupt enemy defenses before the attack by engaging enemy indirect fire weapons and

OPs, reserves or second echelon forces, C2 centers, logistic and assembly areas, and front-line defenses.

Support the Movement to Contact 

and Potential Meeting Engagements

Provide immediately responsive fires to leading elements. Attack deep targets with massed indirect fires

and air support. Implement an aggressive counterfire

plan to prevent enemy indirect fires from unnecessarily delaying the advance. (This requires rapid artillery radar cueing.) Make maximum use of

preliminary coordination.

Provide Support During the Attack

Use all available fire support means to destroy, neutralize or suppress targets that could impede or react to

the attack.

Plan Fires During Consolidation

Protect friendly units during reorganization. Break up

enemy counterattack. Prevent enemy reinforcement,

disengagement or resupply.

Provide Support for Exploitation 

Provide mobile, flexible fire support for maneuvering

units. Place fires on bypassed enemy pockets of resistance to fix them for attack by a more suitable means

of fire or by follow-up forces. Provide fires to slow enemy retreat.

COMMAND AND CONTROL

In the offense, the attacker has the initiative and can

concentrate maneuver forces and firepower at the time

and place of his choosing. A balance between centralized and decentralized control of fire support assets

should be maintained to allow responsive fires, massing

of fires, and shifting of fires as the main effort shifts.

PLANNING

Make plans as detailed as time allows before the attack. Make maximum use of the FSEM and the attack

guidance matrix. SOPs should be well understood.

Make fire support planning and coordination flexible

for execution at lower echelons. Allocating fire support to subordinates and simple coordination procedures will facilitate this.

Make speed in execution easier by planning priority

targets, on-call targets, and schedules of fires; e.g.,

groups or series.

Anticipate CAS requirements. Coordinating the assignment of alert status; i.e., ground or airborne can increase responsiveness. Attack helicopters may be

positioned forward in designated holding areas. Plan

for airspace coordination.

Plan only essential targets. Cancel targets no longer

needed and update targets; e.g., descriptions and locations, as the supported unit moves forward.
3-28 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Use permissive FSCMs well-forward to accommodate

speed of advance and preclude endangering friendly

forces. Use on call FSCMs and to the maximum extent

possible, key their activation to existing maneuver

control measures; e.g., phase lines.

Provide continuous adequate fire support coverage

within the zone of action.

Position indirect fire weapons well-forward.

Consider the assignment of route precedence to indirect fire units.

Consider replenishment of units.

Plan for continuous communications. Make use of radio relays, brevity codes, and signals. Use wire and

messengers during preparation and shift to radio when

the attack has begun. 

Maintain close and continuous coordination with the

FSC of the designated reserve unit to facilitate fire

support if the reserve is committed. 

Plan observation, including target acquisition, adjustment of fires, surveillance of prearranged fires, and

battlefield surveillance. Observers must be positioned

where they can see the battlefield. Remember reconnaissance teams, aircrews, and artillery weapons locating radars.

The rest of this section identifies other considerations

appropriate to specific offensive operations. They

should be used as a guide. They are not all-inclusive

nor do they always apply.

MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

Assign priority of fires to the main effort.

Plan fires on critical points along the route of march. 

Plan priority targets.

Plan fires to support the momentum of the supported

unit; e.g., screens, suppressive fires on bypassed enemy defenses or obstacle clearing.

Consider laser designators positioning. Some may be

positioned with the lead units. (See appendix K for

employing lasers.)

Ensure communications for calling for fire.

Ensure FSCs in trailing and adjacent units coordinate

and pass information continually.

Consider positioning FOs, FACs or spot teams in

overwatch positions.

Plan for hasty attack contingencies.

Plan for SEAD and counterfire.

HASTY ATTACK

Give priority of fires to the main effort. 

Plan fires on known and/or suspected enemy direct

fire positions.

Plan electronic attack of critical targets when assets

are available.

Plan priority targets.

Plan fires on likely assembly areas.

Plan fires on the objective, on gaps, and beyond the

objective to exploit success.

Use smoke to obscure line of sight of enemy observers

and to screen friendly movement.

DELIBERATE ATTACK

Plan fires to—

l Support the maneuver’s attack on the objective.

l Prevent the enemy’s withdrawal from the objective.

l Create a gap in the enemy’s defenses or to cause

him to react where he becomes vulnerable; e.g.,

fires to disrupt his direct fire weapons to facilitate

maneuver of the supported unit.

l Attack enemy indirect fire assets to keep them from

firing on friendly forces as they advance. 

Consider using preparation fires on the objective coordinated with maneuver. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-29

Attack targets beyond the objective to prevent reinforcements and resupply.

Plan smoke on flanks and crossings of exposed areas. 

Plan fires on flanks of supported unit’s advance to prevent counterattack or reinforcement; e.g., FASCAM.

Plan electronic attack on critical targets when assets

are available. 

Ensure fire support is positioned and supplied to provide continuous support during the attack.

RAIDS

Prepare detailed fire support plans to cover all phases

of the operation and foreseeable emergency contingencies; e.g., aborting mission before reaching objective. 

Fires may be directed against the objective immediately before the attack. 

Plan fires to prevent reinforcements, screen the raid

force, and support a withdrawal.

EXPLOITATION AND PURSUIT

Use supporting fires to maintain momentum.

Plan fires to suppress bypassed pockets of resistance.

Consider FASCAM on bypassed units to immobilize

them but use caution for the safety of follow on forces. 

Consider the use of CAS and attack helicopters to attack fleeting targets. 

Restrictive fire lines (RFL) may be required between

exploiting and converging forces. 

Plan to shift FSCMs in advance of the supported unit. 

SECTION VII. DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

In the defense, the battlefield is organized into the security area, the main battle area (MBA), and the rear area.

See MCWP 3-1, Ground Combat Operations and

MCWP 3-15.1, Antiarmor Operations, for a detailed discussion on the conduct of the defense.

SECURITY AREA

Tasks

Engage the enemy with fires beyond the security area

to create confusion and cause him to deploy early.

Provide adequate and continuous close support for

committed units of the security force.

Maintain close liaison and communications with the

MBA for withdrawal of the security force.

Command and Control

Assign on-order tactical missions to artillery units in

the covering force to facilitate egress to the MBA.

Organize the covering force, including its own artillery, to operate independently.

Centralize control of fire support during battle handover.

Support the covering force in the division fire support

plan. Regiment and battalion FSCs perform most fire

support coordination in the covering force.

Clearly delineate the procedure for transfer of C2 for

fire support responsibilities between security forces

and forces in the MBA.

Planning

Centralize planning and coordination as much as possible to facilitate withdrawals, battle handoff, etc.
3-30 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Plan fires to neutralize enemy reconnaissance elements and to slow, stop or canalize enemy movement.

Plan and coordinate routes, positions, communications, and control of fires with the MBA for the supported maneuver units.

Plan, coordinate, and disseminate permissive FSCMs

to facilitate rapid engagement of enemy forces.

Plan FASCAM (air or artillery) to canalize and slow

enemy forces.

Plan fires to cover obstacles.

Plan CAS on known concentrated enemy positions,

but retain on-call CAS for immediate reaction when

the enemy’s main attack is discovered.

Plan screening or obscuring smoke in front of friendly

positions to reduce enemy observation and to facilitate

withdrawal to subsequent battle positions.

Establish communications procedures and radio nets

for calls for fire and coordination/clearance during the

rearward passage of lines.

Plan fires on enemy C2 elements and key enemy vehicles to cause confusion, force early deployment, break

up formations, separate tanks from infantry, and force

tanks to button up.

Plan fires to cover disengagement and repositioning of

supported maneuver elements.

Plan fires to complement direct fire weapons.

Position lasers forward to overwatch the likely avenues of approach.

Plan target acquisition to detect targets for deep attack;

e.g., reconnaissance, UAVs, and sensors.

Coordinate any electronic attacks to protect friendly

communications required during withdrawal to subsequent battle positions.

MAIN BATTLE AREA

Tasks

Mass fires to canalize and slow enemy forces. Plan

fires/FASCAM on obstacles to disrupt enemy breaching efforts and to fix enemy units. Use fire support to

isolate enemy forward echelons. Use smoke and other

fires to assist supported units in disengaging and moving. Plan fires to separate infantry from armor.

Command and Control

Make contingency plans and implement based on the

enemy main effort.

Maximize use of wire communications including laying wire in advance to planned alternate positions.

Centralize control of fire support.

Planning

Plan massed fires on enemy avenues of approach. Plan

engagement areas within the battle area using all fire

support means available.

Plan fires on potential enemy overwatch positions and

observation posts.

At battalion level, coordinate supporting arms fires

with direct fire weapons, including antitank guided

missiles (ATGM). Integrate fires with obstacles to

slow and canalize the enemy for better shots from direct fire weapons or other supporting arms.

Establish final protective fires (FPFs) and allocate them

to units with the main defensive effort. Artillery and

mortar FPFs should be planned and closely tied to direct

fire final protective lines (FPLs). Ensure that everyone

understands who is to order firing the FPF, under what

conditions, and when; i.e., the signal or code word.

Plan on-call CAS for lucrative targets such as armored formations.

Develop a fire support plan for the counterattack.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-31

Reinforce obstacles with fire. Consider FASCAM to

augment the existing obstacles and/or re-seed breached minefields.

Use smoke screens behind forward enemy elements to

isolate them and break up their formations. Smoke can

be fired behind the enemy during daylight to silhouette.

Plan CAS employment; e.g., responsive airspace coordination or alert status. Air support is planned on deep

targets and those targets that can be attacked as the situation develops using on-call missions and search and

attack methods.

Plan fires to support disengagement and repositioning

maneuver forces.

Plan for counterfire. Consider a counterpreparation to

disrupt enemy preparation fires. Use all available assets.

Air support can be employed on-call and in search and

attack missions against deep counterfire targets.

Plan fires to bring the enemy under fire early or to

withhold fires until the enemy reaches designated positions or trigger points to effect surprise. Figure 3-8

shows a trigger point.

The FSC must work closely with the G-2/S-2 to synchronize fires with the enemy’s movement. The time

distance table in appendix L may make this easier.

See appendix L for more information on targeting,

symbology, and scheduling. 

REAR AREA

Fire support planning and coordination in the rear

area is complex. The rear area may contain a large

number of combat support and combat service support (CSS) units. This density and the challenge of

timely exchange of information between fire support

agencies and the CSS unit’s parallel chain of command can increase the chance of fratricide. Commanders may choose to require positive clearance

for missions requested in the rear area. See MCWP

3-4.2, Rear Area Operations.

Establish liaison with the force controlling the rear area.

Allocate or designate fire support to support a rear area contingency plan.

Identify fire support request procedures, means of observation, and communications links for fire support

for a rear area contingency.

Determine the ammunition requirements for any rear

area contingency.

Designate fire support elements by on-order missions.

Make liaison early between the GCE unit with the onorder rear area mission and the rear area operations

center (RAOC).

Rear area units fire support plans must be incorporated

into the MAGTF’s fire support plan.

Figure 3-8. Trigger Point.
3-32 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

SECTION VIII. RETROGRADE OPERATIONS

The three types of retrograde operations are delay,

withdrawal, and retirement. Since retirement is conducted by forces not in contact with the enemy, there

are few fire support tasks other than positioning fire

support in the retirement column so they can readily

respond if needed.

DELAY OPERATIONS

Tasks

Attack the enemy forces far forward. Assist combat

units with disengagement fires. Cover obstacles, gaps,

and flanks with fire. Provide maximum continuous fire

for forces as they displace to the rear. Mass fires to

slow the enemy as he deploys to concentrate for attack

of blocking positions. 

Command and Control

Greater decentralization is required than in position

defense. Allocate assets to lowest possible levels.

Planning

Initially, position fire support to exploit range. Later,

echelon in depth for maximum continuous fire. Ensure

indirect fire assets have priority on routes.

Plan fires on natural obstacles and create obstacles

with fires, e.g., FASCAM. 

Maximize use of special munitions.

Integrate with scheduled fires to support disengagement actions.

Ensure that observers are positioned in overwatch positions.

Plan SEAD and counterfire.

Plan suppression of enemy overwatch positions.

Plan to support a counterattack.

WITHDRAWALS

There are two types of withdrawal operations that are

distinguished by the enemy’s reaction to the withdrawal: withdrawal under enemy pressure and withdrawal

not under enemy pressure. Planning considerations for

both are the same as a prudent commander always plans

to execute a withdrawal under enemy pressure. To disengage a force from enemy contact, procedures for relieving fire support units must be clearly established and

coordinated. Concurrent planning is performed by each

unit involved. The biggest challenges are coordination

and communications.

Tasks

Tasks are the same as delays but with greater emphasis

on close fires to support disengaging forces. Provide the

security force and detachment left in contact (if employed) adequate supporting arms for continual fires.

Command and Control

Maximum decentralization is required. Responsibility

for fire support is passed from the force in contact to the

security force. There must be a plan of events mutually

agreed upon. The responsibility may be passed before,

during or after the movement. Artillery units will often

change missions from GS to DS and vice versa.

Planning

Plan fires on withdrawal routes.

Conduct detailed planning for scatterable mines to

slow pursuit.

Mass fires to help disengagement and discourage enemy pursuit.

Plan fires on obstacles and barriers. Create obstacles

with FASCAM and by cratering roads.

Displace artillery as late as possible without being

overrun. Coordinate the timing and routes of withdrawal of the outgoing artillery with the responsible
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-33

maneuver command. Keep the artillery unit in position until forward ground defense units have been

relieved. The DS artillery units must coordinate

with the supported unit and any relieving or reinforcing artillery on how continuous artillery support

will be provided.

Use CAS to interdict enemy reinforcement routes.

During rearward passage of lines, provide targets, fire

plans, and order of battle information to the force being passed through. Arrange for an exchange of outgoing and incoming FSCC liaison personnel. 

Plan smoke to screen movement, actual unit locations,

and passage points.

Plan electronic attack on critical nodes if the necessary

assets are available.

Concentrate combat power in the areas of the passage

of lines.

Plan for secrecy. In a withdrawal not under pressure,

stealth and security are sought. Fire support is on-call

and used only when the operation is compromised.

Position aircrew or spot teams in overwatch positions.

SECTION IX. OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS

Other tactical operations are routinely conducted during offensive, defensive, and retrograde operations.

Each usually requires fire support and may involve

special considerations for the FSC.

ENCIRCLED FORCES

An encircled force is a force that has lost its freedom

of maneuver as a result of enemy control of all ground

routes of evacuation and reinforcement. Two operational options are possible: defense by an encircled

force and breakout from encirclement. Counterfire is

paramount because encircled forces are particularly

vulnerable to enemy massed indirect fire (the enemy

knows their exact location).

Tasks

Reorganize available fire support. Determine with the

force commander the most critical areas in the defense, future breakout plans of the force, and the

amount of outside help available. Prepare for the breakout. Obtaining all available outside support, particularly air.

Command and Control

Centralized control of fire support assets is required.

Planning

Plan fires for the defense and the subsequent breakout.

Effect coordination with outside fire support elements.

Use fire support for deception, if necessary.

Establish FSCMs. RFLs between converging friendly

forces may be needed.

Coordinate counterbattery radar search sectors.

Position encircled indirect fire weapons where they

can best support the breakout operation.

Use CAS and precision guided munitions extensively

during the breakout.

LINKUPS

Linkups are the joining of two friendly forces. The two

may be moving toward each other or one may be stationary. The controlling higher headquarters of both

forces establishes the command relationship between

the two forces and the responsibilities of each. The

FSCM most commonly used to support a linkup is an

RFL. Forces that link up exchange as much information as practical before the operation. Consider fire

support needed before, during, and after linkup; recognition signals and communications needs for both

forces; and future operations following the linkup.
3-34 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Tasks

Ensure fire support personnel know the FSCMs and

recognition signals. They must be continuously aware

of the progress of linkup forces.

Command and Control

Centralized control of fire support is desired. Communications nets must be adequate for the control of fire

support at all levels.

Planning

Most planned fires are short of the RFL. Targets beyond the RFL must be cleared for attack by the controlling higher headquarters.

Smoke and illumination fires must not cause adverse

effects on the other friendly forces.

Plan fires to ensure that the enemy force between two

friendly forces cannot escape. Use of scatterable mines

should be considered to block enemy withdrawal.

Position indirect fire weapons to allow them to mass

fires at linkup points.

Firing positions should afford easy access to routes to

be used after the linkup.

Permissive FSCMs should allow the moving force

maximum freedom of movement.

RELIEF IN PLACE AND

PASSAGE OF LINES

Procedures and timing for shifting responsibility for

fire support coordination from the stationary force or

force being relieved to the passing force or relief force

must be clearly established and coordinated. Concurrent planning is performed by each unit involved. The

biggest challenges, as with linkups, are coordination

and communications.

Tasks

Ensure all fire support personnel know the FSCMs and

recognition signals for the linkup. They must be continuously aware of the progress of linkup forces.

Command and Control

Maximum centralization is required. Responsibility is

passed from the FSC of the force in contact to the relieving/passing unit. There must be a plan of events that

has been mutually agreed upon. The responsibility may

be passed before, during or after the movement occurs.

Planning

Use smoke to screen movement and passage points as

required. Use electronic attack on critical enemy nodes

if assets are available. Concentrate combat power in

areas of passage of lines.

RIVER CROSSINGS

Offensive river crossings may be hasty, deliberate or

crossings of opportunity. Hasty and deliberate crossings are extremely complex operations. Maintaining

momentum is paramount. If our forces are delayed at

the crossing site, they are extremely vulnerable. The

role of fire support is to assist in protecting the crossing force and sustaining momentum. In a hasty crossing, fire support must be provided from means

immediately available. In a deliberate crossing, additional fire support means should be considered; e.g.,

repositioning GS artillery. 

Tasks

Make fire support immediately available to the crossing forces.

If necessary, task GS units to provide fire support

while DS artillery moves with the supported unit.

Plan smoke and suppressive fires on likely enemy OPs

and direct fire positions within range and line of sight

of the crossing site or area. 

Request electronic attack of enemy listening posts and

indirect fire direction nets within range of the crossing

site or area when assets are available.

Command and Control

Centralized control is desired. Provide continuous fire

support when DS units cross the river.

Planning 

Plan fire support based on the type of crossing.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-35

Consider the visibility conditions and the width of the

crossing areas.

Plan fires to reduce enemy defenses at crossing sites

and to seal off far bank positions.

Use aircrews as overwatch for approaching forces.

Position indirect fire weapons close to the river obstacle in the offense to extend their fires on the far side.

Echelon occupation of far bank positions when these

positions are out of range of enemy small arms fires.

Plan smoke to obscure actual and decoy crossing sites

and to screen friendly movements.

Integrate electronic attack to support the operations

when assets are available.

Use CAS to assist in establishing a bridgehead on the

far side of the river.

Plan FASCAM that will isolate and then deny enemy’s reinforcement.

HELICOPTERBORNE OPERATIONS

Fires must be planned for the helicopter approach and

retirement lane and to protect helicopters during landing and takeoff and while in the landing zone (LZ).

These fires must be coordinated closely with the infantry S-2, S-3, and AirO. Enemy antiaircraft and indirect

fire weapons are the priority targets. Consider LZ

preparation fires, screening fires to provide protection

to troops arriving/departing the LZ/pickup zone (PZ),

and deception fires. Maximum use of EW and SEAD

should be planned to safeguard friendly aircraft.

NIGHT OPERATIONS

Night operations are used to achieve surprise, continue

day operations, and exploit technological superiority;

e.g., night vision devices; compensate for enemy capabilities; e.g., CAS or counter enemy night attacks. Intentional use of illumination in offensive or defensive

operations is employed when the possibility of achieving surprise is remote, the enemy has night vision capability, and where control of units requires the use of

daylight control measures. Initial plans not to employ

illumination during offensive or defensive operations

are made using stealth to achieve surprise in closing

with the enemy before he discovers the attack. Even if

initial plans call for the operation to be nonilluminated, illumination may be planned and executed on-call.

Tasks

Developing the illumination plan is the primary additional task. Illumination may enhance target acquisition for night observation devices, CAS, or the naked

eye. It is also employed to degrade enemy night vision capabilities. Because illumination can affect the

entire battlefield, the authority for approving illumination plans should be retained at the battalion level

or higher. This prevents accidental illumination of

night activities.

Command and Control

Night operations require greater centralized control

than day operations. Control lessens the risk of fratricide and prevents compromising friendly actions or

positions by premature fires.

Planning

Coordinate illumination fires with adjacent units and

formations. 

Employ smoke to degrade enemy night vision devices.

Smoke may be used to assist friendly forces in bypassing enemy units.

Employ laser designation and IR pointers, in addition

to illumination, for CAS marking.

Employ EW to isolate certain elements and degrade C2.

Consider visual signals to initiate shifting/lifting fires.

Marking rounds for purposes of orientation if required.

Place FSCMs on identifiable terrain.

Use radars (weapons locating radar operating in the

friendly mode), laser designators, night vision devices,

or illumination to adjust supporting fires at night.

Plan fires beyond the limit of advance to stop enemy

retreat or reinforcement.

Plan the use of counterbattery fires against illumination delivery units.
3-36 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Adjust FPFs and illumination height of burst during

daylight hours for safety.

Employ ground radars, counterbattery radars, remote sensors, and night vision equipped FOs for

target acquisition.

Plan defensive fires in detail based on nighttime direct

fire capabilities.

Consider FASCAM to separate attack echelons from

follow on forces, disrupt the enemy reserve, and fill

gaps in the defense.

Use illumination projectiles to blind enemy reconnaissance and forward elements.

Coordinate night CAS and illumination placement for

pilots who are aided or unaided with goggles. 

JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM OPERATIONS

A joint air attack team operation (JAAT) is a combat

operation involving a combination of attack helicopters

and tactical fixed-wing aircraft normally supported by

field artillery or naval surface fire support, operating together to attack surface targets. MCRP 3-23A, MultiService for Joint Air Attack Team (JAAT) Operations,

provides the concept, responsibilities, planning considerations, and procedures for JAAT operations.

SECTION X. THE REHEARSAL

The rehearsal is one of the most overlooked aspects of

fire support planning. It provides attendees the opportunity to visualize the battle, improve total comprehension of the plan, promote responsiveness, and identify

areas of confusion, friction or conflict that may have

been overlooked. Its purpose is to validate that the fire

support plan supports the scheme of maneuver.

The extent of the rehearsal is limited by imagination,

the tactical situation, time, and resources available. It

should use the maneuver OPLAN and the fire support

plan. The rehearsal should rehearse maneuver and fire

support together. The rehearsal should include sufficient fire support agencies to ensure all tasks and the

timing of their execution is clearly understood by all;

e.g., timing of delivery of fires on targets; execution of

the artillery displacement plan; procedures for switching frequencies; observation; triggers; and reconnaissance team reporting requirements and procedures.

Sufficient time should be allowed to prepare, conduct,

and critique; modify the original plan as a result of the

rehearsal; and prepare for battle.

ATTENDEES

Attendees should include commanders, key representatives, FSCs (two levels down), and all supporting

arms representatives. When appropriate, include EW,

engineer, LAAD, target acquisition, and reconnaissance representatives.

TYPES

Types of rehearsals vary from the echelon (senior

through subordinate), to warfighting function, to medium (map, model or radio). Organization and conduct

varies depending on available time. A rehearsal SOP

increases speed and efficiency on how a rehearsal can

be conducted. The FSC’s rehearsal prepares supporting arms for fire support plan execution. The maneuver rehearsal is conducted by the XO or S-3 and

incorporates the fire support plan.

The type of rehearsal depends on the nature of operations and time and assets available. Preparing the rehearsal should ensure access for attendees and

adequate representation of events to occur.

Models

Models may be constructed showing buildings, compounds, or built up areas. Model rehearsals require

good intelligence information on the area of operation

and more time to construct. Model rehearsals are normally used for special operations. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 3-37

Map Rehearsal

The rehearsal may be conducted on any map with appropriate overlays. Map rehearsals may be used when

time and rehearsal space is limited. This limits the

number of participants to those who can gather around

a single map unless projected onto a large screen

(C2PC). Actions to be taken are discussed through

verbal recitation by attendees.

Sand Table

The sand table expands the area around where rehearsal attendees may gather around a single graphical representation of the operation. Maneuver graphics may

be depicted using engineer tape, string, spray paint, or

simply carving out lines in the ground. Key terrain, topography, and objectives may be depicted by using

rocks, items of equipment or piling up dirt. Preparing

this rehearsal allows for an increased number of attendees and a better visual aid. Larger sand tables allow attendees to occupy unit positions on the model.

Radio Rehearsal

Radio rehearsals can be conducted for schedules of

fire, timing with maneuver, and other events. They are

conducted on fire support nets when time and the tactical situation do not allow assembly of key personnel. 

CRITICAL EVENTS

If time is limited, critical events identified by the FSC

(fire support events, contingencies or transitions of the

fire support plan from one phase to another) may be all

that are rehearsed. The FSC should prioritize events if

time is limited.

SUBORDINATE REHEARSALS

The fire support plan should be rehearsed before the

maneuver rehearsal. This provides the opportunity to

resolve fire support plan issues for more efficient integration into the maneuver plan. Subordinate elements

and supporting arms should be allowed to perform

their rehearsals.

CLOSURE

When the rehearsal is completed, issues of concern

must be addressed and any changes to the plan

made immediately. Before adjourning, attendees

must acknowledge changes and inform agencies

that did not participate.
CHAPTER 4. TARGETING

Targeting is the process of selecting targets and

matching the appropriate response to them, taking

account of operational requirements and capabilities. (JP 1-02) It is conducted once the commander’s intent, enemy centers of gravity, and enemy

critical vulnerabilities are identified. The FSC and

the targeting team select enemy units, facilities, or

capabilities that he can least afford to lose or that

provide him with the greatest advantage. Target

subsets that must be acquired and attacked to meet

the commander’s intent and accomplish the mission

are further identified.

 SECTION I. ORGANIZATIONS AND PERSONNEL

The division has the only formally structured targeting

section with personnel specifically designated for targeting duties in the GCE. At regiment and below, personnel can be dedicated exclusively to targeting tasks

only if the commander requests additional personnel

or shifts individuals from their normal duties. Targeting at lower levels is usually done by FSCC and S-2

section personnel without augmentation, but lower intelligence sections may be reinforced from division

G-2 direct support teams. All fire support and intelligence personnel play a role in the targeting process.

AMPHIBIOUS FORCE

Amphibious Force Intelligence Center

The amphibious force intelligence center (AFIC) is

the focal point for all intelligence collection, analysis, production, and reporting. It is manned by

ground, air, and naval intelligence personnel from the

ATF and MAGTF staffs. The MAGTF representative

is the target intelligence officer (TGTINTELO). He

handles target intelligence and passes it to the SACC.

The principal MAGTF intelligence elements are the

surveillance and reconnaissance cell (SARC) and the

production and analysis (P&A) cell. Both are part of

the intelligence battalion’s intelligence operations

center (IOC).

The SARC is the primary element for supervising

MAGTF collection operations. It directs, coordinates,

and monitors intelligence collection operations and reporting conducted by organic, attached, and direct

support collection assets. It provides timely intelligence reports to designated MAGTF elements IAW

specified intelligence reporting criteria.

The P&A cell is the primary production and analysis

element of the MAGTF. It processes collected information and other intelligence and produces all-source

intelligence products in response to requirements of

the MAGTF. The P&A cell’s target analysis/BDA

teams focus on detailed analysis of targets identified

by the MAGTF commander, his staff, and the MSCs’

commanders which are not destined for the air tasking order (ATO). Target and BDA analysis and intelligence support for ATO-nominated targets are

generally managed by the MAW G-2 section. The

target analysis/BDA teams provide the full range of

target development and analysis to support deliberate

and reactive targeting efforts of the MAGTF. BDA

elements also maintain the comprehensive picture of

battle damage caused to targets and prepare BDA reports and assessments that support the MAGTF combat assessment effort. Most intelligence personnel

assigned to target information center (TIC) operations will be sourced from the P&A cell’s target analysis/BDA teams.

See MCWP 3-31.1/ NWP 3-09.11M, Supporting Arms

in Amphibious Operations, MCWP 2-1, Intelligence

Operations, and MCWP 2-12, MAGTF Intelligence

Analysis and Production.
4-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Target Information Center

The TIC is located in the SACC. The primary functions

of the TIC are to keep the SACC informed of the status

of high-value targets (HVTs), high-payoff targets

(HPTs), and high priority targets, maintain liaison between the SACC and the AFIC, and prepare and maintain the AF target list and target bulletins. Personnel in

the TIC are the AF TGTINTELO, MAGTF target information officer (TIO), and assistants as required. The

TIC maintains coordination and liaison with the air intelligence officer in the tactical air control center

(TACC [afloat]) and the MAGTF FFC. The AF

TGTINTELO is under the staff cognizance of the N-2,

but works in the TIC coordinating intelligence support

to targeting. The MAGTF TIO comes from the

MAGTF FFCC. He processes target data in the SACC

and passes it to MAGTF fire support agencies ashore.

See MCWP 3-31.1/NWP 3-09.11M, Supporting Arms

in Amphibious Operations, for information on the TIC.

MAGTF COMMAND ELEMENT

Normally, targeting within the MAGTF CE is performed by the FFCC targeting cell. The focus is on the

deep operation and the necessary transition to the

close operation. The MAGTF must integrate D3A

with the air targeting cycle since the MAGTF commander’s primary tool for deep operations is aviation. 

Under direction of the TIO, the targeting cell, in close

coordination with TGTINTELO, helps plan future

operations by incorporating the tactical targeting

methodology of D3A with the six-step, joint targeting

cycle. (See figure 4-1.) It executes in current operations by integrating the time-driven ATO of the ACE

with event-driven needs for fires in the operation. During operations ashore, the MAGTF CE supports the

targeting activities of the GCE and the mission planning of the ACE by rapidly passing target data to the

GCE and ACE and by responding to their requests for

target data.

The MAGTF CE’s targeting focus is on targets in

the MAGTF commander’s area of influence. Targeting is one way for the MAGTF commander to

shape the battlespace.

DIVISION TARGETING

In the division, the target information section (TIS)

serves as the division FSCC’s primary source of target

information for planning and coordinating the delivery

of fire support. Functions are oriented to the tactical

support requirements of the division and to the target

information requirements of the division FSCC. The

TIS uses intelligence provided by the TGTINTELO

(G-2 section/intelligence battalion) and the intelligence officers of artillery units. The targeting process

is discussed in section II. The TIS is normally established at the division level but may be formed at the

regimental level as required by the tactical situation.

If a TIS is not established at the regimental level, the

supporting arms representatives in the FSCC perform

the necessary target information functions. The division TIS focuses primarily within the division’s area

of influence. Specific TIS functions are to—

l Maintain required target and situation maps.

l Maintain target data using automated methods; e.g.

target files.

Figure 4-1. Joint Targeting Cycle and D3A.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 4-3

l Consolidate, evaluate, and display target information and intelligence.

l Recommend target classification and attack priorities to the FSC as required.

l Obtain information and intelligence on the results

of attack on targets by the supporting arms from all

elements and sources.

l Coordinate all matters with MAGTF TGTINTELO

and artillery unit S-2 for target and counterfire

intelligence support.

l Maintain current lists of targets. These include

countermortar, counterbattery, and SEAD lists and

providing this information to the supporting arms

representatives and to the LF as a whole.

l Prepare and ensure dissemination of target bulletins

(TARBULs) after control of the AF target list has

been passed ashore.

TARGETING COMMITTEE

The commander needs advice from experts in many

areas. A targeting committee brings these experts

together as a matter of standard procedure. The

committee performs duties similar to those in

MCRP 3-16A, TTP for Targeting Process, for the

targeting team. The chairman is the decisionmaker

who is the commander or his designated representative. The targeting committee may include members

of the GCE, ACE, CSSE, intelligence support,

MAGTF CE, and, during amphibious operations,

ATF personnel.

INTELLIGENCE COLLECTION

AND PRODUCTION ASSETS

To support targeting efforts, the collection plan must

use all available assets. Division assets are limited

(ground and light armored reconnaissance units, combat patrols, weapons locating radars, etc.). The

MAGTF CE controls additional collection assets that

may support division and MAW targeting efforts

(force reconnaissance, radio battalion, UAVs, etc.).

The MAGTF CE exercises staff cognizance of the majority of the MAGTF’s intelligence production capabilities. The MAGTF CE can also access external

MAGTF collection and production assets that can provide intelligence support. METT-T considerations and

the overall MAGTF concept of operations may result

in significant intelligence resources being either attached to or placed in direct support of the division.

For example, for a mid-intensity conventional combat

operation where the division is the MAGTF’s main effort, the division will almost certainly get either attachments or direct support from the MAGTF’s direct

support teams (DSTs), radio battalion, CI/HUMINT

company, UAV squadron’s remote receive station, and

ground sensor platoon (GSP). See MCWP 2-2, Intelligence Collection, and the MCWP 2-15 Intelligence

Support Operations series for more information on

collection assets.

SECTION II. THE TARGETING PROCESS

Targeting is a continual, decisionmaking process. Commanders and key personnel (fire support, intelligence,

operations and planning) must understand the functions

associated with the process, be knowledgeable of the

capabilities and limitations of acquisition, target intelligence development, and attack systems, and be able to

integrate them. The entire targeting process must be fully integrated into the tactical decisionmaking process. 

Targeting is an integral part of the planning process that

begins with receipt of the mission and continues through

the development and execution of the plan. It is based on

the friendly scheme of maneuver and/or tactical plan. It

includes an assessment of the weather, terrain, and the

enemy situation. This assessment then identifies those

enemy units, equipment, facilities, and terrain which

must be attacked or influenced to support the concept of

operation. Targeting and intelligence support to targeting include determining/deciding which targets are to be

acquired and attacked, when and how they are to be acquired and attacked, and what is required to achieve the

desired effects on target. Selected HVTs and HPTs are
4-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

also identified for deliberate follow up action and analysis (combat assessment [CA]).

The targeting methodology for the GCE is decide, detect, deliver, assess (D3A). Targeting must be completely integrated into the fire support planning

process. For example, the priorities established by the

commander in the decide phase are not for targeting

alone, but include his guidance for intelligence operations, fire support planning, and execution of fires.

The four phases of D3A are inherently intertwined and

overlapping. Simply put, the D3A methodology

should determine—

l What enemy capabilities, functions, formations

should be targeted whose loss to the enemy will set

conditions that contribute to the success of the

friendly course of action?

l What must we do to these targets to deny them to

the enemy?

l Have these targets been located with enough

accuracy to successfully attack them? If not, where

should we look for them? With what collection

asset? What level of production effort is required to

develop the needed target intelligence?

l When will we attack these targets? Will they be

attacked as detected? At a specific time in the

operation? Or, in a particular sequence?

l What fire support assets will we utilize to attack

these targets?

l Once attacked, how will we assess the success of

the attack to determine if we have deprived the

enemy the use of the target?

l If we do not achieve the desired effect, what is the

impact on the friendly COA? If necessary, how will

we reattack the target and evaluate effectiveness of

the reattack?

DECIDE

Intent

This phase translates commander’s intent into priorities and attack guidance. As the first step in the targeting process, it provides the overall focus and sets

priorities for intelligence collection, production and

dissemination, and attack planning. Targeting priorities must be established for each stage or critical event

of an operation. For targeting to succeed, all must understand the unit mission, commander’s intent, and the

commander’s planning guidance. The commander

bases his initial guidance on the intelligence preparation of the battlespace (IPB). IPB is the foundation for

the rest of the targeting process. It is a continuous and

systematic method for analyzing the enemy, weather,

and terrain in a geographical area. (See MCRP 2-12A,

Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield.)

Target Value Analysis

The target information officer or G-2/S-2 performs

TVA, a detailed analysis of the enemy in selected

COAs. TVA provides a relative ranking of target sets

(or categories) based on enemy characteristics: doctrine, tactics, equipment, organizations, and expected

behavior. It begins when the target analyst in the G-2/

S-2 places himself in the position of the enemy commander. The target analyst, in coordination with other

staff members, wargames friendly COAs and analyzes

their impact on enemy operations and likely responses.

Wargaming finalizes individual staff estimates. It

identifies HVTs in priority of assets that the enemy

commander needs to successfully complete a specific

COA. It also identifies HPTs (derived from HVTs),

whose loss to the enemy will contribute to the success

of the friendly COA. See MCRP 3-16A/FM 6-20-10,

chapter 2.

Products

Products from the decide function are incorporated into the fire support annex of the OPORD.

Target Acquisition Taskings

Target acquisition (TA) assets that belong to fire support agencies; e.g., radar or FOs are incorporated into

the collection plan to contribute to target information.

High-Payoff Target List

A high-payoff target list (HPTL) is the prioritized list of

HPTs established and used by targeting personnel and

FSCCs to develop the attack guidance matrix (AGM).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 4-5

Attack Guidance Matrix

The AGM is a document that tells how, when, and to

what effect an HPT will be engaged. The AGM is incorporated into the maneuver and fire support plans. It

is the commander’s attack guidance and is designed to

support his plan. An AGM that supports the division

commander’s plan may not support a regiment or battalion commander’s plan. One AGM rarely supports

the needs of an entire force and may differ between the

various levels of command.

Targeting Selection Standards

TSS establishes criteria to distinguish between known

targets and suspected targets based on the attack system’s target location error (TLE) requirements, size

and status of enemy activity, and timeliness of information. TSSs and TLEs are used by FSCCs and attack

assets to help plan and direct supporting intelligence

requirements/operations and to quickly identify targets

for attack and confirmation.

Requirements for

Battle Damage Assessment

The commander may specify targets of a critical nature that require immediate BDA to determine effects

and support rapid CA. Requirements will be incorporated into the collection plan and may be classified as

commander’s priority intelligence requirements (PIR).

When possible, fire support organizations provide initial BDA to the FSC and the supporting intelligence

officer on targets attacked. 

DETECT

This phase is designed to validate known and suspected HPTs based on guidance from the decide phase, as

well as locate and identify new targets that meet HPT

criteria. Detecting is accomplished by executing the

intelligence operation plan. Target acquisition assets

are tasked to collect information for target analysis

and production. Intelligence collectors focus on the

relevant characteristics of the intelligence operation

plan and FSC-provided targeting information requirements (IRs) and TSS. Target priorities from the decide

phase expedite processing of information and the rapid

production of tailored, pertinent intelligence products

to support targeting. Products are actual targets and

suspected targets.

The G-2/S-2 is the primary staff officer who executes

the intelligence operation plan and validates the overall effectiveness of intelligence support to targeting.

The commander’s priority intelligence requirements

(PIRs) drive intelligence collection, production, and

dissemination plans and should incorporate fire support targeting requirements. The G-2/S-2 must work

closely with the FSC to determine target location error

(TLE) and dwell time requirements for collection systems to produce valid targets. This should result in

clear, concise taskings to target acquisition assets. As

information is collected and intelligence produced, it

is disseminated by intelligence personnel to the TIS in

accordance with current intelligence reporting criteria.

Targets acquired or developed that are specified for attack are passed to the FSCC to engage under the attack

guidance matrix. Suspected targets are forwarded to

the FSCC for tracking and correlation with other information for target development.

A MAGTF has a wide variety of assets available to detect and identify targets; e.g., national intelligence collection assets like satellite photography or a squad

leader’s shelling report (SHELREP).

In order to access multiple assets, the FSC works

closely with the G-2/S-2. The G-2/S-2 requests support from collection resources at higher levels of

command. Following the guidance in the decide

phase, the G-2/S-2 will exercise staff cognizance

from MAGTF and supporting units with intelligence

collection and production capabilities that normally

employ in general support. C2 management is executed via the intelligence battalion commander in his

role as the G-2/S-2’s intelligence support coordinator

(ISC). Sources of information include—

l Communications collection and direction finding

(radio battalion and the VMAQ squadrons).

l Visual reconnaissance (ground reconnaissance

elements and LAR elements).

l Videotape and handheld imagery (primarily UAV

squadrons, but also the HML/A squadrons, ground

reconnaissance units, and LAR battalion).
4-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

l Multi-sensor imagery (UAV squadron and F/A-18D

squadron).

l Electronic reconnaissance (EA-6B squadrons).

l Ground remote sensors (intelligence battalion’s

ground sensor platoon).

l Visual ground reconnaissance (division and force

reconnaissance units).

l Prisoner of war interrogation (interrogation platoon,

intelligence battalion).

l Pilot debriefs (conducted by the ACE G-2).

Other MAGTF target acquisition assets are found at

battalion level and below (LAR battalion, artillery

FOs, NGF spot teams, and the scout/sniper platoon).

The primary mission of these assets is to support

their parent units. The bulk of their effort is with

planned targets or targets of opportunity. Essential

target information for reporting acquired targets

consists of the reporting unit; time of acquisition;

target location, size, and activity; TLE; dwell time;

and stationary or moving status. The FSCC can develop targets in zone by monitoring calls for fire,

CAS requests, and counter battery radar reports.

DELIVER

The objective of this phase is executing attack guidance on targets in support of the commander’s plan.

The key to the deliver phase is well-established procedures for execution, prior coordination, and rehearsals.

The deliver phase is comprised of a set of tactical

and technical engagement solutions. The MAGTF

relies on a decisionmaker, i.e., the staff/watch officer at the detecting fire support agency, to exercise

his authority in attacking targets. His tactical decision is based on the AGM and the current situation.

If he decides not to attack but to track a target, it is

passed back to the TIS.

After targets are identified by the FSCC, determining when and how to attack a target is made considering attack resources available, their capabilities,

desired effects, and rules of engagement (ROE).

This refined analysis produces the following tactical

decisions: time of attack, desired effect, and the attack system to use. Another important decision is

employing combined arms to attack certain targets,

including lethal and nonlethal fires. Any remaining

coordination with higher, lower, adjacent units, or

other Services is done at this time.

Once tactical decisions are made, the target is passed

to the selected supporting arm for technical attack decisions; e.g., the unit to conduct the attack, number

and type of munitions, and response time. The supporting arm’s ability to respond based on range, time

on station, available munitions, and reaction time cannot be assumed but are functions of the prior coordination and the current tactical situation.

The extent of the deliver phase depends on time

available, the type of target, and attack guidance.

Targets attacked immediately are prioritized in accordance with attack guidance. A time sensitive target (moving or short dwell time) may need tracking

if it is not attacked within the appropriate response

time. Planned targets may be attacked individually

or incorporated into the appropriate asset fire plan;

e.g., ATO or schedule of fires. When time is available, a thorough analysis is conducted for detailed

consideration of targets. In targeting for amphibious

operations, particularly pre D-day, the final decision on the attack of targets may be made at the AF

level. At lower levels, the authority to decide to attack is normally decentralized because of the need

for responsiveness. When time is limited, the process may be greatly abbreviated.

ASSESS

The CA reveals if the commander’s guidance is met

and determines the overall effectiveness of force

employment. In the decide phase, the commander

designated critical targets that required immediate

BDA and the type of surveillance desired. G-2/S-2

and fire support planners identified how damage assessment was collected, considering limited assets

and continued requirements for the detect phase.

The degree of reliability and credibility of BDA depends largely on enemy targets and their operations,

MAGTF collection resources, and the scope of intelligence analysis and production needed to produce the required intelligence. BDA, when analyzed

with an assessment of the effectiveness of the attack
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 4-7

tactics, weapon systems, munitions, fusing and delivery systems—munitions effects assessment

(MEA)—leads to recommendations for reattack,

further target selection or modifying commander’s

guidance. Collectively, BDA, MEA, and reattack

recommendations (RR) comprise CA. (See figure 4-

2.) Also see MCWP 2-12, MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis, for more information on BDA

capabilities and operations.

Employment of fire support assets for reattack is coordinated the same way as employment of TA assets

for detection. This is most easily done when assessment is planned, coordinated, and, when possible,

executed concurrently with the attack. At lower levels, specific targets may be designated for assessment. When the attack of a target is controlled and

observed by an FO, FAC, NGF spotter, or any other

observer, separate tasking for assessment is usually

not necessary. When active assessment is not possible, other measures can be used to assess effects on

a target. For example, if an artillery battery were to

be attacked, the appropriate measure of a successful

attack might be terminating firing by the target. If a

target is so important that destroying or neutralizing

it must be confirmed before a planned course of action can be initiated or continued, then positive assessment must be made.

Battle Damage Assessment

BDA is the timely and accurate estimate of damage

resulting from the application of military force, lethal or nonlethal, against a target. It is primarily an

intelligence responsibility, however, at the tactical

level, BDA provides commanders a snapshot of targeting effectiveness and enemy status. In the targeting process, BDA helps to determine the effects of

our attacks and other force employment on the enemy and if reattack of a target is necessary. It may

take many forms, including number of casualties,

damage to equipment, target reaction to the attack

or deception efforts. BDA consists of three elements: physical damage assessment, functional

damage assessment, and target system assessment.

Phase I - Physical Damage

Phase I is the quantitative extent of physical damage

through munitions blast, fragmentation, and/or fire

damage effects to a target. This assessment is based

on the most immediately available data. Typically,

data originates from operational forces that cannot

conduct detailed observation of weapons effects because they are engaged with enemy forces. Thus,

initial phase I analysis may consist of nothing more

than a “hit” or “no-hit” call provided by the shooter.

Phase II - Functional Damage

A functional damage assessment (FDA) is built on

phase I reports as well as all-source intelligence collected and developed from assets at all levels. FDA

at a minimum will describe the estimated effect of

attacks and other force employment on the target’s

ability to perform its intended mission. It may also

include an estimate of the time required for the enemy to reconstitute or replace the target functions destroyed or degraded. Tactical units provide input to

their intelligence sections to support phase II analysis, which is usually conducted at the MAGTF,

component or theater level.

Phase III - Target System

Target system assessment is a broad assessment of

the impact and effectiveness of all types of attacks

Figure 4-2. Combat Assessment Process.
4-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

and other employment of forces against an entire

target system’s capability; e.g., an enemy’s integrated air defense system (IADS). Target system

assessment is conducted by theater and national

level intelligence agencies.

Munitions Effects Assessment

Conducted concurrently and interactively with BDA, this

is an assessment of the weapon system and the munitions

employed to determine and recommend any required

changes to the methods, tactics, weapon system, munitions, fusing or delivery parameters to increase effectiveness. At the tactical level, fire support planners make this

assessment by comparing expected results from tactical

and technical decisions made during the deliver phase

with BDA.

Reattack Recommendations

Based on BDA and MEA, the FSC and G-2/S-2 advise

the commander on reattack of targets and further target selection to achieve his objectives. Reattack recommendations consider objective achievement, target

and aim point selection, attack timing, tactics, and

weapon system and munitions selection.

SECTION III. RECORDING TARGET DATA

Automated information systems have had a significant

impact on recording target data. Recording target data

consists of recording potential targets, developing targets, sharing target information, graphically representing targets on overlays, and maintaining target files. 

TARGET NUMBERING

All FSCs are involved in target numbering. A target

numbering system provides a common reference,

avoids duplication in assigning numbers, and identifies the target originator. Target numbers are assigned

by the planner on planned targets or targets of opportunity that retain tactical significance even after they

have been attacked. A good indication that a target of

opportunity has tactical significance is if the FO or

spotter controlling the mission requests that the target

be recorded when he ends the mission.

MAGTF units use the Marine Corps target numbering

system. It incorporates the NATO and ABCA armies’

standardization agreements AArty P-1, Artillery Procedures, and QSTAG 221, Target Numbering System.

The intent of the Marine Corps target numbering system is to eliminate the need to revise the target numbering system during mobilization or when working

with non-USMC units. The system provides the maximum target number availability for allocation to units

to minimize the frequency for reuse of numbers. Any

changes to the numbering scheme will come from the

senior commander of the MAGTF or joint task force

(JTF). See appendix L.

Another target numbering system used in joint targeting

that FSC’s should be aware of is the basic encyclopedia

(BE) number and unit identification number system.

This compendium of installation and unit intelligence

taken from the modernized integrated data base

(MIDB) is the most inclusive of all lists. BE numbers

describe every identified installation with an active

function or of valid interest to intelligence agencies,

particularly to the operational staffs of the Unified

Commands. The BE contains data on the identification,

location, and function of each installation. It is used to

select potential fixed targets for employing ground, sea

or air weapons or to identify installations to be withheld

from attack, such as public utilities and hospitals. The

BE lists installations in Eurasia, Western Europe, Latin

America and the Atlantic, Middle East and Africa, and

Southeast Asia and the Western Pacific. Numbers are

assigned primarily by the Defense Intelligence Agency

(DIA). The unit identification number is the only

unique identifier of a mobile unit or target. Once established, it is never changed or reused, even if a unit in a

national force changes its subordination or location.

The unit identification number is a list of mobile targets

and fielded forces and is comprised of ten alphanumeric

characters that include the code of the originating agency (who created the record), the order of battle type, the

allegiance of the unit, and an accession number. Unit
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 4-9

identification numbers help intelligence analysts keep

track of the enemy order of battle. The discrete reference number used to record targets depends on the level

of command within the MAGTF, automated information system being used, and local theater procedures.

For more information on MIDB, see MCWP 2-12. 

TARGET LIST

A target list consists of targets maintained and promulgated by the senior echelon of command; it contains

those targets that are to be engaged by supporting

arms, as distinguished from a “list of targets” that may

be maintained by any echelon as confirmed, suspected, or possible targets for informational and planning

purposes (JP 1-02). The target list is maintained in the

automated target file or printed form. There should be

only one target list in an operation.

MAGTF Target List

When an ATF target list or JTL is not published, the

MAGTF CE may establish a MAGTF target list. The

published list contains those targets that supporting

arms of the ACE, GCE, and other assets available to

the MAGTF are to engage as well as those submitted

to higher joint headquarters for attack.

Target Bulletins

The commander who maintains the ATF target list

keeps other interested commanders informed of all list

changes by information messages called target bulletins (TARBULs). As new targets are discovered and

BDA on known targets is produced, this information

and intelligence is disseminated.

The TARBUL is promulgated over the most expeditious means of communications using a standard message format. TARBULs are numbered consecutively

during an operation. The first TARBUL issued by the

responsible commander is labeled as “TARBUL Number One;” the last TARBUL issued by that commander

is annotated as “Final Bulletin.” The same procedure

is used each time the target list is transferred from one

commander to another. The format is as follows:

l Serial Number of Bulletin.

l New Targets.

l Targets Destroyed.

l Targets Damaged/Percentage.

l Canceled Targets.

l Reactivated Targets.

TARBUL distribution depends on task force size and

composition. It is normally distributed to all interested

commanders of higher, adjacent, and lower echelons

of the AF by the commander responsible for the AF

target list. It is distributed to AF elements as designated. They use the TARBUL to update their lists of targets and target files.

LF elements must report to the MAGTF the location

and description of newly acquired targets appropriate

for inclusion on the AF target list, the results of attacks

on targets listed on the AF target list, and those listed

targets that have been overrun. The target report

(TAREP) is used to pass target data. The TIO, in cooperation with the TGTINTELO, evaluates and consolidates reports of target information and intelligence and

prepares TARBULs for approval and release.

Joint Target List

The joint force commander (JFC), usually through the

joint targeting coordination board (JTCB), prepares a

joint target list (JTL) and a joint integrated prioritized

target list (JIPTL). The JTL is the master target list

that supports the JFC’s objectives, guidance, intent,

and courses of action. In wartime, the operation plan

(OPLAN) JTL annex is updated and serves as an initial list of campaign targets. See JP 3-60, Joint Targeting, for further explanation.

The JTL is not a prioritized list of targets. It lists prioritized target categories like C2, airfields, or lines of

communications. When directed by the JFC, the JTL

is updated daily or as required via target information

report (TGTINFOREP) messages from components. 
4-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Joint doctrine employs a JIPTL for prioritizing specific

targets from the JTL. Prioritization refers to a target’s

relative importance and significance within a specific

target system and to other targets. Prioritization does

not necessarily denote operational sequencing. 

TARGETING BOARDS

The highest echelon of command is responsible for

maintaining the target list. At that level, the targeting

committee hosts a targeting board. The board assesses

targeting effectiveness and updates priorities and the

target list. Its basic process inputs subordinates’ recommendations from target lists. It considers them with

the commander’s guidance and priorities, and produces a prioritized target list. 

Lower echelons, although without a dedicated targeting staff, should hold targeting meetings. Meetings are

informally held by the XO with the S-2, S-3, and FSC

to ensure targets address the commander’s desires and

have been incorporated into the fire support and R&S

collection plans. It is not a separate function and

should be in conjunction with the planning process.

If time permits, conducting a targeting board should include an intelligence update on the enemy situation, collection and productions plans, and expected enemy

courses of action. Operation updates include requirements from higher echelons, changes to commander’s

guidance, and review of current operations and available assets. The FSC reviews current attack guidance

and recommends changes. The target list itself is maintained by assessing targets that have been attacked, canceling targets, reactivating targets, and nominating new

ones. Targets planned by subordinate echelons may be

nominated for inclusion on the target list. Such targets

must be considered as significant to the MAGTF, AF or

JTF. The MAGTF targeting board evaluates these targets for inclusion on the target list. In amphibious or

joint operations, the MAGTF makes appropriate recommendations to the AF or JTF.

TARGET FILES

A target file consists of the target list, confirmed and

suspected targets, targets planned to support maneuver, and target information. Automated information

systems enable target files to be maintained at different echelons and share appropriate common information with subordinate, adjacent, and higher levels. The

target file is not the target list nor a single list of targets. It is a unit’s data base that performs two functions: it uses the target file to make nominations to the

targeting board that controls the target list, and it

maintains its own lists of targets. The division target

processing center (TPC), or highest level S-2, is the

clearing house for all target information gathered at

lower levels.

File Production

The initial target file may consist only of targets gathered from national assets or a DIA data base. The target file increases as fire support planners at battalion

and company levels nominate targets to support maneuver. As intelligence collection and production

plans are executed at different levels, target acquisition assets contribute target information, which builds

the file.

Target information includes target descriptions and

sizes, target locations in grid coordinates or polar direction, date-time groups, and report values (RV), the

radial error associated with the type of observer (similar to TLE). Criteria for processing target information

and intelligence are established based on the HPTL,

TSS, and targeted areas of interest (TAIs), named areas of interest (NAIs), and current intelligence reporting criteria. Target information and intelligence that

meet established standards becomes a target while

other information and intelligence may be used to develop a target based on the similarities, proximity, differences in report time, and tactical significance when

correlated with other reports.

File Maintenance

Although automated information systems have expansive memory for maintaining information, they can be

degraded when inundated with excessive information.

Maintaining target files according to the following

principles keeps information current, common, and responsive to the using units.

Targets are maintained by their originating organization; e.g.; a regiment target that is in a subordinate
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 4-11

battalions’ target files is only updated/canceled by

the originator (regiment) of the target. The regiment

is responsible for notifying all users of any change in

the target’s status.

Units with targets in their area of operations but originating elsewhere should make recommendations on

the maintenance of those targets.

Units with targets in their area of interest but originating elsewhere may make recommendations on the

maintenance of those targets.

Considerations for file maintenance include—

l Targets destroyed by friendly forces.

l Targets overrun by advancing elements.

l Targets that have a high mobility factor and are not

attacked within a set time period.

l Targets attacked that show no activity within a set

period of time.

l Target information files combined into a target.

l Changes in requirements for target information.

Specific criteria for file maintenance are as established

in unit SOPs and may be modified depending on the

current tactical situation and tempo of operations.

LIST OF TARGETS

A list of targets may be maintained at any echelon as

confirmed, suspected or likely targets that are of particular concern to their operations. The list contains

targets for planning and informational purposes. Targets on the list may or may not be engaged. An informal company list may even contain essential target

reference points (TRPs). A list may be maintained for

a specific target type; e.g., counterfire, SEAD. The list

of targets is independent from the target list, but both

may be contained in the same target file.

Format

There is no standard format for such lists, but normally

they are constructed based on search criteria entered in

the automated information system. At company levels

they are often maintained on a target list worksheet.

The information recorded normally contains, at a minimum, the target number, target location, description,

and any amplifying remarks. An example of a target

list worksheet is in appendix L.

Processing

A list of targets may be prepared and maintained at

any echelon. Targets included may be derived from

several sources; e.g., the GCE target file, fire planning,

battlefield intelligence, etc. Each FSCC should maintain a named target list, which is actually a list of targets that can be used for various purposes. Subordinate

FSCC’s should send their list of targets to the senior

FSCC anytime it changes. Senior FSCC’s should

merge their subordinate’s lists of targets, resolve duplication, and republish the target list to their subordinates based on unit SOP or commander’s guidance.

The originating unit maintains a copy of the list of targets for its use, forwards a copy to the supporting arms

units, and submits a copy to the next higher echelon.

This may be done electronically. Because the same

target may have been planned by more than one unit,

the possibility exists for a target to be assigned two

target numbers. A fire mission on a target with two target numbers will cause confusion and must be avoided. Thus, the higher echelon compares the list with

lists submitted by other units and eliminates duplications. Duplications are remedied by the higher echelon

deciding on a single target number for the target, and

making appropriate notifications to affected units; e.g.,

originating units, supporting arms units.

As each step up the ladder is completed, it should eventually reach the MAGTF CE. The MAGTF FFCC

should merge all subordinate FSCC’s lists of targets into one MAGTF target list for a given 24-hour period if

the MAGTF is not engaged in amphibious operations.

If the MAGTF is engaged in amphibious operations

then the SACC will develop this list. This will give all

supporting commands a common target list in the form

of the AF target list. 

Maintenance

Lists of targets must be kept current to be useful. Targets that have been attacked and meet the commander’s

guidance are no longer viable and should be removed

to decrease the amount of targets that must be tracked
4-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

by operators and staffs. The same principles for file

maintenance apply to lists of targets. Additions are

made as new targets are identified or planned. Fielding

of automated information systems and the quick passage of information through the LAN, EPLRS, and

SCR can aid in rapidly modifying and disseminating

lists of targets to higher and lower elements.

The headquarters that designated and planned the target to be attacked is responsible for determining if a

target is to be deleted or maintained. During the planning process, certain criteria need to be developed as

to when a target should be deleted. Since targets may

be mobile, target location may only be viable for a

short time. Should this time be exceeded, modify or

delete the target.

Target location is a large determination as to its relevance. Is it behind the FLOT? Do we expect to need

it? Is it on terrain that is no longer key terrain? 

The nature of the target needs to be determined. Has

the target been attacked? Have the attacks met the

commander’s guidance? Is the target still of value to

the commander?

Using AFATDS, a mission-fired report (MFR) is generated by the first AFATDS that receives the information when a mission ends. This MFR contains the

BDA data and who fired the mission. Depending on

the automatic message routing parameters set-up, it is

then sent to subordinate and higher units to provide the

status of the target. 

Currently AFATDS cannot delete or change a target

and automatically update the list of targets in higher

and subordinate units’ databases. There are several

methods to disseminate changes to lists of targets.

Plain Text Message

The headquarters responsible for the target sends a

plain text message (PTM) listing all deleted and added

targets. This is similar to an electronic TARBUL. The

units receive this message and make adjustments to

the list of targets in question.

Named Target List

The headquarters develops a new named target list

with deletions, additions, and changes incorporated.

This list is distributed to higher and subordinate elements along with a PTM to delete the old target list

and institute the new one.

TARGET MAP OVERLAY

The target map is maintained to provide a visual display of targets appropriate for attack by supporting

arms. FSCMs should be readily accessible for use with

the target map. Some targets posted on the target map

are targets—

l In the unit’s zone of action that can interfere with

the concept of operations.

l That are not in the unit’s area of operation but can

interfere with the concept of operations.

l That are not immediately important but may

become important to the concept of operations.

Maintenance

FSCCs and FDCs maintain targets on an overlay. The

overlay is a supplement to the target file. Planned targets, such as known or suspected targets, capable of

interfering with the commander’s scheme of maneuver

are plotted. These targets are derived from the fire support plan, the target list, and the unit’s list of targets.

The target overlay is used as a tool to resolve duplication of targets, to integrate the scheme of maneuver

with the plan of supporting fires, and to determine the

most appropriate unit to engage the target. Target

overlays are maintained by FOs and spotters with only

essential information for rapid referral for the attack of

planned targets.

Standard Procedures for

Annotating Maps and Overlays

Known or suspected targets are plotted using standard

map symbols, indicating the date-time group of the

initial sighting. See appendix L.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 4-13

Targets reported as destroyed are so indicated by placing an X through the target symbol. Those targets partially destroyed are indicated by a single line through

the target and the percentage of damage, if reportable,

along the side. Significant enemy contact is noted by

the use of a red circle at the location of the contact.

Amplifying remarks are recorded. Friendly and enemy

symbology used on these products and displays will be

in accordance with MIL-STD-2525B, Common Warfighting Symbology, and MCRP 5-12A, Operational

Terms and Graphics.

TARGET/OBJECTIVE STUDIES

IPB affects the targeting process through the evaluation of terrain, weather, and the association of threat

forces at specific times and locations within the battlespace. NAIs and TAIs are identified. HVTs and

HPTs are derived and a list of targets is submitted for

consideration. Once the commander has approved a

target, intelligence sections develop target/objective

studies to support mission planning. Target/objective

studies are focused, detailed intelligence products that

aid in applying fires or the maneuver of forces against

a specific target set or area. These studies can also be

used by smaller MAGTFs and units, such as a

MEU(SOC), for mission preparation and execution.

Target/objective studies are graphically oriented and

may use many of the graphics derived during the IPB

process. One such product is a target folder or file described on page 4-10. The folder may contain the following information depending on the specific mission:

l Orientation graphic.

l Time-distance graphic. 

l Weather forecast.

l Hydrographic forecast and astronomical data.

l Intelligence briefing notes for mission.

l Graphic INTSUM.

l Objective area graphic enhancements:

n Orientation graphic (10 to 20 kilometers around

objective or as specified in unit SOP).

n Mission planning graphic (5 kilometers around

objective or as specified in unit SOP).

n Objective area graphics.

l Objective area imagery.

l Imagery and graphics of insertion points and targets.

l SERE plan.

l Challenge and reply passwords.

l Mission-specific data as required.

SECTION IV. TARGETING CHECKLIST

Specific considerations for the FSC during the targeting process help the fire support planning process by

identifying concerns within the framework of the D3A

targeting methodology.

The commander’s planning guidance and intent are

critical to facilitate effective targeting.

DECIDE

What HVTs have been nominated as HPTs?

What are the desired effects for each HPT?

When do we attack each HPT?

How do we attack each HPT?

Are there any restrictions or constraints from higher

authority or under international law?

Which HPTs require BDA?

What are the applicable rules of engagement (ROE)?

Are streamlined clearance procedures present to ensure responsive fires and force protection?

What targeting assets (organic, attached, and supporting) are available to detect and attack HPTs?

What detect, deliver, and assess support is needed

from higher headquarters?
4-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

When must requests to higher headquarters be submitted to obtain the support?

What detect, deliver, and assess support is required

from subordinate units? When is reinforcing required?

What detect, deliver, and assess support requests have

been received from subordinate units and what has

been done with them?

Has the AGM been synchronized with the decision

support template and maneuver and fire support plans?

Is a common datum in use among all concerned units?

If not, are procedures in place to correct differences? 

DETECT

Are HPTs incorporated in CCIRs?

What accuracy, timeliness, and validity standards; i.e.,

TSS are in effect for detection and delivery systems?

Are all target acquisition assets fully used?

Have responsibilities been assigned to the appropriate

unit for detecting each HPT?

Have verification procedures using backup systems

been established where necessary?

Are target acquisition and BDA requirements distributed properly among systems that can accomplish both?

DELIVER

Have communications links and any necessary procedures been established among the detection systems,

the decisionmaker, and the delivery systems?

Have responsibilities been assigned to the appropriate

unit for the attack of each HPT?

Has a backup attack system been identified for critical

HPTs should the primary system be unavailable at the

time the HPT is verified?

Have FSCMs and clearance procedures been established for firing across boundaries?

Have coordination procedures been established with

other components for firing beyond the FSCL?

Have potential fratricide situations been identified and

procedures established to positively control each potential situation?

Have responsibilities been assigned to the appropriate

unit for providing BDA on specified HPTs?

What are the procedures to update the HPT list and

synchronize the AGM and decision support template if

it becomes necessary to change the scheme of maneuver and fire support as the tactical situation changes?

ASSESS

Are the assessment assets linked to specific HPTs?

Are they still available?

Have assessment asset operators been notified of the

attack of a target requiring assessment?

Have assessment asset operators been updated as to

the actual target location?

Has all coordination for the assessment mission, particularly airborne assets, been accomplished?

Is the mission underway?

Has information from the mission been delivered to

the appropriate unit for evaluation?

Has the targeting team reviewed the results of the attack to determine reattack requirements?
CHAPTER 5. EXECUTING THE FIRE SUPPORT PLAN

Execution implements the fire support plan and manages fire support available to combat units. It also applies fires to shape the battlespace, coordinate attacks,

protect the force, and reduce duplication of effort.

SECTION I. FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION TASKS

Basic tasks are—

l Advise the commander of changes in the status of

fire support.

l Recommend changes in fire support employment

based on the current tactical situation.

l Deliver fires on targets detected in the targeting

process by executing attack guidance.

l Select the best supporting arm to attack a target

considering availability, weaponeering, and

coordination requirements.

l Clear requests for fire using an established

approval mode.

l Integrate fires to support the scheme of maneuver.

l Coordinate fires between lower, adjacent, and

higher units.

l Coordinate fires between the observer and

supporting arm and/or multiple firing units.

l Request additional fire support when needed.

l Establish and maintain FSCMs to aid the rapid

engagement of targets and provide safeguards for

friendly forces/installations.

l Resolve fire support conflicts at lowest possible level.

l Disseminate information within the FSCC, to other

COC staff sections, and to adjacent battalions,

supporting artillery units, and higher headquarters;

e.g., unit locations, FSCMs, target information, and

fire support status reports.

COMPANY FIRE SUPPORT

COORDINATION

When no adjacent units are affected, the coordination

required for fire support is best accomplished by the

company commanders and the supporting arms representatives assigned to their units. Battalion FSCCs

have no need to intervene unless a requested fire support asset has to be diverted to a higher priority mission. Artillery batteries and NSFS ships can normally

handle simultaneous missions. FSCs should not intervene to cancel requests for higher priority missions

unless the artillery fire direction center (FDC) or ships

report that they cannot handle any more missions. Simultaneous missions should not be approved if fire

support effectiveness will be degraded. Coordination

between companies is essential for effective battalion

fire support coordination. Coordination among the

supporting arms representatives within a company can

be facilitated by assigning an individual the task of coordinating the company’s supporting fires. Such coordination reduces the frequency with which FSCC

personnel must intervene to cancel or modify requests

for supporting arms and frees battalion FSCC personnel for tasks that companies cannot accomplish (e.g.,

coordination with higher headquarters, requesting additional fire support assets). Battalion SOPs should

establish procedures for coordination between companies; e.g., cross boundary fires, target hand-offs or requests for observation support. 

BATTALION FIRE SUPPORT

COORDINATION

A large portion of the coordination tasks required to

execute the fire support plan are accomplished at the

battalion level. Battalion FSCCs monitor/receive calls

for fire and air requests from the companies. This is

normally performed by the appropriate supporting

arms representatives (artillery LNO, AirO, NGLO, or

mortar representative). Supporting arms representatives assist the FSC in performing the tasks required to
5-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

coordinate and clear the missions (see section III for

detailed procedures). Fires, such as a counter mechanized program, may also be initiated by the battalion

FSCC. Established message routing (centralized or decentralized) and clearance procedures (positive or passive) will specify mission flow for clearance of fires.

REGIMENT FIRE SUPPORT

COORDINATION

Regiment FSCCs play a key role in planning and using

fire support. Regiment FSCCs assist battalion FSCCs

in fire support coordination by granting clearance for

fires delivered in the regiment’s area of operation beyond the battalion’s area of operation and coordinating

the routing of aircraft with adjacent forces The attack

of targets in the regiment’s area of operations detected

during the targeting process is coordinated at the regiment FSCC.

Artillery

The artillery LNO at the infantry regiment FSCC provides information and expertise on all artillery matters.

He represents the direct support artillery battalion

commander. The artillery LNO does not normally

monitor artillery COF nets. The artillery LNO in each

battalion FSCC and the DS artillery battalion FDC

monitor those nets and forward significant information

to the regiment LNO. He monitors the artillery battalion fire direction (FD) net to keep abreast of significant artillery missions. He assists the artillery LNO in

battalion FSCCs in obtaining additional artillery support, if required. In the automated FSCC, he is able to

automatically retrieve data from the battalion FSCCs

and FDC, process artillery target information, clear artillery fires, and quickly disseminate critical fire support information to subordinate units.

Coordination of artillery fire by adjacent maneuver

battalions is normally effected by direct coordination

between the units involved. However, if direct coordination cannot be effected or conflicts arise which

cannot be resolved, the artillery LNO or FSC at the

regiment will assist by effecting the required coordination or resolving the conflict.

The artillery LNO may request fires on targets within

the regiment’s area of operation. These fires may be

provided by the DS battalion or the fires from other artillery (GS, GS-R) units. These fires are coordinated

with higher, lower, or adjacent units, as required.

Air

The AirO at the regiment FSCC provides information

and expertise on all aviation matters. He monitors immediate air requests and may approve, cancel, amend

or recommend that another fire support agency provide the fire support requested. He consolidates preplanned air requests forwarded from the battalions.

The AirO makes recommendations to the FSC who

determines, based on the commander’s guidance, the

best way to satisfy competing demands for air support.

The regiment AirO coordinates air support missions

with the regiment FSC and makes recommendations

for incorporating SEAD. Approved requests for air

support are forwarded to the division.

Naval Surface Fire Support

The NGLO at the infantry regiment has information

and expertise on all NSFS matters. If the regiment is

allocated a ship in GS, the regiment NGLO coordinates

the fires of the GS ship based on the guidance from the

regiment commander. These fires may also be used to

reinforce the fires provided to subordinate battalions.

DIVISION FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION

The division FSCC has the key role in conducting targeting, as well as attacking targets to support the division commander’s concept of operation. It plans and

coordinates fires on targets of interest to the division.

The division FSCC assists the regimental FSCCs in

fire support coordination. If the division generates a

target to be fired, the FSC may use any of the means

available to the division (lethal and nonlethal). Coordination with adjacent or higher fire support coordination agencies is required prior to firing on targets

outside the division boundary.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 5-3

Artillery

The AFSC in the division FSCC is also the artillery

LNO. He employs the division’s GS and GSR artillery

in counterfire, planned fires, and the attack of detected

targets in the division area of operation. He assists the

artillery LNO at the infantry regiments in obtaining

additional artillery support. The AFSC resolves conflicts that arise concerning artillery support that cannot

be resolved at a lower level. He assists regimental artillery LNOs in effecting coordination when direct coordination cannot be accomplished.

Air

The AirO functions generally in the same manner as

the regimental AirOs. He monitors immediate air requests and compiles preplanned air requests forwarded

from the regiments to the division FSCC. The division

AirO provides close liaison with the DASC agency to

assist in coordination of requirements and routing of

air support.

Naval Surface Fire Support

The division NGFO performs functions generally in

the same manner as the regimental NGLOs. If a request for additional NSFS is received from any regiment, the FSC directs the NGFO to coordinate the

mission with a GS ship and the regimental NGLOs. He

then ensures that the requesting agency is properly

linked with the appropriate ship. The NGFO plans targets to be fired by the division’s GS ships.

MAGTF FORCE FIRES COORDINATION

The MAGTF FFCC plans, coordinates, and executes

lethal and nonlethal fires in support of the MAGTF

commander’s concept of operations. The FFCC is the

senior fire support coordination agency. The force

fires coordinator (FFC) is responsible to the MAGTF

commander for planning, coordination, and conduct of

fire support operations in the MAGTF deep operation

and for coordinating MSC fire support operations in

the close and rear operations. The FFCC works closely

and in concert with the MAGTF air section and the

G-2 target intelligence section. The FFCC is organized

into four functional sections.

Plans/Target Information Section

This section conducts all planned fire support coordination functions including support for OPLAN/

CONPLAN/FRAGO development and deliberate targeting. In coordination with future operations and future plans, the plans section develops the MAGTF

commander’s concept of fire support. This section

works closely with MAGTF representatives at

JFACC/HHQ fire support agencies; e.g., the deep operations coordination center (DOCC). The target information officer (TIO) organizes and conducts the

MAGTF targeting board. It recommends targeting

guidance, priorities, and asset allocation, to the

MAGTF commander for approval or modification.

Fire support planning and targeting products are handed off to current fires in the COC for execution.

Current Fires Section

Current fires executes the deep operation and coordinates fires for the close and rear operations as required. This section receives the fire support plan from

target information and ATO from the air center in the

TACC; monitors execution of the fire support plan; revises and adjusts the plan in keeping with the developing situation; and engages reactive targets per the

MAGTF commander’s guidance. Although current

fires is primarily focused on the deep operations area,

it is also responsible for coordinating rear area fires,

conducting/coordinating deep fires, and when required, assisting the MSCs with their close fires. Within the COC, current fires coordinates closely with

current operations, intelligence, the C3 analysis cell,

and liaison officers (LNOs). Current fires maintains

close contact with the ACE TACC and force artillery

(FA). Current fires must maintain close contact with

the adjacent U.S. Army DOCC in addition to the other

organizations described. Current fires conducts reactive targeting with current operations and intel, and directs the attack of targets with the appropriate assets. 

Force Fires Liaison Section

Force fires includes those LNOs sent from the FFCC

to external (higher and adjacent) commands and those
5-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

fire support LNOs sent to the MAGTF. It provides a

coordinated MAGTF view of the battlespace to all external MAGTF fire support LNOs, and receives and

consolidates LNO reports and requests. Force fires also provides a central location for external fires LNOs

provided to the MAGTF. For more information on

MAGTF fires, refer to MCWP 3-42.1, Fire Support in

MAGTF Operations.

Air Section

The air section assists the current fires section and is

directly responsible for all matters pertaining to the

use of aviation assets in the current battle. It maintains

close contact with the TACC, monitors the ATO, and

focuses on reactive targeting in the MAGTF deep battle per targeting principles. The air section assists in

validating the targets scheduled for air attack by informing the TACC of all significant target information

and intelligence on the location and nature of those

targets. The air section also monitors the status and

readiness of ACE assets.

REAR OPERATIONS

Fire support coordination in the rear area is accomplished in the RAOC. The FSC in the RAOC, augmented by fire support representatives, coordinates

and clears fire missions in the rear area. He coordinates with the senior GCE FSCC and the MAGTF

FFCC for fulfilling fire support requests. The MAGTF

FFCC resolves conflicts that arise in fire support coordination involving the rear area. FSCMs may be established within the rear area and should be coordinated

closely with the MAGTF and GCE FSCCs. 

The RAOC uses the MAGTF fire support coordination

net and the MAGTF tactical net for external fire support coordination traffic. The RAOC AirO must be

able to communicate on the TAR net. Internal fire support coordination traffic will be primarily on the combat service support security net. 

For information on fire support coordination in the

rear area, see MCWP 3-41.1, Rear Area Operations.

SECTION II. GAINING AND MAINTAINING 

SITUATIONAL AWARENESS

Rapid and effective fire support coordination requires

situational awareness. An established SOP for information flow in the FSCC is essential to tracking operations. Information requirements are graphical and

quantitative in nature and usually represented on situation maps, status boards, and reports. 

SITUATIONAL MAPS

Situational (sit) maps provide a graphic representation

of the battlespace that is only as accurate as the information reported and recorded. The following information should be kept current.

FSCMs

FSCMs must be activated and canceled relative to the

tempo of the operation. They are one of the primary

tools used to clear fires. FSCs at each echelon are responsible for maintaining a firm grasp of active and

canceled FSCMs. The sit map must reflect the current

FSCMs in effect at all echelons.

Unit Locations

Units and personnel invariably move as the operation

progresses making if difficult to maintain a trace of the

forward line of own troops (FLOT). This is especially

true in maneuver warfare. It is only through the plotting of units both friendly and enemy (via reporting)

that the fire support coordinator can maintain an accurate representation of the battlefield. This is an essential factor in preventing fratricide and creating a

picture of enemy disposition.

The FSC, S-3, and S-2 should work in proximity to

each other (physically or virtually). This allows unit

reporting for fire support coordination purposes and

allows the supporting arms representatives to provide

redundancy in reporting unit locations to the FSCC.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 5-5

Global positioning system (GPS) is a space-based radio navigation system that provides position, velocity,

and time. It uses devices such as the precision lightweight GPS receiver (PLGR) to provide a means for

units to accurately locate their positions. Accuracy of

these reported positions allows for faster coordination

of fires. Observers can fix their own location, enhancing their ability to locate targets accurately. The enhanced position location reporting system (EPLRS)

provides a position and navigation service to users and

makes position location information available to C2

systems. The service is provided in all surface environments during both day and night operations and all

conditions of visibility. EPLRS is a medium for data

communications, enabling users to send/receive messages. This capability is advantageous for disseminating targets, fire plans or FSCMs even if automated fire

support devices are unavailable. 

Targets

Active, planned, and inactive targets are plotted to

graphically show the fire support plan and aid in coordinating fires. As missions are processed, a buildup of

targets creates a picture of the enemy disposition. 

Other Information

Fire support personnel need to maintain other pertinent data (obstacles, primary and alternate positions or

engagement areas).

STATUS BOARDS AND SHEETS

Status boards and sheets reflect pertinent information

for quick reference. Examples of information may include the available assets (e.g., air on station or unit

FIRECAPs), ammunition status, priority targets in effect, and active mission information. See appendix N

for sample FSCC status board and sheet formats. See

appendix O for fire support reference data. 

REPORTS

Reports vary in format from simple verbal acknowledgments to printed data search from an automated

command and control system. Reports commonly used

inside the FSCC reflect the status of a given fire support asset, ammunition on hand, or the status of a fire

request. The basic tenets of reporting are “What do I

know? Who needs to know? How do I tell them?” 

INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS

BY ECHELON

It is important to determine what information is essential for FSCCs at each echelon. Lower echelon FSCCs

generally require greater detail on the current tactical

situation in their area of operations. Higher echelon

FSCCs require more general information on trends

and capabilities that can affect current and future operations. Figure 5-1 on page 5-6 gives examples of the

level of detail and area of emphasis most appropriate

for FSCCs at each echelon for each significant category of information. It is only a guide. The tactical situation dictates specific information requirements

INFORMATION EXCHANGE

Information is of little use when not efficiently disseminated to the individual or agency that requires it.

Information is exchanged over various tactical and fire

support nets. Members of the FSCC and COC should

not assume that information received over a fire support net is only of interest to fire support personnel or

agencies. Effective communication systems must

share information laterally as well as up and down the

chain of command.

Automated information systems enhance our ability to

share information. Parameters may be established

within the system that allow it to automatically disseminate information, such as messages of interest

(MOI), while search criteria for gathering information

can automatically retrieve information from other databases. For example, the essential elements of a

SHELREP transmitted by a company over an artillery

COF net informs the battalion FSCC of the tactical situation and promptly notifies the artillery FDC so

counterfire actions can be initiated (cueing of weapons-locating radars). See FMFM 6-18-1.
5-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

SECTION III. TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION 

PROCEDURES

Tactical fire direction is the “if” and “how” to attack a

target. Mission processing procedures described in this

section can be used for scheduled and immediate requests for fire. 

Additional considerations for offensive and defensive

operations are also listed.

PROCESSING FIRE SUPPORT

The following procedures are recommended for coordinating planned and immediate fire support at all echelons. The actual order of procedures is based on

message routing and approval procedures.

CATEGORY OF

INFORMATION BATTALION REGIMENT DIVISION

Location of Friendly 

Units

All organic and attached companies. Any 

small units or patrols in battalion’s zone 

or sector not located with parent company; e.g., recon or security elements. 

Front line trace of organic or attached battalions and locations of boundaries 

between battalions. Any separate units 

under control of regiment or in regiment’s 

sector but outside zones or sectors of 

battalions. 

Front line trace of organic or attached regiments and location of boundaries 

between regiments. Any separate units 

under control of division or in division’s 

zone or sector but outside zones or sectors of regiments.

Disposition of 

Supporting Arms

Units

Location of all sections of 81mm mortar 

platoon. Location of any artillery battery 

in the battalion’s zone or sector. Firing 

capabilities of all DS and reinforcing artillery which can range that battalion’s zone 

or sector. Location of any NSFS ships in 

DS of the battalion or in GS of the regiment or division which can range the 

battalion’s sector. Times, routes, destinations of all artillery batteries conducting 

displacements in that battalion’s zone or 

sector.

Location and firing capabilities of all units 

of DS artillery battalion. Location of all GS 

or reinforcing artillery that can range that 

regiment’s zone or sector. DS artillery battalion’s plans for displacing batteries. 

Location of any NSFS ship in GS of the 

regiment or division that can range the 

regiment’s zone or sector. 

Firing capabilities of all artillery (cannon 

and rocket).*

Location of all NSFS ships in DS of battalions or GS to regiments or the division.*

Displacement plans of artillery units to 

support division operations; e.g., 

attacks or withdrawals.

Army/joint/coalition fire support assets.

* This information is passed to the air 

control agency.

Status of

Aviation 

Status of assigned aircraft for air 

requests (preplanned and immediate; 

fixed and rotary wing). Information pertaining to friendly and enemy air defense. 

Status of assigned aircraft for air requests 

for battalions and the regiment (preplanned and immediate; fixed-and rotarywing including aircraft conducting air 

observation mission). Information pertaining to friendly and enemy air defense. 

Status of aircraft allocation to division. 

Status of assigned aircraft for air requests 

for regiments and the division (preplanned and immediate: fixed and rotary 

wing including aircraft conducting air 

observation missions). Information pertaining to friendly and enemy air defense. 

Plans of

Units

Scheme of maneuver. Designation of 

main and supporting attacks. Any special plans that require plans of supporting 

fires; e.g., counter-mechanized.

Scheme of maneuver. Designation of 

main and supporting attacks. Designation, location, and likely employment of 

the reserve. Any special plans that require 

plans of supporting fires; e.g., countermechanized.

Same as regiment.

Ammunition

Status

Accurate and current count of 81mm 

ammunition. Shortages of any type of 

ammunition that could affect fire support 

planning. Forecast of when the DS ships 

will leave the fire support area/station to 

resupply ammunition.

Count of artillery ammunition in the DS 

and reinforcing battalion (regiment FSCC 

should receive the count as often as the 

artillery unit calculates it - normally twice 

daily). Forecast of when the GS ship will 

leave the FSA/station to resupply ammunition. Shortages of any type of aviation 

ordnance that could affect fire planning.

Any changes in the available supply rate 

for the force of any type of ammunition. 

Any changes in the available supply rate 

for the force of any type of aviation ordnance. Count of artillery ammunition in 

the GS battalion(s). Forecast of when the 

GS ships will leave the fire support area/

station to resupply ammunition.

Fire Support

Coordination

FSCMs planned and in effect. Updates to 

targets.

Same as battalion. Same as battalion.

Figure 5-1. Information Needed at FSCCs.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 5-7

Plot the Target

Plot on the map all fire missions originating, impacting in, or crossing through the unit’s area of operations. Verify if target attack affects friendly units,

violates or requires additional FSCMs. The fire mission reference card (figure 5-2) is a useful tool for

recording fire missions and keeping all FSCC, S-3,

and S-2 representatives informed of on-going fire

missions. Appropriate data is recorded on a preformatted (by unit SOP), laminated card or printed

from an automated system and then routed to the appropriate personnel where the pertinent information

is recorded. 

Consult the Attack Guidance Matrix

Based on the nature of the target, extract the appropriate attack guidance to determine required effects

and recommended munitions for attack. Additional

considerations should include, at a minimum, ROE,

priority of the mission, assets currently available,

weaponeering for the chosen asset, responsiveness of

the asset, coordination requirements, and commander’s guidance.

Conduct Necessary Coordination

Coordinate internally with supporting arms representatives to time the delivery of fires, coordinate gun target

Figure 5-2. Example of a Fire Mission Reference Card.
5-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

lines/airspace, etc. When appropriate, contact lower,

adjacent, and higher FSCCs to coordinate fires in or

across their area of operation and to request reinforcing fires or special munitions approval.

Clear Fires

The FSC and supporting arms personnel ensure that

fires will not adversely affect friendly forces. There are

two methods of control: positive and passive. If using

positive control, a verbal or automated response will be

sent to the acquisition asset and firing unit whether the

mission is clear. When using passive approval procedures and decentralized message routing, missions on

voice nets should at least be acknowledged.

Complete the Mission

Continue to monitor the mission (progress of the aircraft in ACAs, subsequent corrections or shifts, etc.)

through completion. Record BDA or surveillance, update sit maps, cancel temporary FSCMs, priority targets, etc., and disseminate information, as appropriate.

PLANNED FIRE CONSIDERATIONS

Scheduling the attack of a target is often the most effective way to provide fire support. However, when

the time of attack approaches, the FSC must verify

whether or not the current situation warrants a change

in the scheduled air strike or fire mission. This also applies to timing of individual targets in a schedule of

fire. The FSC should specifically—

l Verify target and refinements with requesting unit

and controlling agency; i.e., can designated

controller still observe target, is it accurately

located and still viable?

l Verify ability of supporting arm to deliver fires.

l Consider the nature of the target. Priorities and

attack guidance may have changed since the air

strike or fire mission was scheduled.

l Cancel mission if no longer required or if

previously granted clearance has been canceled.

l Ensure that the delivery of fires does not pose

unnecessary danger to friendly units and that the

fires will not cause unnecessary interference with

active missions; e.g., aircraft crossing artillery

GTLs.

l Determine if any additional FSCMs are needed.

OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

To effectively coordinate fire support for an attack, the

fire support plan must be established and SOPs understood by all personnel concerned with fire support. The

plan must be flexible; it is usually easier to modify a

plan or deviate from it than to develop a new one.

All fire support personnel must keep abreast of the

developing friendly and enemy situations including

dispositions, capabilities and weaknesses, and their

tactics. Supporting arms commanders and their representatives must know, understand, and anticipate the

supported commander’s actions and requirements.

Once the attack starts, the FSCC should—

l Track targets fired on, the damage assessments

received, and the targets not fired on in scheduled

fires. Also, know the supporting arms assets that

will be switched from scheduled fires if a higher

priority target is reported unexpectedly.

l Track the execution of fires during different phases

of the attack. These will usually be fired when

assault elements reach a certain point or request

fires.

l Make use of priority targets. Shift priority targets

with the maneuver unit’s movement and with

changes in priorities of fire. Cancel priority targets

when not used or bypassed. 

l Clear artillery displacements to the crossing of phase

lines or objectives by supported maneuver unit.

Report this movement to artillery unit immediately.

l Shift fires when lead elements cross appropriate

control measures; e.g., phase line or coordinated

fire line (CFL). Ensure that communications are

maintained with whoever directs those fires.

l Track the location of the lead elements. This

facilitates rapid clearance of fire missions.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ 5-9

DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

Prompt action by FSCCs can be critical to defeating an

enemy attack. Although the enemy seeks surprise in

the attack, there are usually some warnings. When

these indicators appear, the S-2 should rapidly notify

the FSCC watch officer who should—

l Recall the principals; e.g., FSC, artillery LNO, AirO.

l Alert the supporting artillery, NSFS ships, mortars,

DASC, and next higher FSCC.

l Alert forward elements responsible for observing

target triggers.

l Correlate the S-2’s track of the enemy’s advance with

critical targets/killing zones in the fire support plan.

Modify planned fires as required to ensure fires are on

the probable locations of the enemy’s front line

positions (the area he will be in when he starts

exchanging fire with our front line units), his command

post, his reserves, the logistical supply area for his

attack units, and routes he will move his reserves over.

l Pass target data to supporting arms.

l Ensure the barrier and observation plan is coordinated with indirect and direct fires.

During the attack, the FSC should keep the big picture

in focus and use his supporting arms representatives to

attend to details associated with employing those assets. There are often more targets than can be handled

immediately. One of the keys to success is to use the

supporting arms where they most influence the action;

e.g., engagement areas that contain restrictive terrain.

TIMING THE DELIVERY OF FIRES

Methods for timing the delivery of fires must be wellunderstood by all units involved in fire support.

Synchronized Clock

Synchronization places all units on a common time.

The synchronized clock uses a specific hour and

minute based on local or universal time (as dictated by

operation order or unit SOP). This method makes coordination easier and is simple to establish. But, it requires all units to be placed on this established time

and periodic time checks. The synchronized clock is

established by the senior headquarters and disseminated to all maneuver and supporting arms units.

A local time zone may be used to establish the synchronized clock. The use of local time requires periodic, coordinated transmissions of time checks by the

senior headquarters.

Universal time is based on the Zulu Time Zone. Universal time facilitates establishment because supported

units/fire support agencies can independently access an

automated, continuous broadcast of time, by use of HF

radio on frequencies 10.000, 15.000, or 25.000 or by

telephoning DSN 762-1401. Universal time is particularly advantageous when operations involve joint forces and/or aircraft are operating from remote airfields.

Elapsed Time

Delivery of fires may be timed by specifying a number of

minutes (and seconds, as required) to elapse from a stated

countdown reference. Elapsed time is best used in immediate or time critical situations, when a synchronized

clock has not been established or its accuracy is doubtful.

It is often difficult to coordinate elapsed time when several units/fire support agencies are involved; e.g., a coordinated attack of a target by air, artillery, and NSFS.

Elapsed time may be expressed using the signal

MARK. A MARK is transmitted as follows: “TOT 5

minutes from my MARK . . . Standby, MARK.” The

fires are timed to impact exactly when the specified

time has elapsed from the transmission of the

“MARK.” The term, “MARK,” is used when transmitting to artillery, NSFS, and mortar units.

Elapsed time may also be expressed using the signal

HACK. HACK is used to transmit the time-to-target

(TTT) for immediate or on call CAS. The term

“HACK” is used when transmitting to an aircraft/air

control agency. A HACK is transmitted by specifying

the number of minutes and seconds to elapse before

ordnance is to impact on the target. For example “8

(minutes understood) plus 00 (seconds understood) . . .

HACK.” The countdown commences precisely at the

transmission of “HACK.” 

Event-Oriented

Timing of fires may be in relation to a specific event;

e.g., H-hour or H-5, crossing of phase lines, etc.
5-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

SECTION IV. CLEARANCE OF IMMEDIATE

FIRE SUPPORT REQUESTS

Although fire support planning tries to identify and coordinate all required targets and fire support tasks,

there will always be previously unlocated enemy formations or lucrative targets identified during the execution of a plan. Rapid clearance of these targets is

crucial in a battalion FSCC to provide responsive fires.

The FSCC must understand current friendly locations

and their tactical situation, fire support capabilities,

and maintain communications connectivity. The

FSCC’s goal should be to verify, and if necessary, approve the request in less time than it takes for the supporting arms unit to be ready to fire, thereby causing

no delay, if processed concurrently. The FSCC must

quickly assess the following factors to determine the

“best capable” asset to furnish the required support. 

OBSERVER’S REQUEST

The observer is generally in the best position to observe the target and determine the required asset and

munitions. If possible, the requested asset should be

used to attack the target. But because the observer is

only concerned with a small portion of the battlespace,

he may not understand the overall situation with fire

support assets; e.g., an artillery FO sends a call for fire

to the battalion FSCC requesting artillery. The artillery

battalion, supporting the regiment, is massing for a

higher priority mission and is unavailable. The FSC

knows that he has a NGF ship in DS of the battalion.

The FSC directs the NGLO to transfer the mission to

the NGF ship and coordinate observation of fires with

the FO through the artillery LNO.

COORDINATION

During top-down planning, fires are planned and integrated to optimize their effects. Due to the time-sensitivity of an immediate request, the FSCC must quickly

conduct the coordination with higher and adjacent

units, normally done during the fire support planning

process, to coordinate the fires. 

FSCMs Method

FSCMs facilitate timely and safe use of fire support.

When properly used, FSCMs enhance the accomplishment of the mission. For example, a properly placed coordinated fire line makes reactive counterfire more

responsive since there are less coordination requirements.

Effective counterfire allows the supported unit to maneuver freely and use its supporting indirect fires proactively.

The application of FSCMs varies with the operation and

target density. FSCMs can assist in reducing the level of

coordination/clearance for various mission scenarios.

Figure 5-3 illustrates a series of coordination situations.

Figure 5-3. Clearance Requirements.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-11

For 2d Bn, 1st Mar to fire on AC 3001, only internal

clearance is needed (internal communications nets).

For 3d Bn, 1st Mar to fire on AC 3001, clearance from

2d Bn, 1st Mar is needed since the target plots in 2/1’s

zone of action and is below the CFL established by 1st

Mar (1st Mar FS coordination net).

For 2d Bn, 1st Mar to conduct an airstrike on AC

0720, clearance must be obtained from 1st Mar. 2d Bn

should inform and if necessary coordinate with 3d Bn

on the 1st Mar FSC net. If necessary, 1st Marines

should also coordinate with 5th Marines on Division

FS Coordination Net concerning the routing of the aircraft into and out of 1st Marines zone.

All adjacent units desiring to fire on AD 2100 must get

clearance from 5th Mar via the Division FS Coordination Net. No CFL is established and the target is in 5th

Marines’ zone.

For 2d Bn, 1st Mar to fire on AC 0021, clearance is

not required since target is beyond CFL; however, 3/1

should be informed via the Regimental FS Coordination net as to the nature of the target and its effects. 

All 1st MarDiv units desiring to fire on AN 0010 must

coordinate with 3d MarDiv before firing. The target is

in 3d MarDiv’s zone of action. If 2/5 wants to fire on

AN 0010, they may be able to coordinate directly with

the adjacent battalion in 3d Mar Div.

AA 0900 is inside I MEF’s forward boundary and beyond the FSCL. Fires beyond the FSCL do not require

coordination but do require units or assets in the

MEF’s zone of action (reconnaissance teams or aviation assets) to inform the MEF of the fires against the

target. To affect this, units desiring to attack targets

beyond the FSCL must inform higher, adjacent, and

supporting units.

For 2d Bn, 1st Mar to fire on KA 1000, 2/1 must coordinate through 1st Mar. 1st Mar would coordinate

through 1st MARDIV with I MEF, who would contact

the XVIII ABN Corps for approval. 2/1 may be able to

coordinate directly with the adjacent battalion within

XVIII ABN Corps. 

For the naval component commander (NCC) to fire

on AN 1001, the NCC must coordinate with I MEF

for approval. The target is in the MEF’s zone short of

the MEF forward boundary, but beyond the FSCL. If

resolution cannot be achieved, then the JFC would

effect coordination.

Attached Army multiple launched rocket system

(MLRS) units are capable of delivering two types of

fires: rocket and ATACMS. Rocket fires are cleared

the same as cannon artillery fires. However,

ATACMS fires include activation/deactivation of

platoon airspace hazards (PAHs) and target air hazards

(TAHs) since they normally engage targets well

beyond the FSCL. 

Gun-Target Line Method

GTLs are used in conjunction with coordinating air

and indirect fires. It is an imaginary straight line from

the guns to and through the target. Often selecting the

unit to fire based on the GTL line can make the difference in the effects of fires on a target and when fires

are lifted due to the proximity of friendly troops. The

regular exchange of information between an FSCC

and the FDC; e.g., locations of artillery positions or locations of maneuver units to FDC enhances selecting

units to fire based on GTL geometry. The importance

of GTLs in fire support coordination is illustrated in

examples 1 and 2, page 5-12.

In example 1 on page 5-12, the artillery is to support

an infantry company’s attack on an enemy position.

Dispersion of points of impact of mortar and artillery

shells is greater along the GTL than on either side of

the line. Selecting Battery A rather than Battery B to

fire on the objective allows the infantry to advance

closer before lifting fires due to the GTL. The artillery

battalion FDC normally selects the battery to fire.

Therefore, the FSC may be required to request a specific unit to fire, if possible.

In example 2 on page 5-12, NGF and artillery can

range the target. The target is a suitable type for both

artillery and NGF. However, the target is parallel to

the GTL of the ship positioned at FSS 2. Dispersion of

point of impact of NGF is greater along the GTL than

on either side of the line and is more pronounced than

the dispersion of artillery and mortars. Therefore, the

FSCC selects NGF to conduct the engagement.
5-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

WEAPONEERING

Weaponeering is selecting the appropriate weapon

and munitions based on the desired effects and the

lethality or nonlethality of a specific munition.

For example, the battalion FSCC has POF of an artillery battalion, which is not currently being used,

and a section of AV-8Bs are holding at a contact

point. A commander wishes to neutralize an enemy

mechanized company to delay the enemy’s ability

to support its breaching operations. The FSC may

EXAMPLE 1

Selection of a Particular Gun-Target Line

EXAMPLE 2

Selection of a Supporting Arm Based on Gun-Target Line
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-13

choose artillery fires to meet the task because of its

ability to maintain fires for a period of time and the

lethality of DPICM against mechanized armor.

Should the commander wish to destroy the enemy’s

breaching vehicles, the FSCC may choose the section of AV-8Bs since they are more precision-capable to strike individual vehicles than artillery. Or,

the FSC may choose to use artillery and EW aviation for a combined arms effect. 

WEAPONS RESPONSIVENESS

AND RANGE

The FSCC must consider the amount of time that a

weapon system requires to respond and its ability to

operate under the current weather or illumination conditions. The requested system must have the range to

engage the target.

ACCURACY

Target location error (TLE) is the major contributor to

ineffective fires. The FSCC must consider the observers ability to accurately determine the target’s location. Does the observer have a GPS receiver or a laser

range finder? While not using these tools should not

preclude the FSCC from clearing fires, all participants

must understand the ramification of TLE against munitions effectiveness. Another consideration is the

weapon’s ability to locate the target and achieve the

desired effects. Laser spot trackers, forward looking

infrared (FLIR), naval telecommunications system

(NTS), target location designation hands-off system

(TLDHS), and modular universal laser equipment

(MULE) increase the chances to effect the target.

THE THREAT

The FSCC must visualize the current enemy situation

and capabilities. The enemy’s ability must be assessed

against the use of a particular fire support asset. The existence of a threat may be prohibitive to a fire support

asset and cause the FSCC to either react to the threat or

find another asset that is not affected in order to complete the mission. For example, a company requests 15

minutes of artillery suppression on an objective. The

enemy is known to have counterbattery radar and an

active counterfire ability. The FSCC must decide if this

threat precludes the firing of the mission with indirect

fire or determine the means to mitigate the enemy’s

ability to acquire by requesting jamming or aviation to

locate and destroy the counterbattery radar.

SECTION V. INTEGRATING AND COORDINATING

AIR SUPPORT

One of the most challenging tasks performed by an

FSCC is integrating and coordinating air support with

surface fires. The overarching goal is integrating fire support assets and maneuver to achieve the desired effects

from the air attack without suspending the use of the other supporting arms or unnecessarily delaying the scheme

of maneuver. An additional goal is to offer a reasonable

measure of protection to the aircraft from the unintended

effects of our own surface fires and enemy fires.

INFORM SUPPORTING ARMS UNITS

When an air attack is requested, the FSC of the originating unit (battalion, regiment, or division) informs

other concerned FSCCs and supporting arms units on

the details of the mission as quickly as possible. The

FSC will pass the aircrafts’ time of arrival on station

and tentative CAS TOT or CAS TTT. All timing for

SEAD fires is based on a specific aircraft event time;

e.g., CAS TOT/TTT on assault support L-hour. In

immediate SEAD fire missions, the aircraft event

time becomes the zero hour or H-hour for scheduling.

The preferred method for coordinating timing is the

use of a previously established synchronized clock. If

a synchronized clock has not been established or is

not universally available, an elapsed time may be

used to coordinate timing. The FSC must also coordinate the route of the aircraft into and out of the units

zone and ensure that the aircraft route does not adversely impact adjacent units.
5-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

DETERMINE SURFACE FIRES 

TO SUPPORT AIR ATTACK

The two primary forms of support are target marking

and SEAD. They are often used together.

Target Marking

Whenever possible, a mark, with a back-up planned,

should be provided to CAS aircraft. Targets can be

marked by various means, including laser, artillery,

mortars, NSFS, direct fire, another aircraft, or IR

pointer. If none of these methods are available then the

target should be identified by narrative description

given by the terminal controller. 

The mark is best coordinated directly by the FO and

FAC working together, with the FO relaying instructions directly to the firing unit. Usually it is desirable to

have the marking round burst 20-30 seconds before the

aircraft’s bombs impact on the target. WP usually provides an adequate mark although in high winds it

quickly dissipates. Illumination is also usable as a

mark. Illumination can be set to function and burn on

the ground, or it can be set to function slightly above

ground level for certain conditions; e.g., marking in

snow. The M825 fired as a graze burst provides a large,

long duration mark but is usually a limited commodity. 

SEAD

The need for SEAD is assessed after evaluating options for routing aircraft away from known antiair

threats. SEAD is that activity that neutralizes, destroys, or temporarily degrades enemy air defenses in

a specific area by physical attack and/or EW. It may be

accomplished through destructive means (indirect fire,

direct fire, air attack or raids), disruptive means (EW,

deception or flight tactics), or a combination of both.

The primary objective of SEAD is to destroy or degrade enemy surface-to-air defense capabilities, thereby increasing freedom of action and survivability of

aircraft. Specific SEAD objectives will vary with the

MAGTF’s mission. SEAD involves planning and coordination from the company level up through the senior FSCC.

Localized and immediate SEAD are two types of

planned SEAD; opportune SEAD is against targets of

opportunity. Localized SEAD is usually done at the

highest levels to ensure an area is clear of enemy air

defense assets. Immediate SEAD is also planned and

is similar to an on call mission. Opportune SEAD is

generally used with immediate CAS requests. It requires terminal controllers to perform the immediate

coordination of aircraft and indirect fires. (This is usually when the SEAD CFF is used.)

SEAD is most frequently delivered in support of a specific air attack. This involves attacking air defense

weapons that can threaten friendly aircraft in the immediate vicinity of the target and on the aircrafts’ ingress and egress routes. SEAD is normally planned in

a schedule of fires or as a specific program. However,

during an immediate CAS mission fire support personnel at the battalions and companies may have to perform opportune SEAD missions against air defense

assets that had not been previously identified. See

MCWP 3-16.6, Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter,

and Controller Handbook, chapter 8.

Conducting SEAD with other supporting arms; e.g.,

mortars or artillery normally requires firing at the sustained rate of fire for a short period. SEAD effectiveness depends on accurate target location. The FSC,

working with the FAC and FO, usually coordinates

SEAD with target marking. For detailed information

on SEAD, see MCWP 3-22.2, Suppression of Enemy

Air Defenses. 

Figure 5-4 on page 5-15 is an example of the steps

and radio transmissions during a CAS mission with

SEAD. As necessary information becomes available,

some steps are completed simultaneously. The example illustrates coordination requirements. Specific

aircraft tactics may differ. The FSC is assisting in

immediate airspace coordination based on his situational awareness.

Step 1: CAS requested. Information FSCCs need to

establish airspace coordination is included in the request; e.g., target location, IP, egress instructions, desired time of air strike, and special instructions such as

offset. Standard request is in tactical air support request format.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-15

Step 2: FO requests SEAD fires on known AAA

weapon in zone and a marking of target with artillery.

FSCC monitors.

“Artillery Battalion, this is FO, SEAD, OVER. Grid to

suppress—561240, grid to mark—548250, over. SA-9 in

open, DPICM, continuous, standby for CAS TOT, over.”

Step 3: 2d Bn, 1st Mar FSCC plots CAS mission on

map using appropriate flight profile. FSC determines

additional threat at 526248. The FSC instructs NGLO

to initiate a SEAD mission on grid 526248. The spotter monitors and informs FO.

“Ship, this is NGLO, SEAD fire mission, target

number AA2335, OVER. Grid to suppress—

526248, altitude 120, direction 5110, ZSU 23-4,

HE/CVT, 1 gun, 30 Salvos, continuous, standby for

CAS TOT, over.”

Step 4: The FSC determines what airspace coordination is needed. He selects lateral separation for the artillery fires on grid 561240. He selects altitude

separation for the NGF on grid 526248 (NGLO determines maximum trajectory from FSA/FSS at the point

where aircraft will cross to be 2,500 feet MSL). The

FAC and FO are notified of the actions. 

“FO, this is Artillery LNO. CAS will stay north of artillery fires.” (Arty FDC monitors).

“FAC, this is AirO. Keep CAS north of artillery fires

at grid 561240, stay above 2,500 feet MSL on egress

to clear NGF on grid 526248.”

Step 5: The FSC requests clearance from adjacent Bn

FSCC for attack of target outside Bn’s zone and for

use if airspace (Regiment FSCC monitors and takes

action as required). 

“3d Battalion FSCC, this is 2d Battalion FSCC.

Request clearance on NGF SEAD on grid 526248 at

approximately 1019 through 1021. Egress south your

airspace at approximately 1020.”

Step 6: FAC briefs pilot. (Normal brief.)

Step 7: 3d Bn FSCC grants clearance. If the situation

changes, appropriate notification will be made. 

“2d Battalion FSCC, this is 3d Battalion FSCC, NGF

on grid 526248 cleared.”

Step 8: FAC sets CAS TOT (AirO monitors, informs

FSC). Final coordination commences.

“Artillery Battalion, this is FO, CAS TOT 1020, over.” 

[NOTE: Artillery marking round will impact at 1019:30;

SEAD fires will impact from 1019 through 1021.]

“Ship, this is NGLO, CAS TOT 1020, over.”

Figure 5-4. Sample CAS Mission with Opportune SEAD and Marking Support.
5-16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

DETERMINE REQUIRED

AIRSPACE COORDINATION

A function of fire support coordination is to coordinate

airspace usage when required. Indirect fire weapons

and aircraft require the use of airspace to perform their

missions. The ingress normally expressed as a final attack heading or final attack cone, egress routing of

CAS aircraft, and gun-target lines are the largest factors in identifying coordination requirements. Several

techniques may be employed. The method selected depends on the time available, tactical situation, unit

SOP, and state of training.

Airspace Coordination Areas

A formal ACA requires detailed planning. It is not always needed but should always be considered. Upper

and lower limits should be designed to allow freedom

of action for air and surface FS for the greatest number

of foreseeable targets. The artillery liaison officer and

the FDC can determine the trajectory for a specific

battery firing at a specific target to determine if it is

safe to fire while an ACA is in effect. The FSC should

consult the artillery liaison officer when deciding the

altitude of an ACA. The objective is to determine if

that altitude will allow the majority of targets to be attacked without interference problems.

Helicopter Operations

Helicopters require further coordination measures including helicopters employed to provide CAS, combat

assault transport, aerial observation, and medical evacuation (MEDEVAC). Helicopter flights, fixed-wing

aircraft flights, and indirect fires must be coordinated. 

Helicopter routes are used as approach and retirement

lanes for safe transit across the battlespace. They may

also be designated as ACAs when they are actually in

use by in-flight helicopters.

A holding area (HA) may be established for helicopters awaiting targets or missions. HAs serve as informal ACAs while in use. They provide the helicopter

an area and altitude in which to operate. HAs may be

established during planning or operations, are referred

to by name or number and effective time, and are activated when in use. For example—

Activation of Planned HA—HA Cobra, surface to

1,200 feet mean sea level or above ground level, effective (time) to (time).

Establish HA—HA Rattler, grid squares 0577 and

0677, surface to 500 feet mean sea level or above

ground level, effective (time) to (time).

The battle position (BP) is a maneuvering area that

contains firing points for attack helicopters. Like HAs,

BPs serve as informal ACAs while they are in use. The

planning and methods of establishment are also similar to those used for HAs. For more information on

HA/BPs, see MCWP 3-23.1, Close Air Support.

Separation Plans

Separation plans are another means of coordinating

airspace. There are four separation techniques to

achieve airspace coordination for CAS or other aircraft in the area of operations.

Lateral Separation (Adjacent Targets)

Lateral separation plans are for coordinating attacks

against two targets that are close together. The coordinator must know the GTL so the FAC/AO can restrict

any aircraft crossing this line. Establishing a temporary, informal ACA is one way to do this. The aircraft

(and/or airborne controller) are kept away from indirect supporting fires by lateral separation. For example, “Aircraft stay north of artillery fires at grid

561240.” Or, “Aircraft stay north of the 24 grid line

from easting 50 to 60.” The ACA should be large

enough so that aircraft can operate over the target, yet

small enough so that supporting fires are not too restricted. The ACA can be defined by grid coordinates,

grid lines, geographical features, or time. Figure 5-5

on page 5-17 illustrates lateral separation.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-17

Altitude Separation (Same Target)

Altitude separation plans can be used when CAS and indirect supporting fires are employed on the same target. The

altitude restriction ensures clearance from both direct and

indirect fire weapon’s fragmentation pattern. For aircraft

attacking the same target that is being suppressed, the altitude separation can be computed using the appropriate altitude in figure 5-6. See also figure 5-7 on page 5-18.

Figure 5-6. Recommended Altitude Separation for 

Weapon System Effects.

Altitude and Lateral Separation (Different Targets)

When CAS engages a target that requires crossing a

GTL, altitude restrictions can be computed based on

where the indirect fires trajectory intersects the final

attack cone. It can also be used for support aircraft

crossing GTLs (see figure 5-8 on page 5-19). Required

information for computations includes—

l Aircraft final attack cone.

l Firing unit location, munition type and charge to be fired.

l Firing unit range to target and vertical interval 

(target altitude - battery altitude = VI).

Computations for altitude and lateral separation lend to

coordinating preplanned CAS. With adequate training

they can be used with immediate CAS (see figure 5-9 on

page 5-20). Computations require trajectory charts from

the appropriate tabular firing tables (HE and DPICM)

and a final attack cone template. When altitudes are

passed, specify as above ground level or mean sea level. 

Supporting

Arm

Method of

Fire

Altitude

Restriction

(in feet AGL)

Artillery Low Angle 2,000

Naval Gunfire All Charges 2,000 

Mortars MAX ORD

Tank Main Gun 2,000 

LAV 25mm Gun 3,000 

M2 .50 caliber 3,000 

Figure 5-5. Artillery-Aircraft Lateral Separation.
5-18 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Figure 5-7. Artillery-Aircraft Altitude and Lateral Separation.

Determining the Ordinate at a Point Along the Trajectory

Determine the GTL and the firing unit range to target.

Determine the munition type and charge being fired.

Determine vertical interval (VI=Tgt Altitude - Firing Unit Altitude in meters).

Determine where the final attack heading or cone crosses the GTL and the gun target range at those points.

Refer to the appropriate trajectory chart by munition/charge and determine the arc corresponding to range to target.

Determine the altitude (in meters) corresponding to the ranges where the final attack cone crosses the gun target line by tracing the arc to those ranges.

Highest altitude + VI = ALT 1. Multiply by 33 to covert to feet 

(Note: if the final attack cone straddles the summit of the trajectory, use Max Ord for ALT 1).

Lowest altitude + VI = ALT 2. Multiply by 33 to convert to feet.

Incorporate a 1000 foot buffer for nonstandard conditions.

ALT 1 + 1000=STAY ABOVE (expressed to the next highest 100 feet AGL).

ALT 2 - 1000=STAY BELOW (expressed to the next lowest 100 feet AGL).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-19

Time Separation (Same or Different Target)

Time separation may be required when aircraft cannot

be routed away from indirect-fire trajectories. This

technique requires the timing of fires to be coordinated

with the routing of aircraft so that even though aircraft

and indirect fires may occupy the same space, they do

not do so at the same time. For low-level CAS attacks,

time separation can be used when aircraft are attacking

targets just short of indirect fires along the GTL. See

figure 5-10 on page 5-21.

NIGHT CLOSE AIR SUPPORT

Attacking moving targets or providing CAS at night is

limited to low threat situations. In a night high threat

scenario, current capability is very limited. The most

important advantage of night CAS is the limitation it

imposes on all enemy optically-sighted antiaircraft artillery (AAA) and infrared (IR) surface-to-air missiles

(SAMs). This is particularly true if operators do not

have night vision devices. Airborne and ground illumination may degrade enemy night vision capabilities.

Darkness imposes limitations on using CAS. During

night and twilight, pilots have more difficulty visually

locating targets and accurately distinguishing enemy

and friendly forces.

Night CAS missions require extensive planning.

TACPs must emphasize target and friendly force identification and the availability of target designation/illumination assets.

Target Identifiers

Although executing CAS missions at night has

many advantages, darkness and unfavorable weather exasperates the problem for aviators to identify

targets. To increase aviation assets effectiveness

and strive for first pass hits, fire support planners

Figure 5-8. Altitude Restriction Computations.
5-20 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

must consider multiple and redundant means to aid

aviators in identifying targets.

Airborne Illumination

Most USMC aircraft capable of providing CAS can

employ flares that provide illumination for up to 3

minutes. See MCWP 3-23, Offensive Air Support.

Surface Delivered Illumination

Illumination can be delivered by artillery, mortars, and

NSFS to illuminate the target area. If more than one illumination round is employed, pilots must be briefed.

Illumination on the deck has a tendency to degrade

NVG performance and disorient pilots. Use of 81mm

mortar red phosphorous may also be considered for

night CAS MARKS. 

Enemy Ground Fire

Enemy ground fire, AAA, tracer rounds, and SAM firings can disclose target locations.

Laser Designators and IR Pointers

These tools can enhance night target acquisition. CAS

aircraft with laser spot trackers can acquire targets

marked by a designator without using conventional illumination. FACs and terminal controllers armed with

IR pointers can identify targets to pilots using NVGs

quicker than by “talking-on.” Coordination is paramount between the ground unit, FAC, and CAS aircraft. Controllers and aviators must be wary of the

number of pointers used by adjacent friendly units and

the enemy. If there are a number of IR beams in the

area, it will be difficult for CAS aircraft to identify the

correct target area. All USMC aircraft can acquire laser or IR illuminated targets.

Figure 5-9. Artillery-Aircraft Altitude Separation.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-21

Figure 5-10. Artillery-Aircraft Timed Separation.
5-22 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Friendly Positions

Marking friendly positions improves CAS safety and can

provide target area references. Whenever possible, friendly

positions should be marked if safe separation is a factor.

Flares in the air, such as pyrotechnics and 40mm illumination grenades, are effective marks but are usually

visible to the enemy. Wind and cloud cover are important factors in using flares successfully at night.

Strobe lights, if available, can be used for night marking. Infrared filters can be installed when using NVGs

and FLIR-equipped aircraft.

Any light source that can be readily covered and

uncovered can be used for coded signaling. Vehicle headlights are useful nighttime marks, but

for security, cover headlights and use tail or

brake lights.

SECTION VI. DASC-FSCC COORDINATION

Upon phasing control ashore, the DASC directs OAS

and assault support functions under the operational

control of the TACC. The DASC is the principal air

control agency responsible for directing aviation operations that support ground forces. The DASC processes

requests for OAS, assault support, and reconnaissance.

It provides procedural control for aircraft transiting its

area of operations and coordinates with the ground

force on routes, FARPs, frequencies, and airspace control measures.

The DASC or a DASC liaison team collocates with

the GCE FSCC for the most effective integration of

direct air support missions. This ensures the most

economical use of resources for a timely, flexible response to requests from the MAGTF. When collocation is not possible; e.g., with a GCE FSCC in a fast

moving mobile operation or during displacements,

reliable communications must be established between the two agencies. See MCWP 3-25.5, Direct

Air Support Center Handbook.

DASC RESPONSIBILITIES

The DASC is responsible to provide timely information to the FSCC on—

l Aircraft routing plans.

l BDAs reported by air crews.

l The status of outstanding requests.

l Pertinent intelligence data.

l Recommended FSCMs as they relate to air support.

l Changes to the ATO.

l UAV operations to preclude interference with

surface fires.

l Air defense weapons status.

l Aircraft availability to satisfy joint tactical air strike

requests (JTARs)/assault support requests (ASRs).

l Validation on requirements if requests were not

received over TAR/HR.

l Diverts aircraft from preplanned missions if required.

l Recommendations on air allocation.

l Recommended alert status of aircraft (alert 15, 30,

60, etc.).

l FARP status.

FSCC RESPONSIBILITIES

The FSCC continuously provides the DASC with pertinent information. The point to remember is that the

DASC pictures the battlefield based on the information it is provided by the FSCC, other MACCS agencies, and reports received from pilots. Information

passed by the FSCC to the DASC includes—

l Boundaries, FSCMs, and maneuver checkpoints.

l Positions of indirect fire weapons.

l Pertinent intelligence data, especially antiair threats.

l Friendly unit locations.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-23

l Scheme of maneuver, objectives, and the commander’s

intent.

l Air targets that require terminal control that exceeds

the GCE’s organic TACP capability; e.g., FAC(A).

l Status of terminal controllers with the GCE.

l Schedules of fire (and changes).

l LAAD locations (if LAAD is in DS of the GCE).

SECTION VII. COUNTERFIRE COLLECTING

AND REPORTING

Counterfire is fire intended to destroy or neutralize the

enemy indirect fire capability. It provides freedom of

maneuver and unrestricted use of friendly indirect fire

support. Units must be prepared to determine and report counterfire information.

Counterfire information produces intelligence on the

location, number, disposition, zones of fire, caliber,

and type of enemy artillery, mortar, and rocket weapons. It has great value in estimating enemy tactical capabilities. Counterfire information may also disclose

new types of enemy ammunition and weapons, a

knowledge that may permit early development of effective countermeasures.

COLLECTION MEANS

Some means used to collect information are crater and

shell fragment analysis, SHELREPs, and detection by

target acquisition devices; e.g., radars, air and ground

observation, electronic signatures, and target prediction. Counterfire information is forwarded by observers to the FSCC in the most direct manner for

processing. The SHELREP usually provides the medium for this reporting. The SHELREP allows for cueing of artillery radars in the appropriate search sector

to locate the weapon. The FSCC will use this information to locate the enemy firing agency. Based on commander’s guidance, several sources of information,

intelligence or reports may be required to confirm target location. Once the target meets the criteria, the

FSCC will task an agency to perform counterfire.

Chapter 3, section IV discusses the planning sequence

for counterfire.

REACTIVE COUNTERFIRE

Proactive counterfire based on IPB is the preferred

counterfire method. However, not all enemy indirect

fire can be destroyed prior to commencing an attack. 

Reactive counterfire normally requires quick response

capabilities for optimum effectiveness. MCRP 3-16B,

Targeting and Procedures for Time Critical Targeting, has an indepth discussion of attacking time-sensitive targets. Aviation assets provide an excellent

source to provide reactive counterfire, particularly outside the GCE’s area of influence. An air quick fire

channel, TAD-UHF net can be established between

the counterfire section in the FDC, FSCC, or a

FAC(A). Upon target acquisition, the AirO hands off

the mission to the FAC(A), who executes with available CAS. Prior coordination with the DASC and coordination techniques for maneuver and indirect fires

must be incorporated into the fire support plan.

SECTION VIII. FAMILY OF SCATTERABLE MINES

Artillery and air delivered mines provide the

maneuver commander with a rapid, flexible means of

delaying, canalizing, or attriting enemy forces in

offensive and defensive operations. Family of

scatterable mines (FASCAM) can also augment

conventional minefield capability. The engineer

officer and the G-3/S-3 at each level of command

share the primary staff responsibility for the planning
5-24 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

and employment of mines. The engineer advises the

G-3 on the use of all minefield systems, including

FASCAM. The G-3/S-3 recommends priorities,

delegation of employment to subordinates, restrictions

on usage, and positioning of minefields. The FSC has

two responsibilities in incorporating FASCAM into

the unit’s minefield program: advising the supported

unit on the capabilities and limitations of FASCAM

and keeping the supporting arms notified as far in

advance as possible of the supported unit’s intentions

to use FASCAM. The delivery of FASCAM may

require approval from higher headquarters.

AIR DELIVERED MINES

Air delivered FASCAM has the same advantages of artillery FASCAM but can be employed anywhere aviation flies. The major difference between the two is that

air delivered FASCAM has three selectable times: 4

hours, 48 hours or 15 days. Artillery has two options

discussed below. Both types of mines are found in one

piece of ordnance: the GATOR, CBU 78. It consists of

60 submunitions: 45 BLU-91B antitank and 15 BLU92B antipersonnel mines. The mines arm themselves

within two minutes of deployment. The BLU-91B employs the same warhead and functions as remote antiarmor mine system (RAAMS). The BLU-92B employs

an omni-directional warhead and a fragmentation case

to create its antipersonnel effect. It employs four 40 feet

tripwires for detection. GATOR is best suited for preplanned missions. They are requested using the JTAR

via normal air request channels. Regardless of the location of air delivered mines in relation to the FSCL, the

use of air delivered mines is coordinated because of

their obvious effect on future operations.

ARTILLERY DELIVERED MINES

RAAMS and area denial artillery munition (ADAM)

each come in two preset self-destruct times: short duration (4 hours) and long duration (48 hours). Mines

begin self-destructing at 80 percent of the stated time.

Both munitions have an approximate 4.5 percent dud

rate. When both munitions are employed together, fire

ADAM last. 

RAAMS (M718-L and M741-S)

RAAMS are used to achieve tactical kills on tanks and

other armored vehicles. Each projectile contains nine

mechanically fuzed, antitank mines. Upon arming (approximately 45 seconds after impact), the mine uses

electromagnetic signature to detonate a shaped charge

at the vehicle when it passes over the top of the mine.

Mines function right side up or down, but only achieve

mobility kills at cants of greater than 30 degrees. Some

mines have an anti-disturbance feature.

ADAM (M692-L and M731-S)

ADAM projectiles are used against personnel. Each

projectile contains 36 antipersonnel mines. Upon fuze

function of the projectile, individual mines are dispersed over the target area. While arming (complete

by 2 minutes after impact), each mine deploys 7 antidisturbance, tripwire sensors. When disturbed, the

mine propels its munition 3-8 feet into the air, detonating into 600 1.5 grain steel fragments. When employed in combination with other projectiles, ADAM

rounds are always the last rounds fired.

MINEFIELD TARGET CATEGORIES

Two types of minefield target categories may be employed using FASCAM: planned and targets of opportunity. The type used depends on the amount of

planning and coordination time available and the desired density of the minefield. The primary reference

for minefield employment is MCWP 3-16.4/FM 6-40,

Manual Cannon Gunnery.

Planned minefields are normally initiated and coordinated at higher echelons. They are planned as scheduled or on call to support barrier/obstacle plans.

Planned minefields can consist of either short or long

duration mines.

Targets of opportunity are immediate minefields initiated by calls for fire or unplanned operational changes.

They consist of short duration mines delivered in preplanned or standard planning modules. Normally, a

standard target of opportunity minefield is an adjusted,

low angle, short duration, 200 x 400 RAAMS, 400 x

400 ADAM, medium density field. Depending on variables, this consists of approximately 36 to 48 RAAMS
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-25

and 12 ADAM projectiles. Authorization to employ

FASCAM and the number of howitzers immediately

available to fire is a large factor in responsiveness.

Firing Unit Considerations

Three factors must be considered when employing artillery delivered FASCAM: the counterfire threat,

availability of the desired munition, and how long the

artillery unit will be occupied firing. The FSC must

coordinate with the firing agency prior to execution to

ensure responsiveness.

Minefield Density and Size

Standard minefield modules are 400 by 400 meters for

ADAM and high angle RAAMS. Low angle RAAMS

use a 200 x 200 meter module. The width of the field

is always applied as a multiple of the module planning

size. Lengths determine the number of aim points and

are always the longest axis. 

There are three basic minefield types categorized by

required density: low, medium, and high density. Density depends on the mission of the minefield. A low

density minefield harasses an enemy but is quickly

breached. A medium density field will provide an effective obstacle if the minefield is covered with direct

fire and enemy vehicles are buttoned up. High density

fields require considerable clearing and are useful for

forces that are heavily outnumbered and cannot provide adequate covering fires for the obstacle or need

time to withdraw to subsequent positions.

Ammunition availability, unit positioning, and delivery

capabilities provide an estimate of how many meters of

minefield are available. The basic allowance for FASCAM for a unit is low and normally restricted to short

duration mines. To use significant quantities of FASCAM requires added logistical planning and a decision

to use ammunition transport assets to move FASCAM

at the expense of other, more widely used munitions.

Minefields should be emplaced using all available units

rather than firing one unit for a long duration.

SAFETY ZONE DETERMINATION

The safety zone represents the effective obstacle for

friendly forces as it contains spillover mines from

the targeted area (99 percent within the safety

zone). No friendly forces should be located within

the safety zones prior to emplacement nor maneuver

through them before destruction. The FSC is responsible for obtaining safety zones. Safety zones

for preplanned minefields are computed by the FSC

for incorporation by the engineer and distribution

by the G-3. Safety zones for short duration minefields are computed by the artillery FDC and forwarded to higher headquarters via the FSC after the

mission is completed. The engineer officer coordinates the field artillery planning sheet with the FSC.

Automated fire support systems (like AFATDS) can

determine safety zones for FASCAM minefields.

See figure 5-11.

Fired Minefield Data

See table 5-1. Use the following fired minefield data: 

l Type of projectile fired (ADAM or RAAMS).

l Trajectory (high or low angle).

Figure 5-11. Safety Zone Example.
5-26 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

. 

l Range to minefield center.

l Technique (met + velocity error [VE]/transfer or

observer adjust).

l Aimpoint coordinates (single or left and right).

Enter the table at the nearest range for the projectile

type and trajectory and use the correct employment

technique column to determine the size of the safety

zone. Draw the determined safety zone centered over

each aimpoint to establish the minefield safety zone.

Minefield Safety Template

l Enter the template with the fired minefield data.

l Technique (met + VE/transfer or observer adjust).

l Trajectory (high or low angle).

l Type projectile fired (RAMMS or ADAM).

l Range (to minefield center).

l Aimpoint coordinates (center or left and right). 

Center the selected template safety zone square over

the aim points. Draw a square to establish the minefield safety zone. See figure 5-12 on page 5-27.

DA FORM 5032-R, FIELD ARTILLERY 

DELIVERED MINEFIELD PLANNING SHEET

The delivery unit initiates the scatterable minefield

report. For the artillery, the battalion receiving the call

for fire designates the firing units. After the minefield

is emplaced, the fired data is forwarded to the division,

regiment, or battalion FSCC. The fired data is

recorded on DA Form 5032-R, Field Artillery

Delivered Minefield Planning Sheet, Section D. (See

FM 6-40/MCWP 3-16.4). The FSCC computes the

safety zone according to the fired data and passes it to

the engineer for dissemination to higher, lower, and

adjacent units as appropriate.

Interdiction or Area Denial

Artillery-delivered scatterable mines are not well-suited for interdiction or area denial. Because artillery-delivered minefields tend to be small and of low density

(low ammunition availability), they are easily bypassed and/or breached. FA-delivered mines are poorly suited for interdicting roads because—

l Mines tend to break up or malfunction when they

land on a hard surface road.

l Mines are easy to see against the uniform

background of a road.

l Units on roads are already moving in column and

columns are the best formations for breaching

scatterable minefields. 

If RAAMS and ADAM are used for interdiction or area denial, employ them—

l Only at choke points to keep the enemy from easily

bypassing the minefield.

l In high-density fields to prevent breaching.

l When and where they are hard to detect; e.g., in

limited visibility (at night or in fog) or where the

enemy will be buttoned up (as in a chemically

contaminated area).

Table 5-1. Minefield Safety Zone.

Projectile &

Trajectory

Range 

(KM)

MET & 

VE/Transfer

Technique

Observer

Adjust

Technique

RAAMS

Low-Angle

4 500 x 500 500 x 500

7 550 x 550 500 x 500

10 700 x 700 550 x 550

12 850 x 850 550 x 550

14 1000 x 1000 650 x 650

16 1050 x 1050 650 x 650

17.5 1200 x 1200 650 x 650

ADAM

Low-Angle

4 700 x 700 700 x 700

7 750 x 750 700 x 700

10 900 x 900 750 x 750

12 1050 x 1050 750 x 750

14 1200 x 1200 850 x 850

16 1250 x 1250 850 x 850

17.5 1400 x 1400 850 x 850

RAAMS or ADAM

High-Angle

4 750 x 750 700 x 700

7 900 x 900 700 x 700

10 1050 x 1050 750 x 750

12 1200 x 1200 750 x 750

14 1400 x 1400 850 x 850

16 1500 x 1500 850 x 850

17.5 1400 x 1400 850 x 850
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-27

EMPLOYMENT AS AN OBSTACLE

Any type of FASCAM should be employed according

to the basic principles of minefield employment.

Employ mines at a choke point.

Cover mines with effective direct fire and indirect fire

by using HE-VT or DPICM.

Keep minefields under continuous observation. Use

night observation devices and planned illumination

targets at night.

Emplace minefields in belts if possible. It is better to

force the enemy to breach three narrow minefields

than to have him breach one wide one.

Plan to defeat enemy breaching efforts. Coordinate

with the S2 and engineer to anticipate how and where

the enemy will try to breach the minefield. Plan direct

and indirect fires to defeat enemy breaching parties. 

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

FASCAM in general presents a unique planning challenge for fire support personnel because it is visible and

vulnerable on the surface of the terrain. This leads to—

l Reducing the enemy’s ability to see; use indirect

fire to make him button up.

l Minimizing indirect fires on top of the FASCAM.

This represents a judgment call. Firing on the

minefield destroys breaching parties, but it also

makes the minefield easier to breach by destroying

the exposed mines. 

One compromise is to concentrate indirect fires on targets immediately beyond the minefield and direct fires

on targets in the minefield. If a mine plow or other

mine-clearing vehicle enters the minefield and clears a

lane, following vehicles will have to bunch up to enter

the lane and may present a good target. 

Figure 5-12. MIne Safety Template.
5-28 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

If the enemy has cleared a lane and is on the verge of

breaching the minefield, consider firing a heavy concentration of smoke and/or DPICM directly on top of

the minefield. Smoke should obscure the remaining

mines as well as the clear lane markers that the vehicles are trying to follow. Using smoke will have to be

carefully coordinated, since it will inhibit friendly direct fire weapons. However, a fire mission of this type

should be on call in case the enemy places smoke in

between your maneuver force and the minefield to

screen his breaching efforts. If the enemy fires smoke

first, it is to your advantage to shoot the minefield with

smoke and/or DPICM to disrupt his crossing efforts. 

TIMING

Artillery-delivered scatterable mines introduce another

planning problem—timing. Firing mines too early

gives the enemy time to avoid them, limits friendly

freedom to maneuver, and can result in the mines selfdestructing too early. Firing mines too late can result

in their landing behind attacking enemy forces. This is

why the trigger point for firing RAAMS and/or

ADAM must be very carefully coordinated between

the S2, S3, and FSC. The trigger point for firing artillery-delivered mines must meet two criteria: 

l When the enemy reaches the trigger point, he must

be committed to the avenue of approach where the

mines will be delivered.

l It must be far enough forward of the proposed

minefield that the minefield can be emplaced before

the enemy reaches it. 

The trigger point should be a targeted area of interest

(TAI) in the S2’s IPB. The TAI should be under surveillance at all times. The element observing the TAI

should have the authority to fire the on call minefield

or a direct communications link to whoever is going to

call for the mines. The TAI must be far enough beyond

the minefield that the minefield will be in place in time

in a worst-case scenario. The FSC should allow for the

time it takes to send the call for fire, process the call

for fire, execute the mission, and arm the mines. 

EMPLOYMENT TO 

AUGMENT AN OBSTACLE

FA-delivered scatterable mines are optional weapons

for closing lanes in existing obstacles or reseeding

breached minefields.

RAAMS and/or ADAM used to close a lane in an obstacle should be planned with the same considerations

as RAAMS and/or ADAM planned as an obstacle. Another consideration in using RAAMS and/or ADAM

to close a lane is how wide the artillery minefield

should be. A rule of thumb is to use the width of the

lane plus the expected delivery error when mines are

fired. To minimize the amount of ammunition used,

get the best possible grid to the center of the lane. Use

survey if possible, intersection or resection if necessary. If possible and depending on the tactical situation, adjust the mission in advance onto the center

point of the lane and record it as a target.

Planning for using artillery-delivered mines to close

breached obstacles should involve the S2, S3, artillery

LNO, engineer representative, and FSC. This group

should identify the most likely points where the enemy

will try to breach the obstacle and how wide the

breach will probably be. As with using mines to close

a lane, these points should be identified by the most

accurate grid attainable, fired in, and recorded as targets. Even if the enemy does not breach at these exact

locations, targets should provide accurate points to

shift in firing mines. 

The FSC must identify which observer is to fire

RAAMS and/or ADAM to close a breach and under

what conditions the obstacle is considered

breached. The FSC should identify an alternate observer to fire the minefield in case smoke screens,

communications problems or enemy fire prevent the

primary observer from reseeding the obstacle at the

proper time. This will probably require a voice call

for fire over a command net. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-29

SECTION IX. SMOKE

Smoke must be used in sufficient quantities to be

effective. Factors affecting smoke’s use are atmospheric conditions, type of smoke required, size of

the area to be smoked, and length of time needed.

Excessive amounts of ammunition may be required to

meet the commander’s guidance based on these

conditions. The exact number of rounds is not known

until the time of firing because it depends on weather

conditions such as wind speed and direction. The FSC

must also be wary of the hazardous gas that white

phosphorus (WP) produces. It can pass through current issue protective masks and cause adverse effects

on personnel that inhale the gas. Smoke may adversely

affect others on the battlefield if not properly coordinated with adjacent units.

EMPLOYMENT METHODS

Smoke used to obscure is placed on or near the enemy

position to interfere with his observation and ability to

deliver fires.

Smoke used to screen is placed within the areas of

friendly operation or in areas between friendly and enemy forces to degrade enemy observation. It is primarily

intended to conceal friendly forces.

Smoke communicates actions on the battlefield (signal) or to mark locations.

Smoke used with other actions to confuse or mislead

the enemy (deception) is generally used with other deceptive measures.

MORTARS

Mortars deliver a high volume of smoke at short ranges and are a rapid, effective means of obscuration depending on the available combat load. The 81mm

mortar delivers WP and red phosphorous smoke. For

more information, see MCWP 3-15.2, Tactical Employment of Mortars.

ARTILLERY

Artillery delivers large quantities of smoke at long

ranges. It can deliver WP smoke in two forms. M110

WP is a bursting-tube projectile filled with WP and is

used for marking and immediate smoke missions. The

M825 (felt wedge or improved smoke) round is a replacement for the M116 series of HC rounds. It provides a faster, larger, and longer duration of smoke

than the HC round. WP impregnated wedges may not

be completely consumed as the smoke screen is produced. Unburned wedges may crust over and reignite

when disturbed. It does not present a lethal threat to

maneuvering troops. Smoke is available in limited

quantities and should be planned for critical targets

that support maneuver.

NSFS

NSFS can deliver limited quantities of WP. The firing

unit should be forewarned of its intended use to allow

for loading ammunition in the gun turrets for storage.

CONTROLLING SMOKE

Because smoke’s effectiveness is greatly determined

by weather and terrain, the observer controlling the

mission is the key individual. However, the FSC

should be knowledgeable in smoke employment so

that he may judiciously plan its use. The NBCD officer can provide information on the effects of weather

on the use of smoke and help determine smoke placement and effectiveness. 

TIMING

Allow time for delivery and any buildup. All rounds

are fired as standard missions with parallel sheafs under favorable conditions. See table 5-2 on page 5-30.
5-30 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Table 5-2. Planning Data for Smoke.

DELIVERY TECHNIQUES

Immediate smoke is applied to point targets to obscure

and suppress enemy fires. By unit SOP it may be incorporated into immediate suppression calls for fire as a

mix of WP and M825 smoke. Quick smoke is placed in

between units to screen friendly movement from enemy observation or fires. Smoke can be used to obscure,

screen, signal and mark, and deceive. See table 5-3.

DELIVERY

SYSTEM

TYPE

ROUND

TIME TO BUILD

EFFECTIVE SMOKE

AVERAGE

BURNING TIME

AVERAGE OBSCURATION

LENGTH (METERS) PER

ROUND WIND DIRECTION

CROSS HEAD/TAIL

5 in/54 WP 1/2 min 1 min 150 40

155mm WP

M825

1/2 min

1/2 min

1-1/2 min

5-15 min

150

400 

50

100

120mm WP TBD TBD TBD TBD

81mm WP

RP

1/2 min

1/2 min

1 min

3-10 min 

100

200

40

50 

60mm WP 1/2 min 1 min 75 40

Table 5-3. Smoke Delivery Techniques.

DELIVERY

TECHNIQUE

TYPE OF

TARGET

NUMBER

OF GUNS

TYPE OF

AMMUNITION SHEAF OBSCURATION

TIME C2

Immediate smoke (point/

suppression)

Point or small 

area 150 meters 

or less

2 guns 1st round

WP/smoke

BCS 1/2 to 5 min By SOP and/or 

maneuver company commander’s approval

Immediate smoke/

(mortar)

150 meters or 

less

2 guns 2 rounds each WP Parallel 1-3 min By SOP and commander’s 

approval

Quick smoke (mortar) 150-600 meters 4 81mm WP Parallel or 

open/special (as 

required)

4-15 min depending 

on ammunition 

availability

Battalion
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-31

SECTION X. ILLUMINATION

Employment of illumination requires considerable

planning and coordination. Its ability to turn night into

day has both positive and negative aspects that must

be integrated into the overall fire support plan. Specific guidance on its use should always be sought from

and consistent with higher headquarters.

CAPABILITIES

All fire support assets have illumination capabilities.

See table 5-4.

The most important consideration for illumination

employment is its effect on the entire battlefield.

For example, a battalion that conducts an illuminated attack adjacent to a battalion conducting a nonilluminated attack may not be feasible. Every asset,

element, and weapon system that employs a night

vision capability must be considered before employing illumination. Illumination employed correctly can improve friendly NVG performance as

well as degrade enemy night vision. Illumination is

also an incendiary on the deck.

Illumination employed at its intended height of

burst is designed to provide light to see with the naked eye. Illuminants tend to burn all the way to the

ground. When illumination is too close or actually

enters the field of view of NVGs, it “washes out” or

eliminates the effectiveness of the goggles. When

natural illumination (such as from the moon) is inadequate, illumination 2 to 5 kilometers away from

or behind the operating area enhances NVG performance. Thermal sights such as on tanks and LAVs

are only affected by illuminants in close proximity

to acquired targets, however, tank and LAV drivers

use NVGs.

Table 5-4. Illumination Data.

HOWITZER

MORTAR PROJECTILE

INITIAL

HEIGHT OF

BURST

EFFECTIVE

AREA (radius)

BURN TIME

(minutes)

RATE OF

DESCENT

(meters per 

second)

81mm M301A2 400 M 250 M 1 6

81mm M301A3 600 M 250 M 1 6

155mm M485A2 600 M 500 M 1 5

5"/54 MK 91 500 M 250 M 1 10

5"/54 MK 48 500 M 250 M 1 10

CAS LUU-2A/B 600 M 750 M 4.5 5

CAS M257 750 500 M 1.5 5

CAS LUU-1/B GROUND TARGET MARK 30 -
5-32 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

NIGHT CAS

Illumination can be employed with night CAS. It is

important to consider pilots usage of NVGs. One

technique is to offset two artillery illumination

rounds parallel to the final attack heading to orient

the pilot as well as illuminate the target (see figure

5-13). The height of burst is increased to 900 meters

and offset 600 meters beyond the target. Aviation illumination (LUU-2) uses a 900 meter height of burst

and offsets 900 meters. Both techniques allow illumination burnout at 300 meters. This provides the

pilot who is aided with goggles sufficient ambient

light to acquire the target.

AS PART OF A DECEPTION PLAN

Illumination can be employed as part of a deception

plan due to its large battlefield signature. This is

usually coordinated at regiment or higher levels. It

is also effective at harassing enemy movement and

degrading enemy night vision capability.

SECTION XI. PRECISION-GUIDED MUNITIONS

Precision-guided munitions (PGMs) can destroy mobile hard targets such as tanks. PGMs greatly enhance

combat power. Primary PGMs in use are direct fire

weapons such as the TOW and the Dragon. 

The FSC’s role in employing these weapons is to plan

indirect fires and air strikes to complement and augment the effects of these weapons; e.g., the use of FASCAM to canalize tanks into a TOW’s sector of fire.

However, the FSC also has indirect fire and air-delivered, laser-guided munitions that can aid in the antiarmor/antimechanized effort. These include artillery

(Copperhead) and air-delivered munitions. Most aviation PGMs are guided by laser energy, wires, or lowlight TV. Undergoing experiments are aviation PGMs

with global positioning system (GPS) guidance systems that strike directly on the grid input into the GPS

warhead.

JOINT DIRECT ATTACK MUNITIONS

Joint direct attack munitions (JDAM) are designed as

a low cost, autonomously controlled tail kit for the

GBV-31(V)2B (MK-84) and the GBV-32(V)2B/

GBU-32(V)4B (BLU-109) 2,000 pound warheads

and MK-83/BLU-110 1,000 pound warheads. Design

requirements include accurate performance in adverse weather, less than 13 meter circular error probable (CEP), in-flight retargeting, and a launch-andleave capability. 

The tail kit contains a guidance control unit (GCU)

consisting of a 3-axis inertial maneuvering unit, a GPS

receiver and guidance processor. This GCU flies the

weapon via 3 electro-mechanical fin assemblies. 

Figure 5-13. CAS Illumination Technique.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-33

JDAM is a bomb-on-coordinates weapon. Accuracy

will directly relate to the quality of the coordinate input to the system.

JOINT STAND-OFF WEAPONS

A bomb-on-coordinates weapon, joint stand-off weapons (JSOW) is designed to provide an accurate standoff delivery capability to U.S. forces. It consists of a

winged, all-weather, glide vehicle, a GPS-aided IMU

(same as JDAM). JSOW will provide up to 40 nautical

miles stand-off from the intended target. 

Current plans call for three variants:

l Submunition dispenser: AGM 154A-145 BLV 97

bomblets.

l Antiarmor: AGM 154B-24 BLV 108 sensor fused

munitions.

l Unitary warhead: AGM 154C-BLV 111 (500 pound

unitary bomb).

The unitary version will incorporate an imaging IR

seeker in the nose and data link to increase accuracy

over the JDAM. The warhead will not have a hard target penetration capability. 

SECTION XII. IMPROVED

CONVENTIONAL MUNITIONS

Improved conventional munitions (ICMs) are base

ejection projectiles containing a number of submunitions. Submunitions are ejected through the base of the

projectile and scattered in the target area. 

ANTIPERSONNEL IMPROVED

CONVENTIONAL MUNITIONS 

The APICM is no longer in production but is still

held in war reserves. The AP round is effective

against exposed personnel. When the fuse functions, an expelling charge disperses 60 grenades

out through the base of the projectile. When the

submunition’s striker plate located on the base of

the grenade makes contact with the ground (see

figure 5-14), the grenade is hurled 4 to 6 feet in the

air and detonates.

DUAL PURPOSE IMPROVED

CONVENTIONAL MUNITIONS

The dual purpose improved conventional munition

(DPICM) is found in the M483A1 (referred to as ICM)

and the new M864 base burn DPICM (BBDPICM).

DPICM is effective against lightly armored vehicles

and very effective against personnel. On impact, each

submunition detonates a shaped charge that can pierce

2.75 inches of rolled steel. Steel casing fragments create an antipersonnel effect (see figure 5-15 on page 5-

34). M483A1 contains 88 grenades, the M864 contains 72 grenades. 

Effects of cannon DPICM bomblet dispersion on

the ground vary depending on range and charge. At

minimum range, dispersion is elliptical in shape. At

maximum ranges it is almost circular. Simply put,

the M483A1 typically has a 50 meter radius bomblet dispersion, the M864 has a 75 meter radius

bomblet dispersion. The default BCS circular sheaf

is typically 200 x 200 meters; M864 is 250 x 250

Figure 5-14. 155mm APICM Grenade.
5-34 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

meters. DPICM projectiles should not need a height

of burst correction unless there is an error in target

location or data.

When the actual bomblet dispersion pattern is needed,

refer to JMEMS publications. A simplified one dimensional pattern radius can be computed using the following formula: M483A1 (.70 x Rng[km])+38 =

pattern radius in meters. M864 pattern radius is consistently 75 meters.

A small percentage (2 to 2.5 percent) of DPICM’s

submunitions may not detonate and may pose a hazard to friendly maneuver forces. ICMs should not be

fired into wooded areas. Submunitions may become

suspended in tree branches and later pose a threat to

friendly forces. Firing DPICMs into mountainous

areas where the slope is greater than 60 percent increases the dud rate. Snow, mud, and water do not

increase the dud rate, but they do make it difficult to

locate and dispose of duds, thereby increasing the

risk to friendly forces.

MULTIPLE LAUNCH ROCKET

SYSTEM/HIGH MOBILITY ARTILLERY

ROCKET SYSTEM

Marines should be familiar with the munition

capabilities of both systems when Multiple Launch

Rocket System (MLRS)/high mobility artillery

rocket system (HIMARS) support is provided.

MLRS/HIMARS projectiles originally consisted of

the M26 rocket and Army tactical missile system

(ATACMS) Block I. The M26 carries DPICMs;

ATACMS carry antipersonnel antimateriel (APAM)

submunitions. Current inventories are now

expanding to include longer range versions of the

projectiles with less submunitions. 

A larger form of a cannon DPICM is used in the M26

rocket fired by MLRS/HIMARS. Each rocket carries

644 DPICM submunitions that can pierce 4 inches of

rolled steel and create an antipersonnel effect. Other

characteristics are the same as a cannon DPICM. The

ER-MLRS rocket carries 444 submunitions.

APAM is the submunition used in MLRS/HIMARS

ATACMS. A 1.3-pound ball-shaped grenade of composition B and a steel case, on impact, its fragmentation is effective against thin-skinned vehicles, materiel,

and personnel. It is not effective against armored vehicles. Each ATACMS Block I carries 950 APAM grenades. ATACMS Block IA carries 300 APAM.

SECTION XIII. EMERGING MUNITIONS

Current weapons technology is increasingly capable—

better now than ever before. But weapons must continue

to improve to meet 21st century challenges and seize opportunities and technologies. To succeed on future battlefields, the Marine Corps and the Navy are posturing to

purchase modern precision/near precision weapons for

surface, air, and naval surface fire support.

ARTILLERY

Guided MLRS Rocket

This rocket is an improvement in accuracy to reduce

rocket expenditure to 1/6th the current quantity at

Figure 5-15. 155mm DPICM Grenade.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-35

maximum ranges. With the addition of low-cost jam

proof guidance and control, a 2 to 3 mil delivery accuracy is achieved. Maximum range is out to 60 kilometers. The improved accuracy reduces a units’ logistics

burden, increases crew survivability, and reduces collateral damage by increasing the capability to engage

point targets.

MLRS/HIMARS Smart Tactical Rocket

This rocket will be a guided MLRS/HIMARS rocket

carrying smart submunitions out to a range of approximately 60 kilometers. Submunitions will use onboard

sensors to detect, classify, and engage stationary or

moving targets.

Army Tactical Missile System Block II

Army tactical missile system (ATACMS) Block II is a

semiballistic, surface-to-surface guided missile that

carries 13 brilliant antitank (BAT) or BAT P3I submunitions to ranges out to 140 kilometers. Block II is an

adaptation of the Block I missile fielded with modifications to accommodate the BAT submunition. The

primary target set for the missile is large battalion-size

concentrations of moving armor. Once dispensed, the

BAT submunition can autonomously seek and destroy

moving armored targets through acoustic and infrared

sensors. BAT P3I submunitions will expand the target

set to include hot or cold, stationary or moving, hard

or soft targets including surface-to-surface missile

transporter erector launchers.

Army Tactical Missile System Block IIA

Block IIA is a semiballistic, surface-to-surface guided

missile that carries six BAT P3I submunitions to ranges from 100-300 kilometers. It will have GPS-augmented inertial guidance and off-axis launch

capability. Once dispensed, the BAT P3I submunition

can autonomously seek and destroy moving or stationary targets through acoustic, millimeter wave, and infrared sensors. The BAT P3I submunitions target set

includes hot or cold, stationary or moving, hard or soft

targets including surface-to-surface missile transporter

erector launchers. The submunition has increased performance over the basic BAT submunition in adverse

weather and countermeasure environments.

Sense and Destroy Armor Munition (SADARM)

The M898 sense and destroy armor cannon projectile

contains two submunitions that are deployed over the

target area via parachute. Each submunition searches a

75 meter radius footprint using infrared and active and

passive millimeter wave sensors. Upon detection of a

hard target, it fires an explosive formed penetrator into

the top of the target vehicle.

M795 HE Projectile

The M795 is a 155 HE projectile. It will be employed

against the same target array as the M107 HE projectile and achieve a range of 22.5 kilometers.

Extended Range M795

This projectile has similar ballistic characteristics as

the M864 BBDPICM projectile. The extended range

M795 will have a greater lethality at extended ranges

than the M549 HE rocket-assisted (HERA) projectile.

When fired with zone 5 modular artillery charge system (MACS), it can achieve a range of 37 kilometers

(threshold) to 40 kilometers (objective).

XM982 Extended Range Munitions

This projectile will replace the M864 BBDPICM projectile and will provide 155 millimeter howitzers with

an extended range, fratricide reducing, accuracy-enhancing capability to the Marine Corps. The XM982

concept combines both drag reductions from the M864

BBDPICM projectile and glide technology from the

M712 Copperhead projectile. Currently, there are

three variants of the XM982: DPICM, SADARM, and

unitary warhead. Each has a GPS/inertial navigation

system (INS) self-location system, is compatible with

the multi-option fuze for artillery (MOFA), and will be

inductively set via the portable inductive artillery fuze

setter (PIFAS). A significant reduction in the fratricide

probability for cannon DPICM firings will be reduced

using DPICM submunitions with self-destruct/sterilization features. Hazardous DPICM duds will be reduced from the current M42/46 2-3 percent rate to

equal to or less than 0.2 percent (1 in 500) when

DPICM is the lethal cargo for the XM982 projectile.
5-36 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

NAVAL SURFACE FIRE SUPPORT

Mk 172 Cargo Projectile

The Navy is developing this projectile. It currently

will carry 49 Mk 2 ICM bomblets, which are comparable to the US Army M80 bomblet, and may carry other

submunitions such as BAT, SADARM, and smoke, in

the future. The submunition dispersion pattern is circular with approximately a 50 meter radius. The XM

172 has an objective range of 26 kilometers with the 5

inch/54 and 40 kilometers with the 5 inch/62 caliber. 

NSFS PGMs

The Navy is developing extended range munitions that

will give commanders the ability to influence and

shape the battlespace while staying over-the-horizon,

during early phases of an amphibious assault when artillery has not been established ashore and during sustained operations ashore.

XM171 Extended Range

Guided Munition (ERGM)

The ERGM is a 5 inch, 127 millimeter projectile that

is fired from the 5 inch/62 caliber Mk 45 Mod 4 gun. It

will carry 72 submunitions, which are adapted from

the Army’s M-80, containing a primary impact fuze

and a self-destruct backup fuze to reduce the hazard of

duds on the battlefield. It will be guided by a GPS

guidance system with an INS for backup giving it a

CEP of 20 meters. ERGM can achieve ranges in excess of 41 nautical miles with an objective range of 63

nautical miles. In contrast to conventional NGF munitions’ flat trajectory, the ERGM has a much higher trajectory and near-vertical attack angle. It makes it wellsuited for attacking targets in defilade which, due to

terrain features, would cause conventional munitions

to be ineffective. Due to the steep trajectory, a restricted operations zone may be required around the firing

ships and target area similar to the use of PAH/TAH

with ATACMs.

Autonomous Naval Support Round (ANSR)

The autonomous naval support round (ANSR) is being

developed to achieve a long-range, fast response, low

cost, volume fire projectile. The design incorporates

the improvements in guidance electronics, warhead,

and rocket motor design. ANSR has a small nosemounted guidance section, moderate-sized warhead,

large rocket motor, and improved tail assembly.

ANSR is based on mature projectile design and has

been gun-launch flight demonstrated to 23 nautical

miles. The preliminary conclusion from the

demonstration is that the aeronautical and airframe

data directly supports over 60 nautical miles 5-inch

range and 100 nautical miles 155 milimeters range for

a tactical ANSR projectile.

Land Attack Standard Missile

Land Attack Standard Missile (LASM) is a modification of the Navy’s primary surface-launched, AAW

weapon, the Standard Missile-2 (SM-2). LASM will

have a threshold range of 300 kilometers with a CEP

of 20 meters. Missiles in the current inventory will be

retrofitted with a new forward body section to make it

suitable for land attack. The forward section will have

a GPS/INS, a modified warhead, and height of burst

fuzing. The warhead is the 76.5 pound, Mk 125 blast/

fragmentation warhead currently in production.

Tactical Tomahawk

The Navy is acquiring a new generation GPS-navigated Tactical Tomahawk cruise missile capable of attacking strategic, operational, and tactical targets.

Along with a 50 percent cost reduction over the Block

III TLAM, additional system improvements include—

l In-flight retargeting.

l Real time BDA with a missile-mounted camera that

provides a snapshot photograph for battle damage

indications, BDA, and target identification.

l GPS mission planning onboard the firing unit.

l Battlefield loiter capability for responsiveness.

l Flexible architecture for future advances and

alternative payloads (such as hardened target

penetrator or brilliant antitank munitions).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ 5-37

AVIATION

Standoff Land Attack Missile Extended Range

Standoff Land Attack Missile Extended Range

(SLAM-ER) is a precision strike standoff weapon designed for employment against heavily defended high

value targets. The system is employed by F/A-18

strike fighters. It uses a combination of GPS/INS guidance and imaging, streaming video data-link for precision targeting. SLAM-ER can be employed at ranges

in excess of 150 nautical miles.

Modernized Hellfire

The Modernized Hellfire is planned to replace the

BGM-71 series TOW missile, AGM-114 series Hellfire missile, and the AGM-65 series Maverick missile

in a single weapon for the Marine Corps and Navy.

The Modernized Hellfire is envisioned as a rotary and

fixed-wing weapon that will be designed to provide

precision standoff in the engagement of tactical moving targets. The requirement for this weapon includes

multiple seeker capabilities (semiactive laser, imaging

infrared and possible millimeter wave radar) enhanced

lethality and longer range than the weapons it will replace. The Marine Corps is currently pursuing a joint

program with the Army designated the Common Missile System as a possible solution for this weapon.

Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System

This system is a low cost precision-guided rocket that

uses semiactive laser guidance to destroy a wide variety of targets. The current weapon is being designed

for the 2.75 inch rocket system, but will have functionality on the 5.00 inch rocket system as well. This

weapon will provide a cost effective means of engaging point and area targets that do not warrant the expenditure of more costly precision-guided weapons. 
APPENDIX A. SAMPLE FIRE MISSION LOG

The FSCC may use this log to track fire missions received. It should enable the FSC and staff to quickly

identify missions fired for later analysis. Figure A-1 is

a sample log. Figure A-2 on page A-2 is blank and

may be reproduced. Enter information as follows.

Unit, OPORD, and DTG: applicable unit of the log.

Page Numbers: number consecutively.

Observer: observer ID number (automated information systems) or call sign.

Target Number: target number requested, one assigned by FDC (mortar or artillery), or JTAR number.

Target Location: target location as sent by the observer. May be any of the three methods of target location. Include datum if different from WGS-84. Include

grid zone designator (SM 435675) for aviation assets.

Other Information: target description, method of

fire, and method of control.

Clear: if the unit cleared the mission, enter “C.” Enter

“D” for denied. Include time of decision.

Fire Support Asset Assigned: the fire support asset

used for the mission; e.g., “ARTY,” “NGF,” “R/W,”

“F/W,” and “MORT.” 

Agency: agency that provided additional coordination.

Sent: time the request for coordination was sent to the

agency that needed coordination.

Received: time coordination was received and if it

was approved/cleared (“C”) or denied (“D”).

Refine: refinements sent in by the observer (usually to

identify firing/effects trends).

Time: time end of mission (EOM) was received.

Disposition: enter if the target should be forwarded to

higher headquarters. Include BDA (what was killed

and how many remain and their current status).

Unit:

OPORD:

DTG:

Fire Mission Log

Page ___ of ___

Observer

Target

Number

Target

Location

Other

Information Clear

Fire Support

Asset Assigned

Additional Coord EOM

Disposition Agency

Time

Sent Rcvd Refine Time

Z3C AC 1234 MS 

345786

Troops in 

trenchline 

HE/VT, 5 

min Supp, 

AMC

C MORT 1035 10 men 

escaped 

NW–not 

organized

Figure A-1. Sample.
A-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Unit:

OPORD:

DTG:

Fire Mission Log

Page ___ of ___

Observer

Target

Number

Target

Location

Other

Information Clear

Fire Support

Asset Assigned

Additional Coord EOM

Disposition Agency

Time

Sent Rcvd Refine Time

Figure A-2. Fire Mission Log. 
APPENDIX B. FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATING MEASURES

Fire support coordinating measures (FSCMs) enhance

the expeditious attack of targets and provide safeguards

for friendly forces. Their use is governed by the tactical

situation. FSCMs fall into two broad categories: permissive and restrictive. Some maneuver control measures also affect fire support coordination. FSCMs are

recommended by the FSC and established by the commander. FSCMs are graphically shown as a black line or

lines (solid or dashed). All measures are labeled with the

title or abbreviated title of the measure followed by the

establishing headquarters (in parentheses). The significance of identifying the establishing headquarters is that

it designates the area where the FSCM applies. For example, a coordinated fire line (CFL) established by a battalion is effective within that battalion’s zone of action. The

effects do not extend beyond the battalion’s zone. When

a date-time group is used, the time zone must be shown.

FSCMs can be effective immediately, at a scheduled time

or on-call.

PERMISSIVE FSCMS

These measures authorize the attack of targets without

clearance from the ground commander if certain circumstances are met.

Coordinated Fire Line

The CFL is a line beyond which conventional surface fire

support means; e.g., mortars, field artillery, and NSFS

ships may fire at any time within the zone of the establishing headquarters without additional coordination. See

figure B-1.

The CFL expedites the attack of targets beyond the CFL

without coordination with the ground commander in

whose zone of action targets are located. It also provides

the ground commander with an area within his zone

where his forces can operate in safety from uncoordinated friendly surface delivered indirect fires.

Maneuver battalion commanders are responsible for selecting or approving a recommended CFL location for

their zone of action or sector of defense, while supporting artillery commanders and artillery liaison officers at

every echelon should make appropriate recommendations concerning its location. The location of the battalion’s CFL is forwarded to the infantry regiment through

both infantry and artillery fire support coordination

channels, where it is approved, consolidated, and forwarded to division level as appropriate. A consolidated

CFL may be established for the GCE as a whole, but

this is not always practical.

The selected location of the CFL at all echelons is based

on such factors as the scheme of maneuver, patrol plans,

locations of security forces, and the troop safety desires

of the ground commander. There is no requirement for

the CFL to be placed on identifiable terrain. However,

additional considerations are the limits of ground observation, the location of the initial objectives in the offense,

and the requirement for maximum flexibility in both maneuver and the delivery of supporting fires.

Graphic portrayal of the location of the CFL is shown on

maps, charts, and overlays by a dashed black line with the

letters CFL followed by the establishing headquarters in

parentheses above the line and the effective date-time

group below the line. The FSCC of the establishing commander disseminates the location of the CFL to the fire

support coordination agencies of subordinate, adjacent,

and higher headquarters, as required. It is further disseminated to each level of command, to include the establishing command, and all concerned fire support agencies.

Fire Support Coordination Line

The fire support coordination line (FSCL) is an FSCM

that delineates the coordination requirements for the attack of surface targets. It is established by the appropriate

land or amphibious commander within his boundaries in

consultation with superior, subordinate, supporting, and

affected commanders. An FSCL is not a boundary and

Figure B-1. Coordinated Fire Line. does not divide an AO. The FSCL applies to all fires of
B-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

air, land, and sea-based weapon systems using any type

of ammunition against surface targets. Forces attacking

targets beyond an FSCL must inform all affected commanders in sufficient time to allow necessary reaction to

avoid fratricide, both in the air and on the ground. See

figure B-2.

In exceptional circumstances, the inability to conduct this

coordination will not preclude the attack of targets beyond the FSCL. However, failure to do so may increase

the risk of fratricide and could waste limited resources.

When targets are attacked beyond the FSCL, supporting

elements must ensure that these attacks do not produce

adverse effects on, or to the rear of the line. Short of the

FSCL, all air-to-ground and surface-to-surface attack operations are controlled by the appropriate land or amphibious force commander. Establishment of the FSCL must

be coordinated with all affected commanders in order to

avoid fratricide.

The primary purpose of the FSCL is to facilitate the expeditious attack of targets of opportunity beyond the coordinating measure. It provides a measure for coordination

between ground elements and supporting forces without

endangering friendly troops in the air or on the ground or

requiring additional coordination with the establishing

headquarters. The FSCL—

l Facilitates attack of surface targets beyond it.

l Provides ground commanders with sufficient

control of aircraft short of it to ensure troop safety.

l Maximizes employment of weapons where they are

most efficient, and provides aviation commanders,

air control agencies, and pilots with enough

information to identify where control or

coordination is required before aircraft can attack

ground targets.

In amphibious operations, the FSCL is normally established by the MAGTF commander after coordination

with the navy amphibious commander. When air forces

external to the ATF are supporting the amphibious operation, the MAGTF commander coordinates with the supporting forces in conjunction with the navy amphibious

commander. When Marine Corps forces operate independently on land, the FSCL is established by the MAGTF

commander. In joint or combined operations, the FSCL

may be established by headquarters above the MAGTF.

Before establishment, consultation should be made with

appropriate ground and aviation elements.

The FSCL should follow well defined terrain features

easily identifiable from the air. Positioning of the FSCL

must consider the tactical situation. This should include

the scheme of maneuver or plan of defense, weather,

terrain, type and source of aircraft, and overall flexibility of maneuver and fire support. A key factor is the

range of the land or amphibious com-mander’s organic

weapon systems. 

The FSCL is disseminated by the establishing MAGTF

commander to the FSCCs of subordinate, adjacent, and

higher headquarters, as required. It is further disseminated at each level of command, including the establishing

command, to all concerned fire support agencies, such as

the DASC, TACC, FDC, SACC, and NSFS ships.

Changes to the FSCL require notification of all affected

forces within the AO and must allow sufficient time for

these elements to incorporate the FSCL change. Generally, 6 hours is adequate to coordinate a change. 

FSCL location is graphically portrayed on fire support

maps, charts, and overlays by a solid black line with the

letters FSCL followed by the establishing headquarters in

parentheses above the line and effective date-time group

below the line. See figure B-3 on page B-3.

Battlefield Coordination Line

A battlefield coordination line (BCL) is a fire support coordinating measure, established based on METT-T,

which facilitates the expeditious attack of surface targets

Figure B-2. Fire Support Coordination Line.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ B-3

of opportunity between the measure and the FSCL. When

established, the primary purpose is to allow MAGTF aviation to attack surface targets without approval of a GCE

commander in whose area the targets may be located. To

facilitate air-delivered fires and deconflict air and surface

fires, an airspace coordination area (ACA) will always

overlie the area between the BCL and the FSCL. Ground

commanders may strike any targets beyond the BCL and

short of the FSCL with artillery and/or rockets without

coordination as long as those fires deconflict with the established ACA overhead. This includes targets in an adjacent ground commander’s zone that falls within the BCLFSCL area.

The BCL is an exclusive Marine Corps FSCM, similar to

an FSCL, which facilitates the expeditious attack of targets with surface indirect fires and aviation fires between

this measure and the FSCL. See figure B-4. Normally,

Marine units prefer placing the FSCL close to the FEBA

so that organic indirect fires can range most targets short

of the FSCL and organic air assets have maximum freedom to engage targets beyond the FSCL.

However, since in many operations the FSCL is controlled by the CINC or JTF commander, the FSCL may

be placed at a significantly greater distance than the maximum range of Marine Corps indirect fire assets. This

gives the enemy a sanctuary, between the maximum

range of indirect fire supporting arms and the FSCL, in

which aviation assets cannot freely engage without coordination and GCE assets are unable to influence. The

BCL was thus developed as a supplemental measure that

Figure B-3. Example of Permissive FSCM.

Figure B-4. Battlefield Coordination Line.
B-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

may or may not be used. A key factor is the range and positioning of GCE organic weapon systems and the positioning of the FSCL. If the FSCL is placed such that a

sanctuary exists between the range of Marine artillery

and the FSCL, the MAGTF commander can use this internal coordinating measure to facilitate the attack of targets within this area.

The BCL allows MAGTF fire support assets to attack

surface targets without further coordination with the GCE

commander in whose area the targets may be located.

Marine aviation may strike any target beyond the BCL

and short of the FSCL without further coordination, including targets in an adjacent Marine commander’s zone

between the BCL and FSCL. Before firing, the ground

commander should coordinate with the ACE (DASC) if

surface delivered fires will violate ACAs associated with

the BCL.

The MAGTF commander establishes the BCL. The BCL

should follow well defined terrain features easily identifiable from the air. The positioning of the BCL must consider the tactical situation. This should include the

scheme of maneuver or plan of defense, weather, terrain,

type and source of aircraft, and overall flexibility of maneuver and fire support. 

The BCL is disseminated by the establishing MAGTF

commander to the FSCCs of subordinate, adjacent, and

higher headquarters, as required. It is further disseminated at each level of command, including the establishing

command, to all concerned fire support agencies such as

the DASC, TACC, FDC, SACC, and NSFS ships.

BCL location is graphically portrayed on fire support

maps, charts, and overlays by a solid black line with the

letters “BCL” followed by the establishing headquarters

in parentheses above the line and effective date-time

group below the line. BCL is not currently supported by

automated systems for depiction. 

Free-Fire Area

The free-fire area (FFA) is a specific designated area into

which any weapon system may fire without additional

coordination with the establishing headquarters.

FFAs expedite fire and facilitate jettisoning of CAS munitions if an aircraft is unable to drop on a target.

FFAs may be established only by the military or civilian

commander with jurisdiction over the area (usually division or higher). An FFA request must be forwarded to

the appropriate approving official through the MAGTF

commander.

Preferably, the FFA should be easily identifiable from the

air, but it may be designated by grid coordinates, GPS coordinates or latitude and longitude.

The force commander disseminates the FFA including the effective dates and times of the FFA to all

subordinate units.

The FFA is enclosed by a black line with the words FreeFire Area or the letters FFA written inside the circumscribed area. The establishing headquarters may be identified as part of the graphic portrayal. See figure B-5.

Figure B-5. Free-Fire Area.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ B-5

RESTRICTIVE FSCMS

Restrictive FSCMs restrict the use of supporting arms.

Restrictive Fire Line 

An RFL is a line established between converging friendly

forces (one or both may be moving) that prohibits fires,

or effects from fires, across the line without coordination

with the affected force. It prevents fratricide between

converging friendly forces.

The common commander of the converging forces establishes the RFL. He may delegate establishing authority to

the senior commander of the two converging forces or to

the commander of the maneuvering force in a linkup operation between a moving and a stationary force.

To provide for recognition, the RFL should be located on

identifiable terrain. In linkup operations, the RFL is

moved as close as possible to the stationary force to allow

maximum freedom of action for the maneuver and fire

support of the linkup force.

The FSCC of the establishing commander disseminates

the location of the RFL to the fire support coordination

agencies of subordinate, adjacent, and higher headquarters, as required. It is further disseminated to each level of

command, to include the establishing command and all

concerned fire support agencies.

The location of the RFL is graphically portrayed by a

solid black line with the letters RFL followed by the

name of the establishing headquarters above the line.

The effective date-time group is written below the line.

See figure B-6.

No-Fire Area

An NFA is an area where no fires or effects of fires are

allowed. Two exceptions are when establishing headquarters approves fires temporarily within the NFA on a

mission basis, and when the enemy force within the NFA

engages a friendly force, the commander may engage the

enemy to defend his force.

See figure B-7 on page B-6 for an example of an NFA.

The NFA prohibits fires or their effects in the area, normally to protect civilians or cultural areas.

Typically, the Navy amphibious commander/MAGTF

commander or MEF establishes an NFA. On arrival of

military forces, the force commander coordinates the location of an NFA with local authorities.

Normally an NFA is on recognizable terrain, but its location may also be expressed by grid coordinates or by radius in meters from a center point.

The establishing commander disseminates the NFA to all

units of the force.

Figure B-6. Restrictive Fire Line.
B-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

An NFA is graphically portrayed as an area outlined

with a solid black line with black diagonal lines inside.

The letters NFA are written inside the circumscribed

area, along with the effective date-time group for commencement and termination. The area should also be

identified by the designation of the headquarters that

established the area.

Restrictive Fire Area 

An RFA is an area in which specific restrictions are imposed and into which fires that exceed those restrictions

will not be delivered without prior coordination with the

establishing headquarters.

The RFA regulates fires into an area according to the stated restrictions. This means that fires or certain types of

ordnance; e.g., ICM or WP, can be controlled where

friendly forces are or will be located.

An RFA may be established by any ground unit commander within his own zone; however, it is not normally

established below battalion level. When RFAs are used to

protect a forward unit from friendly fires; e.g., reconnaissance team, the RFA size should be large enough to allow

the maneuver of the unit but not so large as to needlessly

restrict fire support in other areas. To facilitate rapidly

changing maneuver areas, on-call RFAs may be used. Dimensions, location, and restrictions of the on-call RFA

are prearranged. The RFA is activated and deactivated

when requested by the maneuvering unit or scheduled by

time or event.

An RFA may be on recognizable terrain, expressed by

grid coordinates or by radius from a point.

An RFA is disseminated by the establishing commander

to the fire support coordination agencies of subordinate,

adjacent, and higher headquarters, as required. It is further disseminated to each level of command, including

the establishing command, and to all concerned fire support agencies.

An RFA is portrayed by a solid black line defining the area with the letters RFA, the designation of the unit establishing the area, any special instructions, and the effective

date-time group written inside the area. See figure B-8.

Airspace Coordination Area 

An ACA is a three-dimensional block of airspace in a target area, established by the appropriate ground commander, in which friendly aircraft are reasonably safe

from friendly surface fires. The airspace coordination area may be formal or informal (JP 1-02). 

Figure B-7. No-Fire Area.

Figure B-8. Restrictive Fire Area.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ B-7

Formal ACAs require detailed planning. More often, informal ACAs are established using time, lateral or altitude separation between surface- and air-delivered

weapon effects. ACAs can vary from physically defined

areas to the various methods of separation. Physical areas

can include routes (control point to IP, HA to BP) or areas (over the target, IP, BP). See figure B-9.

The ACA ensures aircrew safety and effective use of indirect supporting surface fires by deconfliction of time

and space. 

The commander of the unit requesting air support also requests ACAs based on the recommendations of his FSC.

Formal ACAs are established by the airspace control authority and can be scheduled, on-call (on order) or immediate. Scheduled ACAs will state the time they are to be

effective; e.g., 181400Z to 181405Z. 

The ACA may be referred to by a code name; e.g., BOZO or it may take some other form such as the MCFSS

identification; e.g., AC15MR (ACA 1, 5th Mar), or the

target number or grid coordinates of the target. A code

name is the easiest to use, particularly for scheduled and

on-call ACAs. An immediate ACA may or may not have

a code name. The target number or a set of grid coordinates associated with the air support mission facilitates

the dissemination of an immediate ACA.

A control point is a position marked by a buoy, boat, aircraft, electronic device, conspicuous terrain feature, or

other identifiable object which is given a name or number

and used as an aid to navigation or control of ships, boats,

or aircraft. (excerpt from JP 1-02) During planning, control points are selected and named throughout the area.

As necessary, these control points are designated as initial points (IPs), contact points, exit points (EPs) penetration control points (PCPs), etc. Control points can be

used in the establishment and promulgation of ACAs.

When this is done, the names of the control points are

substituted for grid coordinates. For example, ACA BOZO, altitude 50 to 400 feet, Rose to Jones, width 500

meters, effective 281400Z to 281410Z. If all units do not

have the aviation control points, they must be transcribed

into grids. See figure B-10 on page B-8.

Figure B-9. Formal ACA.
B-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Control points are often used to facilitate the establishment of ACAs for aircraft operating in those rear areas

where their flight paths can conflict with artillery and naval gunfire rounds. Routes used frequently can be left in

effect. Routes used occasionally (on-call) can be given

code names and activated as required; e.g., activate ACA

CLOWN 281400Z to 281410Z. When aircraft must follow unanticipated routes, they can be directed to proceed

by a series of control points. These control points can be

promulgated as the ACA; i.e., an immediate ACA.

Helicopter approach and retirement lanes may also be

designated as ACAs for the period they are actually in

use by helicopters. Likewise, holding areas and attack

positions for rotary wing CAS may be designated

as ACAs.

ACAs for aircraft operating within the envelope of enemy antiaircraft weapons present special problems.

While the aircraft are operating outside of these envelopes, they can follow straight, predictable paths.

Figure B-10. ACA Based on Control Points.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ B-9

However, when they are within the envelopes, aircraft

usually need freedom to maneuver. Thus, ACAs for

aircraft operating in the vicinity of enemy antiaircraft

weapons will usually contain long narrow boxes of

airspace which avoids these envelopes or large volumes of airspace within these envelopes.

Figure B-11 shows what the ACA in a high threat area

might look like. In this case, the ACA near the target is a

large cylinder. Within the cylinder, the attacking aircraft

has the space required to evade enemy antiaircraft weapons. It is important to note that the shape and size of that

ACA within the antiaircraft envelope changes with threat

and tactics. The size and shape will depend on the maneuvers of the aircraft, and that will depend on the type of

aircraft and the required tactics to counter the threat. The

air officer in the FSCC must keep abreast of evolving aviation tactics so the size and shape of ACAs can be determined to complement these tactics. 

The ACA may be located above the target area; e.g., a

rectangular box or cylinder, along the route of the aircraft; e.g., a corridor, or a combination.

The ACA’s shape is determined by the path of the

aircraft and the need to provide protection from

friendly fires. Some ACAs are rectangular cubes; i.e.,

boxes of airspace. Other shapes may be required. Dimensions of an ACA can be published in any form

that provides the supporting arms agencies with

enough information to plan their fires around the aircraft’s flight path. For a rectangular ACA, the description may include the ACA’s name, minimum

and maximum altitudes, length (by grid coordinate

points), width (total, bi-sected by the centerline), and

the effective DTG. Altitude is feet above mean sea

level unless otherwise stated. Altitude may be above

ground level when the desire is to restrict the aircraft

to relatively low altitudes above the ground; i.e., 500

feet and below. Above ground level may be particularly useful for helicopters. The vertical space between the ground and the top (or base) of an ACA

based on mean sea level or above ground level differs

significantly. See figure B-12 on page B-10.

ACA dimensions can also be established as SOP or according to a particular threat so that only the points

where the ACA are based, effective time, and name

need be published. ACA size and shape are dictated by

the following:

l Type of aircraft. Generally, the higher the speed of

the aircraft, the more room it needs to maneuver.

l Type of ordnance. Certain types of ordnance affect

both route to target and turning radius of the attack

aircraft. This in turn would affect the ACA. The

FSC must work closely with the AirO in this regard.

Figure B-11. ACA Based on Route of Aircraft.
B-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

l Air defense threat. The threat often dictates the type

of ACA employed in an operation. Within the

enemy air defense envelope, aircraft need room for

evasive maneuver. The most dangerous threat is an

in-tegrated air defense system (IADS) with long

range radars and missiles, which force aircraft to

approach the target area at low altitude, integrated

with mobile weapons; e.g., ZSU 23-4, in the

immediate proximity of the target. To meet this

threat, the attack aircraft use a low level pop-up

technique. A simpler situation exists when either the

enemy has no long range threat or that threat has

been neutralized. In that case, the preferred attack

aircraft tactics may be to remain at high altitude

throughout the attack profile.

l Degrees of restriction. ACAs can vary in their

degree of restriction on aircraft maneuver or

surface-to-surface fires. Guidance for how

restrictive immediate or informal ACAs should be

is part of the fire support planning and coordination

process. Examples include establishing—

n ACAs that allow aircraft maximum freedom of

movement. Such large ACAs are the most restrictive of surface-to-surface fires. They should

be kept in effect for the shortest period possible.

n ACAs that encompass the aircraft’s possible

route and restrict aircraft by directions on the

JTAR or 9-line brief such as offsets. Such instructions can result in a much smaller ACA than

would otherwise be possible. However, when

fixed-wing aircraft maneuver in such a manner

as they do when executing low level, pop-up delivery, they cannot follow a precise track. Aircraft doing such maneuvers can easily move a

quarter mile left or right of the intended path.

Again, the effectiveness of such ACAs can be increased by keeping them in effect for the shortest

possible time.

n All ACAs 1,000 meters above the max ordinate

for current low angle surface-to-surface fires. 

n ACAs above or below surface trajectories when

aircraft routes or final attack cones cross gun target lines. (Use firing table charts and add VI.

Specify charge and method [angle of fire].) In

this way, CAS and surface-to-surface fires can

attack different targets simultaneously.

Scheduled and on-call ACAs are usually disseminated by

the GCE and/or MAGTF FFCC as appropriate in a written document such as an overlay. Immediate ACAs are

usually disseminated by the FSCC of the organization requesting the air mission. Scheduled and on-call air support requests are usually submitted 18 to 24 hours before

the mission. During this period the ACAs associated with

these missions are collected by the GCE or MAGTF

FFCC, reviewed, adjusted, and disseminated to the required agencies. ACA dimensions can also be established

as SOP or according to a particular threat so that only the

points on which the ACA are based, effective time, and

name need be published.

A formal ACA is shown as an area enclosed by a solid

black line. Data includes the letters ACA, the name, the

originating headquarters, minimum and maximum altitude, and effective times. See figure B-13.

Figure B-12. ACAs Using MSL and AGL.

Figure B-13. Map Symbol for Formal ACA.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ B-11

Restricted Operations Zone

A ROZ is not an FSCM. It is an airspace coordination

measure and an area of defined dimensions within which

the operation of one or more airspace users is restricted.

See figure B-14. Examples are the platoon air hazard

(PAH) and target air hazard (TAH) used with ATACMS

units and in the future NGF ships firing extended range

guided munitions (ERGMs) and land attack standard

missiles (LASMs).

The ROZ restricts aircraft from defined areas to prevent fratricide. PAHs and TAHs aid in the deconfliction of airspace for ATACMS units by restricting

aircraft from the airspace directly surrounding both the

launch and impact area. 

Since they are airspace coordination measures, ROZs

are established by the airspace control authority. A

PAH or TAH has no implications for indirect fires, but

is submitted by the FSCC, or in the future the SACC,

through the DASC to the TACC, or TACC-afloat.

ROZs can be preplanned with stated DTG duration or

on-call activation/deactivation, or impromptu with

temporary (mission) duration. 

A PAH or TAH ROZ can be located anywhere an

ATACMS unit or target exists. The ROZ is identified as a

radius from a point with an associated altitude. The PAH

is computed by the ATACMS fire direction system based

on trajectory and exit altitude. Radii vary from 3 kilometers to 5 kilometers. The TAH is also computed by the

fire direction system but is based on entry altitude and

missile trajectory, typically 1 to 10 kilometers. Altitudes

for both ROZs vary from 5,000 to 15,000 meters. 

ROZs are disseminated by the airspace control authority

to aircraft and MACCS. Recommended PAHs and TAHs

are computed by the firing unit and forwarded to the

TACC via the FSCC and DASC.

ROZs are not portrayed on fire support coordination

maps. PAHs and TAHs can be portrayed by a solid black

line defining the area with the letters PAH or TAH, the

altitude, the firing unit, and effective DTG.

Zone of Fire

A zone of fire is an area into which a designated ground

unit or fire support ship delivers, or is prepared to deliver,

fire support. Fire may or may not be observed (JP 1-02).

Units and ships assigned zones of fire are responsible for

attacking known targets and targets of opportunity according to their mission and the guidance of the supported commander.

Zones of fire in amphibious operations divide land into

zones of fire. These zones are assigned to fire support

ships and units as a means to coordinate their efforts with

each other and with the scheme of maneuver of the supported ground unit. The unit or ship should be located so

that it can best support the actions of the supported unit. 

Figure B-14. Restricted Operations Zone.
B-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

The commander of the naval task force providing naval surface support establishes and assigns zones of

fire for the forces. The zone of fire for the artillery battalion or a ship assigned a mission of direct support

normally corresponds to the AO of the supported unit.

The zone of fire for an artillery unit or a ship assigned

a mission of general support should be within the

boundaries of the supported unit. When used in conjunction with naval surface fires, the size and shape of

the zone of fire will depend on the terrain, the visibility, and boundaries of the supported unit.

Zones of fire are disseminated in the MAGTF OPORD.

NSFS and artillery units incorporate their appropriate

zones of fire into their fire plans.

Zones of fire are depicted as an area bounded by a solid

black line and labeled ZF-1, ZF-2, or by MCFSS naming

convention; e.g., ZO12MD (Zone 1, 2d MarDiv).

OTHER CONTROL MEASURES

Some control measures, although not fire support coordinating measures, play a role in fire support planning and coordination.

Boundaries

A boundary is a maneuver control measure. Boundaries

designate the geographical limits of the AO of a unit.

Within their own boundaries, unless otherwise restricted,

units may execute fire and maneuver without close coordination with neighboring units unless otherwise restricted. Normally units do not fire across boundaries unless

the fires are coordinated with the adjacent unit or the fires

are beyond a fire support coordinating measure; e.g.,

CFL. These restrictions apply to all types of ammunition

and to their effects. When such fires as smoke and illumination affect an adjacent unit, coordination with that unit

is required. This does not preclude a commander from

deciding, in certain situations, that his subordinate units

may fire across boundaries at positively identified enemy

units without coordinating for that specific target. This

will only apply to direct fires and observed fires delivered

by supporting arms. It also can only be applied to boundaries which that commander has established; e.g., a battalion commander can only apply this exception to his

own companies’ boundaries.

The area affected by a certain fire support coordinating measure, such as the CFL or FSCL, depends on the

zone of action of the headquarters establishing the

measure. For instance, as depicted in figure B-15, if

Figure B-15. CFL Established by Battalion.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ B-13

the establishing headquarters is 1/7, the zone affected

by the CFL is that of 1/7 (indicated by single diagonal

lines). If the CFL was established by the 7th Mar (see

fig. B-16), the affected area would include the zones

of the subordinate battalions (consolidated by the regiment) as well as that of the regiment.

Phase Lines

A phase line is a maneuver control measure used by land

forces for control and coordination of military operations.

It is usually on recognizable terrain extending across the

zone of action. Units normally report crossing phase lines

and they can be used to identify limits of advance, control

fires, or define an AO. The purpose of each phase line

and any actions required by forces affected by the phase

line is specified by the using unit.

Amphibious Objective Area

The AOA is a geographical area (delineated for command and control purposes in the order initiating the amphibious operation) within which is located the

objective(s) to be secured by the amphibious force. This

area must be of sufficient size to ensure accomplishment

of the amphibious force’s mission and must provide sufficient area for conducting necessary sea, air, and land

operations. (JP 3-02)

Fire Support Area

and/or Fire Support Station

A fire support area (FSA) is an appropriate maneuver area assigned to fire support ships from which to deliver

gunfire support of an amphibious operation. A fire support station (FSS) is an exact location at sea within a FSA

from which a fire support ship delivers fire. (JP 1-02).

This designation stations ships within boat lanes of the

assaulting force or where maneuvering room is restricted

by other considerations.

Radar Zones

Search zones prioritize the search pattern and provide the

reaction posture of the radars to best meet the maneuver

commander’s intent. Each Firefinder radar can store up to

nine different zones. There are four different types of

zones used with the radar: the critical friendly zone

(CFZ), the call-for-fire zone (CFFZ), the artillery target

intelligence zone (ATIZ), and the censor zone (CZ).

Figure B-16. CFL Established by Regiment.
B-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Critical Friendly Zone

The CFZ designates the highest priority friendly locations of the maneuver commander and provides the most

responsive priority of fires from the radars. Cued radars

detecting incoming rounds into this zone immediately

generate a priority request for fire. FSCs recommend to

maneuver commanders positioning of CFZs and their

size for best responsiveness. Typical CFZs include maneuver assembly areas, headquarters, FARPs, and other

troop concentrations.

Call for Fire Zone

The call-for-fire zone (CFFZ) designates a search area

beyond the FLOT that the maneuver commander

wants suppressed or neutralized. The CFFZ designation is closely tied to the IPB process. A CFFZ would

likely be a suspected enemy artillery position. The

CFFZ provides the second most responsive priority for

fires from the radar.

Artillery Target Intelligence Zone

The artillery target intelligence zone (ATIZ) enables a

maneuver commander to watch an area closely while

assigning higher priority to more important areas.

Targets identified in this zone will be evaluated for attack as they are received but will not automatically

generate a fire mission.

Censor Zone

A censor zone (CZ) designates areas from where the

commander does not want to attack targets. The CZ is often used to avoid overlap and duplication.

Common Sensor Boundary

Target duplication between Firefinder radars is likely

during combat operations. In addition, the sheer volume

of targets being passed from the radars will overwhelm

the targeting element, especially if the radars are under

centralized control. An effective method of reducing the

duplication of these targets for attack is to establish a

common sensor boundary (CSB) for call-for-fire zones.

The CSB is a line established by the artillery regimental

HQ or force artillery that divides target acquisition (TA)

areas of search into close and deep areas for the Q-46 and

Q-37, if attached.

The CSB is established by designating a line beyond

which no CFFZs for the Q-46 would be established. The

Q-37 would not establish any CFFZs short of this line.

All radars could process targets generated for attack from

their CFFZs through the same or different headquarters.

Some targets may still be duplicated. When the radars are

used in this way, the maximum range capabilities of the

radars are not restricted. The CSB is not a fire support coordinating measure, although the CSB may coincide with

a CFL. The CSB is only a tool used by the target acquisition controlling headquarters to maximize effectiveness

of radars. In determining CSB placement, consider—

l Range of the attack systems.

l Available attack assets.

l Effective ranges of TA assets.

l The likely enemy indirect fire weapon deployment

areas developed through thorough IPB.

l Availability of ammunition or aviation assets.

l When a radar is required to move for survivability,

that the CSB may have to be adjusted to ensure

optimum radar coverage; e.g., if the Q-46 moves,

the Q-37 will have to cover the Q-46 area of

responsibility until the Q-46 is in position.

FSCMs AND OTHER CONTROL MEASURES 

IN AFATDS

Within automated information systems, FSCMs and control measures are referred to as geometries. Figure B-17

shows an example of how those systems depict fire support geometries.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ B-15

Figure B-17. AFTADS Geometries.
APPENDIX C. BATTALION AND ABOVE FIRE

SUPPORT PLANNING

Table C-1. Mission Analysis.

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

Higher warning order or OPORD.

Status of supporting arms.

Info from higher, adjacent, and lower 

FSCCs.

IPB products.

Enemy COAs from S-2.

HVTs by phase or critical event.

Understand higher maneuver and 

fire support plans.

Organize and analyze facts.

Identify specified and implied fire 

support tasks.

Translate status of fire support 

assets into capabilities.

Analyze effects of IPB on fire 

support.

Use above to develop draft EFSTs.

Fire support mission analysis brief:

Higher fire support plan.

Fire support status (capabilities 

and limitations).

Fire support IPB analysis.

Fire support time line.

Recommended fire support 

tasks.

Commander approves or modifies 

fire support tasks and issues 

additional fire support guidance.

Table C-2. Course of Action Development.

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

Fire support mission analysis brief.

Approved EFSTs.

Commanders additional fire support 

guidance.

Determine where to find and attack 

the enemy to accomplish EFST.

Identify HPTs in those formations 

(TVA).

Quantify desired effects for EFSTs.

Plan methods for EFSTs:

Allocate assets to acquire and 

attack.

Integrate triggers with maneuver 

COA.

Use battle calculus.

Assist S-2 in collection plan 

development to support target 

acquisition CCIRs.

For each COA developed:

Concept of fires.

Draft FSEM.

Draft target list work-sheet and 

overlay.

Draft TSM or modified TSM.

Collection plan.

Table C-3. Course of Action War Game.

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

Draft fires paragraph.

Draft FSEM.

Draft target list worksheet and 

overlay.

Draft TSM or modified TSM.

Collection plan.

Targeting decisions: finalize HPTL.

War game fire support plan against 

enemy COAs.

Test and refine fire support plan.

Modify draft fire support plans for 

each COA.

Final draft for each COA:

Fires paragraph.

Fire support appendix: 

FSEM.

Target list worksheet and 

overlay.

TSM.

Refined HPTL, AGM, and TSS.
C-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Table C-5. Orders Development.

Table C-6. Transition.

Table C-4. Course of Action Comparison and Decision.

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

Final drafts for each COA of:

Fires paragraph

Fire support appendix: FSEM.

Target list worksheet and overlay.

TSM or modified TSM.

Refined HPTL, AGM, and TSS.

Understand higher maneuver and 

fire support plans.

Organize and analyze facts.

Identify specified and implied fire 

support tasks.

Translate status of fire support 

assets into capabilities.

Analyze effects of IPB on fire 

support.

Use above to develop draft EFSTs.

Commander-approved COA.

FSC identifies refinements to

templates and tools for selected 

COA.

Fire support warning order.

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

Commander’s selected COA.

Identified refinements to fire support 

templates and tools for the selected 

COA.

Refine any changes to COA made 

during the decision process.

Finalize and reproduce written 

products.

Prepare orders brief.

Final fire support plan:

Fires paragraph.

Fire support appendix:

FSEM.

Target list worksheet and 

overlay.

Target synchronization matrix.

HPTL, AGM, and TSS.

INPUTS PROCESS OUTPUTS

OPORD. Disseminate order. Rehearsals.

Backbrief.
APPENDIX D. ESSENTIAL FIRE SUPPORT TASKS METHODOLOGY

Based on lessons learned from previous fire support

coordination exercises, the Marine Corps now uses a

methodology called essential fire support tasks

(EFSTs). The purpose of EFST is to translate the maneuver commander’s intent into usable information for

the fire support coordinator (FSC). The FSC uses

EFSTs to focus supporting arms agencies on critical or

essential tasks that must be accomplished to meet the

maneuver commander’s intent.

CONCEPT OF FIRES PARAGRAPH

As a subparagraph to the concept of operations, the

concept of fires paragraph contains EFSTs and describes the commander’s guidance for fires and the

concept of fires to support the scheme of maneuver.

The concept of fires must clearly describe the logical

sequence of EFSTs and how they contribute to the

concept of operations. The FSC uses the specified and

implied tasks identified during mission analysis and

from the commander’s guidance for fire support to

identify specific fire support tasks. The FSC must then

determine the methodology to accomplish each task. 

The methods frame the role of supporting arms agencies in the overall plan and serve to focus their efforts

in supporting the scheme of maneuver. The concept

of fires along with the concept of maneuver communicates how the force as a whole will achieve the

commander’s intent. For the FSC to meet the commander’s intent, EFSTs must be closely integrated

with maneuver.

EFSTs can also help focus the targeting effort by concentrating on enemy critical vulnerabilities and necessary targets that will facilitate maneuver. The primary

audience for the concept of fires is the subordinate maneuver commanders and their fire support personnel.

At each level of command (division, regiment, battalion) there are different levels of experience working

with various fire support products and tools. This technique applies to all levels of FSCCs and staffs. 

FORMAT

Overall paragraph organization should mirror that of

the scheme of maneuver paragraph. If the maneuver

paragraph is phased or otherwise organized, the concept of fires paragraph will take on the same organization. Just as maneuver tasks use task and purpose,

fire support tasks are defined by the task, purpose,

method, and effects (TPME) thought process. TPME

may be used by the FSC to develop the concept of

fires that is concise but specific enough to clearly

state what fires are to accomplish in the operation.

Within each phase of an operation, each EFST will

be described in sequence of planned execution. This

can be done using TPME in step action form or as

subparagraphs. The information required in each subcategory is outlined below.

Task

Describes the targeting objective fires must achieve

against a specific enemy formation’s function or capability. Formations are HPTs or contain one or more HPTs.

Task = Objective, Formation, and Function.

Objective

MCRP 3-16A/FM 6-20-10, Targeting, outlines several

terms to describe targeting objectives that can be used,

however disrupt, delay or limit are most commonly

used. Targeting objectives should not be mistaken for

effects of fire such as: harass, suppress, neutralize, or

destroy used to determine the degree of damage or duration of effects on a specific target. Targeting objectives entail the analysis of enemy situations relative to

the objectives, mission, and the capabilities at the

commander’s disposal, in order to identify and nominate specific vulnerabilities that, if exploited, will accomplish the commander’s intent through disrupting,

delaying, limiting, or diverting enemy forces or critical resources. See chapter 3 for information on targeting objectives and effects of fire. 
D-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Disrupt. Means to preclude efficient interaction of enemy combat or combat support systems. Simplified, it

means to not let an enemy formation perform a specific function: not to do what it is supposed to do. 

Delay. Means to alter the time of arrival of a specific

enemy formation or capability. It focuses on not letting

the enemy do some function when it wants/needs to.

Limit. Applies to reducing the options or courses of action available to the enemy commander. For example,

the commander may direct the use of air interdiction

and fire support to limit the use of one or more avenues

of approach available to the enemy. Also, he may direct

the use of interdiction to limit enemy use of fire support.

To limit capabilities implies we also disrupt enemy

plans by precluding effective interaction or the cohesion

of enemy combat and combat support systems.

Divert. Addresses the commander’s desire to tie up

critical enemy resources. Attack of certain interdiction

targets may result in the enemy commander’s diverting capabilities or assets from one area or activity to

another. Divert indirectly reduces the enemy commander’s capability to continue his plans.

Formation

A specific element or subelement of the enemy. Can

specify a specific vehicle type or target category as

long as the element or subelement is clear.

Function

An ability of the formation to achieve its primary task

and purpose. What is the formation doing that is unacceptable? What do we want the formation to do/not

do? Helping words: “the ability to . . . .”

Purpose

Describes maneuver or operational purpose for the task.

Identify as specifically as possible the maneuver formation that will leverage the targeting objective; describe

in space and time what the objective accomplishes.

Purpose = Maneuver Purpose.

Method

Describes how the task and purpose will be achieved.

It ties the detect function or “lookers” (executor/observer/TA sensor) with the deliver function or “shooters” (lethal and nonlethal assets) in time and space and

describes how to achieve the task. The following

should be considered under method:

Method = Priority, Allocation, Restriction. 

l Priority of fires (POF).

l Final protective fires (FPFs).

l Observers (pri/alt).

l Restrictions.

l Triggers.

l Special munitions.

l Target allocation.

l Target.

l Priority targets.

l EW.

l CAS/attack aviation.

l Any other instructions.

Example: Disrupt the AT battery long range fires

against the TF flank companies.

Example: Delay the ability of the advance unit to

support the security element with direct fires.

Example: Limit the ability of the enemy air assault

company to establish an LZ in the high ground west

of the firebase.

Example: The enemy platoon at the point of

penetration.

Example: The ability to effectively direct fire against

the breach force.

Example: To allow Bravo Mech to occupy the support by fire position without becoming decisively engaged by the center enemy platoon. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ D-3

Priority

Describes the “how” of the EFST. For the looker, it

can assign POF to execute the task outlined. It assigns

observers in maneuver units or other acquisition

means. Assignment of the looker requires the consideration of Target Selection Standards. When a specific

asset; e.g., CAS, is to focus exclusively on a task, that

information can be communicated here.

Allocation

For the shooter, it describes allocating fire support assets to accomplish the EFSTs. Assets may include projected or mechanical smoke, indirect fires (suppress,

neutralize, destroy, obscure, screen), FASCAM,

CPHD, F/W and R/W CAS, and EW. In method, fire

support assets identify their part of accomplishing the

EFST. It is from the method of an EFST that the artillery and other FS/TA assets get their essential tasks. 

Restriction

The method can also outline any limitations or restrictions on accomplishing the tasks; e.g., ammunition (no

ICM on the OBJ), FSCM (ACA Blue) or other restrictions that may effect accomplishing the EFST. See

bullet format and paragraph format examples below.

Effects

Attempts to quantify successful accomplishment of

the task. It provides the looker with a measure of effectiveness (MOE) for the task. If multiple shooters

are involved it helps delineate what each must accomplish. Effects provide a measure of when we are done

with the task. It also provides the basis for the assess

function in D3A and the decision to reattack or not.

See appendix I, table I-7.

Concept of fires and EFST information is placed in the

Concept of Fires paragraph as shown below. An example of the information required for the concept of fires

and EFSTs is shown on pages D-4 through D-5.

3b. ( ) Concept of Operations

(1) ( ) Concept of Maneuver

(2) ( ) Concept of Fires. Task and purpose for

each EFST from the base order. 

Example: Priority of CAS is to destroy the enemy’s

Combined Arms Reserve tanks. This part of the

method can also provide focus by using NAIs, TAIs,

targets, or EAs to describe where attacks will occur.

Example: Method (Bullet Format) 

l Priority: Arty POF to Alpha Co, Mortar POF to

Charlie Co. Team Mech. Arty and Mortar POF

when committed.

l Allocation: Alpha fires Arty Pri Tgt AB1000, Bn 3

DPICM when security element goes to ground.

Charlie fires mortar Pri Tgt AB 2001 Plt 10 HE at AT5 platoon when they set their firing line. Back up

observer for both targets is Recon Tm 2 vic. OP1.

Send suppression missions to Bn FSCC, expect

mortar Plt 3 HE. CAS maintained at Bn level.

l Restrictions: RFA 200 meters radius over Recon

Tm 2. No DPICM within 500 meters NP123456.

ACA Joe in effect when CAS at IP, no fires south of

58 North/South gridline.

Example: Method (Paragraph Format)

Arty POF to Alpha Co, Mortar POF to Team Charlie.

Team Mech gets Arty and Mortar POF when committed. Recon Tm 2 occupies OP 1 prior to LD. Upon

contact, Alpha (P), Recon Tm 2 (A) fires Arty Pri Tgt

AB 1000 Bn 3 DPICM at security element when it

goes to ground. Charlie (P), Recon Tm 2 (A) fires

mortar Pri Tgt AB2001 Plt 10 HE at AT-5 firing line

when they set. Adjust and repeat as necessary. Send

all suppression missions to Bn FSCC, expect mortar

Plt 3 HE. CAS, if available, maintained by Bn. All

RFAs 200 meters radius, Recon Tm 2. No DPICM

within 500 meters NP 123456. ACA Joe i/e when CAS

at IP, no fires south of 58 N/S gridline.

Example: AGMB delayed for 20 minutes. 1 T80/4

BMPs destroyed by FASCAM. CAS destroys 4

T80s and 2 BMPs behind FASCAM. Enemy ADA

jammed by EW during CAS attack.
D-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

PHASE ONE, RECCE MOVEMENT FORWARD

TASK

Destroy the 2 x Forward Security Combat Outposts of the 127th battalion’s main defensive positions to prevent identification of FO and scout forward movement and initial movement of 1/6

from AAHOTBED.

PURPOSE

To allow FOs and scouts to occupy forward OP locations and safeguard initial movement of 1/6

from AA HOTBED to LD (PL JIMMY).

METHOD

Priority: Artillery POF to FO TM 1, mortar POF to scouts.

Allocation: AB 1001 CPHD PRI TGT identified observation post (1 x BMP + Inf section) FO tm 1

(P), scouts(A) at H-180 backup Bn 3 DPICM. AB1002 CPHD PRI TGT identified observation

post (1x T80 + Inf section) FO tm 2 (P), FO tm 1 (A) at H-120 backup Bn 3 DPICM. AB1005 templated OP scouts (P), FO tm 2 (A) when TM B Crosses PL BILL. AB1003 mortar SMK Deception

10 minutes 300 x 60 scouts (P) FO tm 2 (A) at H-10.

Restrictions: Clear Illum through regiment, no DPICM on MSR MARS, regiment release Authority for SD FASCAM. CFL PL TOM o/o PL DICK. RFAs 300 meters radius on all FO tm and scout

locations. FFA 67599977-67009710-65009675.

EFFECTS

2 x observation posts destroyed (1 x Bmp, 1x T80, 2 x sections) 1 x OP destroyed FO tms and

scouts in forward OP positions able to observe BPs and TF1-69 crosses LD unhindered from direct or indirect fires. 

PHASE TWO, SUPPORT BY FIRE AND BREACH OPERATION

TASK

Disrupt the ability of the 127th regiments 2 X Plt BP from effectively engaging Breach Force with

Direct and Indirect Fires.

PURPOSE

To allow TM B to occupy support by fire position and TM C to establish 2 x Breach lanes prior to

assault on to OBJ GOLD South.

METHOD

Priority: Artillery POF TM A, mortar POF TM C.

Allocation: A1B (AB1003 and AB1004 2 x MIP BPs)1x Bty per TGT Continuos Fire 20 minutes

TM B (P), FO tm 1 (A) as TM B crosses 34 Northing. AB1009 20 minutes FA SMK 300 x 60 TM

B (P) TM C (A) as TM B crosses 34 Northing.

Restrictions: Clear illum through regiment, no DPICM on MSR MARS, regiment release authority

for SD FASCAM. CFL PL DICK o/o PL HARRY. RFAs 300 meters radius on all FO tm and scout

locations. FFA 67599977-67009710-65009675.

EFFECTS

TM B occupies SBF position, TM C establishes 2 breach lanes and retains 85% combat power. 2 x Plt

BPs unable to effectively engage 1/6. 

PHASE THREE, SEIZE OBJECTIVE GOLD

TASK

Disrupt the ability of the 127th regiments 2xPlt BPs and enemy regiment from effectively engaging TM C and TM Mech with direct and indirect fires.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ D-5

PURPOSE

To allow 1/6 to seize objective GOLD.

METHOD

Priority: Artillery POF TM C o/o TM Mech, mortar POF TM C o/o TM Mech.

Allocation: AB1100 FA PRI TGT continuous fire 15 minutes East Plt Pos TM C (P) scouts (A) as TM

C exits breach lane. AB1200 mortar Smk 60 x 300 15 minutes TM C (P), FO tm1 (P) as TM C clears

breach lane. If the enemy is observed moving vicinity ELGIN FO tm 1(P), scout (A) initiates 2xCAS

when CAS is 5 minutes off IP AB1010 1 x bty 6rds templated SA13 SEAD FO tm 1 (P)TM C (A) when

CAS 3 minutes off IP AB1201 (1 Tube) mortar red phosphorus (RP) CAS marker. Once TMC seizes

Objective GOLD East, artillery and mortar POF to TM Mech. AB1101artillery PRI TGT Continuous

fire 10 minutes West TM Mech (P) scouts (A) when TM Mech moves through TM C. If the enemy is

observed moving vicinity ELGINFO tm 1(P), scout (A) initiates 2xCAS when CAS is 5 minutes off IP

AB1010 1 x bty 6rds templated SA13 SEAD FO tm 1 (P)TM C (A) when CAS 3 minutes off IP

AB1201 (1 Tube) mortar RP CAS marker.

Restrictions: Clear illum through regiment, no DPICM on MSR, regiment release authority for SD

FASCAM. CFL PL DICK o/o PL HARRY. O/O ACA ORANGE. RFAs 300 meters radius on all FO

tm and scout locations. FFA Grids 67599977-67009710-65009675.

EFFECTS

1/6 seizes OBJ GOLD, SA13 unable to engage CAS. CAS destroys enemy formation (3 x AT5s

12 x T80s).

PHASE 4, CONSOLIDATION

TASK

Limit the ability of the 127th regiment’s remaining forces from penetrating PL KEN.

PURPOSE

To allow 1/6 to establish a hasty defensive position along PL HARRY before the FPOL with 2/6.

METHOD

Priority: Artillery POF TM Mech, mortar POF TM A.

Allocation: AB8000 FASCAM SD, MD, 400 X 200 TM C (P) TM B (A) when Plt or greater size of

BMPs or T80s seen passing South PL KING along Peters Pass. TMB (P) TM Mech (A). TM Mech

to plan 1 x FA FPF. AB1020 mortar FPF TM C (P) as required.

Restrictions: Clear illum through regiment, No DPICM on MSR, regiment release authority for SD

FASCAM. CFL PL HARRY. RFAs 300 meters radius on all FO tm and Scout locations. FFA Grids

67599977-67009710-65009675

EFFECTS

No remaining 127 MIRB forces able to penetrate PL KEN.

1/1 will initially use artillery and NSFS to disrupt the reconnaissance element’s, from 132nd MRR,

ability to identify and report our battle positions and obstacle locations to allow 2/1 to remain undetected within its BPs, prepared to maximize fires within EA Mack. Then R/W CAS and artillery will

be used by 2/1 to delay the advanced guard, main body, of 132nd MRR west of PL Iowa to enable

1/1 to conduct rearward passage of lines with 2/1.
APPENDIX E. APPENDIX 19 TO ANNEX C 

The following formats for the fire support annex are associated with a formal operation

order. Refer to FMFM 1-7, Supporting Arms in Amphibious Operations, FMFM 6-9,

Marine Artillery Support, FMFRP 5-71, MAGTF Aviation Planning, and MCWP 5-1,

Marine Corps Planning Process, for specific formats and information required for the

individual supporting arm tab/fire plan.

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

(U)

(U) REFERENCE: List applicable references; e.g., maps, operation plans, doctrinal

publications, SOPs, etc.

(U) Time Zone:

1. (U) Situation

a. (U) Enemy Forces. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence). Identify any particular 

enemy capability which may have a definite impact on fire support.

b. (U) Friendly Forces. Reference may be made to annex.

(1) (U) Provide a statement on the plan of the higher headquarters sufficient to 

ensure coordinated action by recipients of the fire support plan.

(2) (U) Provide statement on the plan of adjacent forces that affect the operation.

(3) (U) Identify additional supporting elements. Include task designators; e.g., 

TG 38.1. List artillery first (if any), followed by others in alphabetical order.

c. (U) Attachments and Detachments. List fire support units now attached or detached by the operation order, together with the effective time and date. Reference 

may be made to Annex A (Task Organization).

2. (U) Mission

See basic order.

3. (U) Execution

In separate lettered subparagraphs, give a brief concept of operations and state

the concept of fires. This can be accomplished by referring to the concept of

ops and providing a summary of the essential fire support tasks throughout all

phases of the operation. Depending on the detail of attachments, a listing of

each task, its purpose, method, and effect, may be included.
E-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

For each supporting arm, provide a general statement about what support is to

be provided. Record allocation/tactical mission assignments in this paragraph

if fire plan tabs are not used. If a tab is not included, state specific tasks associated with an essential fire support task; e.g., essential artillery tasks.

Depending on what information is provided in the individual tabs, miscellaneous information is provided for each paragraph. Priority of fires, priority of

position areas for artillery units, reliance on particular supporting arms, zones

of fire, instructions for fire planning, guidance on priority targets and the delivery of special fires, counterfire, and SEAD are examples of information

that may be contained in this paragraph. Liaison officer and observer employment may also be addressed. Additional paragraphs may precede the coordinating instructions paragraph to further establish the fire support plan; e.g.,

SEAD, counterfire, counter-mech plans. 

a. (U) Commander’s Guidance for Fires. Commander’s description of what he 

wants fire support to be able to do in order to support his intent.

b. (U) Concept of Operations. Make reference to paragraph 3b of the basic order 

or to Appendix 11 (Concept of Operations). 

c. (U) Concept of Fires. Restated from paragraph 3.b. (2) and may be expanded 

to include detailed essential fire support tasks. Essential Fire Support Tasks 

(EFSTs) may be expressed in the form of Task, Purpose, Method, Effects. EFST 

examples using TPME: 

(1) (U) Task. Disrupt reconnaissance element’s, from 132nd regiments ability 

to identify and report our battle positions and obstacle locations.

(2) (U) Purpose. To allow 2/1 to remain undetected within its battle positions 

(BPs) prepared to maximize fires within engagement area (EA) Mack.

(3) (U) Method. Priority: Arty POF to 1/1. NSFS to 2/1. Allocation: 2 Recon 

Tms attached to 1/1. Recon Tm 3 located at OP B. 1/1 (P) and Recon 3 (A) fire 

AA 1001 to destroy ID’d recon C3 vehicles with CPHD or BN 2 DPICM when 

in vicinity of checkpoint 56. EW ID recon nets/locations and JAM. 1/1 plans 

two arty pri tgts (btry size). HPT ACRV, BRDM. Restrictions: RFA on OP B. 

Illum requires Regt approval. CFZ 1 is in effect over BPs. CFL 1 (PL Florida) is 

in effect. 

(4) (U) Effects. 2 ACRV and 3 BRDMs destroyed west of PL Alabama. Recon 

nets jammed, and friendly BPs not ID’d.

(5) (U) Task. Delay AGMB of 132nd MRR west of PL Iowa.

(6) (U) Purpose. Allow 1/1 to do rearward passage of lines with 2/1.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ E-3

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

(7) (U) Method. Priority: Arty POF to 1/1, NSFS to 2/1, CAS held at Regt. Allocation: Recon 3 TACON to 1/1. 1/1 (p) and Recon 3 (a) fire group A2A, Btry

4 ICM per target and NGF 50 salvos, when lead elements of AGMB cross PL

Arizona. Upon completion, 1/1 (p) and Recon 3 (a) fire AA 2105, Arty Smk

500m, 20min. to allow 1/1 to begin passage. As final elements of 1/1 cross PL

Virginia, 1/1 (p) and 2/1 (a) fires AA 2106, Arty FASCAM 400X400 SD

RAAMs/ADAMs, medium density. 1/1 (p) and 2/1(a) controls section of AH-1s

from BP Rattler to engage tanks and C3 vehicles behind FASCAM minefield.

When 2 Sections of AV-8B arrive at CP Ford, 1/1 (p) or Cobra Sect (a) fires

Program’ Charlie” (SEAD) to allow AV-8Bs freedom to attack targets behind

the FASCAM minefield from IP Chevy. Mark provided by 1/1, artillery (a). EW

identify ADA and COF nets and jam. 1/1 gets 4 arty pri tgt (three guns each). 2/

1 has one NSFS pri tgt. HPTs are C3, AD, and artillery. Restrictions: 200m

RFA (NO ICM) over Recon 3 position. ACA Mongo in effect over IP Chevy

when AV-8Bs check-in.

(8) (U) Effects. AGMB delayed west of PL Iowa for 30 min. 3 of 6 artillery 

tubes destroyed, 10 tanks destroyed, AD neutralized, and 6 ACRVs destroyed. 

d. (U) Air Support

(1) (U) General

(2) (U) Allocation. Tab A (Air Fire Plan).

(3) (U) Miscellaneous

e. (U) Artillery Support

(1) (U) General

(2) (U) Organization for Combat. Tab B (Artillery Fire Plan).

(3) (U) Miscellaneous

f. (U) Naval Surface Fire Support

(1) (U) General

(2) (U) Allocation. Tab C (Naval Surface Fires Plan).

(3) (U) Miscellaneous

g. (U) Chemical Fires Plan. (Omitted. Not used by USMC.)

h. (U) Targeting. Make reference to Tab E (Targeting).

i. (U) Fire Support Coordination. Make reference to Tab F (Fire Support Coordination Plan).
E-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

j. (U) MCFSS. Make reference to Tab G (MCFSS Plan).

k. (U). Coordinating Instructions. Provide information that applies to more than

one supporting arm. Examples: fire support coordination measures, H/L Hour,

method of timing the delivery of fires (e.g., synchronized clock), target number allocations, observation/target acquisition employment, firing restrictions, attack

guidance, target precedence, high-payoff targets, damage criteria, fire support coordination reporting requirements, route precedence, fire plan submission requirements, procedures/signals for shifting of fires. Reference may be made to

applicable tabs; e.g., targeting, fire support coordination.

4. (U) Administration and Logistics

Make reference to Annex D (Logistics/Combat Service Support, and/or administrative/logistic orders. Identify ammunition availability, allocations, and

ammunition management measures; e.g., controlled supply rate (CSR).

5. (U) Command and Signal

Provide instructions necessary for establishment and maintenance of command and signal procedures. Identify command relationships as required, signal information (e.g., instructions or restrictions pertaining to radio and

pyrotechnics), and information pertaining to command posts; e.g., location of

CPs afloat, initial positions ashore, designation of alternate CPs. Reference

Tab F for automated systems communications parameters.

a. (U) Command Relationships (as required)

b. (U) Signal

c. (U) Command Posts

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

/s/

TABS: 

A Air Fire Plan 

B Artillery Fire Plan

C Naval Surface Fire Support Plan

D Chemical Fire Plan (Omitted. Not used by USMC.)

E Targeting

F Fire Support Coordination Plan

G MCFSS Plan (refer to FMFM 6-18.1)

* Other plans may be included as required to complete the fire support plan; e.g.,

counter-mechanized fire plan, counterfire plan, SEAD plan.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ E-5

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format For Tab A to Fire Support Appendix

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

TAB A (Air Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to

Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation

Provide appropriate details of the general situation, particularly on air support.

2. (U) Execution

This paragraph contains air support procedural information needed by the

supported unit for the employment of close air support. Examples: allocation

of sorties for planning purposes, aircraft alert status, air delivery procedures

(e.g., target marking, SEAD, etc.), codes (e.g., to lift air attack, to designate

MEDEVAC, to designate downed aircraft), air request procedures (e.g., cutoff times for submission of requests). The information is listed in separate lettered subparagraphs. Make reference to Annex—(Air Operations) for concept

of air support.

3. (U) Miscellaneous

a. (U) Coordinating Instructions

This subparagraph provides information needed for the coordination of air

support. Examples: fire support coordinating measures, instructions for

TACPs, FAC(A)s, TAC(A), NAOs, UAVs, routing procedures. The information is listed in separate lettered subparagraphs.

b. (U) Air Safety

This subparagraph provides information incident to aircraft safety. Examples: guidance on ACAs and SEAD, strike warning broadcasts. The information is listed in separate lettered subparagraphs.

4. (U) Command and Signal

a. (U) Signal. Refer to Annex K (Communications)
E-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

b. (U) Command Posts. Identify air control agency (e.g., DASC, TACC) locations.

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

 /s/

ENCLOSURES:

1 Preplanned Air Support 

2 Air Targets

3 Air Target Overlay

Copy no.__ of __ copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

ENCLOSURE 1 (Preplanned Air Support) to TAB A (Air Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19

(Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

ENCLOSURE 2 (Air Targets) to TAB A (Air Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

ENCLOSURE 3 (Air Target Overlay) to TAB A (Air Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire

Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

REFERENCE: Map

(The overlay contains air targets, fire support coordinating measures applicable to air

support, and unit boundaries.)

LN

#

TGT

#

TYPE

MSN

AIRCRAFT

ORDNANCE

TOT/TIME

ON STATION

ATK

DIR

PULL OFF 

DIRECTION

TGT

MARKING

CONTROL 

AGENCY REMARKS

LN

#

TGT

#

TGT

DESC

TGT 

COOR-DUM

SIZE 

(METERS)

DIRECTION/

DISTANCE FRIENDLY

UNITS

SOURCE REMARKS
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ E-7

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format of Tab B to Fire Support Appendix

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation

Provide appropriate details of the general situation bearing particularly on artillery support.

2. (U) Mission

(Example–Attack in Zone: 1/10 (DS) and 5/10 (R) provide close fires in

support of the 2d Marines attack in zone NLT 100400NOV00 to destroy the

enemy forces in order to reestablish the FLOT along PL Blue.)

(Example–Movement to Contact: 1/10 (DS) and 5/10 (R) provide close

fires in support of the 2d Marines movement to contact in zone NLT

100400NOV00 to destroy the 49th Tank Brigade’s stay behind forces. On order, 2d Marines will establish crossing sites for the passage of 8th Marines

along PL Red.)

3. (U) Execution

a. (U) Commander’s Intent (artillery battalion commander)

b. (U) Concept of Artillery Support. This is a detailed statement of the artillery 

commander’s visualization of artillery support. It details what the artillery is going 

to do to support maneuver elements and meet the maneuver commander’s intent.

c. (U) Organization for Combat. Details the organization and tactical missions by 

phase (include organic and reinforcing artillery).
E-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

d. (U) Coordinating Instructions. Includes instructions and details for coordination applicable to two or more subordinate elements. These instructions may be included as enclosures to the order. If enclosures are used then include only those 

items of generic interest. The following is a list of coordinating instructions that 

should be addressed:

l Target acquisition.

l Survey/MET.

l Automated fire control (AFATDS/IFSAS/ BCS).

l HPTL.

l Attack guidance matrix (AGM).

l NBC defense.

l Liaison requirements.

l Priority intelligence requirements (PIRs).

l Ammunition restrictions.

l Anti-fratricide measures.

l Rehearsals.

4. (U) Administration and Logistics

Make reference to Annex D (Logistics), Annex P (Combat Service Support),

and/or administrative/logistic orders. Identify ammunition availability, allocations, and ammunition management measures.

5. (U) Command and Signal

Identify command relationships as required, signal information, and information pertaining to command posts; e.g., location of artillery headquarters

afloat and initial positions ashore.

a. (U) Command Relationships. (As required.)

b. (U) Signal

c. (U) Command Posts

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

 /s/ 

ENCLOSURES:

1 Artillery Target List

2 Artillery Synchronization Matrix

3 Artillery Target Overlay

4 Schedules of Fires

5 Observation/Target Acquisition Plan 

6 Survey/Metro Plan
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ E-9

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

ENCLOSURE 1 (Artillery Target List) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX

19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

* A target list worksheet may be used.

ENCLOSURE 2 (Artillery Synch Matrix) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE: Map

Phase I Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

Phases LD to Obj Penny Obj Nickel Obj Dime Obj Quarter

Enemy Cntr-Btry threat-Med Cntr-Btry threat-Med Cntr-Btry threat-High

M

V

R

1/7 (SE) Rte April to clear Obj 

Sixpence

Mvmt to Contact along Rte 

April to PL Quiver

Atk to seize Obj Ring Defend Obj Ring

2/7 (ME) Mvmt to Contact Rte 

Julie to clear Obj Penny

Along Rte Julie, Atk to seize 

Obj Nickel

1st LAR Fwd Pass. of lines. 

Helo Co to SBF 1 Become 

Regt reserve

FSCMs CFL PL Quiver % PL Archer PL Diamond

FSCL PL Ruby 

Event Trigger Event Trigger Event Trigger Event Trigger

Btry

1

Move 1. PA 9 AoF 1. N/A

1600 2. %

2. PA 32

AoF 100

2. R3P vic CP 2. EOM

56 AD2003

1. PA 33 AoF 1. R3P

complete

Essential

Task

1. Mass Bn 1. 1/7 at

(AID): PL

Btry 2 - AD Orange

2001

1. Fire Smoke 1. 2/7

- AD 2003 clears

Obj

Dime

1. Mass Bn 1. En.

(A3D): Btry Crosses

2 - AD 2007 PL

Arrow

Btry

K

Move 1. PA 10 1. N/A

AoF 1600

3. PA 28 AoF 3. EOM

1500 AD0014

Essential

Task

1. Mass Bn 1. 1/7 at

(AID): PL

Btry 3 - AD Orange

2002

1. Fire CPHD 1. A/1/7

AD0003,2 acquires

Rds 2. 1/7

2. Fire Smk crosses

20 min - PL

AD0014 Quiver

1. Mass Bn 1. En. 

(A3D): Btry crosses

2 - AD 2007 PL

Arrow

COC Move to PA 32 when K

FIRECAP

Survey Pri: L, K Pri to A/1/7/ OP, Vic

435427, K, L

Pri: K, L

Radar N/A

Field Trains/LOC AA Red/PA 1 Move to PA 37 when Bn

clear PL Bow

Ammo/POL R3): Btry 1

Class I, V, IX vic CP 56

R3P: Btry K

Class I, V, IX vic CP 56

BAS Colocated with Field

Trains/LOC
E-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 3 (Artillery Target Overlay) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

(U) REFERENCE: Map 

(The overlay contains artillery targets, fire support coordinating measures, and unit

boundaries.)

ENCLOSURE 4 (Schedules of Fire) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19

(Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

(This enclosure contains schedules of fire for artillery units for the operation. Scheduling worksheets may be used. Successive tables are numbered as follows: 4-1, 4-2, etc.)

ENCLOSURE 5 (Observation/Target Acquisition Plan) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to

APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number)

(This enclosure contains information concerning observation. The plan is prepared as a

supplement to the collection plan of the supported unit and higher headquarters. The

plan outlines mission statements for the collection of specific information, reporting requirements (e.g., as acquired, on a time schedule), positioning, and sectors of coverage

of the various assets employed by the artillery; e.g., FOs, artillery OPs, radars, and aerial observers employed under artillery control. The plan may associate a specific firing

unit to a means of observation. Instructions for the exchange of information, requirements for visibility diagrams, and cueing of weapons locating radars are examples of

information applicable to this enclosure.)

ENCLOSURE 6 (Survey/Metro Plan) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19

(Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (U)

(This enclosure provides information concerning survey and meteorology operations.

Requirements and methods of dissemination are addressed. Support requirements to

other units/agencies are identified.)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-11

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format of Tab C to Fire Support Appendix

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

TAB C (Naval Surface Fires Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order—(U)

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

(U) TASK ORGANIZATION

The task organization for naval surface fire support is presented in the form of tactical

arrangements of fire support groups, units and elements, according to tasks assigned.

1. (U) Situation

Provide details of the situation, particularly on naval surface fire support.

2. (U) Mission

State the missions to be accomplished by the fire support groups.

3. (U) Execution

This subparagraph provides information needed by the supported unit for the

employment of NSFS. Examples: tactical mission assignments, relief of ships,

firing procedures (e.g., massing of fires, counter-mechanized fires, SEAD

fires, restrictions, calls for fire, etc. as required), procedures for requesting additional NSFS, employment of SFCPs/AOs. An example follows:

a. (U) At BMNT, D Day, take FSS as assigned in Enclosure 1 and conduct destruction and neutralization gunfire in Naples sector in accordance with Enclosure 2.

b. (U) Ship assignments

SHIP MISSION SUPPORTED UNIT

DD-945 General Support 6th Marines

DD-970 Direct Support 1/6

DDG-23 Direct Support 3/6
E-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

c. (U) Coordinating Instructions. Information that is applicable to two or more 

subordinate elements, usually based on SOP. Important information to be addressed

includes:

l Fire support coordinating measures/procedures. Air space coordination.

l Restrictions. Such as safety limits and restrictions of munitions.

l Standard FFE salvos.

l Massing criteria.

4. (U) Administration and Logistics

Provide information concerning allowance of ammunition to ships. Identify

ammunition replenishment plan.

5. (U) Command and Signal

Provide information concerning communications or make reference to an enclosure or other document containing this information.

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

 /s/ 

ENCLOSURES:

1 Naval Surface Fire Support Operations Overlay

2 NSFS Schedule of Fires

3 NSFS Reports 

4 Radar Beacon Plan
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-13

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

ENCLOSURE 1 (Naval Surface Fire Support Operations Overlay) to TAB C (Naval

Surface Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE: Map

(This overlay contains unit boundaries, designated boat lanes, zones of fire, fire support

areas and stations, naval surface fires targets, target areas, marginal data, helicopter

lanes, and landing force objectives.)
E-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 2 (NSFS Schedule of Fires) to TAB C (Naval Surface Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(The schedule of fire presents information and instructions necessary for executing prearranged naval surface fire support. The schedule identifies the ships, radio frequencies,

armament, targets to be engaged, ammunition allowance, time periods, restrictions on

fires, and remarks/notes.)

ENCLOSURE 3 (NSFS Reports) to TAB C (Naval Surface Fire Plan) to APPENDIX

19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(This enclosure prescribes reports to be made by fire support ships during the operation.

Report flow will be based on command relationships. The reports provide information

on the status of fire support ships. The enclosure gives direction for the flow of information to command ships, code names, methods, time, originator, addresses, and circuits to be used in making reports, and instructions for maintaining naval surface fires

support logs.)

ENCLOSURE 4 (Radar Beacon Plan) to TAB C (Naval Surface Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 12 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

1. (U) General

(This enclosure contains instructions for the employment of the radar beacon.)

2. (U) Mission

The mission of radar beacon teams is to provide fire support ships with an

electronic aid to navigation.

3. (U) Employment

(This subparagraph provides information concerning the employment of the

radar beacons. Examples: plan for establishment ashore, initial positions, antenna azimuths, range errors, codes, security requirements, and communications links are addressed.)

TGT OR Alt SIZE BEARING CAL&AMT AMMO

AREA # DESCRIPTION COORD FT YDS GRIND NO. 5” Other REMARKS

NZ1001 Wpns Revet 571450 50 10x15 42 Sched Dest

NZ1002 Trench Line 582473 135 200x600 110 Sched Neut

NZ1003 Plt Position 635505 65 200x600 45 70 On-call Neut
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-15

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format for Tab E to Fire Support Appendix

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

TAB E (Targeting) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) General

This paragraph provides information concerning targeting. Targeting priorities and guidance, target precedence, target classification (in amphibious operations), target processing, assignment of priority targets, target number

allocations, etc., are addressed. The information is recorded in separate lettered subparagraphs. The tab may include targeting tools, a target list and/or a

list of targets. Reference is made to Annex B (Intelligence).

2. (U) Targeting Boards

This paragraph provides coordinating instructions for targeting boards. This

can include board composition and targeting cycle timelines.

ENCLOSURES: (2-4 Omitted. See MCWP 3-16, chapter 4 or MCRP 3-16A, TTP for

the Targeting Process.)

1 Target List 

2 High Payoff Target List

3 Attack Guidance Matrix

4 Target Selection Standards
E-16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

E

n

closure 1, T

a

b

E, A

p

p

e

n

dix 19, o

f

A

n

n

e

x

C to

O

P

O

R

D

________

1

st M

ar, 1

st M

A

R

DIV

T

arg

et List W

ork

s

h

e

et

O

P

O

R

D

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_ For use of this form see FM 6-20-40; Proponent agency is T

R

A

D

O

C

0

7

0

6

2

0

Z

F

E

B

0

0

DATUM: W

GS-84

SHEET____ of ____

Line

No

Target

No

a

Description

b

Location

c

Altitude

d

Attitude

e

Size Source/

Accuracy

h

Remarks

i

Length

f

Width

g

1 A

C0001 120 m

m

Mortar Plt

499377

2 A

C0002 Rifle

Company

516325 DPIC

M

3 A

C0003 Rifle Platoon 554296

4 A

C0004 OP 570281 VT 50%,

WP 50%

5 A

C0005 M

G Position 566260

6 A

C0006 Trail

Intersection

572247 CP 11

7 A

C0007 Com

m Site 489254 Radius

400

8 A

C0008 Road

Intersection

493250 2400 400

9 A

C0009 A

O

A 512245

10 A

C0010 Trail

Intersection

525231 CP 28

1112131415
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-17

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format for Tab F to Fire Support Appendix

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

TAB F (Fire Support Coordination Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX

C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation

Provide appropriate details of the general situation bearing particularly on fire

support coordination.

2. (U) Execution

In separate lettered subparagraphs, the fire support coordination plan is stated.

Coordination measures, firing restrictions, fire plan processing, and coordination of fires are addressed. Procedures are identified when existing procedures

are inadequate. Fire support coordination tasks are designated. In amphibious

operations, procedures for the passage of control and coordination responsibilities to the MAGTF commander are identified/referenced.

3. (U) Command and Signal

Provide instructions necessary for the conduct of fire support coordination.

When required, fire support communications information may be disseminated in a separate tab (TAB G).

a. (U) Command Relationships. (As required.)

b. (U) Signal.

c. (U) Command Posts. (Location of MAGTF FFCC.)

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

 /s/ 

ENCLOSURES: 

1. Fire Support Coordination Overlay

*Other enclosures as required
E-18 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _ copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

ENCLOSURE 1 (Fire Support Coordination Overlay) to TAB F (Fire Support Coordination) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order

(Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE: Map

(This overlay depicts information applicable to fire support coordination. It contains

fire support coordination measures, unit boundaries, etc.)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-19

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format of Tab G to Fire Support Appendix

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _ copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group

TAB G (Fire Support Communications Plan/MCFSS) to Appendix 19 (Fire Support) to

Annex C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCES:

a. (U) Map

b. (U) UNIT SOP

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation. Refer to paragraph 1 of this order.

Organization for Combat

2. (U) Execution

a. (U) In separate lettered paragraphs, the fire support communications plan/

MCFSS is stated. This tab focuses on the additions to or differences with Annex K,

Command, Control, Communications Systems. These paragraphs should address automated systems, specifically: TCO, IOW, AFATDS, and CTAPS/TBMCS. The enclosures will cover the detailed information such as geometries, subscriber tables,

FIRE SUPPORT MISSION SUPPORTED

_/_/_/11/MR_ (11M) DS FS/C/1_/MD_ 

_/_/A/6_/27_ (627) GS F/S/C/1_/MD_

_/_/_/1_/11_ (111) DS F/S/C/1_/MR_

_/_/_/2_/11_ (211) DS F/S/C/5_/MR_

_/_/_/3_/11_ (311) DS

O/O GS

F/S/C/7_/MR_

F/S/C/1_/MD_

_/_/_/5_/11_ (511) R

O/O GS

_/_/_/5_/11_

F/S/C/1_/MD_

F/D/C/1_/37_ (137) GS F/S/C/1_/MD_
E-20 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

communications tables, and initial database construction and desired guidances to be

used by automated systems. Prioritization of automated assets, such as the comm

OPFAC vs plans OPFAC if one is not mission capable, must be discussed. In conjunction with the G/S-6’s plan in Annex K, net prioritization must be established to

ensure the most valuable nets maintain connectivity.

b. (U) AFATDS

c. (U) TCO/IAS/IOW/C2PC

d. (U) CTAPS/TBMCS

e. (U) Other automated systems

3. (U) Communications

a. (U) Communications will be conducted in accordance with Annex K.

b. (U) Subscriber table and digital nets guard chart are provided in enclosure 2 

and 3 of this TAB.

c. (U) Reports. Battery BCS submit an AFU;UPDATE with OUTTIL immediately prior to displacement and a corrected AFU;UPDATE with READY when in 

place and guns are up. All BCS will report ammo to their controlling AFATDS.

ENCLOSURES: 

1 Initial Geometry

2 Digital Communications Guard Chart

3 Subscriber Table

4 Initial Database and Guidances for Automated Systems

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

J. A. LEJEUNE

General, U. S. Marine Corps

Commanding

OFFICIAL:

S. D. BUTLER

Col USMC

G-3
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-21

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 1 (Initial Geometry) to TAB G (Fire Support Communications Plan/

MCFSS) to Appendix 19 (Fire Support) to Annex C (Operations) to Operations Order

(Number) (U)

All geometry is effective at the start of operations unless otherwise indicated by an oncall time.

1. (U) Zones

a. (U) ZO11MR

b. (U) ZO11A1

c. (U) ZO12A1

d. (U) ZO13A1

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 558 550/110 34 2 555 489/170 34 3 556 427/180 34

4 557 377/165 34 5 561 345/110 34 6 599 285/140 34

7 718 358/160 34 8 712 482/155 34 9 710 525/50 34

10 665 530/85 34 11 656 528/90 34 12 617 548/70 34

13 609 549/90 34 14 598 547/90

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 558 550/110 34 2 555 489/170 34 3 556 427/180 34

4 557 377/165 34 5 617 382/170 34 6 617 548/70 34

7 609 549/90 34 8 598 547/90

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 617 548/70 34 2 617 382/170 34 3 718 358/160 34

4 665 530/85 34 5 656 528/90 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 665 530/85 34 2 666 368/175 34 3 718 358/160 34

4 712 482/155 34 5 710 525/50 34
E-22 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

2. (U) Objectives

a. (U) OB31MF

GRID/ALT GZ RADIUS

750 290/160 34 2500m

b. (U) OB11MR

GRID/ALT GZ RADIUS

616 435/190 34 800m

c. (U) OB21MR

GRID/ALT GZ RADIUS

620 330/150 34 1000m

3. (U) FLOTs. FL11MR.

4. (U) Phase Lines

a. (U) PL11M

b. (U) PL21MR

5. (U) Battle Areas

a. (U) Close

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 707 487/150 34 2 666 497/160 34 3 632 511/155 34

4 598 519/120 34 5 555 518/100 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 709 481/130 34 2 556 482/150 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 712 446/170 34 2 556 455/180 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 427 573 34 2 437 568 34 3 480 565 34

4 558 550 34 5 598 547 34 6 609 549 34

7 617 548 34 8 656 528 34 9 665 530 34

10 710 525 34 11 765 528 34 12 777 500 34

13 780 420 34 14 773 331 34 15 718 358 34

16 599 285 34 17 436 278 34 18 431 360 34

19 435 455 34
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-23

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

b. (U) Rear

c. (U) Deep

6. (U) CFLs. CL11MR.

7. (U) FSCLs. FS11MD.

8. (U) RFLs. RL11MR.

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 423 626 34 2 427 573 34 3 437 568 34

4 480 565 34 5 558 550 34 6 598 547 34

7 609 549 34 8 617 548 34 9 656 528 34

10 665 530 34 11 710 525 34 12 765 528 34

13 773 567 34 14 597 625 34 15 514 636 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 718 358 34 2 599 285 34 3 436 278 34

4 451 245 34 5 482 220 34 6 560 165 34

7 642 148 34 8 719 150 34 9 780 168 34

10 780 241 34 11 773 331 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 712 470/155 34 2 609 498/180 34 3 555 498/170 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 367 391 34 2 773 331/140 34 3 718 358/90 34

4 599 285 34 5 436 278/125 34

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ

1 620 405/170 34 2 599 418/175 34 3 586 436/180 34
E-24 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

9. (U) RFAs. RF31MF (ONCALL, Effective from H+10 to H+480) Restriction: No 

AIR or FA delivered FASCAM.

10. (U) NFAs. NF11MF.

11. (U) FFAs. FF11MF (ONCALL from H+10 to H+480).

ENCLOSURE 2 (Digital Communications Guard Chart) to TAB G (Marine Corps Fire

Support Communications Plan/MCFSS) to Appendix 19 (Fire Support) to Annex C

(Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

Enclosure 2 shows a sample digital communications guard chart.

PT# GRID/ALT GZ RADIUS

1 516 416/80 34 1300

GRID/ALT GZ RADIUS

715 535/90 34 1200m

PT# GRID/ALT GZ PT# GRID/ALT GZ WIDTH

1 709 206/180 34 2 680 225/225 34
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-25

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

A=As Req

C=Net Ctrl

R=Relay

W=When Dir

X=Guard

Y=Yes

1

M

F

M

F

F

C

1

M

D

D

F

S

C

1

M

R

R

F

S

C

5

M

R

R

F

S

C

7

M

R

R

F

S

C

1

1

M

R

F

D

2

T

P

C

R

D

M

E

T

1

/

1

C

O

F

2

/

1

C

O

F

3

/

1

C

O

F

1

/

1

1

F

D

1

/

5

C

O

F

2

/

5

C

O

F

3

/

5

C

O

F

2

/

1

1

F

D

1

/

7

C

O

F

2

/

7

C

O

F

3

/

7

C

O

F

3

/

1

1

F

D

T

A

R

/

H

R

PROTOCOL

L=LAN

T=TACFIRE

V=VMF

1=188-220

L V V V V V L 1 T T T 1 T T T 1 T T T 1 V

KEYTIME 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 2.1 2.1 2.1 0.7 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 0.7 0.7

FSK

1=12/24

2=13/21

3=NRZ

4=CDP

3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 3

BLK MODE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DATA RATE

(bps)

16k 16k 16k 16k 16k 16k 16k 1.2k 1.2k 1.2k 16k 1.2k 1.2k 1.2k 16k 1.2k 1.2k 1.2k 16k 16k

CARRIER

DROP OUT

TIME

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

COMSEC Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

1MF FFCC C X

3AW TACC X

1MD FSCC X C X

3AW DASC X X C

1MR FSCC X C X

1al FSCC X C X

1al FOs X

2al FSCC X C X

2as FOs X

3al FSCC X C X X

3al FOs X

5MR FSCC X C X

1a5 FSCC X C C X

1a5 FOs X X

2A5 FSCC X C C X

2a5 FOs X X

3A5 FSCC X C C X

3a5 FOs X X
E-26 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

A=As Req

C=Net Ctrl

R=Relay

W=When Dir

X=Guard

Y=Yes

1

M

F

M

F

F

C

1

M

D

D

F

S

C

1

M

R

R

F

S

C

5

M

R

R

F

S

C

7

M

R

R

F

S

C

1

1

M

R

F

D

2

T

P

C

R

D

M

E

T

1

/

1

C

O

F

2

/

1

C

O

F

3

/

1

C

O

F

1

/

1

1

F

D

1

/

5

C

O

F

2

/

5

C

O

F

3

/

5

C

O

F

2

/

1

1

F

D

1

/

7

C

O

F

2

/

7

C

O

F

3

/

7

C

O

F

3

/

1

1

F

D

T

A

R

/

H

R

7MR FSCC X C X

1a7 FSCC X C X

1a7 FOs X

2a7 FSCC X C X

2a7 FOs X

3a7 FSCC X C X

3a7 FOs X

11M FDC X C X

11M TPC C C

11M MET X

11M RADAR X

UAV X

111 FDC X X X C

A11 FDC X

B11 FDC X

C11 FDC X

211 FDC X X C

E11 FDC X

F11 FDC X

G11 FDC X

311 FDC X X C C C

I11 FDC X X

K11 FDC X X

L11 FDC X X

511 FDC X C C

R11 FDC X

S11 FDC X

A27 FDC X
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-27

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 3 (Subscriber Table) to TAB G (Marine Corps Fire Support Communications Plan/MCFSS) to Appendix 19 (Fire Support) to Annex C (Operations) to Operations Order (Number) (U)

Enclosure 3 details the subscriber table in communications net order (MEF FSC Net,

then Div FSC net, etc.)

Line

#

Own

Name

HostNameNet Protocol Net

Access

Add IP

Address

Subnet

Mask

Router

Add

Rank

1 FSCC 

1MR

DFSC VMF Adaptive 16 4/11

2 FSCC 

1MR

RFSC VMF Adaptive 02 1/10

Line

#

Station

Name

Host

Name

Add IP

Address

FO# Route

1 FSCC 1MD 12 PD via DFSC net

2 FSCC FWD 1MD 13 PD via DFSC net

3 DASC 3AW 14 PD via DFSC net

4 DASC FWD 3AW 15 PD via DFSC net

5 FSCC 5MR 18 PD via DFSC net

6 FSCC FWD 5MR 19 PD via DFSC net

7 FSCC 7MR 20 PD via DFSC net

8 FSCC FWD 7MR 21 PD via DFSC net

9 FDC 11MR 22 PD via DFSC net

10 FDC FWD 11MR 23 PD via DFSC net

11 FSCC FWD 1MR 03 PD via DFSC net

12 FSCC 1/1 04 PD via DFSC net

13 FSCC FWD 1/1 05 PD via DFSC net

14 FSCC 2/1 06 PD via DFSC net

15 FSCC FWD 2/1 07 PD via DFSC net

16 FSCC 3/1 08 PD via DFSC net

17 FSCC FWD 3/1 09 PD via DFSC net

18 FDC MAIN 1/11 10 PD via DFSC net

19 FDC FWD 1/11 11 PD via DFSC net
E-28 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Line

#

Own

Name

Host

Name

Net Protocol Net

Access

Add IP

Address

Subnet

Mask

Router

Add

Rank

1 FSCC 1/1 RFSC VMF Adaptive04 1/10

2 FSCC 1/1 COF TACFIRE 1/3/3/5 C

Line

#

Station

Name

Host

Name

Add IP

Address

FO# Route

1 FSCC 1MR 02 PD via RFSC net

2 FSCC FWD 1MR 03 PD via RFSC net

3 FSCC FWD 1/1 05 PD via RFSC net

4 FSCC 2/1 06 PD via RFSC net

5 FSCC FWD 2/1 07 PD via RFSC net

6 FSCC 3/1 08 PD via RFSC net

7 FSCC FWD 3/1 09 PD via RFSC net

8 FDC 1/11 10 PD via RFSC net

9 A SD via COF A

10 FDC FWD 1/11 11 PD via RFSC net

11 B SD via COF A

12 FO 11 A CO__ E 11 PD via COF A

13 SI via FDC MAIN

14 FO 12 B CO__ F 12 PD via COF A

15 SI via FDC MAIN

16 FO 13 C CO__ G 13 PD via COF A

17 SI via FDC MAIN
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-29

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Line

#

Own

Name

Net Net

Access

Phy

Add

1 F/O/A/11/___ COFA 4 E

Line

#

Net Logical

Name

Comptr Phy

Add

1 COFA _/_/_/1_11_ Y A

2 F/W/D/1_/11_ Y B

3 F/S/C/1_/1_ Y C

4 F/W/D/1_/1_ Y D

5 / /A/1_/11_ Y I

6 F/O/B/12/__ N F

7 F/O/C/13/__ N G

Line

#

Own

Name

Net Net

Access

Phy

Add

1 F/O/B/12/___ COFA 4 F

Line

#

Net Logical

Name

Comptr Phy

Add

1 COFA _/_/_/1_11_ Y A

2 F/W/D/1_/11_ Y B

3 F/S/C/1_/1_ Y C

4 F/W/D/1_/1_ Y D

5 / /A/1_/11_ Y I

6 F/O/A/11/__ N E

7 F/O/B/12/__ N F
E-30 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 4 (Initial Database and Guidances for Automated Systems) to TAB G

(Marine Corps Fire Support Communications Plan/MCFSS) to Appendix 19 (Fire Support) to Annex C (Operations) to Operations Order (Number) (U)

1. (U) Observer and Radar Assignments

2. (U) Map Mod

a. (U) Center coordinates:776000 03537000

b. (U) Grid zone:+34

c. (U) Datum:WGS 84

3. (U) Target Number Assignments

Unit Assigned Observer/

Radar

FLOT Points

F/S/C/1_/1__(1A1) F/O/A/11/___

F/O/B/12/___

F/O/C/13/___

01-02

03-04

05-06

F/S/C/2_/1__(2A4) F/O/E/14/___

F/O/F/15/___

F/O/G/16/___

07-08

09-10

11-12

F/S/C/3_/1__(3A4) F/O/I/14/___

F/O/L/15/___

F/O/K/16/___

13-14

15-16

17-18

_/_/1/11/MR_(11M) C/M/R/01/___

STATION TARGET BLOCK ASR NUMBER BLOCK

D/A/S/3_/AW_(DAS3AW) AL4500-4999 ALD0000-ALD0999

F/S/C/1_/MR_(1MR) AA0000-0499 AAA0000-AAA0499

F/S/C/1_/1_(1A1) AA1000-1499 AAB0000-AAB0199

F/S/C/2_/1__(2A1) AA2000-2499 AAC0000-AAC0199

F/S/C/3_/1_(3A1) AA3000-3499 AAD0000-AAD0199

_/_/_/1_/11__(111) AG4000-4999

_/_/A/1_/11__(A11) AG5000-5199

_/_/B/1_/11__(B11) AG5200-5399

_/_/C/1_/11__(C11) AG5400-5599
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-31

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

4. (U) Commander’s Criteria

a. (U) Target Selection Standards and Decay Times

TARGET MAX TLE(m) MAX REP AGE (min) DECAY TIME

CP, Regiment 300 60 4 hours

CP, Battalion 300 45 4 hours

CP, Division 300 240 4 hours

CP, Small 250 30 4 hours

ARTY, Towed 200 45 1 hour

ARTY, Unknown 200 45 1 hour

MSL, Medium 400 60 30 minutes

APC 200 30 30 minutes

Armored, Vehicle 200 30 30 minutes

AA, Troops 400 60 30 minutes

AA, Trps and 

Armor

400 45 30 minutes

AA, Troops and 

Vehicle

400 45 30 minutes

ADA, MSL 100 90 30 minutes

Bunker 100 300 30 minutes

Patrol 100 30 10 minutes

Note: Fire requests will not be checked against TSS.
E-32 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

b. (U) HVT List.

c. (U) HPT List.

TARGET CATEGORY RELATIVE VALUE

C3

Fire Support

Maneuver

ADA

Engineer

RSTA

REC

NUC/CHEM

POL

Ammunition

Maintenance

Lift

LOC

HPT MATRIX

Target Effects When Relative Value

CP, Regiment Destroy I

Arty, Towed Neutralized I

Tank, Med Neutralize A

AA, Trps & Armor Suppress P

Key: I=Immediate

A=As acquired

P=Planned
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-33

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

d. (U) Attack Guidance

e. (U) Target and Fire Support System Exclusions. Railroad targets will not be 

attacked due to the need to maintain the infrastructure of the country.

f. (U) Mission Prioritization

TARGET TYPE: Weight 30

PRIORITY OF FIRES: Weight 50

ON-CALL TGTS: Weight 5

TAI: Weight 15 

g. (U) Mission Cutoff Values

FA: 20

AIR: 30

MORTAR: 10

NGF: 10

Rkt/Msl 30

Aviation 20

ATTACK GUIDANCE MATRIX

TARGET EFFECTS WHEN

C3 Destroy I

Fire Support 15% I

Maneuver Neutralize A

ADA Suppress P

Engineer Suppress A

RSTA 10% A

REC Neutralize A

NUC/CHEM Destroy I

POL 15% P

Ammunition 20% P

Maintenance Neutralize A

Lift Suppress P

LOC Suppress P
E-34 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

h. (U) Priority of Fire

i. (U) Target Area of Interest Rank. TA11MD.

j. (U) System Attack Parameters

FA: FDC 1BN 11MAR 1MARDIV

NGF: FSCC 1MD

AIR: FSCC 1MD

k. (U) Immediate missions will be routed to the FDC 3BN 11MAR 1MARDIV.

l. (U) Air Attack Methods

TARGET CATEGORY/TYPE PREFERENCE

C3/CP Regiment 6 GP bombs, 4 Napalm

m. (U) NSFS Attack Methods

TARGET CATEGORY/TYPE PREFERENCE

FS/Missile, Med 20 rds, 5"54 HE, 20 rds WP 

n. (U) FA Restrictions. Maximum volleys for FA is 3, (This has to be entered at 

each OPFAC under the FUs as the units with restrictions, using DETAILED attack 

analysis) and maximum fire units per target for Div. FSCC/Regt. FDC is 7. Maximum fire units per target for Regt. FSCC/BN. FDC is 3. Concrete piercing fuzes 

are restricted from use. (This data is entered for each FSCC UNIT ID that the unit is 

supported by).

o. (U) FA Attack Methods

TARGET CATEGORY/TYPE PREFERENCE

FS/Arty, Towed Battery 2 volleys DPICM, 4 volleys HE/VT 

MAN/AA, Troops & Armor Bn, 1 volley DPICM, 3 volleys HE/PD

p. (U) FA Immediate Attack Methods

Immediate Suppression: Platoon, 1 volley, DPICM

Immediate Smoke: Platoon, 1 volley WP/PD, 1 volley WP2/TI

UNIT RANK

1/1 (1)

3/1 (2)

2/1 (3)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ E-35

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

q. (U) Target Duplication

TARGET SEPARATION DISTANCE

ANY TARGETS: 100 meters

SIMILAR TARGETS: 400 meters

r. (U) Fire Support System Buffers

s. (U) Artillery Target Intelligence (ATI)

(1) (U) Suspect Target Maximum Overlay. 30%

(2) (U) ATI Reporting. The following will be reported in ATI message formats:

t. (U) Battlefield Geometry. Current support data. Initial support data is provided

in enclosure 1 of this TAB.

u. (U) Ammunition and Firing Units

(1) (U) Controlled Supply Rate for 155MM

(2) (U) Critical Ammunition Levels for 155MM

FA: 600 meters NSFS: 750 meters

Mortar: 400 meters Air: 1000 meters

Aviation: 500 meters Rkt/Msl: 1000 meters

AMMUNITION D-DAY S-DAY

HE 80 100

RAP 60 100

DPICM 120 160

Copperhead 0 8

AMMUNITION DEGRADED CRITICAL NO-GO

HE 60% 40% 10%

RAP 50% 30% 10%

DPICM 65% 40% 15%

Copperhead 50% 25% 20%
APPENDIX F. ADVANCED FIELD ARTILLERY

TACTICAL DATA SYSTEM

This appendix, used with MCWP 3-16.2, Tactics,

Techniques, and Procedures for Marine Corps Fire

Support System (TTP for MCFSS), and MCRP

3-16.2A, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System

(AFATDS), sets forth guidelines for operating in automated environments.

The Marine Corps Fire Support System (MCFSS) is

employed at fire and air control agencies including fire

direction centers (FDCs) and fire support coordination

centers (FSCCs) from battalion through the MEF force

fires coordination center (FFCC), the direct air support

center (DASC), the tactical air control center (TACC),

the supporting arms coordination center (SACC), and

the rear area operations center (RAOC) of the CSSE

command element. The system allows these agencies

to operate with first generation digital input/output devices that have entered the Marine Corps inventory.

The Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System

(AFATDS) allows these stations to transition to a single software system that will eventually replace the

Initial Fire Support Automated System (IFSAS), Battery Computer System (BCS), and Multiple Launched

Rocket System (MLRS) Fire Direction System (FDS).

DEVELOPMENT

AFATDS is one of five systems that compose the

Army Tactical Command and Control System

(ATCCS). AFATDS, the only jointly developed system, provides fire support planning and execution software. AFATDS will be developed through three

software versions. Version two (A98) was used as a

test bed in I MEF. Version three (A99) will be fielded

in FY2001. With further software development, currently fielded devices will be compatible with

AFATDS via VMF protocol. Upon the completion of

fielding, all IFSAS/TACFIRE devices will be replaced

by AFATDS. In addition, all artillery technical fire direction for cannon and rocket systems will be computed by AFATDS.

SOFTWARE PREMISE

AFATDS software is developed as a fire support tool.

The computer is provided with detailed guidance

derived from the staff planning process and the decidedetect-deliver-assess (D3A) targeting methodology.

This guidance provides AFATDS with “rules” to use

during processing of fire support missions. Through this

process, the commander and staff determine the appropriate responses during the period of staff planning.

These decisions are executed rapidly by AFATDS during the periods of intense activity that characterize modern maneuver warfighting. Failure to provide adequate

preplanned guidance will prevent the system from executing according to commander’s intent.

GUIDANCE MANAGEMENT

Incoming fire missions and fire plan targets are validated by guidance entered at each fire support and fire

direction echelon. For rapid and efficient attack of targets and fire plan scheduling, this guidance data must

be managed.

Several guidance windows must be maintained to

manage the fire support system, such as—

l Target Selection Standards (TSS).

l HVT List.

l Target Management Matrix.

l Mission Prioritization.

l System Tasks.

l Fire Support Attack Parameters.

l Munitions Restrictions.

The responsibility for creating and disseminating

guidance is an intrinsic element of command and thus

resides with the force commander.
F-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Prior to establishing the landing force ashore, the

MAGTF FFC receives guidance from the AF commander. This guidance is transmitted to the SACC and

subordinate FSCCs and fire support assets controlled

by the MAGTF FFCC.

After establishing the landing force ashore, the GCE

FSCC modifies guidance in accordance with the CLF

and GCE commander’s intent, orders, and verbal direction. This guidance is transmitted to the SACC

(afloat) and subordinate FSCCs, FDCs, and fire support assets. Changes to guidance should not be disseminated between echelons as each echelon

optimizes their guidance based on their mission and

role. AFATDS performs functions based on its established echelon (regiment or battalion) and role

(FSCC, FDC, or other).

FIRE MISSION PROCESSING

Fire mission processing is a key function of the fire

support system. AFATDS uses guidance’s, task organization, and received mission information to select

the appropriate fire support asset, and to route the fire

mission to the appropriate operational facility (OPFACS). Processing through multiple OPFACS is

usually required to move the mission from the requester to the shooter. The processing and route may

be transparent to some of the OPFACS depending on

intervention criteria.

INTERVENTION CRITERIA

AFATDS can use database information to automatically process, coordinate, and possibly deny fire

missions without operator intervention. Intervention

points allow operators to stop automatic processing

under given conditions to review and alter. Intervention criteria are comprised of a set of rules that

govern the interruption of the automatic fire mission

process. An almost endless number of intervention

rules can be established, however, development and

use of intervention points can significantly decrease

responsiveness. Each rule is built around the following categories of mission information:

l Battle Area.

l Attack Option.

l Mission Precedence.

l Target Type.

l Filters.

l Analysis Result.

These six criteria may be set in any combination to

create a single rule. Multiple rules may be constructed.

Default Setup

When the database is initially constructed, a single default rule is incorporated that causes all fire missions

to be subject to intervention. Deleting this rule causes

all fire missions to process automatically. Missions assigned for attack by ATACMS are automatically displayed for operator intervention without regard to

operator established intervention criteria.

Tracking Fire Missions

When a fire mission is processed without any intervention, each OPFAC can maintain situational awareness of active missions as described below.

Active fire missions can be displayed on an overlay.

This will cause any received fire mission, regardless of

intervention criteria, to appear on the screen of the

SHRD as a bold target symbol. The operator can ascertain information about the target by clicking the

symbol that appears.

All fire missions received are placed in the active target list until the mission is ended by receipt of a mission fired report. At any time the operator can display

mission information for any target.

Each method allows the operator to display the target

status window. The status window displays all fire

mission messages received or transmitted for the mission in question. The status of the mission can also be

requested or traced to obtain the status of the mission

at every station involved.

Fire requests and fire orders may be printed when they

are received and/or transmitted. This is accomplished

by making entries in the configure printing setup. This
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ F-3

function is accessed by selecting alerts and messages,

messages, and configure printing setup.

Intervention by OPFAC

The following are recommended for employment of

intervention criteria.

Battalion FSCC

l Denied missions.

l Air and NSFS missions if these assets are available

to the battalion FSCC.

Regiment FSCC

l Denied missions.

l Any other rules dictated by the FSC.

l Air and NSFS missions if these assets are available

to the regiment FSCC.

Division FSCC

l Denied missions.

l All fire missions in the rear operations area.

l All fire missions in the deep operations area.

l All air missions.

Battalion FDC

All fire missions.

Regiment FDC

All fire missions.

ATTACK ANALYSIS

During attack analysis, AFATDS considers various

parameters of a given fire mission; e.g., mission type,

observer request or target location; the guidance that is

in effect; the allocated attack units available; FSCMs;

and attack option ranking criteria to develop attack options to achieve defeat criteria of the target. The three

levels of attack analysis in AFATDS are FS system,

unit, and detailed.

FS System Attack Analysis

System attack analysis allows an FSCC to perform attack analysis only to the level of detail needed to select

an FS system and transmit the mission to the appropriate agency for further processing. When performing

FS system attack analysis, no detailed information (locations of firing units, munitions status, etc.) is required. To use FS system attack analysis correctly, the

FS attack parameters window must be filled out. Generally, this level of attack analysis will be used only at

the higher level FSCCs, such as the MAGTF FFCC.

Unit Attack Analysis

Unit attack analysis allows an OPFAC to conduct

more detailed attack analysis using “rollup” unit information. This level of attack analysis would normally

be used in higher level artillery FDCs/FA CPs. Fire

units directly supporting or commanded by the OPFAC performing the analysis are analyzed using unit

data (location, munitions capabilities, operational status, etc.) to determine if they can attack the target. Firing units with an intermediate FDC between them and

the OPFAC are not analyzed in detail. They are analyzed using the “rollup” data contained in the unit subordinate information window. For unit attack analysis

to be used correctly, the status for subordinate units

must have been transmitted to the OPFAC.

Detailed Attack Analysis

Detailed attack analysis allows an OPFAC to determine and evaluate all individual fire units (as well as

collective groupings of fire units for massing) against

a given target. It uses all unit data (munitions, operational status, location, etc.) to determine a solution for

the target. This method is available for all OPFACs,

but is generally used at the lower echelon; e.g., regiment and below, FDCs, and FSCCs.
F-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

FIRE MISSION ROUTING

Fire missions are routed through OPFACS to select

the optimum fire support asset, provide a conduit for

coordination, and to increase situational awareness.

Routing of the mission depends on the source, however the central hub of fire support is the FSCC.

Options

AFATDS classifies if a selected fire support asset is a

capable option to engage a target into four categories:

l Green—the asset is a capable option and no

coordination is required.

l Yellow—the asset is a capable option but

coordination is required.

l Red—attack options exist but there are restrictions

that prevent that asset from being capable of firing

the mission.

l Black—no attack options exist for that FS system;

i.e., the unit does not have any firing units in

support.

To determine the restrictions of a RED option, open

the attack options window from the menu bar of the

mission window. A series of icons (ammunition,

range, achievable effects, etc.) will display illustrating

whether or not each of these passed or failed.

Battalion FSCC

Fire missions requested by an artillery or mortar observer are transmitted to the battalion FSCC. The observer unit information must indicate that the battalion

FSCC that the observer reports to is both the command

and supported unit (command unit ID and supported

unit ID in the general unit information window for the

observer). The battalion FSCC normally possesses

only organic mortars with which to engage the target.

Regardless, the battalion FSCC computer will consider only those fire support assets that are commanded

by or support the battalion FSCC. If the mission is recommended for denial or processing to an air or NSFS

asset, the mission appears in the intervention window

and remains there until the operator takes action. If the

battalion’s organic mortars cannot adequately service

the target, artillery, air, and NSFS (when air and NSFS

are held at a higher FSCC) may be selected. These

missions are transmitted to the regiment FSCC because the battalion FSCC has entered the regiment

FSCC name in the fields of the system attack parameters window as the agency to route missions. The mission may be resolved in many ways.

Coordination Requests

These requests are transmitted to the agencies responsible for violated boundaries or FSCMs. The transmitting computer will wait until the mission is approved

to transmit the fire request to the regimental FSCC.

Mission Denied

The mission may be denied either by failures of guidance or denial from an agency from which coordination was requested. The operator at the battalion FSCC

may reprocess the mission.

Missions Not Requiring Coordination

Missions are transmitted to the regiment FSCC.

Missions Requiring Coordination

with Electronic Warfare Assets

Missions requiring coordination with electronic warfare assets (as indicated by guidance) will transmit a

request for coordination to the IEW agency listed in

the mission routing info window. Denial or approval

will cause the mission to process as if coordination

from another FSCC was required.

No Solution

AFATDS may not be able to determine a solution. In

this event the AFATDS recommends “Denied, no capable option.” The operator can select unsupportable

causing the mission to be transmitted to the regimental

FSCC (the battalion’s support unit ID) for reevaluation of fire support engagement.

Override

The operator can override AFATDS’ solution and

transmit any solution to any station. Overriding and
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ F-5

transmitting a RED option does not allow the automatic routing of FO commands.

Regiment FSCC

The regiment FSCC processes the mission and intervenes only on denied missions. The mission may not

be assigned to the same asset as predicted by the battalion FSCC if the guidance at the regiment differs

from those at the battalion. The mission may be—

l Transmitted to any fire support asset that the

regiment FSCC commands. If additional

coordination is required, requests are routed before

transmitting the mission to the fire support asset.

l Determined unsupportable. The operator can then

transmit the mission, due to supported unit ID, to

the division FSCC.

l Overridden. The operator can override the

computer solution and transmit any solution to any

station.

Battalion FDC

The battalion FDC processes the mission to subordinate battery FDCs. The battalion FDC always performs detailed attack analysis due to software default.

Fire missions will never be denied at battalion FDC.

Though several options may be available to the battalion FDC, one of three possible solutions will be selected by the battalion FDC:

l The fire mission can be passed to the firing unit(s)

selected by AFATDS.

l The fire mission can be transmitted to any

subordinate or reinforcing unit regardless of the

option AFATDS selected.

l The mission can be returned to the regiment FSCC

as unsupportable. This option should not be

required if the regiment FSCC is in detailed attack

analysis. However, if unsupportable is selected, the

mission is returned to the regiment FSCC,

reprocessed, and most likely transmitted to the

division FSCC as unsupportable. This is AFTADS’

method of “request for reinforcing fires.” Since the

fire mission may be received again by the battalion

FDC as part of a massed fire mission solution from

the regiment FDC, any mission that is returned to

the regiment FDC as unsupportable is immediately

manually deleted from the active fire target list by

the battalion FDC.

Division FSCC

The division FSCC processes fire missions received

but seldom intervenes. NSFS missions are printed and

handed off to the representative of this asset (unless

automated communications are available to these

units). Artillery missions are passed to the regiment

FDC for processing. Air missions are transmitted to

the DASC. 

Regiment FDC

The regiment FDC processes received fire missions

using detailed attack analysis. Fire Orders are passed

to subordinate battalion FDCs. If the mission is unsupportable, it is returned as an unsupportable mission to

the division FSCC. The regiment FDC does not deny

the mission.

RADAR FIRE MISSION AND THE TPC

Radars held in GS are controlled by the TPC. The TPC

will process all fire missions to the regiment FDC by

clicking unsupportable. Since TPC is commanded by

the regiment FDC, missions are automatically passed

to them.

All radar fire missions require coordination since they

will plot in the zone of a maneuver unit. Coordination

is normally effected by coordination requests automatically generated at the regiment FDC, not at the TPC.

Unsupportable missions do not require coordination

until an attack option is determined.

Radars in DS of a battalion are directly linked to that

FDC. Command and support relationships of these radars are changed to reflect this and the fire missions

transmitted are processed by the battalion FDC in the

same fashion as fire missions received by an FO.
APPENDIX G. ESTIMATES OF SUPPORTABILITY

Estimates of supportability are performed in detailed planning and fragmentary order

planning. They analyze the supporting arms’ current capabilities; the current area of operations, enemy capabilities, and each course of action proposed; and cite advantages

and disadvantages of each course of action. The extent of the estimate varies with the

time available. The following formats for formal written estimates cover artillery, aviation, and naval surface fires.

Sample Format of Artillery Estimate of Supportability

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group

ARTILLERY ESTIMATE OF SUPPORTABILITY (U)

TITLE (U)

(U) REFERENCES: (List applicable references; e.g., maps, operation plans, doctrinal 

publications, SOPs, etc.)

1. (U) Mission

(State the mission of the command.)

a. (U) Artillery Concept. (State the artillery concept to support the mission.)

b. (U) Previous Decisions. (State any previous decisions by the maneuver commander.) 

2. (U) Situation and Considerations

a. (U) Characteristics of the Area of Operations. (Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.)

b. (U) Enemy Capabilities and Most Probable Course of Action. (Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.)

c. (U) Friendly Forces. (State the friendly artillery forces available for the operation or refer to the planning document or other document setting forth available 

forces.)

d. (U) Courses of Action. (The proposed courses of action are stated in full.)

Page number

CLASSIFICATION
G-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

e. (U) Assumptions. (State any assumptions on which the estimate is based, including assumptions regarding anticipated enemy action.)

3. (U) Artillery Analysis

a. (U) Considerations Having Equal Effect. (State all considerations of the analysis that have equal effect on all proposed courses of action.)

b. (U) Courses of Action. Each course of action is discussed from a strictly artillery point of view. All influencing factors are considered. Considerations include 

but are not limited to the ability of artillery to cover the area of operation of the supported unit; ammunition availability (total or CSR, munition types, desired packages); positioning and displacement requirements (rate of movement, counterfire 

threat); ability to mass fires; ability to provide CSS (external transportation assets if 

required, artillery culminating points); security of artillery (ground, indirect fire 

threat); troops available; effects of terrain and weather (operations, observation, 

ammunition effectiveness, and communications).

4. (U) Evaluation

(Each course of action is evaluated in turn. Advantages and disadvantages of each 

course of action are enumerated.)

5. (U) Conclusions

a. (U) Best Course. (This is a statement of which course of action can best be 

supported from an artillery point of view.)

b. (U) Other Courses. (Other courses of action are listed in their order of supportability, and a statement is made of their salient disadvantages.)

c. (U) Significant Problems. (This is a statement of significant problems to be

solved and limitations to be taken into account. Measures required to solve the

problems should be included.)

/s/__________________________

__________________________
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ G-3

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format of Aviation Estimate of Supportability

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _ copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group

AVIATION ESTIMATE OF SUPPORTABILITY (U)

TITLE (U)

(U) REFERENCES: (List applicable references; e.g., maps, operation plans, doctrinal 

publications, SOPs, etc.)

1. (U) Mission

a. (U) Basic Mission. (State the mission of the command.)

b. (U) Previous Decisions. (State any previous decisions by the commander.)

2. (U) Situation and Considerations

a. (U) Enemy

(1) (U) Present disposition of major elements. (Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.)

(2) (U) Capabilities. (Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.)

b. (U) Friendly

(1) (U) Present disposition of major elements.

(2) (U) Probable tactical developments.

c. (U) Courses of Action. (The proposed courses of action are stated in full.)

d. (U) Characteristics of the Area. (Refer to the Intelligence Estimate.)

e. (U) Assumptions. (State any assumptions on which the estimate is based, including assumptions regarding anticipated enemy action.)

3. (U) Air Support Analysis

a. (U) Mission of the Force. (Restate the mission with emphasis on aviation support and participation required.)

b. (U) Concept of Employment. (State the concept of employment of aviation 

elements.)
G-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

c. (U) Enemy Situation and Capabilities. (State the enemy capabilities with respect to air support to the force.)

d. (U) Requirement for Aviation Support. (A general statement as to which 

course of action will require the most aviation support.)

e. (U) Topography. (A general statement of the potential sites and landing zones 

for use in the operation.)

f. (U) Weather. (A general statement of the impact of weather on aviation support of the operation.)

g. (U) Observation and Surveillance. (A general statement regarding observation 

and surveillance as they concern aviation support of the operation.)

h. (U) Communication Requirements. (A general statement regarding communications requirements for aviation support of the operation.)

i. (U) Logistics Support. (A general statement regarding logistics support for 

aviation support of the operation.)

j. (U) Hydrographic Conditions. (A general statement regarding the impact hydrography will have on aviation support.)

4. (U) Evaluation

(Each course of action is evaluated in turn. Advantages are enumerated, and then 

disadvantages enumerated.)

5. (U) Conclusions

a. (U) Best Course. (This is a statement of which course of action can best be 

supported from an aviation support point of view.)

b. (U) Other Courses. (Other courses of action are listed in their order of supportability, and a statement is made of their salient disadvantages.)

c. (U) Significant Problems. (This is a statement of significant problems to be 

solved and limitations to be taken into account. Measures required to solve the 

problems should be included.)

/s/__________________________

__________________________
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ G-5

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

Sample Format of Naval Surface Fires Estimate of Supportability

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group

NAVAL SURFACE FIRES ESTIMATE OF SUPPORTABILITY (U)

TITLE (U)

(U) REFERENCE:

1. (U) Mission

a. (U) Basic Mission. (Of the command as a whole.)

b. (U) Previous Decisions. (If any.)

c. (U) Purpose of This Estimate. (To determine the course of action that can best 

be supported by naval surface fires.)

2. (U) Situation and Considerations. (Omit subparagraphs not applicable.)

a. (U) Enemy

(1) (U) Present Disposition of Major Elements. (Reference may be made to Intelligence Estimate.)

(2) (U) Major Capabilities.(Enemy tactical capabilities likely to affect naval 

surface fires matters.)

(3) (U) Other Capabilities. (Those of a nontactical nature which are likely to 

affect the naval surface fires situation.)

b. (U) Own Forces

(1) (U) Own Courses of Action. (A statement of the tactical courses of action 

under consideration.)

(2) (U) Naval Surface Fire Support Means. (A breakdown of the number and 

types of ships that will be available for the operation. At this stage of the operation, this may be purely an estimate from the NAVY AMPHIBIOUS COMMANDER.)

(3) (U) Training. (A statement of the state of training of SFCPs and the ships 

that will be supporting the operation, if known.)
G-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

c. (U) Characteristics of the Area. (Those affecting the naval surface fires situation such as weather, terrain, and hydrography. Reference may be made, in part, to 

the Intelligence Estimate.)

d. (U) Assumptions. (If any.)

e. (U) Special Factors. (Items not covered elsewhere which may have a bearing 

on the naval surface fires situation.)

3. (U) Naval Surface Fires Analysis

(Under each of the following subheadings, each course of action under consideration is analyzed in the light of all significant factors to determine problems which 

will be encountered, measures required to solve such problems, and any limiting 

features which will exist.)

a. (U) Hydrography

b. (U) Terrain

c. (U) Weather

d. (U) Means Required

e. (U) Training

f. (U) Intelligence

g. (U) Helicopter Support Requirements

h. (U) Electronic Warfare

i. (U) Miscellaneous

4. (U) Considerations Having Equal Effects

(Discuss those factors that will affect all courses of action equally.)

5. (U) Evaluation

(Based on the foregoing analysis, the advantages and disadvantages of each course 

of action under consideration are summarized and compared from a naval surface 

fires viewpoint.)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ G-7

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

6. (U) Conclusions

(Omit subparagraphs not applicable.)

a. (U) (A statement as to which course of action under consideration can best be 

supported from a naval surface fires viewpoint.)

b. (U) (A statement of the salient disadvantages which render the other courses of 

action less desirable from a naval surface fires viewpoint.)

c. (U) (A statement of significant naval surface fires problems to be solved and 

limitations to be taken into account.)

d. (U) (A statement of measures required to solve naval surface fires problems 

involved.)

/s/__________________________

__________________________
APPENDIX H. EXAMPLE OF FRAG ORDER

FIRE SUPPORT PLAN WITH

QUICK FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING

CLASSIFICATION

1. Commander’s Guidance for Fire Support

The main effort is 1/6 and they will have priority of fires during their assault. Disrupt 

enemy fires during our movement forward. Plan fires to limit possible enemy mech attack on our left flank. Disrupt enemy positions on the objective by neutralizing the armored vehicles and suppressing his direct fires during the assault. Maximize CAS 

against tanks and artillery while the air threat remains low. Limit reinforcing enemy 

tanks. Disrupt the enemy’s indirect fires, particularly while 1/6 moves through the pass. 

Ensure our artillery’s displacement plan can keep up with our movement.

2. Concept of Fires

a. (U) Pre-Assault Phase

(1) (U) Task. Disrupt the enemy’s indirect fire capabilities.

(2) (U) Purpose.To enable 6th Mar freedom of maneuver to objective A.

(3) (U) Method. 6th Mar has priority of fires for counterfire prior to crossing 

the line of departure. Target acquisition (TA) allocate 6th Mar 1 radar CFZ per 

battalion assembly area. Artillery POF to 1/6. FAC (A) neutralize all radar acquisitions, 2 sorties fixed-wing on-call. Recon Tm 2 (primary) and 1/6 (alternate) controls 2 sections of rotary-wing to locate/destroy OPs in vicinity of the 

pass. 1/6 fires AJ 2005/06/14/15, 50 salvos NSFS (DD 987 & DD 980) to neutralize all EW-located artillery and ADA targets. EW identify artillery COF/

ADA nets, identify/locate artillery/ADA units, and on order jam ADA nets. Pri 

Tgts are ADA assets, C3, artillery. FSCL 1 is in effect and 6th Mar CFL is established at PL Gold.

(4) (U) Effect. Enemy indirect fires into assembly areas limited. Active artillery and ADA units destroyed (3 of 6 batteries) and (4 of 8 launchers). COF nets 

identified for Movement and Assault phase. No CAS losses to ADA. 

b. (U) Movement Phase

(1) (U) Task. Disrupt enemy indirect fires from LD until 1/6 is in attack position.

(2) (U) Purpose. Enable freedom of maneuver to the objective. Preserve combat power. 

(3) (U) Method. Artillery POF and NGF to 1/6. TA allocate 1/6 radar CFZ 

along route of march. FAC(A) will be used for time critical targets and radar acquisitions, 2 sorties fixed-wing on-call and NSFS (DD 980) is alternate to neutralize additional radar acquisitions. EW on order jam ADA; be prepared to jam 

artillery COF. 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION
H-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

(4) (U) Effect. Enemy indirect fires ineffective. Active artillery units neutralized or forced to displace.

(5) (U) Task. Limit possible enemy attack to left flank.

(6) (U) Purpose. Protect regiment left flank and maintain momentum of the attack.

(7) (U) Method. 2/6 allocated quick fire plan (QFP) TURTLE (4 NSFS, 2 Arty 

TGTs- counter-mech program). On order, 2/6 has priority of rotary-wing CAS 

and NSFS (DD 987); on order FAC (A) locate/neutralize mech battalion in 

named area of interest (NAI) 1 with 2 sections F/A-18; suppress dismounted 

troops in NAI 1 -2 sect rotary-wing. HA Mamba in effect. NSFS (DD 987) and 

Artillery on order neutralize mech unit in NAI 1 (QFP TURTLE-TGTs TBD). 

Artillery be prepared to provide suppression along route of march.

(8) (U) Effect. Enemy attack disrupted without regiment committing ground 

units. 

(9) (U) Task. Neutralize the motorized rifle battalion on objective A.

(10) (U) Purpose. Neutralize enemy direct fires prior to assault and begin destruction of forces on the objective.

(11) (U) Method. Priority of all Fires to 1/6 at PL RED. 1/6 allocated QFP 

TADPOLE (4 NSFS, 2 Arty TGTs- prep fires). NSFS (DD 987) neutralize motorized rifle battalion QFP TADPOLE (TGTs TBD). Artillery destroy neutralize 

rifle battalion QFP TADPOLE (TGTs TBD). On-call, 2 TGTs (AJ 2008, 2009). 

CAS neutralize MRB on OBJ A -2 sections of rotary wing, -1 sortie fixed-wing. 

BP BLACK, ACA SKUNK in effect.

(12) (U) Effect. Enemy long range direct fires neutralized. Motorized rifle 

companies neutralized.

c. (U) Assault Phase

(1) (U) Task. Disrupt enemy indirect fires during assault.

(2) (U) Purpose. Prevent suppression of attacking units.

(3) (U) Method. EW jam artillery COF.

(4) (U) Effect. Enemy COF required to jump.

(5) (U) Task. Limit enemy tank company’s on OBJ B ability to reinforce OBJ A.

(6) (U) Purpose. Isolate OBJ A.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ H-3

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

(7) (U) Method. 1/6 has POF for CAS. 1/6, through FAC(A), controls CAS to 

neutralize tank co. in TAI 1 -2 sorties fixed-wing, 2 sections rotary CAS. BP 

GREEN, ACA POSSUM in effect. 1/6 emplaces 1 400x400, medium density, 

short duration, RAAMS minefield (AJ 2010). 1/6 neutralizes tank co with NSFS 

(DD 980) (Series PERCH- AJ 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014). CFL 2 in effect, CFL 3 

on order.

(8) (U) Effect. Tank company neutralized. 

d. (U) Consolidation Phase

(1) (U) Task. Limit the enemy’s counterattack.

(2) (U) Purpose. Allow consolidation of combat power. 

(3) (U) Method. Priorities of fire to 6th Mar. TA establish 1 CFZ per battalion. 

1/6 receives 1 Artillery battery FPF. 6th Mar FSCC controls CAS to locate/destroy enemy in NAI 2 -1 section rotary CAS. EW identify/locate command net.

(4) (U) Effect. Enemy counterattack detected, disrupted. 
H-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

3. (U) Fire Support Execution Matrix

4. (U) Coordinating Instructions

a. (U) CFL #3 in effect effective 050600 OCT at grid 433644 through 503644.

b. (U) Target nominations, Quick fire plans, due NLT 050000 OCT. Updated list 

of targets will be transmitted NLT 050200 OCT.

Target allocation.

Regt: 20 

1/6: 10 

2/6: 10

c. (U) Recon team RFAs will be transmitted NLT 042300 OCT.

6TH MAR

AA LOD PL RED OBJ A/B CONSOLID

CF POF from

Div

QUICK FIRE PLAN

TADPOLE

O/O AJ 2010 POF-All

1/6 POF - Arty POF - All O/C AJ 2008,

2009

Arty 

1 Btry FPF

2/6 O/O POF - 

RCAS, NSFS,

QFP TURTLE

POF - NSFS

NSFS N - Counterfire N - Counterfire 

O/O QFP

TURTLE

QFP TADPOLE O/O Series

PERCH

2/10 O/O QFP

TURTLE

QFP TADPOLE O/C AJ 2008, 

2009

O/O AJ 2010

1 Btry FPF

CAS (Rotary) 2 Sect, L/D OPs 2 Sect

O/O N/S NAI 1

2 Sect, D OBJ A 2 Sect, N OBJ

B

1 Sect, Scout

NAI 2

CAS (Fixed) 2 Sorties

N - Counterfire

2 Sorties

N- Counterfire

1 Sortie, D OBJ

A 

2 Sorties, N OBJ

B

EW ID - COF/ADA 

Locate

ATRY/ADA

O/O - Jam ADA

O/O JAM ADA

BPT JAM COF

JAM COF JAM ADA ID/L CMD

FSCMs FSCL 1 CFL 3 BP BLACK

ACA SKUNK 

BP GREEN ACA

POSSUM
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ H-5

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

5. (U) Critical Information

a. Artillery

(1) # of BN 1 round missions available: 30. 

(2) # of FASCAM (MED DEN 400 x 400) available: 2. 

(3) # of minutes of M825 smoke for 300M screen: 20. 

(4) RAP reserved for counterfire missions unless approved by this HQ.

b. CAS

(1) Rotary-wing CAS sections (2 on station) from 050500 through 

051600 OCT. FARP grid 422610.

(2) Fixed-wing CAS sorties from 050200 through 050400 OCT available 

from CVBG in AOA; from 050400 through 051600 OCT available from 2d 

MAW, LAGGER POINT RENO, grid 350500. 

c. NSFS

d. USS O’Bannon, DD 987, DS to 6th Mar from FSA 1 effective 050000 OCT. 

Off station 051200 through 051400 OCT for UNREP.

e. USS Moosbrugger, DD 980, GS to 6th Mar from FSA 2 effective 050600 OCT. 
APPENDIX I. TARGETING AND EXECUTION TOOLS

Targeting and execution tools are incorporated into the

fire support annex of the OPORD and are used to task

subordinate elements.

Although not normally developed on the battalion level, FSCCs at lower echelons may use the high-payoff

target list (HPTL) and adjust the higher headquarters

AGM according to their scheme of maneuver to determine their own AGM, subordinate taskings, targets,

and fire support execution matrix (FSEM). The FSC

can modify and apply each of the following examples

(or combinations) to meet his needs and the current

tactical situation. See MCRP 3-16A/FM 6-20-10, Targeting, for a detailed discussion of targeting and execution tools.

HIGH-PAYOFF TARGET LIST

The HPTL is a prioritized list of high-payoff targets

(HPTs). Define HPTs as accurately as possible.

In table I-1, combat outpost (COP) targets have been

further defined to only those in the zone of the main

attack. Priority #2 could pose problems. Are both of

these systems the same priority throughout this phase?

If non-Firefinder assets are allocated to detect them,

which system is allocated for first? (Get clarifying

guidance from the regimental FSC.) ADA systems in

#3 can cause a lack of focus. Are all systems, regardless of location, an HPT? Consider only those that can

affect the battalion’s airspace.

TARGET SELECTION

STANDARDS MATRIX

TSS are criteria established to evaluate potential target

information considering its source, accuracy, reliability, and timeliness. Knowledge of the enemy’s use of

deceptive techniques or decoys and changes in tactics

in an attempt to counter friendly action or deceive targeting sources will affect TSS.

HPTs identified from the collection effort must be reported to the delivery system within the designated

timeliness criteria and meet the target location error

goal under accuracy in order to be attacked. Commanders can override this criteria at any time, but this

gives the targeting team guidance to execute in the absence of further orders. See table I-2.

ATTACK GUIDANCE MATRIX

Knowing target vulnerabilities and the effect an attack

will have on enemy operations allows the targeting

team to propose the most efficient available attack option. Key guidance is the type of effects the commander wishes to inflict on the target. After commander’s

approval, attack guidance is summarized in the AGM.

See table I-3. The AGM consists of—

l The HPTL—a prioritized list of HPTs by phase of

the operation.

l When—the time the target should be engaged.

Table I-1. HPTL.

Phase/Event: Security Zone

PRIORITY TARGET

1 COPs in main attack zone

2 2S1 and 2S19

3 2S6, SA9, SA13

4 Mortars in main attack zone

5 Regimental CP

Table I-2. TSS Matrix.

HPT TIMELINESS ACCURACY

COPS in main 

attack zone

3 hr 100 m

2S1 and 2S19 30 min 150 m

2S6, SA9, SA13 1 hr 200 m

Mortars in main 

attack zone

30 min 150 m

Regiment CP 4 hr 500 m
I-2 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

l How—the attack system that will engage the target.

l Effect—desired effects on target or target system.

l Remarks—remarks on if BDA is required, whether

coordination must take place, etc.

Guidance for when an asset is to be attacked is described as immediate, as acquired, and planned. 

l Immediate—the commander wants this target

attacked as soon as acquired, before any others.

l As acquired—these targets will be attacked in the

order they are acquired and received by the fire

support asset. Immediate takes precedence over as

acquired. 

l Planned—targets are not to be attacked but are to be

planned for a later time to be attacked as part of a

preparation, program or schedule of fires.

MCRP 3-16A/FM 6-20-10 has additional information

on the AGM.

HPTL/TSS/AGM

The FSC can combine one or more tools to meet his

requirements. Table I-4 shows the most common attack systems used. Table I-5, on page I-4, shows an

HPTL with an AGM. 

In table I-4, across the top portion of the matrix (prioritized from left to right) are the HPTs by category. Below each category, specific target types can be listed

for clarification.

Along the left-hand column are the attack systems that

can be used to attack the HPTs. At the intersection of

the HPT’s column and the attack system row is a box

that contains the asset prioritization, TSS, and damage

criteria. (See graphic at the bottom of the page.) In the

top right hand corner of the box is a small number—

the asset prioritization. It helps the FSC or watch officer determine which asset to use to attack the target. Artillery is the second choice to attack indirect fire

assets. The TSS displays target location error, engagement criteria (how big the target must be to engage),

what the target is doing, and the target decay time. The

location given by the observer must be within 100m of

the target’s location. The target must be larger than

platoon size, stationary, and should not have been reported longer than 30 minutes ago. Should the request

for fire for the identified target meet the TSS and the

asset determined to be first choice to attack the target

is unavailable, then artillery would be used to attack an

indirect fire asset.

Table I-3. Attack Guidance Matrix.

HPT WHEN HOW EFFECT REMARKS

COPs P Arty N Plan in initial Prep

RSTA and OPs P Arty N Plan in initial Prep

2S1 and 2S3 I CAS (FIXED) N Plan in initial Prep

2S6, SA-9, SA-13 P Arty S SEAD for CAS

Regt CP A EW/Arty EW/N Coord with ECM prior to 

Neutralizing

Reserve Bn P CAS (fixed) D Intent to attack reserve Bn in 

EA HOT

LEGEND I = IMMEDIATE

A = AS ACQUIRED

P = PLANNED

S = SUPPRESS

N = NEUTRALIZE

D = DESTROY

EW = JAMMING OR OTHER OFFENSIVE EW
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ I-3

Table I-4. HPTL/TSS/AGM.

PHASE: 1- DTG:

HIGH-PAYOFF TARGETS

PRI 1 2 3 4 REMARKS

DESC

RIPTION

INDIRECT FIRE ADA

SYSTEMS

MANEUVER RSTA

A

T

T

A

C

K

S

Y

S

T

E

M

S

Arty

1 100M 2 1 100MM 1 1 100MM 3 1 100M 1

2 Platoon> 2 PLT(-) 2 Platoon> 2 CoHq

3 Stationary 3 Stationary 3 Stationary 3 Stationary

4 30 Min 4 45 Min 4 <45 Min 4 <45 Min

N N S N

81 MM

1 100M 5 1 100M 3 1 100M 5 1 100M 5

2 Platoon 2 PLT(-) 2 Platoon> 2 CoHq

3 Stationary 3 Stationary 3 Stationary 3 Stationary

4 30 Min 4 45 Min 4 <45 Min 4 <45 Min

S S S S

RWCAS

1 500M 3 1 500M 4 1 500M 2 1 500M 3

2 Battery 2 PLT(-) 2 Platoon> 2 CoHq>

3 Stationary 3 Stat/Moving 3 Stat/Moving 3 Stat/Moving

4 <1 Hour 4 <1 Hour 4 <1 Hour 4 <1 Hour

D D D N

NSFS

1 100M 4 1 100M 2 1 100M 4 1 100M 2

2 Platoon> 2 PLT(-) 2 Platoon> 2 CoHq>

3 Stationary 3 Stat/Moving 3 Stat/Moving 3 Stat/Moving

4 30 Min 4 45 Min 4 <45 Min 4 <45 Min

S S S N

FWCAS

1 1KM 1 1 1KM 5 1 1KM 1 1 1KM 4

2 >Battery 2 PLT(-) 2 Platoon> 2 CoHq>

3 Stationary 3 Stat/Moving 3 Stat/Moving 3 Stat/Moving

4 45 Min 4 <1 Hour 4 <1 Hour 4 <1 Hour

D D D D

1

INDIRECT FIRE

Arty

1 100M 2

2 Platoon>

3 Stationary

4 30 Min

N

Asset

Prioritization

Target

Selection

Standards

Damage

Criteria
I-4 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

REACTIVE ATTACK GUIDANCE MATRIX 

The reactive attack guidance matrix (RAGM) provides

a quick means to determine whether an emerging target should be struck, possibly diverting fire support assets from a planned target. The RAGM prioritizes

reactive target sets, specific targets within those target

sets, and targeting objectives within specific geographic locations. It can be used to determine reallocation of

fires assets, and quickly identify specific target sets

and targets within those target sets to engage quickly.

The RAGM must be updated every 6-12 hours. Within

table I-6, if a planned target is being engaged and an

enemy MRL appears in the Port City area, necessary

fire support assets would be employed to engage the

reactive target. This tool is used primarily by the MEF,

but division FSCs should be aware of this product. 

Table I-5. High-Payoff Target List/Attack Guidance Matrix.

EVENT OR PHASE: Attack to Objective C

PRI CATEGORY HPTs WHEN HOW COMMENTS

1 ADA SA-8, SA-11,SA-15 A/P N

2 FIRE SPT Arty CP MRL, C/B Wpns I N/EW Coord with ECM

3 ENGINEER Bridging Units,

pontoons

A N

4 C

3 MRR, MRD CP A N/EW Coord with ECM

5 MANEUVER 1st Ech/lead division A N

6 RSTA Fwd intercept DF nodes I N

- NUKE/CHEM I D Need BDA

- REC A N Not HPT

- CLASS III POL A N Not Hpt

- CLASS V

AMMO

A N Not HPT

- CLASS IX

MAINT

A N Not HPT

- LIFT A N Not HPT

- LOC A N Not HPT

LEGEND I = IMMEDIATE

A = AS ACQUIRED

P = PLANNED

Arty = Artillery

C/B = Counterbattery

Ech = Echelon

ECM = Electronic countermeasures. (ECM is 

used only in NATO. Electronic attack and 

electronic protection are used in DOD.)

S = SUPPRESS

N = NEUTRALIZE

D = DESTROY

EW = JAMMING OR OTHER OFFENSIVE EW

MRD = Motorized rifle division

MRL = Multiple rocket launcher

MRR = Motorized rifle regiment
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ I-5

DAMAGE CRITERIA MATRIX

See table I-7. The damage criteria matrix is a deliberate targeting tool FSCs can use to evaluate the effectiveness of targeting objectives against enemy

strengths/capabilities and the desired targeting effects.

It can also help anticipate future fire support requirements and reallocate fire support assets. This matrix is

designed to be a “big picture” guide and will change

periodically (probably between phases of the battle).

This tool is used primarily by the MEF, but could be

used within the GCE. 

Note: “50% CE” means physical damage to the unit of

50% of the notional T/O and T/E. 

Table I-6. Reactive Attack Guidance Matrix.

1 2 3 4

AREA Port City Northwest Mountains

MSR

Eastern Approach to

Port City

Capital to Port City

MSR

TARGET

CATEGORY

PRIORITY

FS-MRL/LR/COASTAL

C3I-Corps/DIV DEFENSE

MMR-MECH/ARM

C3I-CORPS/DIV

FS-MRL/LR

MOB/CM

MVR-MECH/ARV/AVIATION

C3I-CORPS/DIV

FS-MRL/LR

MVR-MECH/ARM

FM-MRL/LR

MVR-MECH/ARM

UNIT

PRIORITY

20th Arty BDE

15th Corps HQ

5th Div HQ

22 Arty BDE

3d Army CE

4th BDE 42d BDE

INTENT Defeat ground force in vicinity 

of Port City to set conditions for 

force entry operations

Prevent LR Arty from interdicting 1 

MEF forces

Prevent remnant forces, special op & bypassed units 

from interfering with 1 MEF 

rear area operations

Prevent forces from disrupting planned 1 MEF river 

crossings

Table I-7. Damage Criteria Matrix - Example from MEF.

Destroy Neutralize

Endstate MOE Endstate MOE

Maneuver

Armor/Mech Unable to operate above company levelReg: 30% CE

Res: 40% CE

Unable to perform mission 24-48 

hrs

Reduce 10% current

T/O-T/E

Motorized/Foot Unable to operate above battalion 

level

Reg: 40% CE

Res: 30% CE

Fire Support

MRL/Arty Unable to operate at battery level 50% CE Unable to mass fires at BN and 

abv 24-48 hrs

Essential system components soft kill

Radar Physically destroy Unable to emit 24-48 hrs Essential system components soft kill

C2 Unable cmd/coord 24-48 hrs

Air Defense

IADs Unable to integrate multiple air 

defense sites

C2 nodes destroyed Unable to coordinate air defense 

for 24-48 hrs

Comm, power, TA assets 

damaged

AAA Unable to significantly interfere 

with friendly air ops

0% CE Forced into autonomous ops for 

24-48 hrs

Reduce units 10%

SAM Crew served SAMs inop Reduce units 10%
I-6 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

TARGETING SYNCHRONIZATION MATRIX

See table I-8. The TSM synchronizes targets with

acquisition assets and firing assets by assigning responsibilities to detect, deliver, and assess attacks

on specific HPTs. HPTs are listed in priority by category (decide column). Units and agencies are listed under the detect, deliver, and assess columns

across from the specific HPTs for which they are responsible. As responsibilities are fixed, the asset envisioned to be used is indicated. This provides the

targeting team a check to ensure all assets are used

and that assets or agencies are not overtaxed. TSMs

could also be prepared for a specific event or for

each phase of the battle.

Table I-8. TSM.

DECIDE DETECT DELIVER ASSESS

Pri Category HPTs Agency Asset Agency Asset Agency Asset

1 Fire

Support

M46 Arty

Regt

Q-36 1-Arty

Regt

1-Arty,

MLRS

ACE Debriefs

Astros/BM

-21

G-2 UAVs 2-ACE G-2 Analysis/

UAVs

FROG

2S5

Rad Bn MEWSS,

TPCS

D-20, D30Arty

Regt

Q-36 Arty

Regt

Arty,

MLRS

Atk Helo ACE Organic ACE,

Arty

Regt

Organic

Arty

MLRS

2 ADA Skyguard ACE EA-6B, Arty

Regt

Arty,

MLRS

ACE Analysis,

Crotale A/C

RHAW

Debriefs,

SA-6, SA-8,

2S6

Debriefs MEF G-3

ACE

EA-6B

(EA)

F-18

(Strike)

EA-6B

3 RSTA Rasas/Cymb ACE EA-6B Arty

Regt

Arty,

MLRS

ACE Debriefs

Giraffe G-2 Recon

Patrols

ACE F-18,

AV-8B

G-2 Recon

Debriefs

Patrols,

Ops

Regt Organic Regt Organic Regt Organic

4 MVR 3-47 AR, 2d LAR Organic Rad Bn TPCS G-2 UAVs,

LAR/

15th Mech

Bde

G-2 JSTARS

SLAR

Arty

Regt

Arty,

MLRS

8th MAR

14th Mech

Bde

8th MAR Organic ACE CAS,

DAS

SPOTREPS

3d Recon

Bn

Rad Bn (R/F) ACE Debriefs

LEGEND Atk Helo = attack helicopter

EA = electronic attack

mech = mechanized

SPOTREPS = spot reports
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ I-7

FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX

See figure I-1 on page I-8. The FSEM is a concise

planning and execution tool that graphically displays

the fire support plan to facilitate execution. It assists

the FSCs, observers, supporting assets, and the

maneuver commander in understanding how the fire

support plan supports the commander’s intent. It is a

valuable planning and execution tool for both offense

and defense. The matrix explains the portions of the

fire support plan that each FSC, FO, and maneuver

commander is responsible for executing. When

approved by the maneuver commander, the matrix

becomes the primary execution tool for the FSC and

maneuver commanders. It is particularly useful in

fixing responsibility for execution. It can use maneuver control measures such as TRPs or checkpoints

to help integrate maneuver and fire. The FSEM must

be event-driven, not based on time (this amplifies the

importance of close cooperation between the FSC and

the maneuver and artillery S-2s). IPB reveals possible

and likely enemy locations, avenues of approach, and

provides the initial framework for developing the fire

support plan. Information that should be included on

the FSEM follows:

l Phases or breakdown of how the commander plans

to execute (should be same as scheme of maneuver).

l Maneuver units (including reconnaissance, STA,

and LAR). Maneuver units are responsible for

executing targets.

l Supporting assets. Position areas and scheduled

movements should be displayed to give executors

situational awareness.

l FSCMs. FSCMs facilitate the fire support execution.

l Priorities of Fire (POF). POF tells whose requests for

fire will be answered first, as long as a higher ranked

HPT is requested at same time. POF does not mean

that other units will not have requests answered.

l Primary and alternate executors of targets. Always

plan a back-up executor, especially for Copperhead

(CPHD) and laser guided PGMs.

DD FORM 1972, JOINT TACTICAL AIR 

STRIKE REQUEST

See figure I-2 on page I-9. All U.S. Armed Forces use

the JTAR to request CAS. Using this form is mandatory unless otherwise authorized by a higher authority.

ASSAULT SUPPORT REQUEST

See figure I-3 on page I-10. The ACE executes assault

support missions as preplanned or immediate. The

ACE executes both types of support in response to

specific requests. The type of request determines the

type of support.
I-8 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Figure I-1. FSEM.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _______________________________________________ I-9

Figure I-2. DD Form 1972, JTAR.
I-10 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Figure I-3. ASR.

ASSAULT SUPPORT REQUEST FORM

SECTION I — MISSION REQUEST DATE

1. UNIT CALLED THIS IS REQUEST NUMBER SENT

2. REQUEST FOR

A. q HELICOPTER

B. q FIXED-WING

3. MISSION CATEGORIES

A. q PREPLANNED: PRECEDENCE __________

B. q PRIORITY __________

C. q IMMEDIATE: PRIORITY ________________

4. TYPE MISSION

A. q TACTICAL

B . q ADMINISTRATIVE

TIME BY

5. MISSION IS

A. q ASSAULT TRANSPORT G. q TRAP

B. q LOGISTICAL SUPPORT H. q SAR

C . q AIR EVACUATION I. q ILLUMINATION

D . q MEDEVAC J. q SPECIAL OPS

E. q AERIAL DELIVERY K. q OTHER __________

F. q C2

6. PAYLOAD IS

A. q TROOPS __________________

B. q EXTERNAL CARGO (WT) ____________________

C . q INTERNAL CARGO (WT/CU) _________________

LARGEST ITEM (LxWxH) ________________

7. INSTRUCTIONS

PICKUP TIME COORDINATES LZ TIME COORDINATES

A. _______________________ __________________________________ ____________________________ _______________________________________

B. _______________________ __________________________________ ____________________________ _______________________________________

C. _______________________ __________________________________ ____________________________ _______________________________________

D. _______________________ __________________________________ ____________________________ _______________________________________

8. LZ DESCRIPTION

A. WIND DIRECTION/VELOCITY _________________________________ B. ELEVATION _____________________________________________________ (FT MSL)

C. SIZE _______________________________________________________ D. OBSTACLES _____________________________________________________________

E. FRIENDLY POS _____________________________________________ DIR/DIST ______________________________/_________________________________

F. ENEMY POS ________________________________________________ DIR/DIST ______________________________/_________________________________

G. LAST FIRE RECEIVED TIME/TYPE _______________/______________ DIR/DIST ______________________________/_________________________________

9. LZ WILL BE A. q UNMARKED 10. LZ MARKED WITH A. q PANELS B. q SMOKE C. q FLARES

B. q MARKED WITH COLOR ____________ D. q MIRROR E. q LIGHTS F. q NAVAID G. q OTHER

11. COMMUNICATIONS A. PICKUP ZONE CALL SIGN _______________________________/FREQUENCY (COLOR CODE) _______________________________________

B. LZ CALL SIGN _________________________________________/FREQUENCY (COLOR CODE)________________________________________

12. REMARKS ACKNOWLEDGED

BN/REGT

DIVISION

OTHER

SECTION II — COORDINATION

13. MSFS

16. ESCORT/AERIAL REFUELING A. q REQUESTED B. q ASSIGNED

C. NO/TYPE A/C _____________________________________________ D. CALL SIGN ____________________________________________________________

E. COMMUNICATIONS_________________________________________ F. ARMAMENT ____________________________________________________________

17. REQUEST

q APPROVED qDISAPPROVED

19. REASON FOR DISAPPROVAL

20. RESTRICTIVE FIRE/AIR PLAN

A. q IS NOT B. q NUMBER

21. IS IN EFFECT

 A. q (FROM TIME) ___________ B. q (TO TIME) ___________

22. LOCATION

 A. q _____________________ B. q __________________

(FROM COORDINATES) (TO COORDINATES)

23. WIDTH (METERS) 24. ALTITUDE/VERTEX

 A. q ___________ B. q __________

MAX/VERTEX MINIMUM

SECTION III — MISSION DATA

25. MISSION NUMBER 26. CALL SIGN 27. NO/TYPE AIRCRAFT

28. EST/ACT TAKEOFF 29. ETA/ATA

30. MISSION CANCELLED/DIVERTED A. q CANCELLED B. q DIVERTED BY: _______________________________________

31. TERMINATE REQUEST A. q GO/NO GO DTG ______________ B. q WHEN COMPLETED ________________

32. MISSION RESULTS ACKNOWLEDGE

 A. q COMPLETE

 B. q INCOMPLETE

 C. q OTHER ____________________
APPENDIX J. RADAR ZONE MANAGEMENT

ZONE PLANNING SEQUENCE

Tactical Employment

Prioritize the unit’s sector for zone planning that meets

the maneuver commander’s planning guidance

(FSCC). The FSC must allocate and approve the zones

that support the scheme of maneuver, meet the commander’s guidance for force protection, and facilitate

the engagement of HPTs (commander, targeting team,

FSCC). The fire support staff must incorporate the

zones into the appropriate synch matrixes and intelligence collection plans (FSCC, Arty S2/S3). Refine the

zones during COA development and war-gaming process (FSCC, Arty S2/S3). 

Technical Employment

Rehearse the cueing and use of zones during combined

arms and FS rehearsals (FSCs, Arty S3/S2 and radar section). As the IPB improves and scheme of maneuver

changes during execution, radar zones must be refined.

Radar positions must be selected that optimize the probability of acquisition and support the coverage of planned

zones (Bn S2/S3, Radar Plt Cdr or section chief). 

RESPONSIBILITIES

The key to successful planning and execution of radar

employment is the active involvement of FSCs and the

maneuver staff in developing and executing the plan. The

FSC, S2, S3, targeting officer, and observer-liaison chief

must assist the controlling artillery S2 in triggering and

refining radar zones for effective force protection and delivery of responsible counterfire. To ensure the Firefinder

radar employment plan is effective, all leaders and planners must understand the capabilities, limitations, and

products of the system. Plans that do not manage the high

volume of digital fire missions and artillery intelligence

data generated by the radar negate the system’s influence

on the battlefield. Plans that do not clarify clearance of

fires for counterfire missions will limit the artillery’s ability to provide responsive counterfire. 

Targeting Team

The targeting team is made up of the unit XO, unit

FSCC, targeting officer (if assigned), AO, Arty Bn S2/

S3, FDO, NGLO, and the Mortar Rep (if assigned).

Coordinate and integrate all target acquisition asset

employment and radar zone allocation.

Ensure planned zones are prioritized to support the

HPTL and the concept of operations.

Assign cueing agents to trigger the radar, which activates planned zones that correspond to NAI and IRs. 

FSC/Arty LNO

Translate the maneuver commander’s guidance for

force protection and engagement of enemy indirect

fire weapons.

Give guidance to subordinate FSCCs and solicit CFZs

from each.

Recommend zones to the commander during the planning process.

Ensure the radar employment plan is incorporated into

the R&S plan.

Ensure the ground scheme of maneuver is coordinated

with the radar movement plan.

Ensure priorities and triggers are developed for the activation and inactivation of each planned zone.

Integrate the planned triggers for radar movement and

zones into the appropriate synch matrix.

Incorporate zone management into the combined arms

and FS rehearsals.

Ensure zones are sent to the DS Bn S2 for inclusion in

the radar deployment order (RDO). 
J-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Subordinate FSCs/Arty LNO

Develop zones to support the unit’s plan, breach sites,

battle positions, and others.

Nominate zones to the senior commander for approval

and priority.

Develop precise triggers for zone activation and inactivation. Ensure that the developed triggers for approved zones are incorporated into the supported

unit’s Synch Matrix.

Establish ownership and responsibility for the zones.

Ensure any changes to the scheme of maneuver are

balanced against planned zones.

Ensure refinement is completed and sent to the artillery S2 for transmission to the radar. 

Artillery S2 

Develop CFFZs based on the templated enemy artillery

positions and confirmed intelligence data.

Develop CFZs for FA units.

Nominate zones to FSCC for approval.

Ensure the radar employment plan is integrated into

the R&S plan.

Receive approved zones from the FSCC for inclusion

into the RDO.

Construct the RDO and brief the radar platoon commander or section chief.

Refine zones as IPB improves or the scheme of maneuver changes. 

Artillery S3

Incorporate zone management and radar positioning

into the Synch Matrix.

Ensure TA enclosure to the artillery fire plan includes

coordination measures for zone development and radar

positioning.

Ensure land management for the radar is coordinated

with the maneuver COC.

Ensure clearance of fires and attack guidance for

counterfire missions within the unit’s sector are coordinated and understood by all members of the COC. 

Radar Platoon Commander Section Chief

Ensure the capabilities and limitations of the radar system are considered during the planning process.

Select radar positions that support the search sector requirements of planned zones, optimize the probabilities of acquisition and facilitate required moves to

support the scheme of maneuver.

Identify zone restrictions violated during the planning

and rehearsal process.

Participate in all appropriate rehearsals. 
APPENDIX K. LASER EMPLOYMENT

Laser weapons systems consists of ground and airborne designators used with surface or air delivered

guided munitions. Systems include laser designators/

rangefinders, laser acquisition/spot trackers or seekers,

laser guided weapons, and delivery platforms. Laser

systems are used by artillery FOs, NSF spotters,

FACs, reconnaissance personnel, and fixed-and rotary-wing pilots. Several references for laser employment and procedures exist. Joint Pub 3-09.1, JTTP for

Laser Target Designation Operations, provides detailed information on all Service laser systems and

munitions. MCWP 3-16.6, Supporting Arms Observer,

Spotter, and Controller, provides detailed information

on ground laser systems.

BASIC REQUIREMENTS

The five basic requirements to use laser designators

with laser seekers or laser guided munitions follow.

A pulse repetition frequency (PRF) code is used for

the laser designator, the laser spot tracker (LST), and

the laser guided weapon (LGW). Each must use the

same code when operating together.

An agreed upon direction of attack is necessary. The

LST or LGW must be able to acquire the energy reflected from the target.

The laser designator must be lasing/designating the

target at the correct time and for the proper duration.

The delivery system must release the munition within

the specific munition delivery envelope.

Line of sight must exist between the designator and

the target, as well as between the target and the tracker

or LGW. The LGW can have LOS before or after

launch, depending upon the system capabilities.

LASER TARGET DESIGNATION, RANGING, 

AND POINTING SYSTEMS

Laser designators provide the energy source that is reflected from a designated target to provide terminal

guidance for LGWs. These systems emit discrete pulses of infrared energy, invisible to the naked eye. Characteristics of these pulses are determined by a PRF

code of the laser energy that can be set by a series of

switches on the equipment. Laser target ranging systems provide accurate range direction and elevation information for use in locating enemy targets or other

positions but are not capable of designating for laser

guided munitions. IR pointers simply provide visual

identification of targets. Systems vary from handheld

to aircraft-mounted devices. The laser designator/

rangefinder inventory within the Marine Corps follows.

Modular Universal Lasing Equipment

The modular universal laser equipment (MULE) (AN/

PAQ-3) is a laser designator/rangefinder capable of

designating moving targets to a range of 2,000 meters

or stationary targets to 3,500 meters. Maximum

rangefinding capability is 10,000 meters. The MULE

system has a north-seeking capability that allows selforientation for direction and a readout of both grid and

true azimuths. It is capable of detecting multitarget reflections. The MULE can be operated during periods

of darkness or reduced visibility at slightly reduced

ranges by use of a night vision device. It is interoperable with the digital message system (DMS), and indirectly, through the DMS, with the battery computer

system (BCS). When used in conjunction with the precision lightweight GPS receiver (PLGR), it provides

accurate observer and target location. The MULE is

powered by vehicle for sustained operations or battery

for a shorter duration. 
K-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Target Location Designation

and Hand-off System

The TLDHS is a modular, man-portable (43 pounds

for LLDR and THS), automated target acquisition, location, and designation system that can digitally handoff target data to fire support platforms. It has the capability of designating moving targets to 3,000 meters

and stationary targets to 5,000 meters. Maximum

rangefinding capability is 10,000 meters. TLDHS is

comprised of two independent subsystems. The lightweight laser designator-rangefinder (LLDR) provides

the target location and designation capability through

the integration of day and thermal optics, eye-safe laser rangefinder, angle and vertical angle, GPS receiver, and a laser designator for LGWs and spot trackers.

The second subsystem is the target hand-off system

(THS). THS provides the capability to compose, transmit, and receive digital fire support messages. 

Laser Infrared Observation

Set (AN/GVS-5)

The AN/GVS-5 is a hand held, battery operated laser

rangefinder. It has no ability to designate targets or determine direction. It has a 7 x 50 monocular sighting

system and an accuracy of plus/minus 10 meters for

distances from 200 to 9,990 meters. It can provide a

maximum of 100 range readouts per battery charge.

Laser Target Designator/Rangefinder Pod

The F/A-18 C/D is capable of carrying AN/AAS-38

LTD/R pod which provides two functions. Its laser

designator provides terminal weapons guidance for all

LGWs, as well as designating targets for airborne

coded laser acquisition/spot trackers (LSTs). 

Night Targeting System

The AH-1W attack helicopter contains the NTS,

which provides laser target designator/rangefinder capability, as well as forward looking infrared (FLIR) visual capability and video capture. It performs the same

functions as the LTD/R pod for fixed-wing platforms.

Illumination Devices

Handheld lasers emit infrared (IR) light for compatibility with NVGs. These devices can either “flood” IR light

within 1,000 meters to enhance general NVG performance, or focus a small beam up to 4 kilometers to pinpoint a specific target or mark friendly positions with an

IR light beam for any unit or weapon system employing

NVGs. Examples include IZLID and GCB-1B.

LASER ACQUISITION DEVICES

Laser acquisition devices are systems that allow visual

acquisition of a coded laser designated target. They

must be set to the same PRF code as the laser designator for the user to see the target being lased. There are

two types of laser acquisition devices. Note that the

AH-1W has the capability to use onboard Hellfire munitions as an improvised LST prior to firing. 

Laser Acquisition/Spot Tracker Pod

The coded laser acquisition/spot tracker (LST) can be

carried on the F/A-18 A/C/D. Once it acquires the laser spot (target), it passes necessary ballistic information to allow FLIR or radar acquisition of target and

visual display. Desired PRF codes are in-flight selectable. It then employs LGWs or executes visual deliveries of non-laser ordnance.

Angle Rate Bombing System

The ARBS is used on the AV-8B. It consists of a 3-axis gimballed telivision/LST, enabling view of the laser

spot. It provides day or night attack and reattack information for either LGW or non-guided bombs. The system allows in-flight selection of PRF codes but is

affected by smoke or obscurants.

WARNING

Care must be taken to remain oriented on the target,

ensuring that the LST has acquired and locked onto

target reflected laser energy. There are instances when

LSTs have acquired and locked onto the laser signature caused by atmospheric attenuation around the laser designator device.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ K-3

LASER GUIDED WEAPONS

These munitions hone in on reflected laser energy during the terminal portion of the attack. Such munitions

are part of the precision guided munition (PGM) family.

Copperhead

The Copperhead (M732 CLGP) is a 155 millimeter

cannon-launched, laser-guided projectile used to defeat high-payoff targets. It has a maximum range of

16,800 meters and a minimum range of 3,000 meters.

Copperhead targets can be designated by ground or

airborne designators. Multiple targets in large target

arrays or widely separated targets may be engaged.

The projectile follows one of two trajectories depending on visibility conditions. Upon reaching a point on

its descending trajectory, the laser designator operator

lases the target. The projectile acquires the reflected

laser energy and maneuvers to the designated target.

Its payload consists of a 15-pound-shaped charge. 

Maverick

The Maverick AGM-65E is an air launched, laser

guided air to ground missile employed on the AV-8B,

and F/A-18 aircraft. It can be used against armored vehicles, field fortifications, or surface combatants. The

missile requires lock on before launch. Once, the Maverick is launched, the aircraft can break away or

launch another missile. It employs a 125 pound or 300

pound warhead. If Maverick loses the spot, the missile

goes ballistic over the target and does not explode. The

PRF code is cockpit selectable.

Hellfire

The Hellfire (AGM-114) is a laser-guided, anti-armor

missile launched from the AH-1W/Z Super Cobra aircraft. It can be employed in indirect (lock on after

launch) or direct (lock on before launch) fire methods.

Hellfire can be launched in four firing modes: one missile (single), two or more missiles on the same code

(rapid), two or more missiles launched on different

codes using multiple laser designators (ripple), or multiple codes and designators used in combination of rapid

and ripple fire. The PRF code is cockpit selectable.

Laser-Guided Bombs

The MK-82, -83, and -84 are Marine Corps designations for the 500, 1,000, and 2,000 pound bombs that

can be converted to the GBU-12, GBU-16, and GBU10 laser-guided bombs, respectively. These bombs use

common laser guidance and control subassemblies,

with only the aerodynamic surfaces changed to match

the particular size of warhead. 

Paveway I and II LGBs require ballistically accurate

delivery (release within an envelope) and continuous

laser energy during the last 10 seconds of flight. When

delivered from a low-altitude loft maneuver, lasing is

restricted to the last 10 seconds of flight to prevent

bombs missing short. They can be employed in a

standoff capacity. The PRF codes are set before aircraft launch. 

LASER-GUIDED WEAPONS PLANNING

Due to the enhanced complexity of laser weapon systems and their specific requirements for employment,

prior planning and coordination is required for optimal

performance in battle. 

Integration

Optimum use of PGMs is on preplanned targets or engagement areas outside or at the maximum range of maneuver direct fire weapons (typically 3,000 meters).

This allows for early engagement of high-payoff targets

and reduces the effects of an obscured battlefield. However, integration into the overall battle plan is necessary.

Integration with direct fire weapons creates a combined

arms effect as well as ensures mutual support. 

Environmental Conditions

LGWs require line of sight with both the designator and

the target, and the LGW and the target. Irregular terrain

and vegetation must be considered in the location of

EAs, LTDs, and LGWs. Rain, snow, fog, and low

clouds can reduce the effectiveness of laser-guided munitions ability to acquire radiation. Laser designators

line of sight can be reduced. Snow on the ground produces a negative effect on laser-guided munition accuracy or cause spillover. Extreme temperatures (below
K-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

32 degrees) can affect MULE battery life. Obscuration

of the battlefield can also reduce the effectiveness of

LGWs. When possible, employ techniques such as attacking downwind targets first. 

Munition Employment Characteristics

The specific engagement requirements for each LGW

varies and must be considered in planning. Considerations include minimum and maximum ranges, minimum visibility and required designation times, and

maximum angle of acquisition. 

For example, Copperhead has engagement templates, a

13 second designation requirement, and a maximum acquisition angle of 800 mils (45 degrees) between the observer and GTL. The minimum visibility to effectively

use Copperhead is 5,000 meters. The Maverick has a

maximum range of 24 kilometers, requires continual

lasing, and has a 60 degree maximum acquisition angle.

The Hellfire has an 8 kilometer maximum range, a 60

degree maximum acquisition angle, and also requires

continual lasing. 

Designator Location and Characteristics

Whether airborne or ground designator, the location of

the laser designator must ensure line of sight to the target while allowing the LGW to acquire the target within the parameters of its attack angle, 1067 mils (60

degrees) in most cases. Blocking line of sight between

the LGW and the laser designator produces false lockon. Airborne designators should remain behind delivery platforms while ground designators use terrain or

vegetation to break line of sight when possible. The

short lifespan of battery powered designators should

be considered in extended operations. 

PRF Codes

Laser coding permits the simultaneous use of multiple

laser designators and laser guided weapons/seekers.

Laser designators and seekers use a PRF coding system to ensure that a specific seeker and designator

combination work in harmony. By setting the same

code in both the designator and the seeker, the seeker

tracks only the target that is designated with that code.

Code Description

The system uses either a three-digit or four-digit numeral system, depending on the type of laser equipment. Three digit settings range from 111 to 788,

while four digit settings range from 1,111 to 1,788. All

three and four digit designator/seekers are compatible.

Lower numbered PRF codes provide higher quality

designation due to faster pulse repetition.

Code Allocation and Assignment

Laser guided weapons system codes must be controlled and coordinated. At the MAGTF level, different blocks of codes are assigned to artillery, air, and

NGF to prevent interference between supporting

arms activities. 

Each supporting arm then assigns codes to its subordinate units for individual missions and changes codes

periodically as the situation requires. Subordinate

FSCCs provide positive coordination of the code settings through the various fire support representatives.

Normally codes are given to individual observers,

however observers are able to use the same codes as

long as it is coordinated; e.g., observers use the same

code when one is a back-up.

Each MULE/TLDHS operator normally uses his own

PRF code unless employing LGBs or for preplanned

missions with distinct PRFs. His PRF code is confirmed before mission execution of aerial delivered

LGWs. LGBs PRF codes cannot be changed in flight. 

For preplanned CAS, codes are ultimately assigned to

each flight. The LTD must match the preset LGB

codes, while Maverick, Hellfire, and Copperhead can

be set to match the designators PRF code. 

Security

The PRF codes are handled in the same manner as other classified material. Secure means should be used, if

available, when codes are passed between laser designators and the munition delivery unit/aircraft. However, the absence of compatible secure means should not

normally dictate the termination of a laser guided munition attack. In certain situations, codes may have to

be prebriefed.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ K-5

Safety

There are two hazards associated with laser systems

applicable in both combat and peacetime training.

The first is the ability of the LST or LGW to acquire

and guide in on spillover laser energy rather than the

target; i.e., the laser designator. This is known as

false lock-on. The second is the laser beam’s intense

infrared radiation that can cause serious eye damage

and blindness.

False Lock-on

A seeker may detect scattered radiation that is caused

by suspended matter in the atmosphere. It is called

atmospheric scatter/attenuation or backscatter. 

To mitigate the effects of atmospheric scatter, 20-degree angle with its origin at the target and bisecting

the laser designator establishes a safety exclusion

zone for air delivered munitions (excluding Copperhead) and LSTs. 

Aerial platforms must avoid this zone during designation to reduce the likelihood of an LST or LGW

acquiring the designator vice the target. The exclusion zone is not an absolute safety measure as some

LSTs have acquired the atmospheric scatter in front

of the ground laser designator even though the LSTs

were outside the safety zone. 

In combat, attack headings should avoid this zone if

possible. Peacetime employment follows training

safety requirements. 

Eye Hazard

During combat, take care to avoid friendly casualties

from indiscriminate laser designation. Be cautious in

designating highly reflective targets that can cause

dangerous reflected beams. The policy of the United

States Armed Forces prohibits employing laser

weapons that are specifically designed to, or have a

combat function of, causing permanent blindness.

Peacetime use of lasers imposes strict safety requirements during training exercises. Range and unit safety SOPs must be adhered to in their employment.

EMPLOYMENT

Key factors must be considered when employing laser

systems. Adverse effects of these factors can often be

overcome by planning and skillful employment of the

laser designators.

Ground Mode

Ground laser designators identify targets for artillery,

NSFS, and aircraft delivered munitions. MULE

equipped teams can designate for laser-guided munitions as well as conventional ordnance delivered by

LST. Standard calls for fire are used except that the laser code must be exchanged between the ground designator and the firing unit or the aircraft.

Airborne Mode

Airborne laser target designators identify targets for

all types of aircraft delivered munitions. Airborne designator systems operating in support of ground maneuver forces can employ all types of laser guided

munitions. Standard calls for fire or request for air

support are used, except that the code being used must

be exchanged.

Communications

Positive communications between the designator operator and the munition delivery means is required to coordinate the proper PRF code, the seeker/laser

designator alignment, and target designation timing.

Enemy Countermeasures (NATO)

Judicious use of laser target designators limit the enemy’s countermeasure capability. Designator vulnerability must be considered when designating point

targets such as tanks, BMPs, and guns that can detect

radiation and suppress designators. Offset aim points

reduce a target’s ability to react.

Aim Points

The nature of the target surface affects the aim point

as it varies the amount and direction of reflected radiation. Concave or poorly defined targets; e.g., caves
K-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

and tunnels, may absorb the laser spots. Horizontal

flat surfaces can refract or cause enough spillover to

cause misses.

Battlefield Obscuration

Smoke, dust, and debris can impair the use of laser

guided munitions. Reflective scattering of laser light

by smoke particles may present false targets. The night

sight, alternate positions on higher ground, and alternate designators can be useful in reducing smoke and

dust effects.

Darkness

Targets are more difficult to locate, range, and designate during low illumination. The night sight on the

designator will overcome the effects of darkness and

can assist during periods of poor visibility and inclement weather.
APPENDIX L. TARGETING, SYMBOLOGY, AND SCHEDULING

TYPES OF TARGETS

Target of Opportunity

A target visible to a surface or air sensor or observer,

which is within range of available weapons and

against which fire has not been scheduled or requested. (JP 1-02)

Planned Target

In artillery and naval surface fire support, a target on

which fire is prearranged. The degree of prearrangement varies, but some prior coordination/action has

been done to facilitate its engagement. Planned targets

may be further subdivided into scheduled or on-call

targets. Some planned targets may be designated as

priority targets and FPFs.

Scheduled Target

In artillery and naval surface fire support, a planned

target on which fire is to be delivered at a specific

time. Fires are prearranged as to location and time of

firing. This time may be related to an H-hour or another time reference.

On-Call Target

In artillery and naval surface fire support, a planned

target other than a scheduled target on which fire is delivered when requested. The on-call target is prearranged as to location and is fired on request or on

signal. The on-call target requires less reaction time

than a target of opportunity.

Priority Target

A target which when requested for attack takes precedence over all the fires for the designated firing unit or

element. Priority targets are designated by the maneuver commander that controls the firing asset, who also

provides specific guidance as to when the targets will

become priority, munitions to use, accuracy, and desired effects. When not engaged in fire missions, firing

units will lay on priority targets. Do not assign more

priority targets than can be supported. A rule of thumb

is no more than three priority targets to a 6-gun battery. If the priority target is an FPF only one is assigned to a battery (see next paragraph). Two priority

targets may be assigned to an 81mm mortar platoon.

Designation of priority targets may be planned to shift

as the supported unit moves forward; e.g., crossing

phase lines.

Final Protective Fires

An immediately available prearranged barrier of fire

designed to impede enemy movement across defensive lines or areas. (JP 1-02) An FPF is a priority target

placed on a likely enemy avenue of approach. FPFs

consist of final protective lines (FPLs), principal direction of fires (PDFs), and barrages. FPLs and PDFs apply to small arms and crew served weapons, while

artillery and mortars fire continuous barrages. A barrage is a prearranged barrier of fire, except that delivered by small arms, designed to protect friendly troops

and installations by impeding enemy movements

across defensive lines or areas. (excerpt from JP 1-02)

The location of the FPF is any distance from the

friendly position that supports the current tactical situation within range of organic direct fire weapons, normally 200 to 400 meters (within danger close).

Artillery FPFs are fired by an entire battery (6 guns).

In mortars, an FPF may be assigned to each squad,

section or the platoon. FPF size depends on the type

and number of weapons. See table L-1.

Table L-1. Size of FPF.

Weapon Size (meters)

60mm mortar

Section (3 tubes) 90 x 30

81mm mortar

Platoon (8 tubes)

Section (4 tubes)

Squad (1 tube)

280 x 35

140 x 35

35 x 35

120mm mortar

Platoon (6 tubes)

Squad (1 tube)

360 x 60

60 x 60

155mm howitzer

Battery (6 guns) 300 x 50
L-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Target Numbering System

To designate targets for fire support operations, the

Marine Corps adheres to the provisions of A-Arty P-1

and QSTAG 221. Provisions to the target numbering

system are specified in the fire support plan.

The Target Number 

The target number consists of six characters, comprising two letters and four numerals; e.g., AB1234. The

two letter group may be used to indicate the originator

of the target number and/or the level controlling the

target data.

First Letter

The CINC, joint, or the common commander to Army

and Marine forces assigns the first letter of the target

number to Army Corps and the MEF/MAGTF. The

national identifying letters for NATO and ABCA

armies are American, British, Canadian, and Australian. Nations with corresponding first letters follow:

l Belgium/Luxembourg, B.

l Canada, C, Z.

l Denmark, D.

l France, F.

l Greece, E.

l Germany, G.

l Italy, I.

l Netherlands, H.

l Norway, N.

l Portugal, P.

l Spain, S.

l Turkey I,O,T. 

l United Kingdom, J,U, X. 

l United States, A, K,Y,W. 

l Others, V.

Second Letter

The second letter designates units within the MAGTF.

See table L-2.

Table L-2. Letter Assignments—Marine Units.

I MARINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE A

1ST MARINE DIVISION B

1st Marine Infantry Regiment C 

5th Marine Infantry Regiment D

7th Marine Infantry Regiment E

11th Marine Artillery Regiment F

II MARINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE G

2D MARINE DIVISION H

2d Marine Infantry Regiment I 

6th Marine Infantry Regiment J 

8th Marine Infantry Regiment K

10th Marine Artillery Regiment L

III MARINE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE M

3D MARINE DIVISION N

3d Marine Infantry Regiment O

4th Marine Infantry Regiment P

12th Marine Artillery Regiment Q

MARINE FORCES RESERVE R 

4TH MARINE DIVISION S

23d Marine Infantry Regiment T

24th Marine Infantry Regiment U

25th Marine Infantry Regiment V

14th Marine Artillery Regiment W

UNASSIGNED X,Y, Z
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ L-3

Numbers 

Numbers further designate units. See table L-3.

I MEF will assign MEB and MEU(SOC) numbers to

1st MEB, 11th, 13th, and 15th MEU’s. II MEF will assign MEB and MEU(SOC) numbers to 2d MEB, 22nd,

24th, and 26th MEUs. III MEF will assign MEB and

MEU(SOC) numbers to 3d MEB, 31st MEU(SOC).

Units assigned to the MEB and MEU(SOC) use their

block of numbers assigned under the division to which

they belong. See tables L-4 through L-7.

Table L-3. Number Assignments—MEF

Command Elements.

0000-0999 MEF FFCC

1000-1999 MEB Command Element

2000-2999 Lowest Numbered MEU Command Element

3000-3999 Second Lowest Numbered MEU Command Element

4000-4999 Third Lowest Numbered MEU Command Elements

5000-5999 MAW

6000-6999 FSSG/RAOC

7000-7999 Force Reconnaissance Company

8000-8999 Unassigned

9000-9999 Weapons of Mass Destruction

Table L-4. Number Assignments—Marine 

Divisions.

0000-0999 Division FSCC

1000-1999 Tank Battalion

2000-2999 LAR Battalion

3000-3999 Reconnaissance Battalion

4000-9999 Unassigned

Table L-5. Number Assignments—Marine

Infantry Regiments.

0000-1999 Infantry Regiment FSCC

2000-2999 Lowest Numbered Infantry Battalion

3000-3999 Second Lowest Numbered Infantry Battalion 

4000-4999 Third Lowest Numbered Infantry Battalion

5000-5999 Attached Battalion

6000-6999 Attached Battalion

7000-9999 Unassigned

Table L-6. Number Assignments—Marine

Artillery Regiments.

0000-0999 Regimental Fire Direction Center

1000-1999 Lowest Numbered Artillery Battalion

2000-2999 Second Lowest Numbered Artillery Battalion

3000-3999 Third Lowest Numbered Artillery Battalion

4000-4999 Attached Artillery Battalion

5000-5999 Attached Artillery Battalion

6000-6999 Counterfire

7000-9999 Unassigned

Table L-7. Number Assignments—Marine

Infantry Battalions.

0000-0199 Infantry Battalion FSCC

0200-0299 Lowest Lettered Infantry Company

0300-0399 Second Lowest Lettered Infantry Company

0400-0499 Third Lowest Lettered Infantry Company

0500-0599 Weapons Company

0600-0699 Scout Sniper Platoon

0700-0799 81mm MTR Platoon

0800-0899 Attachment

0900-0999 Attachment
L-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Each Infantry battalion block of numbers assigned will

be different based on whether they are the lowest numbered battalion, second lowest numbered battalion, or

the third lowest numbered battalion.

Forward observers and naval gunfire spotters will use

target numbers assigned to them from the Infantry

company they are supporting. Table L-8 provides number blocks for artillery battalion FDCs. Table L-9 provides examples as discussed in tables L-2 through L-8. 

Target Symbols

Standard symbols are used to prepare maps, charts,

and overlays to identify targets by type.

Point Target

A target of such small dimension that it requires the accurate placement of ordnance in order to neutralize or destroy it. (JP 1-02). It is generally a target that is 200

meters or less in length and width. The symbol shows the

proper placement of the target number. See figure L-1.

Table L-8. Number Assignments—Marine

Artillery Battalions.

0000-0199 Artillery Battalion FDC

0200-0299 Lowest Lettered Artillery Battery

0300-0399 Second Lowest Lettered Artillery Battery

0400-0499 Third Lowest Lettered Artillery Battery

0500-0599 Attachment

0600-0699 Attachment

Table L-9. Examples of Marine Corps Target Numbering System.

*BLT 3/1 Supports 11th MEU. BLT 3/1 will use 1st Marines 

target numbers.

MEF

I MEF FFCC AA 0000-0999

11th MEU FFCC AA 2000-2999

3D MEB FFCC AM 1000-1999

DIVISION

3D MARDIV FSCC AN 0000-0999

10th MARINES FDC AL 0000-0999

1ST TANK BATTALION AB 1000-1999

INFANTRY REGIMENT

8TH MARINES FSCC AK 0001-0999

2/3 FSCC AO 3000-3199

1/7 FSCC AE 2000-2199

ARTILLERY REGIMENT

B BTRY 1/10 AL 1300-1399

F BTRY 2/11 AF 2300-2399

A BTRY 1/12 AQ 1100-1199

INFANTRY BATTALION

B CO. 1/6 FO AJ 1300-1399

SCOUT SNIPER 2/3 AO 3600-3699

*BLT 3/1 (CHOPPED TO 11TH MEU) AC 4000-4999

SPOT TM C/1/7 AE 2400-2499

Figure L-1. Point Target.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ L-5

Linear Target

A target that is more than 200 meters but less than 600

meters long. Targets longer than 600 meters may be

subdivided into multiple targets for attack with indirect fire. A linear target is designated on the target list

or list of targets by two grids or a center grid, length,

and attitude. Automated systems define linear targets

by a ratio of at least 5:1, length to width, respectively.

See figure L-2.

Rectangular Target

A target wider and longer than 200 meters. It is designated on the target list or list of targets by a center grid,

length, width, and attitude. Automated systems define

rectangular targets by a ratio of less than 5:1, length to

width, respectively. See figure L-3.

Circular Target

A target that is circular in nature or is vague as to its

exact shape. It is designated by a center grid and a radius on the target list or list of targets. See figure L-4.

Final Protective Fire

The FPF is normally drawn as a linear target. For a

mortar, FPFs assigned to individual weapons may be

depicted as a circular target. The symbol used includes

the target number, the designation of FPF, and the system/unit to deliver the fires. The FPF symbol is drawn

to scale. See figure L-5.

Target Reference Point (TRP)

Maneuver elements use an easily identifiable TRP to

orient direct fire weapons systems. TRPs should only

be identified in terms of the direct fire system, not the

target numbering system. The symbol is the same as

that for a standard target with a TRP letter. Only TRPs

used as triggers for fire support events are integrated

into the scheme of fires. Essential TRPs are included

on internal lists of targets and identified in the remarks

section as TRP. This provides observers direct interface with direct fire systems. See figure L-6. 

AFATDS Geometries

Figure L-7 on page L-6 shows how AFATDS displays

target symbols. See MCRP 3-16.2A for specific instructions for AFATDS. 

Figure L-2. Linear Target.

Figure L-3. Rectangular Target.

Figure L-5. FPF.

Figure L-6. TRP.

Figure L-4. Circular Target.
L-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Target List Worksheet

The target list worksheet is a document that facilitates fire planning by the FSC (see fig. L-8) for a

sample. It is a preliminary listing of all targets and

their descriptions from which the FSC can select

and plan. The U.S. Army publishes the worksheet as

DA Form 4655R. The information contained on target list worksheets can be maintained and transmitted digitally as well. Instructions to prepare the DA

Form 4655-R follow. 

Geometry

Situation: 

Friendly

(F)

Enemy (E)

Border Color:

Friendly (F) 

Enemy (E)

Current 

Symbol 

Planned 

Symbol

Target Area of 

Interest

F F-Blue

Point Target F F-Black

Rectangular 

Target

F F-Black

Circular Target F F-Black

Linear Target F F-Black

Target 

Reference Point

F F-Black

Figure L-7. AFATDS Targeting Geometries.

TAI

Name

TAI

Name

number

altitude description

number

altitude description

number number

Number Number

number number

number number
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ L-7

Heading

On the left hand side, place the unit that filled out the

target list worksheet, the OPORD, and the DTG. On

the right side, fill in the number of target list pages.

Place the DATUM that the targets were described

from. This may not always be WGS-84.

Line Number

This is an administrative control measure for internal

use. Assign each target a line number. 

Target Number

Assign each target a target number from the block of

numbers given to the planning source. 

Description

Enter a concise target description that is adequate for a

decision on how the target should be attacked.

Location

Enter grid coordinates for point, rectangular, and circular targets. For linear targets, enter coordinates of the

center point. If writing in the endpoints use two lines. 

Altitude

Show the altitude of the target in meters, unless otherwise specified. 

Attitude

Enter the attitude of linear and rectangular targets in

grid azimuths. 

Size (Length and Width)

Enter no dimensions for a point target, one dimension

(length) for a linear target, two dimensions (length and

width) for a rectangular target, or the radius of a circular target (width). 

Source and/or Accuracy

The information in this column aids in determining

how to attack the target. When known, enter the

source and accuracy of the target data. 

Remarks

Enter any special considerations for attack of the target such as requested munitions or method of attack.

1

st Mar, 1st MARDIV Target List Worksheet

OPORD _________ For use of this form see FM 6-20-40; Proponent agency is TRADOC

070620ZFEB00

DATUM: WGS-84

SHEET____ of ____

LINE 

NO

TARGET

NO

a

DESCRIPTION

b

LOCATION

c

ALTITUDE

d

ATTITUDE

e

SIZE SOURCE/

ACCURACY

h

REMARKS

i

LENGTH

f

WIDTH

g

1 AC0001

120 mm 

Mortar Plt 499377

2 AC0002 Rifle Company 516325 DPICM

3 AC0003 Rifle Platoon 554296

4 AC0004 OP 570281

VT 50%, 

WP 50%

5 AC0005 MG Position 566260

6 AC0006 Trail Intersection 572247 CP 11

Figure L-8. Sample Target List Worksheet.
L-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

T

arg

et List W

ork

s

h

e

et

For use of this form see FM 6-20-40; Proponent agency is T

R

A

D

O

C

DATUM: W

GS-84

SHEET____ of ____

LINE

NO

TARGET

NO

a

DESCRIPTION

b

LOCATION

c

ALTITUDE

d

ATTITUDE

e

SIZE SOURCE/

ACCURACY

h

REMARKS

i

LENGTH

f

WIDTH

g

Fig

ure

L-9. Bla

n

k

T

arg

et List W

ork

s

h

e

et.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ L-9

Work Columns

These columns are used to indicate targets that are to

be included in a particular fire support schedule. Enter

one diagonal line (/) under the appropriate column to

show the target is to be included in a particular schedule. When the target has been scheduled, enter an opposing diagonal line, forming an X to show the action

is complete.

Figure L-9 is a blank target list worksheet.

Automated Target List

Automated systems, such as AFATDS, will have the

means to store, execute, and refine lists of targets. See

figure L-10. Because of their storage capability, these

automated systems can maintain several target lists at

once. These target lists include active, inactive, oncall, suspect, planned, and any named target lists.

TYPES OF PLANNED FIRES

Group of Targets

A group is two or more targets on which fire is desired simultaneously. A group of targets is designated by a letter/number/letter combination. It is

graphically displayed by circling the targets. The first

letter is that of the country (as assigned by the

MAGTF or senior headquarters). The number is assigned sequentially as it is used. The last letter is the

letter assigned to the unit planning the group. When

planning groups of targets, consideration must be

Figure L-10. Example of an AFATDS.
L-10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

given to the number of firing units (artillery units

[battery/battalion], mortar platoon, or NSFS) available. For NSFS, multiple targets may be assigned to a

ship if the ship is equipped with multiple gun mounts

and a surface fires control system which can accommodate the missions; e.g., MK-86 GFCS. Targets included in a group may be engaged individually if

required. Groups are executed at a predetermined

time, on-call, or when a certain event occurs. Figure

L-11 illustrates the graphic designation of a group.

Series of Targets

In artillery and NSFS, a number of targets and/or

groups(s) of targets planned to support a maneuver

phase. The targets in a series are fired in accordance

with a time sequence. A series is given a nickname by

the unit planning the series. A series may include mortars and CAS also. A series may be fired at a predetermined time, on-call, or when a certain event occurs.

See figure L-12 for a graphic illustration of a series.

Program of Targets

A program is the predetermined sequential attack of

targets of a similar nature. It may be executed on-call,

at a specific time, or when a particular event occurs.

Targets are designated by their nature and based upon

the commander’s guidance. For example, in a counterfire program, all the targets are artillery system related

OPs, artillery batteries, mortar platoon, CPs. Programs

may be planned for various purposes; e.g., counterfire,

SEAD, counter-OP, countermechanized. Programs are

not graphically displayed.

Preparation Fire

Fire delivered on a target preparatory to an assault.

(JP 1-02). It is an intense volume of fire delivered in

accordance with a time schedule. The fires normally

commence prior to H-hour and may extend beyond it.

They may start at a prescribed time or be held on-call.

The duration of the preparation is influenced by

factors such as the fire support needs of the entire

force, numbers of targets, and firing assets and

ammunition available.

Preparation fires may not always be warranted. Factors influencing the commander’s decision of whether

or not to plan/execute a prep include availability of accurate targets, fire support and ammunition available,

whether the benefits produced by the prep will offset

the loss of surprise, and the time available. The timing

and the execution of the prep should take into account

the enemies ability to recover. The prep may include

all supporting arms.

Critical targets may be identified for damage assessment. Observation on these targets can be achieved by

various sources; e.g., reconnaissance teams, weapons

locating radars of the artillery regiment. If desired effects have not been achieved, reattack may be required.

Generally, adjustments cannot be made during the

preparation. Therefore, observers must refine target locations for all scheduled fires, and firing units must

emphasize proper gunnery procedures to promote accurate fires. Procedures must be established to engage

priority targets during the prep if necessary. These targets may be identified as on-call targets on the schedule. This may require a firing unit to be temporarily

removed from the prep, engage the priority target, and

then resume firing the prep. Firing units will notify the Figure L-12. Series of Targets.

Figure L-11. Group of Targets.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ L-11

FSCC of any assigned targets that were not engaged or

that were only partially engaged.

Counterpreparation Fire

Intensive prearranged fire delivered when the

imminence of the enemy attack is discovered. It is

designed to: break up enemy formations; disorganize

the enemy’s systems of command, communications,

and observation; decrease the effectiveness of artillery

preparation; and impair the enemy’s offensive spirit.

(JP 1-02).

Barrage Fire

Fire which is designed to fill a volume of space or area

rather than aimed specifically at a given target.

(JP 1-02) Barrage fire is a prearranged technique for

the engagement of targets of opportunity or planned

targets. The target area is configured to effect the desired results. The target area may be defined to restrict

the enemy’s movement; e.g., avenue of approach or to

isolate an enemy unit (prevent reinforcement or withdrawal). The volume and duration of fire is based on its

intended effect and tactical situation. The fires may be

delivered in a prearranged target configuration; e.g., a

horseshoe pattern around the friendly position or in a

random, sweeping manner throughout the target area.

Program Names in Automated Systems

AFATDS names programs and schedules of fire in accordance with the above paragraphs. However due to

its fixed message formats, IFSAS can only name geometries and fireplans using six characters. Refer to

FMFM 6-18-1/MCWP 3-16.2, MCFSS, appendix C,

for the naming convention required by IFSAS. Below

are some IFSAS naming convention examples:

SCHEDULING OF FIRE

The procedures provided in this paragraph are used in

scheduling fires. The quick fire support plan form or

the scheduling worksheet form may be used.

General Procedures for All Schedules

Worksheet

A separate worksheet is used for each schedule

planned to support an operation. Groups may be recorded on the same worksheet.

Heading of Worksheet

The worksheet heading includes type/name of the

schedule and the supported unit for which it is prepared.

Timing Block

To the right of the block labeled firing unit is the timing block. The fire planner writes the appropriate

minute each hash mark is to indicate in the schedule;

e.g., -6 through +4.

Firing Unit Line Number

Each firing unit is assigned its own line number in the

schedule. Record the unit; e.g., 2/10, the caliber of

weapon; e.g., 155, the type of weapon; e.g., T for towed

or SP for self-propelled, and the firing unit; e.g., D.

Dots and Lines

For each target to be engaged by a single volley, indicate the TOT by a dot on the worksheet at the appropriate time. For each target to be fired with more than one

volley, indicate the duration of the fires by drawing a

horizontal line between the appropriate time lines. The

first rounds will impact at the time corresponding with

the beginning of the line, and the last rounds will impact

at the time corresponding with the end of the line. The

number of rounds fired depends on the rate of fire for

scheduling. Figure L-13 on page L-12 illustrates the use

of dots and lines on the worksheet.

SE21A6 2d Series established by 1st Bn, 6th Mar

CF1T10 1st Counterfire Program established by 10th Mar TPC

SA12MD 1st SEAD Program established by 2d MARDIV
L-12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ L-13

Damage Criteria

See chapter 3, section II.

Target Number and Ammunition

The target number is shown above the line/dot with

the amount of ammunition to be fired below the line/

dot. If the munition is other than standard, this is indicated by use of a subscript with specific instructions

recorded in the remarks column. Remarks should be

recorded one line beneath the last scheduled line.

Shift Times and Rates of Fire for Scheduling

Shift time is the length of time needed for the firing

unit to cease firing on one target and commence firing

on its next scheduled target. When scheduling fires,

shift times must be allowed. Gaps (2 or more shift

times) should be avoided, except in a series of targets.

The number of rounds fired by a weapon in a specific

duration (designated by length of line on scheduling

worksheet) is based on the rates of fire in table L-10.

Table L-10. Rates of Fire.

On-Call Targets

On-call targets for a particular schedule are indicated by recording the target number in the remarks

column on the line of the assigned firing unit. Below the target number, show the number of rounds

to be fired. Do not use a line or dot and ammunition

entry. If a unit is ordered to fire on its on-call target

while they are firing the schedule, the unit will

leave the schedule, fire the on-call target at the

maximum rate of fire, rejoin the schedule at the real

time, and report those targets that were not engaged

to the appropriate headquarters.

Instructions for Specific Schedules

Preparation Fires

Targets are divided into three categories. Phase I targets include hostile fire units; e.g., batteries, OPs, radars, anti-air defenses. Phase II targets include

command and control; e.g., CPs, supply/logistics areas, communications sites. Phase III targets include

front line elements; e.g., trench lines, dug in positions.

If a target fits more than one category, categorize it

where it poses the greatest threat.

Phase I targets are scheduled first, beginning from the

left on the appropriate line(s) of the worksheet. (See

fig. L-13 on page L-12.) All units must start firing at

the same time. Phase III targets are scheduled next, beginning from the right. All units finish firing at the

same time. Phase II targets are scheduled between

phase I and III targets. Gaps are filled with re-fires of

phase I targets. Units should, when possible, have

commenced firing on the last targets in one phase before or at the same time that they begin firing on targets in the next phase.

Counterpreparation

Counterprep is fired in two phases with firing beginning and ending with all units participating and no

gaps permitted. Phase I and phase III targets are scheduled together as one phase; then phase II targets are

scheduled. Counterpreparation fires are always on-call

and scheduled starting at 0 in the timing block.

Groups of Targets

The group schedule is normally on-call and is not scheduled for a time sequence. It is scheduled so that fires will

strike the targets at the same time. The group number is

shown in the timing block space. Below the group number, list the targets of the group opposite the firing unit assigned the target. Below each target number, show the

number of rounds to be fired. No line or dot is drawn.

More than one group for a given operation may be scheduled on the same scheduling worksheet. See figure L-14,

on page L-14.

Weapon Rates of Fire For 

Scheduling Shift Time

60mm mortar 20 rpm 1min

81mm mortar (M-252) 15 rpm 1min

155mm howitzer 1 rpm 1min

5”/62 naval gun 12 rpm 1min

5”/54 naval gun 20 rpm 1min
L-14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ L-15

Series of Targets

The series of targets are normally fired on-call and are

scheduled starting at 0 on the timing line. Units are not

required to commence and end firing together. There

may be gaps in the schedule. Targets are not scheduled

by category. The commander will normally indicate

the sequence in which he wants the targets attacked.

See figure L-15, on page L-16.

Programs of Targets

Programs of targets are fired on-call at the commander’s request. Each type program is scheduled starting

at 0 on the timing line and extended as long as needed.

Instructions for completing the program are the same

as those for the series of targets.

Countermechanized Programs

These fires must be scheduled to impact at the time intervals corresponding to the rate of march speed of the

various echelons of the enemy formation. Table L-11

will assist the fire planner in scheduling countermechanized fires.

This table provides the time required to travel 1 kilometer (or 1 mile) while using specified march speeds.

Travel times are calculated based on rates of march

(miles/kilometers in 1 hour) and includes time for

scheduled short halts and time lost due to road and

traffic conditions. The time for long halts must be added to the total time traveled (miles or kilometers) by

the travel time factor for 1 mile or 1 kilometer for the

designator speed.

Table L-11. Time Distance Table. 

Speed Miles/ 

Kilometers per 

hour

Rate of March Miles/

Kilometers In 1 Hour

Minutes to Travel 1 

Kilometer/

1 Mile

10 mph

16 kph

8 mph

12 kph

5/7.5

15 mph

24 kph

12 mph

20 kph

3/5

20 mph

32 kph

16 mph

25 kph

2.4/3.75

25 mph

40 kph

20 mph

32 kph

1.84/3

30 mph

48 kph

25 mph

40 kph

1.5/2.4

35 mph

56 kph

30 mph

46 kph

1.3/2

40 mi/h

64 km/h

35 mi/h

53 km/h

1.13/1.5
L-16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16
APPENDIX M. REPORTS

A decisionmaker needs good information to make

good decisions. A report system provides essential information at a preestablished time or when the event

occurs. Standardizing report formats facilitates passing information.

Figure M-1 shows report requirements for fire support coordination agencies, supporting arms representatives assigned to combat companies, and

supporting arms units. See figures M-2 through M-8

for formats. 

SUBMITTING/FORWARDING AGENCY

REPORT FIG FO FAC

NGF

SPOT

BN 

FSCC

REGT 

FSCC

DIV 

FSCC

ARTY 

FDC

NSFS 

SHIP

Firing Capabilities (FIRECAP) X-2 HS

Displacement Report (DISREP) X-3 HS

Shelling Report (SHELREP) X-4 HA HA HA HA HA S

Guns Up Ready to Fire (GURF) X-5 S

FLASHREP/SPOTREP/TAREP X-6 H H H H H A S

Naval Gunfire Support (NGFS) X-7 S

Command Post Report (CPREP) X-8 HS

KEY:

H - To higher headquarters

S - To supported headquarters

HS - To higher and supported headquarters

A - To supporting arms unit 

HA - To higher headquarters and supporting arms

Figure M-1. Fire Support Coordination Reports.

Title: Displacement Report (DISREP).

Purpose: To report displacement of artillery battery.

Occasion: When unit displaces; i.e., can no longer fire.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report DISREP

Line A Unit

Line B Time

Line C Destination

Line D Number of weapons

EXAMPLE

DISREP To report 4 guns displacing to new 

position

Line A A7W (call sign of battery)

Line B 0710Z

Line C 714 438 (encoded)

Line D 4 (encoded)

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure M-3. DISREP.

Title: Fire Capabilities (FIRECAP) Report.

Purpose: To report artillery battery in position and ready to fire or to 

report a change in the number of weapons available.

Occasion: When the battery is ready to fire or when a change occurs 

in the number of weapons functioning.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report FIRECAP

Line A Unit (call sign)

Line B Grid (encoded)

Line C Azimuth of fire (in mils and encoded)

Line D Number of weapons (encoded)

EXAMPLE:

FIRECAP To report battery ready to fire with 4 guns

Line A A7W (call sign of battery)

Line B 714 438 (encoded)

Line C 0800 (encoded)

Line D 4 (encoded)

FIRECAP To report change in number of guns able 

to fire

Line A A7W (call sign of battery)

Line D 6 (encoded)

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure M-2. FIRECAP.
M-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Title: Shelling Report (SHELREP).

Purpose:To report bombing, shelling or mortaring by the enemy.

Occasion: Submitted as soon as possible after incident.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Line A Unit of origin

Line B Position of observer

Line C Direction in mils

Line D Time from

Line E Time to

Line F Area bombed, shelled or mortared

Line G Number and nature of guns; i.e., mortars, 

rockets

Line H Nature of fire

Line I Number, type, and caliber of weapons

Line J Time of flash to bang

Line K Damage

EXAMPLE:

Line A Current call sign, address, group, or code 

name

Line B Encode if headquarters or important OP or 

column F gives information on location

Line C Measured clockwise from grid North in 

degrees or mils (state which) of flash, sound 

or groove of shell (state which) Omit for 

aircraft

Line D Time from

Line E Time to

Line F Grid reference in clear or direction to impact 

in degrees or mils, distance in meters

Line G Mortar, rocket launchers, aircraft, or other 

methods of delivery

Line H Registration, bombardment, harassing, etc.

LIne I State whether measured or assumed of 

shells, rockets, missiles, or bombs

LIne J Omit for aircraft

Line K Encode if required

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure M-4. SHELREP.

Title: Guns up Ready to Fire (GURF) Report.

Purpose:To report NGF ship capabilities.

Occasion: When ship comes on station.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report GURF Report

Line A Call sign of ship and DTG of

message assigning ship to the NGF mission 

LIne B “On station and ready” and DTG (local) end of 

NGF ship’s assignment

Line C Planned firing location (grid coordinates). If the 

ship will be firing from a track, enter the approximate center of the track

Line D Significant reduction in capability, including 

mount casualties and/or ammunition shortages

Line E Ammunition aboard, by type, 

available for NGF

Line F Any other information of value

EXAMPLE: 

GURF

Line A A2W, 012100Z NOV 00

Line B On station and ready, 022200P NOV 00

Line C LB 614 212

Line D High explosive 60, white phosphorus 15

Line E High explosive 140, white phosphorus 60

Line F Starting 021700P AUG 00, off station for 60 

minutes for ammo resupply

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure M-5. GURF Report.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ M-3

Title: Command Post Report (CPREP).

Purpose: To report the time of opening and closing of the CP and the 

location of the new CP.

Occasion: When a CP is opened and closed.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report CPREP

Line A Unit (call sign)

Line B Location (encoded)

Line C Date-time group CP established

EXAMPLE:

CPREP CPREP

Line A W1P

Line B 742 210 (encoded)

Line C 160800Z AUG 00

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure M-8. CPREP.

Title: FLASHREP/SPOTREP/TAREP and Follow-Up Reports.

Purpose: Target reports (TAREPs) are used to pass target data.

Occasion. When potential target is discovered or after attack of significant target or target on target list.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report

Line A Precedence: Flash/Immediate/Priority/

Routine

Line B Reporting Unit

Line C Time: 

DTG of Report

DTG of Incident

Line D Reference: Original SPOTREP DTG or Target Number

Line E Location: 

Enemy

Friendly

Line F Incident Description:

Target Description

Vulnerability

Accuracy of Location (In Meters)

Size, Shape, and Orientation (In Meters and 

Mils)

Associated/Equipment or Units

Line G Action Taken:

Line H Friendly Casualties:

KIA

WIA

MIA

Line I Enemy Casualties:

KIA

EPW

Line J Enemy Weapons/Equipment/Documents 

Captured:

Line K Friendly Weapons/Equipment Damaged/

Destroyed/Lost:

Line L Remarks:

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.The group of digits must always be 

preceded by the block of two capitals designating the 100km square; 

e.g., LB6448 (STANAG No. 2029). (See FM 6-121, Field Artillery Target Acquisition.)When reporting attack or target or result of attack, 

include lines C2 (DTG of incident) and E1 (location of enemy). Intelligence agencies need this information.

Figure M-6. FLASHREP/SPOTREP/TAREP.

NGFS REPORT 

Firing Ship Call Sign Date-Time Group

REPORT

(CHECK ONE)

INCLUDE ITEMS TYPE OF REPORT

[ ] CANDY ALFA, BRAVO, CHARLIE, DELTA, ECHO, & 

FOXTROT

MISSION BEGINS

[ ] HONEY ALFA, BRAVO, CHARLIE, & INDIANEW TARGET 

SIGHTED

[ ] PICKLE BRAVO, CHARLIE, & 

GOLF

TARGET NOT FIRED

[ ] PEPPER HOTEL CURRENT AMMO 

SUMMARY

ALFA Type of Mission

BRAVO Target Number and 

Grid Coordinates

CHARLIE Target Description

DELTA Agency Controlling Fire 

- Voice Call

ECHO Target Assessment - 

Destroyed, Neutralized, 

Details

FOXTROT Ammunition Expended - 

Code, Number, type, & 

Caliber

GOLF Reason Target Not 

Fired On

HOTEL Enter Using Code, 

Amount, Type, & Caliber of Each Type of 

Bombardment Ammunition Remaining

INDIA Action Taken or 

Contemplated

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure M-7. NGFS REPORT.
APPENDIX N. SAMPLE FSCC STATUS

BOARD AND SHEET FORMATS

Available Fire

Support Agencies

Mortars CAS

DTG

Time Ammo 

Status 

Updated

Field Artillery TA

NSFS Other

Unit Location Call 

Sign Frequency Tactical Mission/Weapons Status Type

Amount 

(Number of 

Guns)

Remarks

Priority 

Targets/FPF

Fire Support 

Coordinating 

Measures

Supported Unit Unit to Fire

Target 

Number

Shell/Fuze 

Combination

DTG 

Effective FSCM Establishing Unit DTG Effective Location

Remarks:

Figure N-1. FSCC Status Board.

Figure N-2. FSCC Status Sheet.
APPENDIX O. FIRE SUPPORT REFERENCE DATA

Tactical

Missions INHERENT RESPONSIBILITIES

Arty Unit

with

Mission of

Answers

Calls for

Fire in

Priority

From

Has As Its

Zone of

Fire

Furnishes

Forward

Observers

Establishes

Liaison

With

Establishes

Comm With

Is

Positioned

By

Has Its

Fires

Planned By

DIRECT 

SUPPORT

1. Supported 

unit.

2. Own observers.

3. Higher artillery headquarters.

Zone of supported unit.To each company sized 

maneuver element of 

supported unit.

Supported unit 

(down to battalion level).

Supported unit. Unit commander 

as deemed necessary or ordered 

by higher artillery 

headquarters.

Develops own fire 

plan.

REINFORCING 1. Reinforced 

unit.

2. Own observers.

3. Higher artillery headquarters.

Zone of fire of 

reinforced unit.

No requirement. Reinforced unit. Reinforced unit. Reinforced unit or 

ordered by higher 

artillery headquarters.

Reinforced unit.

GENERAL 

SUPPORTREINFORCING

1. Higher artillery 

headquarters.

2. Reinforced 

unit.

3. Own 

observers.

Zone of supported unit to 

include zone of 

fire of reinforced 

unit.

No requirement. Reinforced unit. Reinforced unit. Higher artillery 

head-quarters or 

reinforced unit 

subject to prior 

approval by 

higher artillery 

headquarters.

Higher artillery 

headquarters.

GENERAL 

SUPPORT

1. Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Zone of supported unit.No inherent 

responsibility.

No inherent 

responsibility.

No inherent 

responsibility.

Higher artillery 

head-quarters.

Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Written in operation orders or 

plans as follows:

2/10 (155, T): DS 6th Mar

5/10 (155, T): GS

Artillery Unit Caliber/T:Towed,SP: Self-Prop Mission Assigned Supported unit; not req for GS

2nd Bn, 10th Mar

5th Bn, 10th Mar

(155: T);

(155,T)

DS

GS

6th Mar

Highest maneuver HQ through senior 

artillery HQ

On-order missions are written as follows:

1st Bn, 14th Mar (155, T): GSR 2d Bn, 14th Mar, O/O DS 24th Mar

Nonstandard missions are written as follows:

1st Bn, 10th Mar (155, T): GS 2d MarDiv, 2d PCFF 2d LAR Bn until 131600R NOV*

* 1st Bn is GS to the division, but 2d priority in calls for fire (PCFF) is to 2d LAR Bn.

Figure O-1. Artillery Tactical Missions.

Figure O-2. Formats for Assigning Artillery Units Tactical Missions.
O-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Ship with a Mission of

Normally Assigned in

Support of

Has Its Fires Planned

by Positioned by

DIRECT SUPPORT Committed Battalions SFCP Navy Amphib Commander

GENERAL SUPPORT Regiment and/or Division Supported Unit Navy Amphib Commander

Mortar Platoon or

Element with a Mission of

Normally Assigned in

Support of

Has Its Fires

Planned by Positioned by

DIRECT SUPPORT Company Supported Unit Mortar Platoon Commander

GENERAL SUPPORT Battalion Battalion Mortar Platoon Commander

Weapon

Max Range (m)

Full Charge RAP

Max Range (m)

Reduced

Charge

Rate of Fire

Per Tube

(MAX/SUST) Ammo Fuzes

5"/54 23,100 29,181 12,200 20/20 HE, HC, ILLUM, WP, 

RAP, ICM (Mk 172) 

Q, MT, CVT, VT, 

DEL

5"/62 82,000 (ERGM) 40,000 (Mk 

172 ICM) 23,100 (Conv)

29,181 12,200 10/3-5 (ERGM)

20/10-12 (Conv)

HE, HC, ILLUM, WP, 

RAP, ERGM, ICM 

(Mk172)

Q, MT, CVT, VT, 

DEL, GPS

LASM 300,000 N/A N/A N/A HE, Blast fragmentation

LEGEND: CVT–controlled variable time 

DEL–delay 

HC–high capacity

HE–high explosive

ILLUM–illumination

MT–mechanical time

GPS–global positioning system

Q–quick

RAP–rocket assisted projectile

VT–variable time

WP–white phosphorus

Figure O-3. Naval Gunfire Tactical Missions.

Figure O-4. Mortar Tactical Missions.

Figure O-5. Naval Gunfire Weapon Systems.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ O-3

Hull # Name Armament GFCS Hull # Name Armament GFCS

Ticonderoga Class (CG), 27 Ships, Active As Of Oct 2001

CG 47 Ticonderoga 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 61 Monterey 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 48 Yorktown 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 62 Chancellorsville 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 49 Vincennes 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 63 Cowpens 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 50 Valley Forge 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 64 Gettysburg 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 51 Thomas S. Gates 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 65 Chosin 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 52 Bunker Hill 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 66 Hue City 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 53 Mobile Bay 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 67 Shiloh 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 54 Antietam 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 68 Anzio 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 55 Leyte Gulf 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 69 Vicksburg 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 56 San Jacinto 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 70 Lake Erie 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 57 Lake Champlain 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 71 Cape St George 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 58 Philippine Sea 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 72 Vella Gulf 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 59 Princeton 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 CG 73 Port Royal 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

CG 60 Normandy 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

Arleigh Burke Class (DDG), 32 Ships Active, 19 Under Construction As Of Oct 2001

DDG 51 Arleigh Burke 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 67 Cole 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 52 Barry 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 68 The Sullivans 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 53 John Paul Jones 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 69 Milius 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 54 Curtis Wilbur 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 70 Hopper 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 55 Stout 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 71 Ross 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 56 John S. McCain 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 72 Mahan 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 57 Mitscher 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 73 Decatur 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 58 Laboon 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 74 McFaul 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 59 Russell 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 75 Donald Cook 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 60 Paul Hamilton 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 76 Higgins 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 61 Ramage 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 77 O’Kane 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 62 Fitzgerald 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 78 Porter 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 63 Stethem 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 79 Oscar Austin 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 64 Carney 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 80 Roosevelt 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 65 Benfold 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 81 Winston S. Churchill 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

DDG 66 Gonzalez 1 - 5”/54 MK-34 DDG 82 Lassen 1 - 5”/54 MK-34

Spruance Class (DD), 28 Ships, Active As Of Oct 2001

DD 963 Spruance 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 977 Briscoe 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 964 Paul F Foster 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 978 Stump 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 965 Kinkaid 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 982 Nicholson 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 967 Elliot 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 985 Cushing 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 968 Arthur W Radford 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 987 O’Bannon 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 969 Peterson 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 988 Thorn 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 970 Caron 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 989 Deyo 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 971 David R Ray 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 991 Fife 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 972 Oldendorf 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 992 Fletcher 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 973 John Young 2 - 5”/54 MK-86 DD 997 Hayler 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

DD 975 OBrien 2 - 5”/54 MK-86

LEGEND: CG - guided missile cruiser

DDG - guided missile destroyer

DD - destroyer

Figure O-6. Naval Gunfire Platforms.
O-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Caliber 105mm1

105mm1 155mm 155mm1

227mm1607mm1

Model M102 M119A1 M198 M109A5/A6 MLRS ATACMS

Ammunition HE, HC,

WP,

ILLUM,

APICM

HE, HC,

WP,

ILLUM,

APICM,

DPICM

HE, HC, WP,

ILLUM,

APICM,

DPICM,

M825 SMK,

FASCAM,

CPHD

HE, HC, WP,

ILLUM,

APICM,

DPICM,

M825 SMK,

FASCAM

CPHD

DPICM APAM

Fuzes PD, VE,

MT,

MTSQ,

CP,

DELAY

PD, VT,

MT,

MTSQ,

CP,

DELAY

PD, VT, MT,

MTSQ,

DELAY

PD, VT, MT,

MTSQ,

DELAY

ET ET

Maximum Range (meters)

11,400 11,500 18,300

22,0004

18,200

21,7004

32,0001

45,0005

60,0006

165,0001

300,0007

Range of RAP

(meters)

15,300 19,500 30,100 30,000

Range of DPICM

(meters)

10,500 14,100 18,000

28,2008

17,900

28,1008

Minimum Range

(meters)

10,000

13,000

25,000

70,000

Maximum Rate of Fire (rounds 

per minute)

10 10 4 4 12/40 sec 2/20 sec

Sustained Rate of Fire (rounds 

per minute)

3 3 2 1 N/A N/A

Illum Time (Seconds) 75 75 120 120

HE Burst Width

(1 round)

35 35 50 50 100

FPF 210

6 guns

210

6 guns

300

6 guns

300 6 guns

150 3 guns

N/A N/A

Figure O-7. Characteristics of U.S. Mortars, Artillery, and Rockets.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ O-5

Caliber 60mm 81mm 120mm

Model M224 M252 M285

Ammunition HE, WP, ILLUM HE, WP, RP, ILLUM HE, WP, ILLUM

Fuzes MO MO MO

Maximum Range

(meters)

3,50025,60037,2001

Minimum Range

(meters)

75 70 200

Maximum Rate of Fire

(rounds per minute)

30 35 15

Sustained Rate of Fire

(rounds per minute)

20 15 5

Illum Time (seconds) 25 60 70

HE Burst Width

(1 round)

28 35 60

FPF 90

3 tubes

35

1 tube

60

1 tube

NOTES: 1. USMC units do not have these weapon systems. USMC units may operate with Army units equipped with 

these weapons.

2. With M720 ammunition.

3. With M821 ammunition.

4. With M795 HE, M825 Smk ammunition.

5. Extended Range MLRS was fielded in FY 99.

6. Guided MLRS to be fielded in FY 02.

7. Block 1A ATACMS was fielded in FY 98.

8. Base Burn DPICM M864.

LEGEND: APICM–antipersonnel improved conventional munitions.

BB–base burn

CPHD–copperhead

DPICM–dual-purpose improved conventional munitions.

ET–electronic time

HE–high explosive

ILLUM–illumination

MO–multi-option fuze, VT, PD, Delay

MT–mechanical time

MTSQ–mechanical time superquick

PD–point detonating

RAP–rocket assisted projectile

RP–red phosphorus

SMK–smoke

VT–variable time

WP–white phosphorus

Figure O-7. Characteristics of U.S. Mortars, Artillery, and Rockets (Continued).
O-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Type of

Aircraft

Comm

Package Navigation Guns

Conventional

Ordnance Laser Equipment

External Max Load Tracker Designator

AV-8B 2 UHF TACAN INS Radar 

**

25mm

300 rounds

LGBs

AGM-65

Maverick

Generalpurpose

bombs

CBUs

Napalm

2.75" rockets 5.00" 

rockets LUU-2 flares

25-mm cannon 

AGM-122 Sidearm

8,000 lbs Yes (ARBS) No 

(Radar)

No

AH-1W 2 UHF *

2 VHF-AM *

2 VHF-FM *

TACAN

ADF

FM Homer

Radar Beacon

20mm

750 rounds

or

20mm Pod

300 rounds

2.75 Rockets

5.0 Rockets

TOW missile

Hellfire

SIDEARM

2,500 lbs No Yes

F/A-18C 2 UHF *

2 VHF-AM *

2 VHF-FM * 

TACAN

ADF

INS

Radar

FLIR

20mm

580 rounds

All 13,700 lbs Yes

(Pod)

Yes

F/A-18D 2 UHF *

2 VHF-AM *

2 VHF-FM *

TACAN

ADF

INS

Radar

FLIR

20mm

515 rounds

All 13,500 lbs Yes

(Pod)

Yes

A-10 UHF

VHF-AM

VHF-FM

TACAN

INS

30mm

1,100 rounds

All 16,000 lbs Yes

(Pod)

No

AH-64 UHF

VHF-AM

VHF-FM

TACAN

ADF

Doppler

30mm

1,200 rounds

70 mm rocket

Hellfire

3,000 lbs Yes Yes

F-16 UHF *

VHF-AM *

VHF-FM *

TACAN

ADF

INS

Radar

ILS

20mm

515 rounds

All 12,000 lbs No Yes *** 

F-15E UHF TACAN

ADF

INS

Radar

ILS

20mm

512 rounds

All 13,220 lbs No Yes ***

* Can only monitor two frequencies at a time.

** AV-8B “Plus” is equipped with radar.

*** F-16C/D and F-15E can designate if equipped with a LANTRN pod.

LEGEND: ADF–automatic direction finder

ARBS–angle rate bombing system

FAE–fuel air explosive

FLIR–forward looking infrared

ILS–instrument landing system

INS–inertial navigation system

TACAN–tactical air navigation system

TOW–tube launched, optically tracked, wire command link, guided missile 

system

Figure O-8. U.S. Aircraft Capabilities Guide.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ O-7

Weapon Effective

Range (m)

Maximum Load

(rounds)

2.75RX, 10-lb 7,500 76

2.75RX, 17-lb 6,000 76 

2.75 MK 66/M151 22.95-lb 6,900 38

7.62mm minigun 1,000 5,000

.50 Cal machine gun 1,830 500

20mm cannon 1,500 750

30mm cannon 3,000 1,200 

40mm grenade launcher 1,600 265

TOW 3750 8

Type Munitions Remarks

General Purpose (GP) Bombs

MK-82, LD, 500 lb.; MK-83, LD, 1000 lb.; 

MK84, LD, 2000 lb.

All are similar in construction and vary only in size and weight. Streamlined cylindrical body with conical 

fins designed for low drag. Effects: Blast, fragmentation and deep cratering (with a delayed fuze).

MK-82 HDGP (SNAKE-EYE) MK-82 with four MK-15 retarding fins. Selectable high (HD) or low drag (LD). Effects: Blast, fragmentation and deep cratering (with a delayed fuze).

MK-82 Air Inflatable Retarder (Air) HDGP General purpose bombs with AIR tail assembly.

MK-84 (AIR) HDGP Uses a ballute as a retarding device. Selectable HD/LD. Effects: Blast and fragmentation.

MK-36 (Destructor) MK-82 snake-eye with a MK-75 arming kit which converts the bomb into a land or water mine. HD only. 

Timed self-destruct or magnetic fuzing.

BLU- 109/B (I-2000) Penetrator Bomb 2000 lb. improved GP bomb. Effects: Cratering and hard target penetration.

M-1 17, 750 lb. GP Bomb Effects: Blast, fragmentation and deep cratering (with a delayed fuze).

M-1 17R Selectable HD/LD by means of a retarding tail assembly.

M-1 17D (Destructor) Equipped with a MK-75 arming kit for ground implant and shallow water mining. HD only.

M-118 3000 lb. Demolition Bomb Effects: Blast, fragmentation and cratering. Not good for penetration.

Guided Bombs

GBU-10/GBU-12 Laser-guided, maneuverable, free-falling weapons. GBU-10 is a MK-84 and the GBU-12 is a MK-82. 

Effects: Blast, fragmentation and deep cratering (with a delayed fuze).

GBU-16 Laser-guided, maneuverable, free-falling weapons. Effects: Blast, fragmentation and deep cratering (with 

a delayed fuze).

GBU-24/B LLLGB Low level, laser-guided, maneuverable free-fall weapon. MK-84 body. Can be released at very low altitudes. Bomb bumps up approx. 450 ft above release altitude. Effects: Blast and fragmentation.

GBU-24A/B LLLGB Same as GBU-24/B but uses BL-109/B bomb body. Used for hard target penetration.

GBU-15 TV or IR guided, automatically or manually by the WSO. MK-84 or MK-109 body. Effects: Blast, fragmentation, cratering and hard target penetration.

Missiles

AGM-65 (Maverick) A and B models are guided based o visual contrast. D and G models use IR guidance. The Marine 

Corps E model is laser guided. Designed for standoff acquisition and destruction of point targets. Effects: 

Shaped charge produces a good penetration of hard targets such as tanks and bunkers.

AGM-130 Rocket powered version of GBU-15. Standoff range out to 15 nautical miles (NM).

Figure O-9. Aviation Direct Fire Weapons Systems Ranges.

Figure O-10. Munitions Description.
O-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

AGM-114B (Hellfire) Solid propellant laser/radar guided antiarmor missile. Max range in excess of 8000 meters.

Guns

20mm 750 to 850 rounds per minute. AP, HE and incendiary.

20mm Gattling 2500 to 6000 rounds per minute. TP, HEI, API, TPI, HEIT.

Cluster Bombs

GAU-8, 30mm Gattling 42000 rounds per minute. 1.5 lb. projectile TP, HEI, API on the A/OA-10 only.

CBU-24 SUU-30 LOADED WITH 665 BLU-26 BOMBLETS. The BLU-26 submunition is baseball sized, spins to 

arm and detonates on impact. Dispersion pattern is torus or donut shaped.

CBU-30 SUU-13 with 40 canisters containing 32 CS bomblets each. Bomblets will start dispensing CS gas 5 to 6 

seconds after release and will dispense for 10 to 15 seconds. Dispersion is linear.

CBU-38 SUU-13 containing 40 BLU-49 antimaterial HE bomblets that will penetrate jungle canopies. Dispersion 

is linear.

CBU-49 Same as CBU-24 except bomblets have delay timers to detonate at random times after impact. Dispersion pattern is torus or donut shaped.

CBU-52 SUU-30 loaded with 220 BLU-61 softball sized bomblets with an incendiary lining and a scored steel 

casing for fragmentation. Dispersion pattern is torus or donut shaped.

CBU-55 Slow sped Fuel Air Explosive (FAE). Used against blast sensitive targets. Kills by overpressure.

CBU-58 SUU-30 loaded with 650 BLU-63 baseball sized bomblets with incendiary pellets and scored casing for 

fragmentation. Dispersion pattern is torus or donut shaped.

CBU-71 Same as CBU-58 except submunitions have delay fuzes that detonate at random times after impact. Dispersion pattern is torus or donut shaped.

CBU-87 (Combined Effects Munitions [CEM]) SUU-65 loaded with 202 BLU-97 bomblets. BLU-97 has a shaped charge for armor; steel scored liner for 

fragmentation and incendiary ring. Dispersion is rectangular.

CBU-89 (GATOR) SUU-64 loaded with a mix of 72 BLU-91/B antiarmor and 22 BLU-92/B antipersonnel mines with preset 

self-destruct time. Dispersion pattern varies from circular at high angles to linear at low angles.

CBU-97/B (Sensor Fused Weapons) SUU-64 with an airbag dispensing system and 10 BLU-108/B submunitions designed to provide multiple 

kills per pass capability against tanks, armored vehicles, artillery, APC’s and support vehicles.

MK-20 (Rockeye) MK-7 loaded with 247 MK-118 antiarmor submunitions with antipersonnel capabilities. Dispersion pattern varies from circular at high angles to linear at low angles.

BL-755 European munitions loaded with 147 antiarmor submunitions. Designed for low altitude low angle deliveries against armor but produces more fragmentation than the MK-20 Rockeye. Dispersion pattern is 

rectangular.

GBU-55/72 High speed FAE. Used against blast sensitive targets. Kills by overpressure.

Type Munitions Remarks

Figure O-10. Munitions Description (Continued).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ O-9

Risk-Estimate Distances

See figures O-11 and O-12. The term “danger

close” is used when there are friendly troops or positions within a prescribed distance of the target,

specifically 600 meters for cannon artillery. This is

simply a warning and not a restriction to both the

maneuver commander and the fire direction center

to take proper precautions. Risk-estimate distances

are defined as the distance in meters from the intended center of impact at which a specific degree

of risk and vulnerability will not be exceeded. The

casualty criterion is the 5-minute assault criterion

for a prone soldier in winter clothing and helmet.

The probability of incapacitation (PI) means that a

soldier is physically unable to function in an assault

within a 5-minute period after an attack. The 0.1

percent PI value can be interpreted as being less

than or equal to one chance in a thousand. The

ground commander must accept risk when targets

are inside 0.1 percent PI. These distances in figures

O-11 and O-12 are designed for wartime and should

not be applied for peace-time training.

Item/

System Description Risk Estimate Distances (Meters)

10% PI 0.1% PI

1/3 2/3 Max

range 1/3 2/3 Maxrange

M102/M119 105mm Howitzer 85 85 90 175 200 275

M109/M198 155mm Howitzer 100 100 125 200 280 450

M109/M198 155mm DPICM 150 180 200 280 300 475

M270A1 MLRS TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD 2 km

M270A1 ATACMS TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD 5 km

M224 60mm mortar 60 65 65 100 150 175

M29/M29A 81mm mortar 75 80 80 165 185 230

M30 107mm (4.2in) mortar TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD

M120 120mm mortar TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD

NSFS MK-45 5"/54 gun 210 225 250 450 450 600

Figure O-11. Risk Estimates Distances for Indirect Fire Assets.
O-10_______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Item Description Distance (meters)

10% PI 0.1% PI

MK-82 LD 500 lb bomb 250 425

MK-82 HD 500 lb bomb (retarded) 100 375

MK-82 LGB 500 lb bomb (GBU-12) 250* 425*

MK-83 HD 1,000 lb bomb 275 475

MK-83 LD 1,000 lb bomb 275 475

MK-83 LGB 1,000 lb bomb (GBU-16) 275* 475*

MK-84 HD/LD 2,000 lb bomb 325 500

MK-84 LGB 2,000 lb bomb (GBU-10/24) 225* 500*

MK-20** Rockeye 150 225

MK-77 500 lb Napalm 100 150

CBU-55/77** Fuel-air explosive * *

CBU-52** CBU (all types) 275 450

CBU-58/71** *** CBU (all types) 350 525

CBU-87** CBU (all types) 175 275

CBU-89/78** CBU (all types) 175 275

2.75" FFAR Rocket with various warheads 160 200

SUU-11 7.62mm minigun * *

M-4, M-12, SUU-23, M-61 20mm Gattling gun 100 150

CAU-12 25mm gun 100 150

GPU-5a, GAU-8 30mm Gattling gun 100 150

AGM-65***** Maverick (TV, IIR, laser-guided) 25 100

MK-1/MK-21 Walleye II (1,000 lb. TV-guided bomb) 275 500

MK-5/MK-23 Walleye II (2,400 lb. TV-guided bomb) * *

AC-130 105mm canon 40/25/20mm 80**** 

35

200**

125

* Risk-estimate distances are to be determined. For LGBs, the values shown are for weapons that do not guide and that follow a ballistic trajectory similar 

to GP bombs. This does not apply to GBU-24 bombs, because GBU-4s do not follow a ballistic trajectory.

** Not recommended for use near troops in contact.

*** CBU-71/CBU84 bombs contain time-delay fuzes, which detonate at random times after impact. CBU-89 bombs are antitank and antipersonnel mines 

and are not recommended for use near troops in contact.

  AC-130 estimates are based on worse case scenarios. The 105mm round described is the M-1 HE round with M-731 proximity fuze. Other fuzing 

would result in smaller distances. These figures are accurate throughout the firing orbit. The use of no-fire headings has no benefits for reducing risk-estimate distances and should not be used in contingency situations.

** *** The data listed applies only AGM-65 A, B, C and D models. AGM-65 E and G models contain a larger warhead and risk-estimate distances are not 

currently available.

Figure O-12. Risk Estimate Distances for Aviation Munitions.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ O-11

Rate of Fire

Manufacturer/

Weapon

Basic

Range

(meters)

BB/RAP

Range

(meters)

Max Sust Countries

Possessing Remarks

AUSTRIA

GHN-45, 155mm Towed 30,300 39,600 7/min 2/min Iran, Iraq, Thailand None

BRAZIL

ASTROS II, MRL --- 30,000

60,000

32/min

4/min

Reload

Reload

Saudi Arabia,

Iran, Qatar

None 

CHINA

WS-1, 320mm MRL

Type 83, 273mm MRL Type 71, 

180mm MRL

WA 021, 155mm Towed Type 83, 

152mm Towed Type 82/85, 

130mm MRL Type 59-1, 130mm 

Towed

---

---

---

30,000

30,400

---

27,500

80,000

40,000

20,000

39,000

38,000

15,000

38,000

4/min

4/min

10/min

5/min

4/min 

60/5min

10/min

Reload

Reload

Reload

2/min

2/min

Reload

10/min

None

None

None

None

Iraq

Thailand

Iran, Iraq, Oman, N Korea, 

Egypt, Lebanon

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

FRANCE

GCT, 155mm SP

GCT, 155 Towed

MkF3, 155mm SP

23,000

24,000

20,000

29,000

32,000

25,000

6/min

3/18sec

3/min

2/min

6/min

1/min

Iraq, Kuwait, Saudi Arabia

Cyprus

Iraq, Kuwait, UAE

None

None

None

GERMANY

PzH 2000, 155mm SP 30,000 40,000 3/10sec 9/min None None

IRAN

N10, 450mm MRL --- 150,000 1/min 2/hour None None

IRAQ

ABABEL 100, 400mm MRL

ABABEL 50, 262mm MRL

--- 

---

100,000

50,000

4/min

12/min

Reload

Reload

None

Frmr Yugoslavia, Bosnia Serb 

Army, Croatia

None

None

ISRAEL

845, 155mm Towed 

M71, 155mm Towed

24,000

23,500

39,000

30,000

5/min

5/min

2/min

2/min

None

Singapore, Thailand, South 

Africa

None

None

ITALY

PALMARIA, 155mm SP 24,700 30,000 3/20sec 4/min Libya, Nigeria None

LEGEND: BB–base burn 

CHEM–chemical munitions capable

INA–information not available

LGM–laser-guided munitions capable 

MRL–multiple rocket launcher

NUKE–nuclear munitions capable

SP–self-propelled

Figure O-13. World Artillery, Mortars, and Rocket Launchers.
O-12_______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Rate of Fire

Manufacturer/

Weapon

Basic

Range

(meters)

BB/RAP

Range

(meters)

Max Sust Countries

Possessing Remarks

North Korea

M1985, 240mm MRL

M1987, 170mm SP

M46, 130mm SP

BM 11, 122mm MRL

M1981, 122mm SP

M1992, 120mm SP Mortar

---

40,000

27,500

---

23,900

8,700

43,000

---

---

20,500

---

---

12/min

INA

6/min

30/min

INA

INA

Reload

INA

1.1/mm

Reload

INA

INA

Iran

Iran, Iraq

None

PLO, Syria, Iran, Iraq, Uganda

None

None

CHEM

None

None

None

None

None

Russia/CIS

FROG-7,MRL

SMERCH, 30mm MRL

2S4, 240mm, SP Mortar

M240, 240mm, Towed Mortar

BM 27, 220mm MRL

2S7, 203mm SP

2S3, 180mm Towed

2S3, 152mm SP

2S19, 152mm SP

2S5, 152mm SP

2A36, 152mm Towed

D-20, 152mm Towed

BM 14, 122mm MRL

BM 21, 140mm, MRL

2S1, 122mm SP 

D-30, 122mm Towed

2S9, 120mm SP Mortar

2S23, 120mm SP Mortar

2B9, 82mm SP/T Mortar

---

---

9,600

9,700

---

37,500

30,400

20,600

24,700

28,400

28,400

17,230

---

---

15,300

15,300

8,900

8,900

4,300

70,000

70,000

18,000

18,000

35,000

47,000

43,800 

24,000

30,000 

37,000

37,000

30,000

9,800

20,400

22,000 

22,000

13,000

12,900

---

1/min

12/min

1/min

1/min

16/min 

2/min

1/min

4/min

8/min

5/min

5/min

5/min

16/min

40/min

8/min

8/min

6/min

10/min

120/min

1/hour

Reload

40/hour

38/hour

Reload

2/min

1/2min

1/min

8/min

5/min

1/min

1/min

Reload

Reload

1.1/min

1.1/min 

6/min

10/min

Frmr Warsaw Pact, Afghan, Algeria, 

Cuba, Egypt, Iraq, North Korea, 

Libya, Syria, Yemen

Kuwait, UAE

Iraq, Czech Republic

IRA, Iraq, North Korea, Egypt, Oman, 

Lebanon

Afghanistan, Syria

Czech Republic, Poland,

Slovakia

India, Iraq, Egypt, Syria

Hungary, Iraq, Libya, Syria

None

None

Finland

Algeria, China, Cuba, Egypt, Vietnam, Frmr Yugoslavia

Algeria, Afghanistan, Cambodia, 

China, Egypt, Syria, North Korea, 

Vietnam 

China, Egypt, India, Iran, Iraq, North 

Korea, others

None

China 

Afghanistan

None

Hungary

NUKE, CHEM

None

NUKE, LGM

NUKE, LGM

CHEM,

MINES

None

None

None

LGM

None

None

None

CHEM

CHEM, MINES

None

None

LGM

LGM

None 

SOUTH AFRICA

G-6, 155mm SP

G-5, 155mm Towed 

30,800

30,200

39,600

39,000

3/21sec

3/min

4/min

3/min

UAE, Oman

None

None

None

UNITED KINGDOM

FH 70, 155mm Towed 24,700 31,500 3/13sec 2/min Germany, Italy, Japan, Saudi Arabia None

FORMER YUGOSLAVIA

M-77, 128mm MRL --- 20,600 32/min Reload Bosnia, Bosnian Serb Army, Croatia, 

Iraq, Serbia, Monte Negro

None

NOTE: A complete listing of all world artillery systems and their characteristics is available in the classified National Government Intelligence Center 

series Field Artillery Worldwide. Reference DST 1130S-115-94, Cannon and Mortars; DST 1130S-94 Vol 2 Sup 1; and NGIC 1143-200D-95, Multiple 

Rocket Launcher Systems.

LEGEND: BB–base burn 

CHEM–chemical munitions capable 

INA–information not available

LGM–laser guided munitions capable 

MRL–multiple rocket launcher

NUKE–nuclear munitions capable

SP–self-propelled

Figure O-13. World Artillery, Mortars, and Rocket Launchers (Continued).
APPENDIX P. ENVIRONMENTAL AND TERRAIN CONSIDERATIONS

MOUNTAIN OPERATIONS

FM 90-6, Mountain Operations, provides more detailed information.

Munitions

IPB helps determine where and what munitions are

most effective. Consideration of munitions employment and effect follow.

Snow

Mechanical time fuzes are the most effective air burst.

VT demonstrates fuze sensitivity.

HE/PD (point detonating) or DELAY, CBUs, and

ICM are less effective due to fragmentation absorption

by the snow.

FASCAM may settle into snow. This may cause antihandling devices to prematurely detonate the munitions.

Laser designated munitions may be ineffective (specular activity).

WP can burn undetected in snow for up to 4 days.

Smoke effectiveness is reduced.

Snow slides can be started.

Rocky Terrain

HE/PD is very effective. It produces fragmentation

from splintering rocks.

VT and time fuzes are effective.

ICM is effective; however, it has reduced efficiency

on greater than 60 degree slopes.

FASCAM can be used to deny the enemy the use of

narrow defiles, valleys, roads, and usable terrain.

Laser-guided weapons can be effective on canalized

targets.

Swirling winds and slopes will make smoke employment difficult.

Changing atmospheric conditions make unobserved

fires less accurate and require more meteorological

support for artillery and mortars.

Rockslides can start.

Target Acquisition and Observation

Forward Observers

Surface observation is compartmentalized due to multiple terrain crests.

FOs may require airlift or mountaineering support to

overcome terrain masks and compartments.

Heavy fogs and low clouds may obscure observation.

Observers tend to underestimate range when looking

upward; overestimate range when looking down. 

Aircrews

Aircrews can effectively observe areas not visible by

ground means; e.g., in deep defilade, on reverse

slopes, deep targets. They are vulnerable to enemy air

defenses when compartmentalized. Aircrews may be

confined to valleys and lower elevations because of atmospheric conditions for flight.

Radars

Terrain masks can degrade the effective range of radar. Enemy high angle, indirect fires are easily detected. Additional use of ground surveillance radars and

remote sensors may be required. More extensive use

of SHELREPs is required.
P-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Targeting

IPB should identify—

l Routes that can be used by the enemy to attack,

withdraw, and resupply.

l Likely position areas for indirect fire assets,

command and control elements, CSS assets, and

observation posts.

l Any terrain that is subject to snowslides, rockslides,

or avalanches.

Considerations

High angle fires (artillery and mortars) are often required to clear the intervening crests and to attack the

reverse slopes.

VT fuze employment requires additional intervening

crest considerations.

CAS can effectively attack canalized targets and reverse slope targets.

Naval gunfire must fire reduced charge for intervening

crests which reduces range.

Position areas for artillery and mortars are limited, have

limited access, and are likely to be targeted by enemy

counterfire actions.

Limited ingress/egress routes allow effective enemy

employment of ADA.

JUNGLE OPERATIONS

See FM 90-5, Jungle Operations, for more information. Contact with the enemy will often be at extremely close ranges. Fire support must be responsive

enough to support troops in close contact, quickly and

decisively. Depending on the size of enemy elements,

supporting arms employment may be decentralized to

accomplish responsive fires.

Munitions

Munitions used will vary with the type vegetation

and terrain. Knowledge and employment of the type

of munitions best suited for the terrain is vital. Varying terrain includes triple canopy jungle, heavy

ground vegetation, swamps, and small clearings. In

triple canopy jungle—

l HE/VT, HE/Time, and ICM and other payloadsubmunitions (CBUs, FASCAM) are ineffective or

less effective.

l HE/delay will penetrate treetops and create

additional fragmentation from splintering.

l Heavy CAS ordnance with fuze extenders can clear

away jungle canopy.

l M825 smoke has limited effectiveness unless fired

graze burst.

l White phosphorous is effective as a marking round

and in initial adjustments.

Target Acquisition and Observation

Triple canopy jungle makes observation beyond 25 to

50 meters very difficult. Target location, self-location,

and friendly unit location is difficult.

Forward Observers

FOs often cannot see rounds and must be able to adjust

fire by sound. This requires experience (see MCWP

3-16.6 for additional information).

Marking rounds can be fired to assist in self-location.

Marking rounds are usually fired center of sector or at

least 400 meters forward of friendly units. After the

round is fired, the FDC sends the grid of the impact.

GPS is essential for quick target and self-location. Night

vision devices are essential for low light observation.

Aircrews

Aircrews can see exposed movements and positions

that the ground observer cannot. They can assist in relay of fire support communications and mark targets for

CAS. Aircrews are ineffective in triple canopy jungle.

Radars

Radars are very effective. Proactive counterfire that is

based on IPB must be rehearsed and fully integrated

into the fire support plan to be effective.
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ P-3

Ground surveillance radars and remote sensors are effective. SHELREPs may only be usable for intelligence collection versus reactive counterfire.

Targeting

Isolated units prepare 360 degree defenses with appropriate fire plans including FPFs. Consider planning

munitions specific required supply rates (RSR) to support operations.

Considerations

Artillery positions are limited and often inaccessible

by road. Static positions require 6400 mil firing capability and defensive fire planning.

Units employing CAS need positive identification of

friendly troops; e.g., prearranged signals, procedures.

Increased requirements on helicopter support results in

increased SEAD support.

Communications in triple canopy are severely degraded. Proper use of antennas, relays, and re-transmission

stations helps offset this limitation.

DESERT OPERATIONS

FM 90-3, Desert Operations, will provide more detailed information.

The three types of desert terrain are mountainous,

rocky plateau and sandy dunes. Fire support planning

considerations will vary significantly between operations in each type of desert terrain. Typical engagements are at extended and maximum ranges with

greater dispersion and mobility of units. Continuous

fire support for highly mobile maneuver forces requires considerable planning.

Munitions

Mountain and Rocky Plateau Deserts

Munitions effectiveness for mountain deserts is the

same as for any mountainous region except that the

considerations of snow are not usually applicable.

Sandy or Dune Deserts

HE/delay, ICM, and CBUs are ineffective in deep

sands. Laser-guided munitions can be employed at

max ranges. Smoke and illumination can be used effectively to obscure or silhouette enemy.

Target Acquisition and Observation

Forward Observers

Laser range finders and global positioning systems are

essential for accurate and timely target location.

Targets can be detected by observing dust signatures.

Training in vehicle ID at extended ranges is required.

Equipment maintenance increases due to heat, sand,

and dust.

Aircrews

Aerial navigation/target location is difficult in featureless terrain. Aircraft are vulnerable to enemy air defenses at maximum ranges. Positive identification of

friendly troops is more difficult; use prearranged signals and procedures.

Radars

Radars are effective to maximum ranges. Effective integration into counterfire programs is essential.
P-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Targeting

Identify trafficable terrain for wheeled and tracked vehicles and likely mortar and artillery positions. Assess

the impact of wadis, gulches, wet lakebeds, and other

significant terrain to compartmentalize or canalize

friendly and enemy units. Identify likely enemy forward observation positions.

Considerations

Mobility may affect supporting arms ability to maintain fire support for maneuver.

Aircraft are vulnerable to the maximum ranges of enemy ADA.

CAS can employ standoff ranges in target engagement.

Target marking requirements increase.

LOCs for sustainment increase. 

Volumes of fire for simple munitions increase with

dispersion of target elements (target size increases).

Helicopter operations are difficult to execute due to

dusty conditions.

COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

FM 90-11, Cold Weather Operations, contains additional information on aspects of operating in a cold

weather environment.

Fire planning for cold weather operations is similar to

that for more temperate regions. However, limited

ground mobility of artillery weapons and ammunition

supply and increased time of operation must be considered by the fire support planner.

Munitions

Munitions effectiveness in snow is the same as those

listed under mountain operations. Low temperatures

may cause illuminating rounds to malfunction.

Target Acquisition and Observation

Forward Observers

Visibility diagrams require constant update due to

drifting snow. Ground burst may be difficult to observe in deep snow.

Aircrews

Aircrews are not as prone to disorientation as are

ground observers. Weather conditions may reduce the

availability of aircraft.

Radars

Extreme cold weather may degrade radar’s operations.

Ground surveillance radars are effective. Deep snow

may reduce remote sensors effectiveness.

Targeting

Visual target detection may be limited. Heavy precipitation may reduce LOCs to predictable routes. Ice

fogs and snow clouds created by moving enemy formations reveal targets. Tracks in the snow may indicate enemy positions.

Considerations

Extreme cold weather will reduce a weapon’s range.

Mobility of maneuver and indirect fire assets is often

extremely limited.

Frequent poor weather reduces availability of CAS.

Target marking and friendly unit self-marking requirements increase.

Effective communications are hampered by electronic

interference, weakened batteries.

Routes and firing positions may be limited due to frozen

terrain. May require explosives to emplace howitzers. 
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ P-5

MILITARY OPERATIONS

ON URBANIZED TERRAIN

MCWP 3-35.3, Military Operations on Urbanized

Terrain, contains additional information on aspects of

operating in a MOUT environment. FMFM 4-7C-3/

FM 101-61-10, MOUT JMEMS, provides specific information on munitions effects.

Characteristics of the MOUT environment include

high concentrations of populace and infrastructure and

the consideration of collateral damage to both. Intensity of conflict and ROE have an exponential effect on

the employment of fire support in the MOUT environment. The effective employment of fires in what can

be a constraining environment is essential to success.

Munitions 

HE/VT and time fuzes can effectively clear rooftops

of enemy troops. Varying heights of buildings can

cause VT to prematurely function.

HE/PD is effective on masonry targets only in PD

mode. HE/Delay may only penetrate the first wall or

the roof.

Only concrete piercing (CP) fuzes can penetrate multiple-layer masonry structures.

Calculated minimum safe distances are not accurate in

cities since buildings give added protection.

NSFS effectiveness is decreased by the height of the

buildings. Try to position so GTL is parallel with “urban canyon.”

Dead-space beyond buildings is 5 times the height of

the building for low-angle fire and 3 times the height

of the building for high-angle fire.

Laser-guided munitions are effective against hardened

targets. Have to be wary of specular reflectivity.

Heavy CAS ordnance, artillery, and NSFS can quickly

and effectively create rubble and demolish structures.

Rubblization, however, can often create problems for

friendly forces, especially during clearing operations.

Smoke, WP, and illumination are effective and can

create incendiary effects but tend to help the enemy

defenders since they plan and lay their defensive fires

for limited visibility.

Target Acquisition and Observation

Forward Observers

OPs can be established in high structures. However,

survivability conditions may preclude the occupation

of rooftops.

Buildings may limit or compartmentalize ground observation. Ground obstacles will limit or impede movement. Build observer plan with observers inside and

outside the built-up area to lessen gaps in coverage.

GPS functioning may be degraded since buildings

may mask satellite signals.

Aircrews

Aircrews can quickly locate exposed or moving targets; however, they have to be aware of dead space

and air defense ambushes in contained urban areas.

Aircrews often cannot locate origin of fires from within buildings.

FAC(A)s can facilitate CAS employment, especially

masked targets.

FAC(A)s and observers must be wary of laser employment. Specular reflectivity off the various reflective

surfaces will demand detailed planning for the successful use of laser designators and IR pointers.

The multitude of light from a city can decrease a

FAC(A) or observers ability to identify targets. Lights

will degrade NVG effectiveness.

Radars

Employment can be degraded due to masking by

buildings. Emplacement outside of built up areas may

provide more effective employment.
P-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Targeting 

Identify mobility corridors, resupply routes, and applicable choke points.

Identify civil infrastructure points (communications,

utilities or government).

Identify likely enemy artillery and mortar positions.

Plan fires to accompany penetrations, unless the enemy is withdrawing.

Identify ROE restricted targets.

Be aware of “shoot and scoot” tactics within any builtup areas.

Considerations

Determine what is acceptable collateral damage to

populace and infrastructure.

Interdict and canalize by creating rubble and obstacles.

Use fires to prevent enemy movement on streets and

occupation of rooftops for observation.

Employment of howitzers in direct fire may be required (possible attachment to maneuver units). Howitzers can be used to create breaches in walls or be set

on PDFs. “Killer junior” will be the munition of

choice. 155 millimeter towed howitzers may often

have difficulty maneuvering through city streets or

“digging in” on pavement or concrete.

High angle indirect fires may be required due to masking by buildings. In many cases, high-angle fire on a

howitzer may still not be able to prosecute the targeted

area. As a result, mortars may become the indirect fire

weapon of choice.

NSFS engagements may be limited due to masking.

IPs and BPs for CAS aircraft must be thoroughly

planned. Prominent buildings, structures, and parks

may be used. Must be easily identifiable.

CAS is effective, especially against masked targets,

but may have to increase dive angle.

CAS is vulnerable to enemy air defenses, especially

when compartmentalized.

Positioning for artillery and mortars includes masking,

dispersion, and trafficability.

Radio communications are degraded; consider wire or

existing civil communication lines. Build a comm relay plan.

Current military mapping does not provide the detail to

move, target, and observe fires in MOUT. Smaller scale

maps such as tourist maps may be required to operate

effectively; 8-digit grids will be required within cities.

Meteorological conditions in the city are different than

those outside the city. Atmospheric changes in the city

(ambient heat radiated from buildings, industrial

smog, and deviation in winds) may increase the frequency of meteorological measurements.

Survey datums in most underdeveloped countries are

at best unreliable. Survey must be extended into the

town. Compasses and magnetic equipment may be adversely affected by the structures.

Plan and secure resupply routes. Ammunition expenditure (class V[w]) increases during MOUT.

Create Molotov cocktail and RPG screens on vehicles

and howitzers to defeat or decrease effectiveness of

these weapons.

The release of toxic industrial chemicals due to fires

must be planned for. Place RFA or NFAs on likely locations of industrial chemicals. Have NBCD officer

determine effects of chemicals if released (down wind

hazard area and time viable).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ P-7

Plan and disseminate how friendlies will mark occupied buildings. Aircraft must be able to identify. 

Hold CAS aircraft over nonhostile terrain to allow aircrew to build SA without overly worrying about threat.

Fixed-wing aircraft generally need 16 kilometers (4X4)

area to hold effectively.

Parks, fields, school yards, and other obvious positions

are obvious to the enemy and will be targeted.

Stabilize mortar base plates on concrete with sandbags.

MLRS/HIMARS should not be positioned in built up

areas due to the low trajectory of the weapon. 
APPENDIX Q. GLOSSARY

SECTION I. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required

AA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . antiaircraft

AAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . antiaircraft artillery

AAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assault amphibious vehicle

AAW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . antiair warfare

ABCA . . . . . American, British, Canadian, Australian

ACA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .airspace coordination area

ACE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aviation combat element

ADAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . area denial artillery munition

AF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .amphibious force

AFSC. . . . . . . . . . . . assistant fire support coordinator

AGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . above ground level

AGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . attack guidance matrix

AirO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .air officer

A/NGF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air/naval gunfire

AO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . area of operations

AOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .amphibious objective area

AoF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . azimuth of fire

AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . antipersonnel; attack position

APICM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .antipersonnel improved

conventional munition

arty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . artillery

ASC. . . . . . . . . . . . . air support controller/coordinator

ASC (A) . . . . . assault support coordinator (airborne)

ASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air support element

ASL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air support list

ASLT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air support liaison team

ASR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assault support request

ATCCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Army Tactical Command

and Control System

ATF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amphibious task force

ATFIC. . . . . amphibious task force intelligence center

ATGM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . antitank guided missile

ATIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . artillery target intelligence zone

ATO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .air tasking order

BA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . basic allowance

BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . brilliant antitank

BBDPICM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . base burn dual purpose

improved conventional munition

BCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battery computer system

BDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battle damage assessment

BE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .basic encyclopedia

Bn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .battalion

C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command and control

CA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . combat assessment

CAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . close air support

CATF . . . . . . . . . .commander, amphibious task force

CBAE . . . . . commander’s battlespace area evaluation

CBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .cluster bomb unit

CCIR . . . . . . . . . . . . commander’s critical information

requirements

CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command element

CEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .circular error probable

CFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calls for fire

CFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coordinated fire line

CFZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . critical friendly zones

CI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . counterintelligence

CINC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .commander in chief

CIS . . . . . . communications and information systems

CLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .commander, landing force

cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command

COA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . course of action

COC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .combat operations center

COF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . conduct of fire

COG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . center of gravity

CONPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . contingency plan

COP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . combat outpost

CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . checkpoint; contact point;

command post

CPHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copperhead

CPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .command post report

CSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . common sensor boundary
Q-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

CSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . controlled supply rate

CSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . combat service support

CSSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . combat service support element

CV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . critical vulnerability

CVT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . controlled vehicle time

CZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . censor zone

D3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . decide-detect-deliver-assess

DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Department of the Army

DACT . . . . data automated communications terminal

DAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct air support

DASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct air support center

DCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . digital communications terminal

DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direction finding

DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defense Intelligence Agency

DISN . . . . . . . . Defense Information System Network

DISREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .displacement report

DMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . digital message system

DOCC . . . . . . . . . deep operations coordination center

DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dual purpose

DPICM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dual purpose improved

conventional munition

DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct support

DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . decision support template

EA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electronic attack

EFST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . essential fire support tasks

EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . .Execution Management Control

EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electronic protection

EPLRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enhanced position location

reporting system

ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electronic warfare support

EW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electronic warfare

EWCC . . . . . . . electronic warfare coordination center

EWO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electronic warfare officer

FAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward air controller

FAC(A) . . . . . . . . . . .forward air controller (airborne)

FAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fuel air explosive

FAHQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .force artillery headquarters

FARP. . . . . . . . . . forward arming and refueling point

FASCAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . .family of scatterable mines

FCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .final coordination line

FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire direction

FDA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . functional damage assessment

FDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fire direction center

FDO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire direction officer

FEBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward edge of the battle area

FFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . free-fire area

FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .force fires coordinator

FFCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . force fires coordination center

FFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fire for effect

FIRECAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . firing capabilities

FLASHREP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flash report

FLIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .forward looking infrared

FLOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward line of own troops

FMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fleet Marine Force

FMFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fleet Marine Force manual

FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .forward observer

FOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward operating base

FPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . final protective fire

FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .final protective line

frag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fragmentary

FRAGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fragmentary order

FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support

FSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support area

FSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support coordinator

FSCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support coordination center

FSCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support coordination line

FSCM . . . . . . . . . . fire support coordinating measure

FSEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support execution matrix

FSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support station

GCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ground combat element

GCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . guidance control unit

GFCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gunfire control system

GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . global positioning system

GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . general support

GS-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .general support-reinforcing

GTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gun-target line

GURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . guns up ready to fire

HA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .holding area

HARM. . . . . . . . . . . . high-speed antiradiation missile

HC . . . . . . . . . . . . hexachloroethane (artillery smoke)

HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helicopter direction
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ Q-3

HDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .helicopter direction center

HE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive

HERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HE rocket-assisted

HF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .high frequency

HIMARS . . . . . . high mobility artillery rocket system

HPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-payoff target

HPTL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-payoff target list

HQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . headquarters

HR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helicopter request

HUMINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . human intelligence

HVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-value target

I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . immediate

IADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integrated air defense system

ICM . . . . . . . . . . . . .improved conventional munitions

IFSAS . . . . . . .Initial Fire Support Automated System

INTSUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intelligence summary

IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intelligence operations center

IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . initial point

IPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .intelligence preparation of the

battlefield/battlespace

IR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .infrared radiation

JAAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .joint air attack team

JDAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joint direct attack munitions

JFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joint force commander

JIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .joint intelligence center

JMEM . . . . . . . . joint munitions effectiveness manual

JP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joint publication

JTAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joint tactical air strike request

JTCB . . . . . . . . . . . .joint targeting coordination board

JTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .joint task force

JTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joint target list

kbps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .kilobits per second

KOCOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . key terrain, observation and

fields of fire, cover and concealment,

obstacles, and avenues of approach

LAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . low altitude air defense

LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local area network

LAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . light armored reconnaissance

LASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . land attack standard missile

LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . landing force

LFOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . landing force operations center

LGW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . laser guided weapon

LLDR . . . . . .lightweight laser designator rangefinder

LNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .liaison officer

LOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . letter of instruction

LOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line of sight

LST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . laser spot tracker

LTC. . . . . . . . . . low altitude air defense team control

LWC . . . . . . low altitude air defense weapons control

m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter

MACCS. . . . Marine air command and control system

MACS . . . . . . . . . . . . modular artillery charge system

MAGTF. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Marine air-ground task force

MarDiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine division

MASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine air support squadron

MAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine aircraft wing

MBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main battle area

Mbps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . megabites per second

MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mobility corridors

MCCRES . . . . . . . . Marine Corps Combat Readiness

Evaluation System

MCDP . . . . . . . . . .Marine Corps doctrinal publication

MCPP . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine Corps Planning Process

MCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . multi-channel radio

MCRP . . . . . . . . . Marine Corps reference publication

MCWP . . . . . . Marine Corps warfighting publication

MEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . munitions effect assessment

MEDEVAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . medical evacuation

MEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Marine expeditionary force

met. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .meteorological

METT-T . . . . . . mission, enemy, terrain and weather,

troops and support available-time available

MEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Marine expeditionary unit

MEU(SOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .Marine expeditionary unit

(special operations capable)

MFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .mission-fired report

MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . megahertz

MIDB . . . . . . . . . . . . modernized integrated data base

MILSTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . military standard

MLRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .multiple launch rocket system

mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . millimeter
Q-4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

MOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .measure of effectiveness

MOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . message of interest

MOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .military occupational specialty

MOUT . . . . . .military operations on urbanized terrain

MPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mean point of impact

MSC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .major subordinate command

MSL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .mean sea level

MULE . . . . . . . . . .modular universal laser equipment

NAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .named area of interest

NATO . . . . . . . . . North Atlantic Treaty Organization

NBCD . . . . nuclear, biological, and chemical defense

NCO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . noncommissioned officer

NFA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no-fire area

NGF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . naval gunfire

NGFSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . naval gunfire officer

NGLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . naval gunfire liaison officer

NSFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . naval surface fire support

NTS . . . . . . . . . . . . naval telecommunications system

NVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . night vision goggles

OAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offensive air support

obj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . objective

OIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . officer in charge

OMFTS . . . . . . . . .operational maneuver from the sea

OOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . order of battle

OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . observation post

OPFACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operational facility

OPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation plan

OPORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation order

OTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . over-the-horizon

P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . planned

P&A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . production and analysis

PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . position area

PAH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . platoon area hazard

PCFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . priority in calls for fire

PCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .penetration control point

PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .point detonating (fuze action)

PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . principal direction of fire

PGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precision-guided munition

PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . probability of incapacitation

PIFAS . . . . . . . portable inductive artillery fuze setter

PIR/IR . . . . . . . . . . . priority intelligence requirement/

intelligence requirement

PLGR. . . . . . . . . . precision lightweight GPS receiver

PLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . position location information

PLRS . . . . . . . . . . . position location reporting system

POF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . priority of fires

PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .pulse repetition frequency

PZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pickup zone

QSTAG . . . . .quadripartite standardization agreement

RAAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . remote antiarmor mine system

RABFAC. . . . . . . .radar beacon forward air controller

RAGM. . . . . . . . . . . . reactive attack guidance matrix

RAOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rear area operations center

RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .rocket assisted projectile

RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .rear area security

RDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .radar deployment order

RFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . restricted fire area

RFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .restrictive fire line

ROE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rules of engagement

RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reattack recommendations

R&S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . reconnaissance and surveillance

RSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . required supply rate

RSTA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reconnaissance, surveillance,

and target acquisition

RV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . report values

SAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .supporting arms coordinator

SACC . . . . . . . . .supporting arms coordination center

SADARM . . . . . . . sense and destroy armor munition

SAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .surface-to-air missile

SARC . . . . . . . . surveillance and reconnaissance cell

SCAMP . . . . .sensor control and management platoon

SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single-channel radio

SEAD . . . . . . . . . . suppression of enemy air defenses

S/EWCC . . . . . . . . . . . .signals intelligence/electronic

warfare coordination center

SFCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shore fire control party

SHELREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shelling report

SINCGARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .single channel ground

and airborne radio system

sit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . situational
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ Q-5

SOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . standard operating procedure

SPOTREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spotting report

STA . . . . . . . . . . . . surveillance and target acquisition

STANAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . .standardization agreement

SYSCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .systems control center

TA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target acquisition

TAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air command

TAC(A). . . . . . . . . . tactical air coordinator (airborne)

TACC . . . . . . . . .Marine tactical air command center;

Navy tactical air control center

TACGRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air control group

TACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air control party

TACRON . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air control squadron

TAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .tactical air direction

TADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air direction center

TAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target area hazard

TAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . targeted area of interest

TAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air request

TARBUL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target bulletin

TAREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target report

TATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical air traffic control(ler)

TBMCS . . . .Theater Battle Management Core System

TCIM. . . . . tactical communications interface module

TCO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .tactical combat operations

TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target damage assessment

TDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical data network

TGTINFOREP . . . . . . . . . . . target information report

TGTINTELO . . . . . . . . . . . target intelligence officer

THS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target handoff system

TIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .target information center

TIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target information officer

TIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target information section

TLDHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target location designation

hands-off system

TLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target location error

T/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table of organization

TOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .time on target

TOW . . . . . . . . . . . . .tube launched, optically tracked,

wire command link, guided missile system

TPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .target processing center

TPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time-phase line

TPME . . . . . . . . . . . task, purpose, method, and effect

T&R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . training and readiness

TRI-TAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tri-Service Tactical

Communications System

TRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .target reference point

TSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target synchronization matrix

TSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target selection standards

TTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time to target

TVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target value analysis

UAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unmanned aerial vehicle

UHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ultra-high frequency

ULCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unit-level circuit switches

USMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . United States Marine Corps

VHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .very high frequency

VMAQ . . Marine tactical electronic warfare squadron

VMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . variable message format

VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . variable time (fuze)

WEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . weapons employment officer

WP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .white phosphorus

XO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . executive officer

SECTION II. DEFINITIONS

advance force—(DOD, NATO) A temporary organization within the amphibious task force which precedes the main body to the objective area. Its function

is to participate in preparing the objective for the main

assault by conducting such operations as reconnaissance, seizure of supporting positions, minesweeping,

preliminary bombardment, underwater demolitions,

and air support. (JP 1-02)

airborne alert—(DOD, NATO) A state of aircraft

readiness wherein combat-equipped aircraft are airborne and ready for immediate action. (DOD) It is
Q-6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

designed to reduce reaction time and to increase the

survivability factor. (JP 1-02)

air defense—(DOD) All defensive measures designed

to destroy attacking enemy aircraft or missiles in the

Earth’s envelope of atmosphere, or to nullify or reduce

the effectiveness of such attack. (JP 1-02)

air liaison officer—(DOD) An officer (aviator/ pilot)

attached to a ground unit who functions as the primary

advisor to the ground commander on air operation

matters. (JP 1-02)

allocation—(DOD) In a general sense, distribution of

limited resources among competing requirements for

employment. Specific allocations (e.g., air sorties, nuclear weapons, forces, and transportation) are described as allocation of air sorties, nuclear weapons,

etc. (JP 1-02)

amphibious force—An amphibious task force and a

landing force together with other forces that are

trained, organized, and equipped for amphibious operations. (JP 3-02)

amphibious objective area—(NATO) A geographical

area (delineated for command and control purposes in

the order initiating the amphibious operation) within

which is located the objective(s) to be secured by the

amphibious force. This area must be of sufficient size to

ensure accomplishment of the amphibious force’s mission and must provide sufficient area for conducting

necessary sea, air, and land operations. (JP 3-02)

apportionment (air)—(DOD) The determination and

assignment of the total expected air effort by percentage and/or by priority that should be devoted to the

various air operations and/or geographic areas for a

given period of time. Also called air apportionment.

(JP 1-02)

area of influence—(DOD, NATO) A geographical area wherein a commander is directly capable of influencing operations by maneuver or fire support systems

normally under the commander’s command or control.

(JP 1-02)

area of interest—(DOD, NATO) That area of concern to the commander, including the area of influence, areas adjacent thereto, and extending into enemy

territory to the objectives of current or planned operations. This area also includes areas occupied by enemy

forces who could jeopardize the accomplishment of

the mission. (JP 1-02)

attack position—Maneuver area used by attack helicopters which contain firing points laterally and in

depth. When activated, attack positions may be airspace coordination areas.

barrage—(DOD) A prearranged barrier of fire, except

that delivered by small arms, designed to protect

friendly troops and installations by impeding enemy

movements across defensive lines or areas. (JP 1-02)

battle damage assessment—An estimate of damage

or degradation resulting from the application of military force, either lethal or nonlethal, against a target.

This estimate should be timely and accurate. Battle

damage assessment can be applied to the employment

of all types of weapon systems (air, ground, naval, and

special forces weapons systems) throughout the range

of military operations. Battle damage assessment is

primarily an intelligence responsibility with required

inputs and coordination from the operators. Battle

damage assessment is composed of physical damage

assessment, functional damage assessment, and target

system assessment. Also called BDA. (Proposed by JP

3-60 for inclusion in JP 1-02.)

battlespace—(DOD) The environment, factors, and

conditions which must be understood to successfully

apply combat power, protect the force, or complete the

mission. This includes the air, land, sea, space, and the

included enemy and friendly forces, facilities, weather, terrain, the electromagnetic spectrum, and information environment within the operational areas and

areas of interest. See also joint intelligence preparation

of the battlespace. (JP 1-02). All aspects of air, surface, subsurface, land, space, and electromagnetic

spectrum which encompass the area of influence and

area of interest. (MCRP 5-12C) 

barrage fire—(DOD, NATO) Fire which is designed

to fill a volume of space or area rather than aimed specifically at a given target. (JP 1-02)

battlefield surveillance—(DOD, NATO) Systematic

observation of the battle area for the purpose of providing timely information and combat intelligence.

(JP 1-02)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ Q-7

centers of gravity—Those characteristics, capabilities, or localities from which a military force derives

its freedom of action, physical strength, or will to

fight. Also called COG. (JP 1-02) A key source of

strength without which an enemy cannot function.

(MCDP 1-2)

close air support—(DOD) Air action by fixed- and

rotary-wing aircraft against hostile targets which are in

close proximity to friendly forces and which require

detailed integration of each air mission with the fire

and movement of those forces. (JP 1-02)

close operations—Military actions conducted to

project power against enemy forces which pose an immediate or near term threat to the success of current

battles and engagements. These military actions are

conducted by committed forces and their readily available tactical reserves using maneuver and combined

arms (MCRP 5-12C).

close support—That action of the supporting force

against targets or objectives which are sufficiently

near the supported force as to require detailed integration or coordination of the supporting action with the

fire, movement, or other actions of the supported force

(JP 1-02).

close supporting fires—Fire placed on enemy troops,

weapons, or positions, which, because of their proximity, present the most immediate and serious threat to

the supported unit (JP 1-02).

combat assessment—The determination of the overall effectiveness of force employment during military

operations. Combat assessment is composed of three

major components, (a) battle damage assessment

(BDA), (b) munitions effects assessment (MEA), and

(c) reattack recommendation. Also called CA. (Proposed by JP 3-60 for inclusion in JP 1-02.)

combat power—(DOD, NATO) The total means of

destructive and/or disruptive force which a Military

unit/formation can apply against the opponent at a given time. (JP 1-02)

combined arms—The full integration of combat arms

in such a way that to counteract one, the enemy must

become more vulnerable to another. (MCRP 5-12C)

constraint(s)—Something which must be done that

limits freedom of action. See also restraint(s). (MCRP

5-12C)

control point—(DOD, NATO) A position marked by

a buoy, boat, aircraft, electronic device, conspicuous

terrain feature, or other identifiable object which is

given a name or number and used as an aid to navigation or control of ships, boats, or aircraft. (JP 1-02)

counterattack—(DOD, NATO) Attack by part or all

of a defending force against an enemy attacking force,

for such specific purposes as regaining ground lost or

cutting off or destroying enemy advance units, and

with the general objective of denying to the enemy the

attainment of his purpose in attacking. In sustained defensive operations, it is undertaken to restore the battle

position and is directed at limited objectives. (JP 1-02)

counterfire—(DOD, NATO) Fire intended to destroy

or neutralize enemy weapons. (DOD) Includes counterbattery, counterbombardment, and countermortar

fire. (JP 1-02)

countermechanized defensive fire—The fire of targets planned on routes of approach which logically

would be used by enemy mechanized forces. Normally, it is scheduled for delivery on call of the supported

landing force. (NWP 3-09.11M (Rev C)/FMFM 1-7)

counterpreparation fire—(DOD, NATO) Intensive

prearranged fire delivered when the imminence of the

enemy attack is discovered. (DOD) It is designed to:

break up enemy formations; disorganize the enemy’s

systems of command, communications, and observation; decrease the effectiveness of artillery preparation; and impair the enemy’s offensive spirit. (JP 1-02)

course of action—(DOD) 1. A plan that would accomplish, or is related to, the accomplishment of a

mission. Also called COA. (JP 1-02)

covering force—(DOD, NATO) 1. A force operating

apart from the main force for the purpose of intercepting, engaging, delaying, disorganizing, and deceiving the enemy before he can attack the force

covered. 2. Any body or detachment of troops which

provides security for a larger force by observation,

reconnaissance, attack, or defense, or by any combination of these methods. (JP 1-02)
Q-8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

covering force area—(DOD) The area forward of

the forward edge of the battle area out to the forward

positions initially assigned to the covering forces. It

is here that the covering forces execute assigned

tasks. (JP 1-02)

critical point—(DOD) A key geographical point or position important to the success of an operation. (JP 1-02)

critical vulnerability—An aspect of a center of gravity that if exploited will do the most significant damage

to an adversary’s ability to resist. A vulnerability cannot be critical unless it undermines a key strength. Also called CV. (MCRP 5-12 C)

damage assessment—(DOD, NATO) The determination of the effect of attacks on targets. (JP 1-02)

deep operations—Military actions conducted against

enemy capabilities which pose a potential threat to

friendly forces. These military actions are designed to

isolate, shape, and dominate the battlespace and influence future operations (MCRP 5-12C).

deep supporting fires—Fire directed on objectives

not in the immediate vicinity of our forces, for neutralizing and destroying enemy reserves and weapons, and

interfering with enemy command, supply, communications, and observations (JP 1-02).

delaying operation—(DOD, NATO) An operation in

which a force under pressure trades space for time by

slowing down the enemy’s momentum and inflicting

maximum damage on the enemy without, in principle,

becoming decisively engaged. (JP 1-02)

deliberate attack—(DOD, NATO) A type of offensive action characterized by preplanned coordinated

employment of firepower and maneuver to close with

and destroy or capture the enemy. (JP 1-02)

deliberate targeting—The methodical identification,

compilation, and analysis of potential fixed or semifixed targets followed by the decision of which potential targets will be attacked, when, and/or by what

weapon and ordnance. It is practiced primarily during

the planning phase of an operation, when planning for

an attack, or when the tempo of combat is slow.

(MCRP 5-12C)

destruction fire—(DOD) Fire delivered for the sole

purpose of destroying material objects. (JP 1-02)

direct air support center—(DOD) The principal air

control agency of the US Marine air command and

control system responsible for the direction and control of air operations directly supporting the ground

combat element. It processes and coordinates requests

for immediate air support and coordinates air missions

requiring integration with ground forces and other

supporting arms. It normally collocates with the senior

fire support coordination center within the ground

combat element and is subordinate to the tactical air

command center. (JP 1-02)

direct support—(DOD) A mission requiring a force

to support another specific force and authorizing it to

answer directly the supported force’s request for assistance. (JP 1-02)

exploitation—(DOD, NATO) An offensive operation

that usually follows a successful attack and is designed

to disorganize the enemy in depth. (JP 1-02)

fathom—A unit of length equal to 6 feet used especially for measuring the depth of water. Used when

planning desirable depths of water for fire support areas/fire support stations.

final protective fire—(DOD, NATO) An immediately available prearranged barrier of fire designed to impede enemy movement across defensive lines or areas.

(JP 1-02)

fire plan—(DOD, NATO) A tactical plan for using

the weapons of a unit or formation so that their fire

will be coordinated. (JP 1-02) Fire plans are developed

by supporting arm agencies and incorporated into the

fire support plan.

firepower—(DOD, NATO) 1. The amount of fire

which may be delivered by a position, unit, or weapon

system. 2. Ability to deliver fire. (JP 1-02)

fire support—Fires that directly support land, maritime, amphibious, and special operations forces to engage enemy forces, combat formations, and facilities in

pursuit of tactical and operational objectives. (JP 1-02)

fire support area—(DOD) An appropriate maneuver

area assigned to fire support ships by the naval force
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ Q-9

commander from which they can deliver gunfire support to an amphibious operation. (JP 1-02) A fire support area is assigned to each fire support unit or, in

certain cases, each individual fire support ship executing fire support missions. Fire support areas are

assigned by CATF, in consideration of recommendations of the NGFO on the landing force staff. Fire support areas are located for minimum interference with

any waterborne and airborne ship-to- shore movement.

The size, shape, and location of the fire support area

are dependent upon several factors, such as ship maneuvering room, hydrographic conditions (e.g., sand

bars, reefs, shoals, shallow water), obstacles (including minefields), antiaircraft, and antisubmarine disposition; and the best position in respect to range, guntarget line, and observation for potential employment

targets. Fire support areas are delineated on an overlay

with a dot-dash line representing a boundary, annotated in degrees true north; and labeled with the letters

FSA and a Roman numeral (e.g., FSA I). The boundary is a straight line to a recognizable point on the

beach or a navigational aid to assist the ships in remaining within their respective FSAs.

fire support coordination—(DOD, NATO) The

planning and executing of fire so that targets are adequately covered by a suitable weapon or group of

weapons. (JP 1-02)

fire support coordination center—(DOD, NATO) A

single location in which are centralized communications facilities and personnel incident to the coordination of all forms of fire support. (JP 1-02)

fire support coordinator—The officer in charge of

the fire support coordination center. He is the direct

representative of the landing force commander for the

planning and coordination of all available fire support.

(MCRP 5-12C)

fire support plan—A plan on how indirect fires and

target acquisition will be used to support an operation.

It should include a portion for each means of fire support involved. (MCRP 5-12A)

fire support station—(DOD) An exact location at sea

within a fire support area from which a fire support

ship delivers fire. (JP 1-02) Fire support stations are

more restrictive than an FSA. Fire support stations are

useful where maneuvering room is restricted, and usually afford increased accuracy, firing at shorter ranges,

and optimum gun-target line. However, a disadvantage of the FSS is the loss of the mobility of the ship.

Fire support stations are delineated on an overlay by

the letters FSS and an Arabic numeral (e.g., FSS 1).

forward air controller—(DOD) An officer (aviator/

pilot) member of the tactical air control party who,

from a forward ground or airborne position, controls

aircraft in close air support of ground troops. (JP 1-02)

forward air controller (airborne)—(DOD) A specifically trained and qualified aviation officer who exercises control from the air of aircraft engaged in close

air support of ground troops. The forward air controller (airborne) is normally an airborne extension of the

tactical air control party. (JP 1-02)

forward arming and refueling point—(DOD) A

temporary facility, organized, equipped, and deployed

by an aviation commander, and normally located in

the main battle area closer to the area of operation than

the aviation unit’s combat service area, to provide fuel

and ammunition necessary for the employment of aviation maneuver units in combat. The forward arming

and refueling point permits combat aircraft to rapidly

refuel and rearm simultaneously. (JP 1-02)

forward edge of the battle area—(DOD, NATO)

The foremost limits of a series of areas in which

ground combat units are deployed, excluding the areas

in which the covering or screening forces are operating, designated to coordinate fire support, the positioning of forces, or the maneuver of units. (JP 1-02)

forward line of own troops—(DOD) A line which

indicates the most forward positions of friendly forces

in any kind of military operation at a specific time.

The forward line of own troops normally identifies

the forward location of covering and screening forces.

(JP 1-02)

functional damage assessment—The estimate of

the effect of military force to degrade/destroy the

functional or operational capability of the target to

perform its intended mission and on the level of success in achieving operational objectives established

against the target. This assessment is based upon allsource information, and includes an estimation of the

time required for recuperation or replacement of the
Q-10_______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

target function. (Proposed by JP 3-60 for inclusion in

JP 1-02.)

general support—(DOD, NATO) That support which

is given to the supported force as a whole and not to

any particular subdivision thereof. (JP 1-02)

ground alert—(DOD, NATO) That status in which

aircraft on the ground/deck are fully serviced and

armed, with combat crews in readiness to take off

within a specified short period of time (usually 15

minutes) after receipt of a mission order. (JP 1-02) The

readiness time may be at other intervals, and is usually

specified in the operation order.

group of targets—(DOD, NATO) Two or more targets on which fire is desired simultaneously. A group

of targets is designated by a letter/number combination or a nickname. (JP 1-02)

harassing fire—(DOD, NATO) Fire designed to disturb the rest of the enemy troops, to curtail movement

and, by threat of losses, to lower morale. (JP 1-02)

hasty attack—(DOD, NATO) In land operations, an

attack in which preparation time is traded for speed in

order to exploit an opportunity. (JP 1-02)

helicopter direction center—(DOD, NATO) In amphibious operations, the primary direct control agency

for the helicopter group/unit commander operating under the overall control of the tactical air control center.

(JP 1-02)

high-payoff target—(DOD) A target whose loss to

the enemy will significantly contribute to the success

of the friendly course of action. High-payoff targets

are those high-value targets, identified through wargaming, which must be acquired and successfully attacked for the success of the friendly commander’s

mission. Also called HPT. (JP 1-02)

high-payoff target list—A list identifying the highpayoff targets for a phase of the battle in the order of

their priority. (MCRP 3-1.6.14)

high-value target—(DOD) A target the enemy commander requires for the successful completion of the

mission. The loss of high-value targets would be expected to seriously degrade important enemy functions

throughout the friendly commander’s area of interest.

Also called HVT. (JP 1-02)

holding area—An area where attack helicopter aircrews await targets or mission. Holding areas should

provide cover, concealment, and space for dispersion.

The area(s) is positioned to enhance responsiveness.

immediate air support—(DOD, NATO) Air support

to meet specific requests which arise during the course

of a battle and which by their nature cannot be planned

in advance. (JP 1-02)

initial point—(DOD) A well-defined point, easily distinguishable visually and/or electronically, used as a

starting point for the bomb run to the target. (JP 1-02)

intelligence preparation of the battlespace—(DOD)

An analytical methodology employed to reduce uncertainties concerning the enemy, environment, and terrain for all types of operations. Intelligence

preparation of the battlespace builds an extensive data

base for each potential area in which a unit may be

required to operate. The data base is then analyzed in

detail to determine the impact of the enemy, environment, and terrain on operations and presents it in

graphic form. Intelligence preparation of the battlespace is a continuing process. Also called IPB. (JP

1-02). In Marine Corps usage, the systematic, continuous process of analyzing the threat and environment in

a specific geographic area. (MCRP 5-12C)

interdiction fire—(NATO) Fire placed on an area or

point to prevent the enemy from using the area or

point. (JP 1-02)

joint intelligence center—(DOD) The intelligence

center of the joint force headquarters. The joint intelligence center is responsible for providing and producing the intelligence required to support the joint

force commander and staff, components, task forces

and elements, and the national intelligence community. (JP 1-02)

killing zone—(DOD) An area in which a commander

plans to force the enemy to concentrate so as to destroy him with conventional weapons or the tactical

employment of nuclear weapons. (JP 1-02)

linkup—A meeting of friendly ground forces (such as

when an advancing force reaches an objective area
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ Q-11

previously seized by an airborne or air assault force,

when an encircled element breaks out to rejoin friendly forces, or when converging maneuver forces meet).

(MCRP 5-12A)

list of targets—(DOD) A tabulation of confirmed or

suspect targets maintained by any echelon for informational and fire support planning purposes. (JP 1-02)

MAGTF rear area—That area extending rearward

from the rear boundary of the ground combat element

to the MAGTF rear boundary. (FMFM 2-6)

main effort—The designated subordinate unit whose

mission at a given point in time is most critical to

overall mission success. It is usually weighted with the

preponderance of combat power and is directed

against a center of gravity through a critical vulnerability. (MCRP 5-12C)

maneuver—(DOD, NATO) Employment of forces on

the battlefield through movement in combination with

fire, or fire potential, to achieve a position of advantage in respect to the enemy in order to accomplish the

mission. (JP 1-02)

Marine Corps Planning Process—A six-step methodology which helps organize the thought processes of

the commander and staff throughout the planning and

execution of military operations. It focuses on the

threat and is based on the Marine Corps philosophy of

maneuver warfare. It capitalizes on the principle of unity of command and supports the establishment and

maintenance of tempo. The six steps consist of mission

analysis, course of action development, course of action analysis, comparison/decision, orders development, and transition. Also called MCPP. NOTE: Tenets

of the MCPP include top down planning, single battle

concept, and integrated planning. (MCRP 5-12C) 

mark—(DOD) In artillery and naval gunfire support,

to call for fire on a specified location in order to orient

the observer/spotter or to indicate targets. (excerpt

from JP 1-02)

marking fire—(DOD, NATO) Fire placed on a target

for the purpose of identification. (JP 1-02)

massed fire—(DOD). The fire of the batteries of two

or more ships directed against a single target. 2. Fire

from a number of weapons directed at a single point or

small area. (JP 1-02)

maximum effective range—(DOD, NATO) The maximum distance at which a weapon may be expected to

be accurate and achieve the desired result. (JP 1-02)

maximum ordinate—(DOD, NATO) In artillery and

naval gunfire support, the height of the highest point in

the trajectory of a projectile above the horizontal plane

passing through its origin. (JP 1-02)

maximum range—(DOD, NATO) The greatest distance a weapon can fire without consideration of dispersion. (JP 1-02)

mean point of impact—(DOD, NATO) The point

whose coordinates are the arithmetic means of the coordinates of the separate points of impact/burst of a finite number of projectiles fired or released at the same

aiming point under a given set of conditions. (JP 1-02)

mean sea level—(DOD) The average height of the

surface of the sea for all stages of the tide, used as a

reference for elevations. (JP 1-02)

minimum range—(DOD) 1. Least range setting of a

gun at which the projectile will clear an obstacle or

friendly troops between the gun and the target. 2. Shortest distance to which a gun can fire from a given position. (JP 1-02)

mission precedence—The determination of the relative order of attacking multiple targets confronting the

unit simultaneously. The sequence for attack may be

prearranged, and is based on the commander’s guidance, commander’s intent, and the tactical situation.

MK-86—A gun fire control system employed on naval ships. MK-86-equipped ships can store up to eight

prearranged target locations, and can conduct simultaneous fire missions.

movement to contact—An offensive operation designed to gain or reestablish contact with the enemy.

(OH 6-1)

named area of interest—A point or area along a

particular avenue of approach through which enemy

activity is expected to occur. Activity or lack of activity within an NAI will help to confirm or deny a
Q-12_______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

particular enemy course of action. Also called NAI.

(MCRP 5-12C)

neutralization fire—(DOD) Fire which is delivered

to render the target ineffective or unusable. (NATO)

Fire which is delivered to hamper and interrupt movement and/or the firing of weapons. (JP 1-02)

obscuration fire—Fire delivered to suppress the enemy by obscuring his view of the battlefield.

on-call—(DOD, NATO) A term used to signify that a

prearranged concentration, air strike, or final protective fire may be called for. (JP 1-02)

on-call target—(DOD, NATO) In artillery and naval

gunfire support, a planned target other than a scheduled target on which fire is delivered when requested.

(JP 1-02)

passage of lines—(DOD, NATO) An operation in

which a force moves forward or rearward through another force’s combat positions with the intention of

moving into or out of contact with the enemy. (JP 1-02)

planned targets—Targets that are known to exist in

an operational area and which effects are scheduled in

advance or are on-call. Examples range from targets

on joint target lists (JTLs) in applicable campaign

plans, to targets detected in sufficient time to list in the

air tasking order (ATO), mission-type orders, or fire

support plans. Planned targets have two subcategories:

scheduled or on-call. (Proposed by JP 3-60 for inclusion in JP 1-02.) 

prearranged fire—(DOD, NATO) Fire that is formally planned and executed against targets or target areas

of known location. Such fire is usually planned well in

advance and is executed at a predetermined time or

during a predetermined period of time. (JP 1-02)

preliminary weaponeering—A preliminary analysis

of the target to determine what, if any, weapons will

be effective against the target and the degree of damage it is possible to achieve with various types and

quantities of ammunition.

preparation fire—(DOD, NATO) Fire delivered on a

target preparatory to an assault. (JP 1-02)

preplanned air support—(DOD, NATO) Air support

in accordance with a program, planned in advance of

operations. (JP 1-02) Preplanned air support is either

scheduled or on-call.

preplanned on-call air support mission—Air missions in which aircraft are preloaded for a particular

target and placed in an appropriate ground/airborne

alert readiness condition. In requesting on-call missions, the supported unit specifies the period the support is required. Detailed mission planning and briefing

is normally not possible before launch. (FMFM 5-41)

preplanned scheduled air support mission—Air

missions which are executed at a specific time. Aircrews are assigned a time on target. Scheduled missions provide effective coordination and economical

use of aircraft and ordnance. (FMFM 5-41)

priority of fires—The organization and employment

of fire support means according to the importance of

the supported unit’s missions. (MCRP 5-12A)

priority target—A target on which the delivery of

fires takes precedence over all the fires for the designated firing unit or element. The firing unit or element

will prepare, to the extent possible, for the engagement

of such targets. A firing unit or element may be assigned only one priority target. The designation may

be based on either time or importance. (MCRP 5-12A)

program of targets—A number of planned targets of

a similar nature. A program of targets identified by a

code name may be initiated on-call, at a specified

time, or when a particular event occurs. Targets are

fired in a predetermined sequence. (MCRP 5-12A)

pursuit—(DOD, NATO) An offensive operation designed to catch or cut off a hostile force attempting to

escape, with the aim of destroying it. (JP 1-02)

radar beacon—(DOD) A receiver-transmitter combination which sends out a coded signal when triggered

by the proper type of pulse, enabling determination of

range and bearing information by the interrogating station or aircraft. (JP 1-02)

rate of fire—(DOD, NATO) The number of rounds

fired per weapon per minute. (JP 1-02)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ Q-13

reactive target—The method used for targeting targets of opportunity. It is used when time and situation

do not allow for targeting; i.e., during deliberate targeting, during an attack, when defending against an attack, or upon discovery of the location of a target such

as a radio jammer, tank, or antiaircraft weapon.

(MCRP 5-12C)

rear area operations center—A command and control facility that serves as an area/subarea commander’s planning, coordinating, monitoring, advising, and

directing agency for area security operations. (JP 1-02)

rear area security—The measures taken before, during, and/or after an enemy airborne attack, sabotage

action, infiltration, guerrilla action, and/or initiation of

psychological or propaganda warfare to minimize the

effects thereof. (MCRP 5-12 C)

rear operations—Military actions conducted to support and permit force sustainment and to provide security for such actions (MCRP 5-12C).

reinforcing—(DOD, NATO) In artillery usage, tactical mission in which one artillery unit augments the

fire of another artillery unit. (JP 1-02)

relief in place—(DOD, NATO) An operation in

which, by direction of higher authority, all or part of a

unit is replaced in an area by the incoming unit. The

responsibilities of the replaced elements for the mission and the assigned zone of operations are transferred to the incoming unit. The incoming unit

continues the operation as ordered. (JP 1-02)

restraint(s)—Something which is prohibited that

limits freedom of action. See also constraint(s).

(MCRP 5-12C)

retirement—(DOD, NATO) An operation in which

a force out of contact moves away from the enemy.

(JP 1-02)

retrograde movement—(DOD) Any movement of a

command to the rear, or away from the enemy. It may

be forced by the enemy or may be made voluntarily.

Such movements may be classified as withdrawal, retirement, or delaying action. (JP 1-02)

scheduled fire—(DOD, NATO) A type of prearranged fire executed at a predetermined time. (JP 1-02)

scheduled targets—Planned targets on which fire is

to be delivered at a specific time. (Proposed by JP 3-60

for inclusion in JP 1-02.) 

screening smoke—Smoke used to conceal friendly

forces, positions, and activities from enemy ground or

air observation. Screening smoke is normally placed

between friendly and enemy forces. (FMFM 6-8)

security area—Area that begins at the forward area of

the battlefield and extends as far to the front and flanks

as security forces are deployed. Forces in the security

area furnish information on the enemy and delay, deceive, and disrupt the enemy and conduct counterreconnaissance. (MCRP 5-12A)

series of targets—(NATO) In artillery and naval gunfire support, a number of targets and/or group(s) of targets planned to support a maneuver phase. A series of

targets may be indicated by a nickname. (JP 1-02)

shore fire control party—(DOD) A specially trained

unit for control of naval gunfire in support of troops

ashore. It consists of a spotting team to adjust fire and

a naval gunfire liaison team to perform liaison functions for the supported battalion commander. (JP 1-02)

summit—(DOD) The highest altitude above mean sea

level that a projectile reaches in its flight from the gun

to the target; the algebraic sum of the maximum ordinate and the altitude of the gun. (JP 1-02)

supporting arms—(DOD) Air, sea, and land weapons

of all types employed to support ground units. (JP 1-02)

supporting arms coordination center—(DOD) A

single location on board an amphibious command ship

in which all communication facilities incident to the

coordination of fire support of the artillery, air, and naval gunfire are centralized. This is the naval counterpart to the fire support coordination center utilized by

the landing force. (JP 1-02)

supporting fire—(DOD, NATO) Fire delivered by

supporting units to assist or protect a unit in combat.

(JP 1-02)

suppression of enemy air defenses—(DOD) That activity which neutralizes, destroys or temporarily degrades surface-based enemy air defenses by destructive

and/or disruptive means. (JP 1-02)
Q-14_______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

suppressive fire—(DOD) Fires on or about a weapons system to degrade its performance below the level

needed to fulfill its mission objectives, during the conduct of the fire mission. (JP 1-02)

sustained rate of fire—(DOD, NATO) Actual rate of

fire that a weapon can continue to deliver for an indefinite length of time without seriously overheating.

(JP 1-02)

tactical air command center—(DOD) The principal

US Marine Corps air command and control agency

from which air operations and air defense warning

functions are directed. It is the senior agency of the US

Marine air command and control system which serves

as the operational command post of the aviation combat element commander. It provides the facility from

which the aviation combat element commander and his

battle staff plan, supervise, coordinate, and execute all

current and future air operations in support of the

Marine air-ground task force. The tactical air command

center can provide integration, coordination, and direction of joint and combined air operations. (JP 1-02)

tactical air control center—(DOD) The principal air

operations installation (ship-based) from which all aircraft and air warning functions of tactical air operations

are controlled. Also called Navy TACC. (JP 1-02)

tactical air control party—(DOD, NATO) A subordinate operational component of a tactical air control

system designed to provide air liaison to land forces

and for the control of aircraft. (JP 1-02)

tactical air direction center—(DOD) An air operations installation under the overall control of the tactical air control center (afloat)/tactical air command

center, from which aircraft and air warning service

functions of tactical air operations in an area of responsibility are directed. (JP 1-02)

tactical fire direction—The control of one or more

units in the selection of targets to attack, designation

of the unit or units to fire, selection of the method of

attack, and selection of the most suitable ammunition

for the mission. (MCWP 3-16.1)

tactical mission—Defines the fire support responsibility of an artillery, naval gunfire, or mortar unit to a

supported unit.

target—A geographical area, complex, or installation

planned for capture or destruction by military forces.

(JP 1-02)

target acquisition—(DOD, NATO) The detection,

identification, and location of a target in sufficient detail to permit the effective employment of weapons.

(JP 1-02)

target analysis—(DOD, NATO) An examination of

potential targets to determine military importance, priority of attack, and weapons required to obtain a desired level of damage or casualties. (JP 1-02)

targeted area of interest—The geographical area or

point along a mobility corridor where successful interdiction will cause the enemy to either abandon a particular course of action or require him to use

specialized engineer support to continue, where he can

be acquired and engaged by friendly forces. Not all

TAIs will form part of the friendly course of action;

only TAIs associated with high-payoff targets are of

interest to the staff. These are identified during staff

planning and wargaming. TAIs differ from engagement areas in degree. Engagement areas plan for the

use of all available weapons. TAIs might be engaged

by a single weapon. (MCRP 5-12A)

target bulletin—An information message, used by the

commander responsible for maintaining the target list,

to keep interested commanders informed of all changes to the list. (FMFM 1-7)

target information—Unevaluated data of every description concerning targets that, when processed, may

produce target intelligence. (FM 6-121)

target intelligence—(DOD, NATO) Intelligence

which portrays and locates the components of a target

or target complex and indicates its vulnerability and

relative importance. (JP 1-02)

target list—(DOD) The listing of targets maintained

and promulgated by the senior echelon of command; it

contains those targets that are to be engaged by supporting arms, as distinguished from a “list of targets”

that may be maintained by any echelon as confirmed,

suspected, or possible targets for informational and

planning purposes. (JP 1-02)
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element _____________________________________________ Q-15

target number—(NATO) The reference number given to the target by the fire control unit. (JP 1-02)

target overlay—(DOD, NATO) A transparent sheet

which, when superimposed on a particular chart, map,

drawing, tracing or other representation, depicts target

locations and designations. The target overlay may also show boundaries between maneuver elements, objectives, and friendly forward dispositions. (JP 1-02)

target precedence list—The commander’s list of

types of mobile potential targets arranged in the order

in which they are to be attacked.

target reference point—An easily recognizable point

on the ground (either natural or manmade) used for

identifying enemy targets or controlling direct fires.

Target reference points are usually designated by company commanders or platoon leaders for company

teams, platoons, sections, or individual weapons. They

can also designate the center of an area where the

commander plans to distribute or converge the fires of

all his weapons rapidly. Target reference points are

designated by using the standard target symbol, a target number, and a target reference point letter. Essential target reference points may be included in lists of

targets during fire planning.

target value analysis—A method for providing a systematic determination of which targets out of the entire target array should be attacked for the greatest

tactical benefit.

targeting—(DOD) The process to detect, select, and

prioritize targets, match the appropriate action, and assess the resulting effects based on the commander’s

objective, guidance, and intent. (Proposed by JP 3-60

for inclusion in JP 1-02.)

time on target—(DOD) 1. Time at which aircraft are

scheduled to attack/photograph the target. 2. The actual time at which aircraft attack/photograph the target.

3. The time at which a nuclear detonation is planned at

a specified desired ground zero. (NATO) In other than

air operations, the time of the first weapons effect on

the target or target groups. 

time-sensitive targets—Those targets requiring immediate response because they pose (or will soon

pose) a clear and present danger to friendly forces or

are highly lucrative, fleeting targets of opportunity.

(JP 1-02)

time to target—(DOD) The number of minutes and

seconds to elapse before aircraft ordnance impacts on

target. (JP 1-02)

trigger point—An identifiable point on the ground

used to time the delivery of fire with a moving target.

A firing unit is given a command to fire as the target

passes over or near the trigger point. The trigger point

is selected in consideration of reaction time of the firing unit, time of flight of the projectile, and the rate of

march of the enemy.

Universal Time—A measure of time that conforms

within a close approximation, to the mean diurnal rotation of the Earth and serves as the basis of civil timekeeping. Universal Time (UT1) is determined from

observations of the stars, radio sources, and also from

ranging observations of the moon and artificial Earth

satellites. The scale determined directly from such observations is designated Universal Time Observed

(UTO); it is slightly dependent on the place of observation. When UTO is corrected for the shift in longitude of the observing station caused by polar motion,

the time scale UT1 is obtained. When an accuracy better than one second is not required, Universal Time

can be used to mean Coordinated Universal Time

(UTC). Also called ZULU time. Formerly called

Greenwich Mean Time. (JP 1-02)

visibility diagram—A sketch that is drawn to scale by

the observer of the area of observation. It shows those

portions of the terrain which cannot be observed from

a given observation post. The visibility diagram is dispatched to infantry and artillery S-2 officers for evaluation of target area coverage so gaps can be covered.

(FMFM 6-8)

weapons free—(DOD, NATO) In air defense, a weapon control order imposing a status whereby weapons

systems may be fired at any target not positively recognized as friendly. (JP 1-02)

weapons hold—(DOD, NATO) In air defense, a

weapon control order imposing a status whereby

weapons systems may only be fired in self-defense or

in response to a formal order. (JP 1-02)
Q-16_______________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

weapons tight—(DOD, NATO) In air defense, a

weapon control order imposing a status whereby

weapons systems may be fired only at targets recognized as hostile. (JP 1-02)

withdrawal operation—(DOD, NATO) A planned

operation in which a force in contact disengages from

an enemy force. (JP 1-02)

zone of action—(DOD, NATO) A tactical subdivision

of a larger area, the responsibility for which is assigned to a tactical unit; generally applied to offensive

action. (JP 1-02)

zone of fire—(DOD) An area into which a designated

ground unit or fire support ship delivers, or is prepared

to deliver, fire support. Fire may or may not be observed. (JP 1-02).
Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element ______________________________________________ R-1

APPENDIX R. REFERENCES

Joint Publications (JPs)

1-02 DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms 

3-02 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Operations 

3-09 Doctrine for Joint Fire Support 

3-09.1 Joint Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for

Laser Designation Operations

3-09.3 TTP for Close Air Support (CAS)

Marine Corps Doctrinal Publication (MCDP)

1-0 Marine Corps Operations

Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWPs)

2-1 Intelligence Operations

2-12 MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis

3-1 Ground Combat Operations 

3-15.1 Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

3-15.2 Tactical Employment of Mortars

3-16.4 Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery

3-16.6 Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter, and Controller

3-2 Aviation Operations

3-22.2 Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses

3-23 Offensive Air Support 

3-23.1 Close Air Support 

3-24 Assault Support

3-25 Control of Aircraft and Missiles

3-25.5 Direct Air Support Handbook

3-31.1 Supporting Arms in Amphibious Operations (NWP 3-09.11M (Rev.C))

3-35.3 Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT)

3-37.1 Chemical Operations Principles and Fundamentals

3-41.1 MAGTF Rear Area Operations

5-1 Marine Corps Planning Process

6-2 MAGTF Command and Control

Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRPs)

2-12A Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield (IPB) (FM 34-130)

3-16A Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process

3-16B The Joint Targeting Process and Procedures for Targeting

Time-Critical Targets

3-16C Fire Support for Combined Arms Commander

3-16.1 Field Artillery Survey

3-16.1C Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for Multiple Launch

Rocket System (MLRS) Operations

3-23A Multiservice Procedures for Joint Air Attack Team Operations 

5-12A Operational Terms and Graphics
R-2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16

Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFMs)

1-7 Supporting Arms in Amphibious Operations

6-9 Marine Artillery Support

6-18-1 MCFSS Techniques and Procedures

Fleet Marine Force Reference Publication (FMFRP)

5-71 MAGTF Aviation Planning

Marine Corps Order (MCO)

3501.26 Artillery Unit Training and Readiness Manual

Allied Tactical Publication (ATP)

37 Supporting Arms in Amphibious Operations

U. S. Army Field Manuals (FMs)

6-20-30 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps 

and Division Operations 

6-20-40 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for 

Brigade Operations 

34-1 Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations 

90-3 Desert Operations

90-5 Jungle Operations

100-5 Operations

Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals (JMEMs)

JMEMs are in the FMFM 4-7 series and are classified. FSCs should have ready access

to the JMEMs for the weapons used.

Standardization Agreements (STANAGs)

1181 Supporting Arms in Amphibious Operations (ATP-37)

2103 Reporting Nuclear Detonations, Biological and Chemical Attacks, and

Predicting and Warning of Associated Hazards and Hazard Areas 

ATP 45(A)

2104 Friendly Nuclear Strike Warning 

2111 Target Analysis-Nuclear Weapons 

3736 Air Interdiction and Close Air Support - ATP-27(C)

QSTAG 221 Target Numbering System

Allied Publication

AArty P1 Artillery Procedures